Document ENDF-102
Report BNL-NCS-44945-05-Rev.

ENDF- 6 Formats Manual
Data Formats and Procedures for the Evaluated Nuclear
Data File ENDF/B-VI and ENDF/B-VII

Revised June 2005
Revised Apr 2004
Revised Apr 2001
Revised May 1998
Revised Feb 1997
Revised Nov 1995
Revised Oct 1991
Issued July 1990

Written by the Members of the Cross Section Evaluation Working Group
Edited by M. Herman

National Nuclear Data Center
Brookhaven National Laboratory
Upton, N.Y. 11973-5000

DISCLAIMER
This report was prepared as an account of work sponsored by an agency of the United States Government. Neither theUnited States Government nor any agency thereof, nor any of their employees, nor any of their contractors,
subcontractors, or their employees, makes any warranty, express or implied, or assumes any legal liability or
responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, or usefulness of any information, apparatus, product, or process
disclosed, or represents that its use would not infringe privately owned rights. Reference herein to any specificcommercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily
constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States Government or any agency,
contractor, or subcontractor thereof. The views and opinions of authors expressed herein do not necessarily state orreflect those of the United States Government or any agency, contractor, or subcontractor thereof.

2

April 2001

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction to the ENDF System
0.2. Philosophy of the ENDF System
0.3. General Description of the ENDF System
0.4 Contents of an ENDF Evaluation
0.5 Reaction Nomenclature - MT
0.6 Representation of Data
0.7 General Description of Data Formats
0.8 References for Chapter 0
1.

File 1. GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1. Descriptive Data and Dictionary (MT = 451)
1.2 Number of Neutrons per Fission, ν (MT = 452)
1.3. Delayed Neutron Data, ν d (MT = 455)
1.4. Number of Prompt Neutrons per Fission, ν p (MT = 456)
1.5. Components of Energy Release Due to Fission (MT = 458)2.

File 2. RESONANCE PARAMETERS
2.1 General Description
2.2 Resolved Resonance Parameters
2.3 Unresolved Resonance Parameters
2.4 Procedures for the Resolved and Unresolved Resonance Regions
2.5 References for Chapter 23.

File 3. NEUTRON CROSS SECTIONS
3.1 General Description
3.2 Formats
3.3 General Procedures
3.4 Procedures for Incident Neutrons
3.5 Procedures for Incident Charged Particles and Photons

4.

File 4. ANGULAR DISTRIBUTIONS OF SECONDARY PARTICLES
4.1 General Description
4.2 Formats
4.3 Procedures
4.4 Procedures for Specific Reactions

5.

File 5. ENERGY DISTRIBUTIONS OF SECONDARY PARTICLES
5.1 General Description
5.2 Formats
5.3 Procedures
5.4 Additional Procedures

April 2001i

6.

File 6. PRODUCT ENERGY-ANGLE DISTRIBUTIONS
6.1 General Description
6.2 Formats
6.3 Procedures

7.

File 7. THERMAL NEUTRON SCATTERING LAW DATA
7.1 General Description
7.2 Coherent Elastic Scattering
7.3 Incoherent Elastic Scattering
7.4 Incoherent Inelastic Scattering

8.

File 8. RADIOACTIVE DECAY DATA
8.1 Radioactive Nuclide Production
8.2 Fission Product Yield Data (MT = 454 and MT = 459)
8.3 Radioactive Decay Data (MT = 457)

9.

File 9. MULTIPLICITIES FOR PRODUCTION OF RADIOACTIVE ELEMENTS
9.1 General Description
9.2 Formats
9.3 Procedures

10. File 10. CROSS SECTIONS FOR PRODUCTION OF RADIOACTIVE NUCLIDES
10.1 General Description
10.2 Formats
10.3 Procedures
11. GENERAL COMMENTS ON PHOTON PRODUCTION
12. File 12. PHOTON PRODUCTIONPROBABILITY ARRAYS
12.1 Formats
12.2 Procedures

MULTIPLICITIESANDTRANSITION

13. File 13. PHOTON PRODUCTION CROSS SECTIONS
13.1 Formats
13.2 Procedures
13.3 Preferred Representations
14. FILE 14. PHOTON ANGULAR DISTRIBUTIONS
14.1 Formats
14.2 Procedures
15. File 15. CONTINUOUS PHOTON ENERGY SPECTRA
15.1 Formats
15.2 Proceduresii

April 2001

23. File 23. "SMOOTH" PHOTON INTERACTION CROSS SECTIONS
23.1 General Comments on Photon Interaction
23.2 General Description
23.3 Formats
23.4 Procedures
26

File 26 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTIONS FOR PHOTO- AND ELECTRO-ATOMIC
DATA
26.1 General Description
26.2 Formats

27. File 27. ATOMIC FORM FACTORS OR SCATTERING FUNCTIONS
27.1 Formats
27.2 Procedures
28. File 28. ATOMIC RELAXATION DATA
28.1 Atomic Relaxation
28.2 General Description
28.3 Formats
28.4 Procedures
30. INTRODUCTION TO DATA COVARIANCE FILES
30.1 File 30. Data Covariances Obtained from Parameter Covariances andSensitivities
30.1.2 Formats
30.1.3 Additional Procedures
30.1.4 Multigroup Applications of Parameter Covariances
31. File 31. COVARIANCES OF THE AVERAGE NUMBER OF NEUTRONS PERFISSION31.1 General Description
31.2 Formats
31.3 Procedures
32. File 32. COVARIANCES OF RESONANCE PARAMETERS
32.1 General Description
32.2 Formats
32.3 General Description of Compact Covariance Matrix
32.4 Formats for Compact Covariance Matrix
32.5 Procedures
33. File 33. COVARIANCES OF NEUTRON CROSS SECTIONS
33.1 General Description
33.2 Formats
33.3 Procedures
33.4 Examples

April 2001iii

34. File 34. COVARIANCES FOR ANGULAR DISTRIBUTIONS OF SECONDARYPARTICLES
34.1 General Description
34.2 Formats
34.3 Procedures
35. File 35. COVARIANCES FOR ENERGY DISTRIBUTIONS OF SECONDARYPARTICLES
35.1 Introduction
35.2 Formats
35.3 Procedures
40. File 40. COVARIANCES FOR PRODUCTION OF RADIOACTIVE NUCLEI
40.1 General Description
40.2 Formats
40.3 Procedures
APPENDIX
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.

iv

Glossary
Definition of Reaction Types
ZA Designations of Materials and MAT Numbers
Resonance Region Formulae
Kinematic Formulas
Summary of Important ENDF Parameters
Maximum Dimensions of Important ENDF Parameters
Recommended Values of Physical Constants to be used in ENDF

April 2001

Acknowledgements
The following people have made significant contributions to the writing and editing of theformats and procedures contained in this document.
Ch. Dunford (NNDC)
M. Green (ORNL)
R. LaBauve (LANL)
N. Larson (ORNL)
C. Lubitz (KAPL)
R. MacFarlane (LANL)
V. McLane (NNDC)
D. Muir (LANL)
N. Larson (ORNL)
S. Pearlstein (BNL)
R. Peele (ORNL)
F. Perey (ORNL)
R. Roussin (ORNL)
R. E. Seamon (LANL)
L. Stewart (LANL)•The NNDC would like to thank the people who contributed corrections to this revision, particularly
Nancy Larson,

April 2001v

List of Laboratories Currently Participating in CSEWG
AECL
ANL
BET
Boeing
BNL
DNFSB
CRNL
DNSB
DOE
GA
INEL
KAPL
LANL
LLNL
LSU
NIST
ORNL
PNL
RPI
SNL
TSI
WES

vi

Atomic Energy of Canada Ltd.
Argonne National Laboratory
Bechtel Bettis Inc.
Boeing North American
Brookhaven National Laboratory
Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board
Atomic Energy of Canada Ltd., Chalk River Nuclear Laboratories
Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board
U. S. Dept. of Energy
General Atomics
Idaho National Engineering & Environmental Laboratory
Knolls Atomic Power Laboratory, Inc.
Los Alamos National Laboratory
Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory
Louisiana State University
National Institute of Standards and Technology
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
Ohio State University
Pacific Northwest National Laboratory
Purdue University
Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
Sandia National Laboratories
TSI Research Corp.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Monroeville
Pittsburgh
Westinghouse Savannah River Company

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

DATA FORMATS AND PROCEDURESFOR THE EVALUATED NUCLEAR DATA FILE

0. ENDF-6 PREFACE
This update to revision 4/01 of "Data Formats and Procedures for the Evaluated Nuclear Data
File, ENDF" pertains to the version 6 of the ENDF formats. The seventh version of the ENDF/B
library, ENDF/B-VII, uses these formats.
Below is a list of changes to the formats and procedures that appear in this edition. In
addition, some typographical error corrections are included. Users of this manual who note
deficiencies or have suggestions are encouraged to contact the National Nuclear Data Center.
Major updates to Manual for Revision June 2005
Section Page

Update0.7.3
2.

New record type: INTG (N. Larson)
Replacement of LRF=5 and 6 with LRF=7 format for R-Matrix
parameters. Miscellaneous corrections. (N. Larson)

32.

Addition of LCOMP=2 format for resonance-parameter covariancematrices (N. Larson)

Appendix D

Addition of D.1.7, Equations for LRF=7 format. Deletion of Sections
D.1.5 and D.1.6. Other miscellaneous corrections. (N. Larson)

Major updates to Manual for Revision 2004
Section Page
0.
1.

0.5
0.23-.25
1.7-.82.

Added table of library numbers (NLIB)
Recommended two-dimensional interpolation procedures (M. Greene)
Energy dependent delayed-group constants added.
Miscellaneous corrections and updates (C. Lubitz).
Updates for 2 channel spins (N. Larson, C. Lubitz).

4.

4.1-.46.

6.3-.4
6.6

August 2004

UpdateRemoved elastic transformation matrix (C. Dunford)
Increase to 2000, the number of energies for which angular distributions
are given (JEFF)
Increase to 201, the number of angles at which a tabular distribution canbe given for an incident energy. (JEFF)
Allow NA=2 for Kalbach-Mann parameterization (JEFF)
Equation 6.4 corrected (JENDL)

0.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

7.
8.
9.
10.

0.2

6.10
6.12
7.2,7.4
8.9
9.1-.2
10.1-.2

Add LTP=15 interpolation for ratio to Rutherford scattering (JENDL)
Revised equation in laboratory frame for LAW=6 (M. Greene)
Corrected incoherent inelastic scattering equations (C. Lubitz)
Added section for stable nucleus (JEFF)
Added final product identifier, IZAP (JEFF)
Added final product identifier, IZAP (JEFF)

Appendix D

Replaced Section D.3.1 (C. Lubitz).

Appendix F
Appendix G

Corrected limit on number of Legendre coefficients
Increased limits of number of incident energies and number of angles
per incident energy in File 4, 6 and 14
Increased the number of allowed subsections in File 6

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.1. Introduction to the ENDF-6 Format
The ENDF formats and libraries are decided by the Cross Section Evaluation Working Group(CSEWG), a cooperative effort of national laboratories, industry, and universities in the U.S. andCanada,1 and are maintained by the National Nuclear Data Center (NNDC).
Earlier versions of the ENDF format provided representations for neutron cross sections anddistributions, photon production from neutron reactions, a limited amount of charged-particle
production from neutron reactions, photo-atomic interaction data, thermal neutron scattering
data, and radionuclide production and decay data (including fission products). Version 6(ENDF-6) allows higher incident energies, adds more complete descriptions of the distributionsof emitted particles, and provides for incident charged particles and photonuclear data bypartitioning the ENDF library into sub-libraries. Decay data, fission product yield data, thermal
scattering data, and photo-atomic data have also been formally placed in sub-libraries. In
addition, this rewrite represents an extensive update to the Version V manual.2
0.2. Philosophy of the ENDF System
The ENDF system was developed for the storage and retrieval of evaluated nuclear data to be
used for applications of nuclear technology. These applications control many features of thesystem including the choice of materials to be included, the data used, the formats used, and thetesting required before a library is released. An important consequence of this is that each
evaluation must be complete for its intended application. If required data are not available forparticular reactions, the evaluator should supply them by using systematics or nuclear models.
The ENDF system is logically divided into formats and procedures. Formats describe how
the data are arranged in the libraries and give the formulas needed to reconstruct physicalquantities such as cross sections and angular distributions from the parameters in the library.
Procedures are the more restrictive rules that specify what data types must be included, which
format can be used in particular circumstances, and so on. Procedures are, generally, imposed bya particular organization, and the library sanctioned by the Cross Section Evaluation Working
Group (CSEWG) is referred to as ENDF/B. Other organizations may use somewhat different
procedures, if necessary, but they face the risk that their libraries will not work with processing
codes sanctioned by CSEWG.
0.2.1. Evaluated data
An evaluation is the process of analyzing experimentally measured cross-section data,
combining them with the predictions of nuclear model calculations, and attempting to extract thetrue value of a cross section. Parameterization and reduction of the data to tabular form produces
an evaluated data set. If a written description of the preparation of a unique data set from thedata sources is available, the data set is referred to as a documented evaluation.

1

See page vi for a list of present and former members of CSEWG.

2

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures for the Evaluated Nuclear Data File, ENDF/B-V, BNL-NCS-50496(ENDF-102), edited by R. Kinsey, 1979. (Revised by B. Magurno, November 1983).

August 2004

0.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.2.2. ENDF/B Library
The ENDF/B library maintained at the National Nuclear Data Center (NNDC) contains therecommended evaluation for each material. Each material is as complete as possible; however,completeness depends on the intended application. For example, when a user is interested inperforming a reactor physics calculation or in doing a shielding analysis, he needs evaluated data
for all neutron-induced reactions, covering the full range of incident neutron energies, for eachmaterial in the system that he is analyzing. Also, the user expects that the file will contain
information such as the angular and energy distributions for secondary neutrons. For anothercalculation, the user may only need a minor isotope for determining activation, and would thenbe satisfied by an evaluation that contains only reaction cross sections.
ENDF/B data sets are revised or replaced only after extensive review and testing. This
allows them to be used as standard reference data during the lifetime of the particular ENDF/B
version.
0.2.3. Choices of Data
The data sets contained on the ENDF/B library are those chosen by CSEWG from
evaluations submitted for review. The choice is made on the basis of requirements forapplications, conformance of the evaluation to the formats and procedures, and performance intesting. The data set that represents a particular material may change when (1) new significant
experimental results become available, (2) integral tests show that the data give erroneous
results, or (3) user's requirements indicate a need for more accurate data and/or better
representations of the data for a particular material. New or revised data sets are included in newreleases of the ENDF/B library.
0.2.4. Experimental Data Libraries
NNDC maintains a library for experimentally measured nuclear reaction data (CSISRS). In
addition to the data, the CSISRS library contains bibliographic information, as well as details
about the experiment (standard, renormalization, corrections, etc.).
At the beginning of the evaluation process the evaluator may retrieve the available
experimental data for a particular material by direct access to the CSISRS database via the World
Wide Web or using the NNDC Online Data Service.3 Alternately, the data may be requested
from the NNDC, and transmitted in the form of listings, plots, and/or files, which may beformatted to satisfy most needs.
0.2.5. Processing Codes
Once the evaluated data sets have been prepared in ENDF format, they can be converted toforms appropriate for testing and actual applications using processing codes. Processing codesthat generate group-averaged cross sections for use in neutronics calculations from the ENDF
library have been written. These codes4 include such functions as resonance reconstruction,
Doppler broadening, multigroup averaging, and/or rearrangement into specified interface
formats.
3
4

C.L. Dunford, T.W. Burrows, Online Nuclear Data Service, NNDC/ONL-99/3, periodically updated.
D.E. Cullen, The 1996 ENDF Pre-Processing Codes (PREPRO96), report IAEA-NDS-39, Rev. 9, 1996
R. E. MacFarlane, D. W. Muir, The NJOY Nuclear Data Processing System, Version 91, report LA-12740-M,
October 1994.

0.4

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The basic data formats for the ENDF library have been developed in such a manner that few
constraints are placed on using the data as input to the codes that generate any of the secondary
libraries.
0.2.6. Testing
All ENDF/B evaluations go through at least some testing before being released as a part of alibrary. Phase 1 testing uses a set of utility codes5 maintained by NNDC and visual inspection bya reviewer to assure that the evaluation conforms to the current formats and procedures, takes
advantage of the best recent data, and chooses format options suited to the physics being
represented. Phase 2 uses calculations of data testing "benchmarks," when available, to evaluate
the usefulness of the evaluation for actual applications.6 This checking and testing process is a
critically important part of the ENDF system.
0.2.7. Documentation
The system is documented by a set of ENDF reports (see Section 0.8) published by the
National Nuclear Data Center at Brookhaven National Laboratory. In addition, the current statusof the formats, procedures, evaluation process, and testing program is contained in the Summaryof the Meetings of the Cross Section Evaluation Working Group.
0.3. General Description of the ENDF System
The ENDF libraries are a collection of documented data evaluations stored in a definedcomputer-readable format that can be used as the main input to nuclear data processing
programs. For this reason, the ENDF format has been constructed with the processing codes inmind. The ENDF format uses 80-character records. Parameters are written in the form of
FORTRAN variables (that is, integers start with the letters I, J, K, L, M, or N, and parameters
starting with other letters represent real numbers). A complete list of all the parameters definedfor the ENDF-6 format will be found in Appendix A (Glossary).
0.3.1. Library Organization
Each ENDF evaluation is identified by a set of key parameters organized into a hierarchy.
Following is a list of these parameters and their definitions.
Library

NLIB

VersionNVER

a collection of evaluations from a specific evaluation group (e.g.,
NLIB 0=ENDF/B).
one of the periodic updates to a library in ENDF format (e.g., NVER
6=ENDF/B-VI). A change of version usually implies a change informat, standards, and procedures.
A revision number is appended to the library/version name for eachsucceeding revision of the data set; for example, ENDF/B-VI.2. Thereis no parameter for the revision number in the format.

5

C. L. Dunford, ENDF Utility Codes Release 6.11, April 1999. Available on the NNDC Web page.

6

Cross Section Evaluation Working Group Benchmark Specifications, ENDF-202, 1974 (last updated 1991).

August 2004

0.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Sublibrary NSUB

FormatNFOR

Material

MAT

Mod
File

NMOD
MF

SectionMT

set of evaluations for a particular data type, (e.g., 4=radioactive decay
data, 10=incident-neutron data, 12=thermal neutron scattering data).
(See Table 0.1 for the complete list of sub-libraries).
format in which the data is tabulated; tells the processing codes how toread the subsequent data records (e.g., NFOR 6 = ENDF-6).
the target in a reaction sub-library, or the radioactive (parent) nuclide ina decay sub-library; see Section 0.3.2.
"modification" flag; see Section 0.3.3.
subdivision of a material (MAT); each file contains data for a certainclass of information (e.g., MF=3 contains reaction cross sections, MF=4
contains angular distributions). MF runs from 1 to 99. (See Table 0.2
for a complete list of assigned MF numbers).
subdivision of a file (MF) ; each section describes a particular reaction
or a particular type of auxiliary data (e.g., MT=102 contains capturedata). MT runs from 1 to 999. (See Appendix B for a complete list of
assigned MT numbers).

0.3.2. Library (NLIB)
A library is a collection of material evaluations from a recognized evaluation group. Each ofthese collections is identified by an NLIB number. Currently defined NLIB numbers are given in
the table below.
NLIB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
41

0.6

Library Definition
ENDF/B - United States Evaluated Nuclear Data File
ENDF/A - United States Evaluated Nuclear Data File
JEFF - NEA Joint Evaluated File (formerly JEF)
EFF - European Fusion File (now part of JEFF)
ENDF/B High Energy FileCENDL – China Evaluated Nuclear Data Library
JENDL – Japan Evaluated Nuclear Data Library
INDL/V – IAEA Evaluated Neutron Data Library
INDL/A – IAEA Nuclear Data Activation Library
FENDL – IAEA Fusion Evaluated Nuclear Data Library
IRDF – IAEA International Reactor Dosimetry File
BROND – Russian Evaluated Nuclear Data File (IAEA version)
INGDB-90 – Geophysics DataFENDL/A – FENDL activation evaluations
BROND – Russian Evaluated Nuclear Data File (original version)

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.3.3. Material (MAT)A material is defined as either an isotope or a collection of isotopes. It may be a single
nuclide, a natural element containing several isotopes, or a mixture of several elements(compound, alloy, molecule, etc.). A single isotope can be in an excited or isomeric state. Eachmaterial in an ENDF library is assigned a unique identification number, designated by thesymbol MAT, which ranges from 1 to 9999.7
The assignment of MAT numbers for ENDF/B-VI is made on a systematic basis assuming
uniqueness of the four digit MAT number for a material. A material will have the same MAT
number in each sub-library (decay data, incident neutrons, incident charged particles, etc.).
One hundred MAT numbers (Z01-Z99) have been allocated to each element Z, through Z =98. Natural elements have MAT numbers Z00. The MAT numbers for isotopes of an element
are assigned on the basis of increasing mass in steps of three, allowing for the ground state andtwo metastable states.8 In the ENDF/B files, which are application oriented, the evaluations ofneutron excess nuclides are of importance, since this category of nuclide is required for decay
heat applications. Therefore, the lightest stable isotope is assigned the MAT number Z25 so thatthe formulation can easily accommodate all the neutron excess nuclides.
For the special cases of elements from einsteinium to lawrencium (Z≥99) MAT numbers
99xx are assigned, where xx = 20, 25, 20, l5, and l2 for elements 99 to 103 respectively, one
covers the known nuclides with allowance for expansion.
For mixtures, compounds, alloys, and molecules, MAT numbers between 0001 and 0099 areassigned on a special basis (see Appendix C).
0.3.4. Material modification (MOD)All versions of a data set (i.e., the initial release, revisions, or total re-evaluations) areindicated using the material "modification" flags. For the initial release of ENDF/B-VI, themodification flag for each material (MAT) and section (MT) carried over from previous versions
is set to zero (MOD 0); for new evaluations they are set to one (MOD 1). Each time a change ismade to a material, the modification flag for the material is incremented by one. The
modification flag for each section changed in the revised evaluation is set equal to the newmaterial modification number. If a complete re-evaluation is performed, the modification flagfor every section is changed to equal the new material "modification" number.
As an example, consider the following. Evaluator X evaluates a set of data for 235U. Afterchecking and testing, the evaluator feels that the data set is satisfactory and transmits it to the
NNDC. The Center assigns the data set a MAT number of 9228 subject to CSEWG's approvalof the evaluation. This evaluation has "modification" flags equal to 1 for the material and for all
sections. After the file is released, user Y retrieves MAT 9228 from the Center's files, adds it tohis ENDF library as material 9228, and refers to it in later processing programs by this number.
Should the evaluation of material 9228 subsequently be revised and released with CSEWG's
approval, the material will have a MOD flag of 2. This material would have MOD flags of 2 oneach revised section, but the unchanged sections will have MOD flags of 1.

7

The strategy for assigning MAT numbers for ENDF/B-VI is described here; other libraries may have different
schemes.
8

This procedure leads to difficulty for the nuclides of xenon, cesium, osmium, platinum, etc., where more than 100
MAT numbers could be needed to include all isotopes.

August 2004

0.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.4. Contents of an ENDF Evaluation
As described above, sub-library (NSUB) and material (MAT) specify the target andprojectile for a reaction evaluation or the radioactive nuclide for a decay evaluation. MF and MT
indicate the type of data represented by a section and the products being defined.
The sub-library distinguishes between different types of data using NSUB =10*IPART+ITYPE. In this formula, IPART=1000*Z+A defines the incident particle; use
IPART=0 for incident photons or no incident particle (decay data), use IPART=11 for incident
electrons, and IPART=0 for photo-atomic or electro-atomic data. The sub-libraries allowed for
ENDF-6 are listed in Table 0.1.
Table 0.1
Sub-library Numbers and Names
NSUB

IPART

ITYPE

Sub-library Names

0
1
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
113
10010
10011
10020
...
20040

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
11
1001
1001
1002

0
1
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
0
1
0

2004

0 Incident-Alpha data

Photo-Nuclear Data
Photo-Induced Fission Product Yields
Photo-Atomic Interaction Data
Radioactive Decay Data
Spontaneous Fission Product Yields
Atomic Relaxation Data
Incident-Neutron Data
Neutron-Induced Fission Product Yields
Thermal Neutron Scattering Data
Electro-Atomic Interaction Data
Incident-Proton Data
Proton-Induced Fission Product Yields
Incident-Deuteron Data

The files (MF) allowed are summarized in Table 0.2, and their use in the different sublibraries is discussed following.
Table 0.2
Definitions of File Types (MF)
MF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

0.8

Description
General information
Resonance parameter data
Reaction cross sections
Angular distributions for emitted particles
Energy distributions for emitted particles
Energy-angle distributions for emitted particles
Thermal neutron scattering law data

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

8
9
10
12
13
14
15
23
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
39
40

Radioactivity and fission-product yield data
Multiplicities for radioactive nuclide production
Cross sections for radioactive nuclide production
Multiplicities for photon production
Cross sections for photon production
Angular distributions for photon production
Energy distributions for photon production
Photo- or electro-atomic interaction cross sections
Electro-atomic angle and energy distribution
Atomic form factors or scattering functions for photo-atomic interactions
Atomic relaxation data
Data covariances obtained from parameter covariances and sensitivities
Data covariances for nu(bar)Data covariances for resonance parameters
Data covariances for reaction cross sections
Data covariances for angular distributions
Data covariances for energy distributions
Data covariances for radionuclide production yields
Data covariances for radionuclide production cross sections

The following MF numbers have been retired: 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, and 25.
0.4.1. Incident-Neutron Data (NSUB 10)
The procedures for describing neutron-induced reactions for ENDF/B-VI have been kept
similar to the procedures used for previous versions so that current evaluations can be carried
over, and in order to protect existing processing capabilities. The new features have most of
their impact at high energies (above 5-10 MeV) or low atomic weight (2H, 9Be), and include
improved energy-angle distributions, improved nuclear heating and damage capabilities,
improved charged-particle spectral data, and the use of R-matrix or R-function resonanceparameterization.
Each evaluation starts with a descriptive data and directory, File 1 (see Section 1.1). For
fissionable isotopes, sections of File 1 can be given to describe the number of neutrons produced
per fission and the energy release from fission.
A File 2 is always given. For some materials, it may contain only the effective scatteringradius, and for other materials, it may contain complete sets of resolved and/or unresolved
resonance parameters.
A File 3 is always given. The required energy range is from the threshold or from 10-5eV to
20 MeV, but higher energies are allowed. There is a section for each important reaction or sumof reactions. The MT numbers for these sections are chosen based on the emitted particles as
described in Section 0.5 (Reaction Nomenclature). For resonance materials in the resolved
resonance energy range, the cross sections for the elastic, fission, and capture reactions arenormally the sums of the values given in File 3 and the resonance contributions computed fromthe parameters given in File 2. An exception to this rule is allowed for certain derived
evaluations (see LRP=2 in Section 1.1). In the unresolved resonance range, the self-shieldedcross sections will either be sums of File 2 and File 3 contributions, as above, or File 3 values
multiplied by a self-shielding factor computed from File 2. (See Sections 2.3.1 and 2.4.21.)
August 2004

0.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Distributions for emitted neutrons and other particles or nuclei are given using File 4, Files 4
and 5, or File 6. As described in more detail below, File 4 is used for simple two-body reactions(elastic, discrete inelastic). Files 4 and 5 are used for simple continuum reactions, which arenearly isotropic, have minimal pre-equilibrium component, and emit only one important particle.
File 6 is used for more complex reactions that require energy-angle correlation, that areimportant for heating or damage, or that have several important products, which must be tallied.
If any of the reaction products are radioactive, they should be described further in File 8.
This file indicates how the production cross section is to be determined (from File 3, 6, 9, or 10)
and gives minimal information on the further decay of the product. Additional decay
information can be retrieved from the decay data sub-library when required.
Note that yields of particles and residual nuclei are sometimes implicit; for example, theneutron yield for A(n,2n) is two and the yield of the product A-1 is one. If File 6 is used, allyields are explicit. This is convenient for computing gas production and transmutation crosssections. Explicit yields for radioactive products may be given in File 9, or production crosssections can be given in File 10. In the latter case, it is possible to determine the yield bydividing by the corresponding cross section from File 3. File 9 is used in preference to File 10
when strong resonances are present (e.g., radiative capture).
For compatibility with earlier versions, photon production and photon distributions can be
described using File 12 (photon production yields), File 13 (photon production cross sections),
File 14 (photon angular distributions), and File 15 (photon energy distributions). Note that File
12 is preferred over File 13 when strong resonances are present (capture, fission). Wheneverpossible, photons should be given with the individual reaction that produced them using File 12.
When this cannot be done, summation MT numbers can be used in Files 12 or 13 as described in
Section 0.5.9.
When File 6 is used to represent neutron and charged-particle distributions for a reaction, it
should also be used for the corresponding photon distribution. This makes an accurate energybalance check possible for the reaction. When emitted photons cannot be assigned to a particular
reaction, they can be represented using summation MT numbers as described in Section 0.5.9.
Finally, covariance data are given in Files 30-40. Procedures for these files are given in
Sections 30-40.
0.4.2. Thermal Neutron Scattering (NSUB 12)9
Thermal neutron scattering data are kept in a separate sub-library because the targets are
influenced by their binding to surrounding atoms and their thermal motion; therefore, the physics
represented10 requires different formats than other neutron data. The data extend to a few eV forseveral molecules, liquids, solids, and gases. As usual, each evaluation starts with descriptive
data and directory file (see Section 1.1). The remaining data is included in File 7. Either the
cross sections for elastic coherent scattering, if important, are derived from Bragg edges andstructure factors, or cross sections for incoherent elastic scattering are derived from the boundcross section and Debye-Waller integral. Finally, scattering law data for inelastic incoherent
scattering are given, using the S(α,β) formalism and the short-collision-time approximation.

9

Used with IPART=0 only.

10

J.U. Koppel and D.H. Houston, Reference Manual for ENDF Thermal Neutron Scattering Data, General Atomic
report GA-8774 (ENDF-269) (Revised and reissued by NNDC, July 1978).
0.10

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.4.3. Fission Product Yield Data
Data for the production of fission products are given in different sub-libraries according to
the mechanism inducing fission. Currently, sub-libraries are defined for neutron-induced fission
product yields, and for yields from spontaneous fission. The format also allows for future
photon- and charged-particle-induced fission. Each material starts with a descriptive data anddirectory file (see Section 1.1). The remaining data is given in File 8, which contains two
sections: independent yields, and cumulative yields. As described in Section 8.2, the format forthese two sections is identical. Covariance data for File 8 are self-contained.
0.4.4. Radioactive Decay Data (NSUB=4)
Evaluations of decay data for radioactive nuclides are grouped together into a sub-library.
This sub-library contains decay data for all radioactive products (e.g., fission products andactivation products). Fission product yields and activation cross sections will be foundelsewhere.
Each material contains two, three, or four files, and starts with a descriptive data
and directory file (see Section 1.1). For materials undergoing spontaneous fission, additional
sections in File 1 give the total, delayed, and prompt fission neutron yields. In addition, thespectra of the delayed and prompt neutrons are given in File 5. The File 5 formats are the same
as for induced fission (see Section 5), and the distributions are assumed to be isotropic in thelaboratory system. File 8 contains half-lives, decay modes, decay energies, and radiation spectra(see Section 8.3). Finally, covariance data for the spectra in File 5 may be given in File 35;
covariance data for File 8 are self-contained.
0.4.5. Photo-Nuclear (NSUB=0) and Charged-Particle (NSUB≥10010) Sub-libraries
Evaluations for incident charged-particle and photo-nuclear reactions are grouped together
into sub-libraries by projectile. As usual, each evaluation starts with a descriptive data anddirectory file (see Section 1.1). For particle-induced fission or photo-fission, File 1 can also
contain sections giving the total, delayed, and prompt number of neutrons per fission, and theenergy released in fission. Resonance parameter data (File 2) may be omitted entirely (seeLRP=-1 in Section 1.1).
Cross sections are given in File 3. The MT numbers used are based upon the particles
emitted in the reaction as described in Section 0.5. Explicit yields for all products (including
photons) must be given in File 6. In addition, the charged-particle stopping power should begiven. If any of the products described by a section of File 6 are radioactive, they should be
described further in a corresponding section of File 8. This section will give half-life, minimum
information about the decay chain, and decay energies for the radioactive product. Further
details, if required, can be found in the decay data sub-library.
Angular distributions or correlated energy-angle distributions can be given for all particles,
recoil nuclei, and photons in File 6. It is also possible to give only the average particle energy
for less important reactions, or even to mark the distribution "unknown." (See 6.2.1.)
Finally, Files 30 to 40 might be used to describe the covariances for charged-particle andphoto-nuclear reactions.

August 2004

0.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.4.6. Photo-Atomic Interaction Data (NSUB 3)
Incident photon reactions with the atomic electrons11 are kept in a separate sub-library.
These data are associated with elements rather than isotopes. Each material starts with adescriptive data and directory file (see Section 1.1), as usual. In addition, the material may
contain a File 23 for photon interaction cross sections, and File 27 for atomic form factors.
0.4.7. Electro-Atomic Interaction Data (NSUB=113)
Incident electron reactions with the atomic electrons are also kept in a separate sublibrary.
These data are again associated with elements rather than isotopes. Each material starts with adescriptive data and directory file (see Section 1.1), as usual. In addition, File 23 is given for theelastic, ionization, bremsstrahlung, and excitation cross sections, and File 26 is given for theelastic angular distribution, the bremsstrahlung photon spectra and energy loss, the excitationenergy transfer, and the spectra of the scattered and recoil electrons associated with subshellionization.
0.4.8. Atomic Relaxation Data (NSUB=6)
The target atom can be left in an ionized state due to a variety of different types ofinteraction, such as photon or electron induced ionization, internal conversion, etc. This section
provides the data needed to describe the relaxation of an ionized atom back to neutrality. This
includes subshell energies, transition energies, transition probabilities, and other parameters
needed to compute the X-ray and electron spectra due to atomic relaxation.
The materials are elements. Each material starts with a descriptive data and directory file(see Section 1.1), as usual. In addition, a File 28 is given containing the relaxation data for all
the subshells defined in the photo-atomic or electro-atomic sublibraries.
0.4.9. Energy and Angular Distributions of Reaction Products (Files 4, 5, and 6)
Several different options are available in the ENDF-6 format to describe the distribution inenergy and angle of reaction products. In most cases, the double differential cross section of theemitted particle in barns/(eV-sr) is represented by(0.1)
σ ( µ , E , E ′) = σ ( E ) y ( E ) f ( µ , E , E ′) / 2π

where

µ is the cosine of the emission angle,
E is the energy of the incident particle,
E′ is the energy of the emitted particle,
σ(E) is the reaction cross section,y(E) is the yield or multiplicity of the emitted particle, andf(µ,E,E′) is the normalized distribution function in (eV-unit cosine)-1.

For simple two-body reactions, the energy of the emitted particle can be determined fromkinematics (see Appendix E); therefore,f ( µ , E , E ′) = f ( µ , E ) δ ( E ′ − ξ )
where

(0.2)

ξ is defined by Eq. (E.5) in Appendix E.

11

D.E. Cullen, et al., Tables and Graphics of Photon-Interaction Cross Sections from 10 eV to 100 GeV. Derived
from the LLNL Evaluated Photon Data Library (EPDL). UCRL-50400, Vol. 6 Rev. (October 1989)
0.12

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The distribution function f(µ,E) can be given as a section of File 4 with no corresponding
section in File 5, or as a section of File 6 with no corresponding sections in Files 4 or 5. For
simple continuum reactions, the full distribution is sometimes given as a product of an angular
distribution and an energy distribution:f ( µ , E , E ′) = f ( µ , E ) g ( E , E ′)(0.3)
The angular function is given in File 4, and g(E,E′) is given in File 5. This simple
continuum format does not allow adequate description of energy-angle correlations, and it can
only describe one emitted particle. Emitted photons can be described by this scheme also, but
the files used are 14 and 15.
For the more complex reactions, the full distribution function is given in File 6. This fileallows for all reaction products to be described, and it allows for energy-angle correlation of theemitted particles.

0.5. Reaction Nomenclature - MT
The following paragraphs explain how to choose MT numbers for particle-induced andphoto-nuclear reactions for ENDF-6. A complete list of the definitions of the MT numbers will
be found in Appendix B.
0.5.1. Elastic Scattering
Elastic scattering is a two-body reaction that obeys the kinematic equations given in
Appendix E. The sections are labeled by MT=2 (except for photo-atomic data, see Section 23).
For incident neutrons, the elastic scattering cross section is determined from File 3 together withresonance contributions, if any, from File 2. The angular distribution of scattered neutrons isgiven in File 4.
For incident charged particles, the Coulomb scattering makes it impossible to define an
integrated cross section, and File 3, MT=2 contains either a dummy value of 1.0 or a "nuclear
plus interference" cross section defined by a particular cutoff angle. The rest of the differential
cross section for the scattered particle is computed from parameters given in File 6, MT=2 (seeSection 6.2.6).
0.5.2. Simple Single Particle Reactions
Many reactions have only a single particle and a residual nucleus (and possibly photons) in
the final state. These reactions are associated with well-defined discrete states or a continuum oflevels in the residual nucleus, or they may proceed through a set of broad levels that may betreated as a continuum. The MT numbers to be used are:Discrete
50-90
600-648650-698
700-748750-798
800-848

August 2004

Continuum
91
649
699
749
799
849

Discrete+Continuum
4
103
104
105
106
107

Emitted Particle
n
p
d
t
3
He
α

0.13

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

By definition, the emitted particle is the lighter of the two particles in the final state.
If the reaction is associated with a discrete state in the residual nucleus, use the first columnof numbers. In a typical range, MT=50 leaves the residual nucleus in the ground state, MT=51
leaves it in the first excited state, MT=52 in the second, and so on. The elastic reaction uses
MT=2 as described above; therefore, do not use MT=50 for incident neutrons, do not use
MT=600 for incident protons, and so on. For incident neutrons, the discrete reactions are
assumed to obey two-body kinematics (see Appendix E), and the angular distribution for theparticle is given in File 4 or File 6 (except for MT=2). If possible, the emitted photons
associated with discrete levels should be represented in full detail using the corresponding MT
numbers in File 6 or File 12. For incident charged particles, the emitted particle must be
described in File 6. A two-body law can be used for narrow levels, but broader levels can also
be represented using energy-angle correlation. Photons associated with the particle should begiven in the same section (MT) of File 6 when possible.
If the reaction is associated with a range of levels in the residual nucleus (i.e., continuum),
use the second column of MT numbers. For incident neutrons, Files 4 and 5 are allowed forcompatibility with previous versions, but it may be necessary to use File 6 to obtain the desired
accuracy. When Files 4 and 5 are used, photons should be given in File 12 using the same MT
number if possible. For more complicated neutron reactions or incident charged particles, File 6
must be used for the particle and the photons.
The "sum" MT numbers are used in File 3 for the sum of all the other reactions in that row,
but they are not allowed for describing particle distributions in Files 4, 5, or 6. As an example, aneutron evaluation might contain sections with MF/MT=3/4, 3/51, 3/91, 4/51, and 6/91. A
deuteron evaluation might contain sections with 3/103, 3/600, and 6/600 (the two sections in File
3 would be identical). For a neutron evaluation with no 600-series distributions or partial
reactions given, MT=103-107 can appear by themselves; they are simply components of theabsorption cross section.
In some cases, it is difficult to assign all the photons associated with a particular particle to
the reactions used to describe the particle. In such cases, these photons can be described using
the "sum" MT numbers in File 12 or 13 (for neutrons) or in File 6 (for other projectiles).
Some examples of simple single-particle reactions follow.
Reaction

MT

9

50
91
600
650
651

Be(α,n0)12C
Fe(n,nc)Fe
2
H(d,p0)3He
6
Li(t,d0)7Li
6
Li(t,d1)7Li

For the purposes of this manual, reactions are written as if all prompt photons have been
emitted; that is, the photons do not appear explicitly in the reaction nomenclature. Therefore, no"*" is given on Li in the last example above.

0.14

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.5.3. Simple Multi-Particle Reactions
If a reaction has only two to four particles, a residual nucleus, and photons in the final state,
and if the residual nucleus does not break up, it will be called a "simple multi-particle reaction."
The MT numbers that can be used are:
MT
11
16
17
22
23
24
25
28
29
30
32
33
34
35

Emitted Particles
2nd
2n
3n
na
n3a
2na
3nα
np
n2α
2n2α
nd
nt
n3He
nd2α

MT
36
37
41
42
44
43
108
109
111
112
113
114
115
116

Emitted Particles
nt2α
4n
2np
3np
n2p
npα
2α
3α
2p
t2α
d2α
pd
pt
dα

For naming purposes, particles are always arranged in ZA order; thus, (n,np) and (n,pn) aresummed together under MT=28. In addition, there must always be a residual particle. By
definition, it is the particle or nucleus in the final state with the largest ZA. This means that thereaction d+t→n+α must be classified as the reaction 3H(d,n)4He (MT=50) rather than thereaction 3H(d,nα) (MT=22). The cross sections for these reactions will be found in File 3, as
usual.
This list is not exhaustive, and new MT numbers can be added if necessary. However, somereactions are more naturally defined as "breakup" or "complex" reactions (see below).
For compatibility with previous versions, Files 4 and 5 are allowed in the incident-neutron
sub-library. In this case, the particle described in Files 4 and 5 is the first one given under"Emitted Particles" above. At high neutron energies, File 6 is preferred because it is possible todescribe energy-angle correlations resulting from pre-equilibrium effects and to give
distributions for more than one kind of particle. Using File 6 also makes it possible to give anenergy distribution for the recoil nucleus. This distribution is needed in calculating nuclear
heating and radiation damage. If Files 4/5 are used, photons should be given in File 12 or 13
using the same MT number when possible. Similarly, if File 6 is used to describe the outgoingparticle, the photons should also be given in File 6 under the same MT number, or under MT=3,
if necessary. However, it often will be necessary to use the nonelastic MT=3 as described below.
For charged-particle sub-libraries, File 6 must be used for these reactions. Photons should begiven in File 6 using the reaction MT number when possible. If the photons cannot be assigned
to a particular reaction, the nonelastic MT=3 can be used as described below.

August 2004

0.15

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.5.4. Breakup Reactions
A number of important reactions can be described as proceeding in two steps: first one orseveral particles are emitted as in the simple reactions described above, then the remaining
nuclear system either breaks up or emits another particle. In the nomenclature of ENDF-6, theseare both called "breakup reactions." For ENDF/B-V, these reactions were represented using
special MT numbers or "LR flags". For ENDF/B-VI, the preferred representation uses File 3 andFile 6. The same MT numbers are used as for the simple reactions described above. The crosssection goes in File 3 as usual, but a special LR flag is used to indicate that this is a breakup
reaction (see below). The yield and angular distribution or energy-angle distribution for eachparticle emitted before breakup is put into File 6. In addition, yields and distributions for all the
breakup products are allowed in File 6. For photo-nuclear and charged-particle sub-libraries, thephotons are also given in File 6; but for neutron sub-libraries, the photons may be given in Files
6 or 12-15. This approach provides a complete accounting of particle and recoil spectra fortransport, heating, and damage calculations. It also provides a complete accounting of products
for gas production and activation calculations. Finally, it does all of this without requiring alarge list of new MT numbers.
Some examples of breakup reactions are
Reaction
3

H(t,n0)5He(nα)
6Li(d,n3)7Be(3Heα)7
Li(n,nc)7Li(tα)
7Li(t,2n)8Be(2α)
7Li(p,d1)6Li(dα)
9Be(a,n3)12C(3α)
16O(n,n6)16O(α)12C

MT

50
53
91
16
651
53
56

By convention, the particles are arranged in Z, A order in each set of parentheses. This leads
to ambiguity in the choice of the intermediate state. For example,
12

C(n,n′)12C(3α)
C(n,α)9Be(n2α)

12or 7Li(t,2n)8Be(2α)
7Li(t,n)9Be(n2α)
7Li(t,α)6He(2nα)
7Li(t,nα)5He(nα)
The evaluator either must choose one channel, partition the reaction between several
channels, or use the "complex reaction" notation (see below). Care must be taken to avoid
double counting.
In some cases, a particular intermediate state can break up by more than one path; forexample,6

Li(d,p4)7Li(tα) Ex = 7.47 MeV,
6
Li(d,p4)7Li(n6Li).

0.16

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

If two channels are both given under the same MT number, File 6 is used to list the emitted
particles and to give their fractional yields. The notation to be used for this type of reaction is6

Li(d,p4)7Li(X).

Note that the Q value calculated for the entire reaction is not well defined. Another option isto split the reaction up and use two consecutive MT numbers as follows:6
6

Li(d,p4)7Li(t,α)
Li(d,p5)7Li(n6Li)

Ex = 7.4700 MeV, MT=604,
Ex = 7.4701 MeV, MT=605.

The same proton distribution would be given for MT=604 and 605. The mass-difference Q
value is well defined for both reactions, but the level index no longer corresponds to real levels.
The choice between the "simple multi-particle" and "breakup" representations should be basedon the physics of the process. As an example, an emission spectrum may show several peaks
superimposed on a smooth background. If the peaks can be identified with known levels in one
or more intermediate systems, they can be extracted and represented by breakup MT numbers.
The remaining smooth background can often be represented as a simple multi-particle reaction.
0.5.5. LR Flags
As described above, the MT number for a simple reaction indicates which particles are
emitted. However, complex breakup reactions emit additional particles. The identity of these
additional particles can be determined from LR or File 6.
LR Meaning

0 Simple reaction. Identity of product is implicit in MT.
1 Complex or breakup reaction. The identity of all products is given explicitly inFile 6.
22 α emitted (plus residual, if any)
23 3α emitted (plus residual, if any)
24 nα emitted (plus residual, if any)
25 2nα emitted (plus residual, if any)
28 p emitted (plus residual, if any)
29 2α emitted (plus residual, if any)
30 n2α emitted (plus residual, if any)
32 d emitted (plus residual, if any)
33 t emitted (plus residual, if any)
34 3He emitted (plus residual, if any)
35 d2α emitted (plus residual, if any)
36 t2α emitted (plus residual, if any)
39 internal conversion
40 electron-positron pair formation

August 2004

0.17

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The values LR=22-36 are provided for compatibility with ENDF/B-V. Some examples of
their use:
Reaction
6
Li(n,n1)6Li(dα)
7Li(n,nc)7Li(tα)
10
B(n,n12)10B(d2α)
12C(n,n2)12C(3α)
16O(n,n1)16O(e+e-)16O
16
O(n,n6)16O(α)12C

MT
51
91
62
52
51
56

LR
32
33
35
23
40
22

Note that the identity of the residual must be deduced from MT and LR. Only the firstparticle is described in File 4 and/or File 5; the only information available for the breakup
products is the net energy that can be deduced from kinematics.
The use of LR=1 and File 6 is preferred for new evaluations because explicit yields anddistributions can be given for all reaction products.
0.5.6. Complex Reactions
At high energies, there are typically many reaction channels open, and it is difficult todecompose the cross section into simple reactions. In such cases, the evaluation should use
MT=5. This complex reaction identifier is defined as the sum of all reactions not given
explicitly elsewhere in this evaluation. As an example, an evaluation might use only MT=2 and5. Sections of File 6 with MT=5 and the correct energy-dependent yields would then represent
the entire nonelastic neutron spectrum, the entire proton spectrum, and so on. A slightly morerefined evaluation might use MT=2, 5, 51-66, and 600-609. In this case, MT=5 would represent
all the continuum neutron and proton emission. The discrete levels would be given separately torepresent the detailed angular distribution and two-body kinematics correctly. The notation used
for complex reactions is, for example, 6Li(d,X).
0.5.7. Radiative Capture
The radiative capture reaction is identified by MT=102. For neutron sublibraries, the only
product is usually photons, and they are represented in Files 6 or 12-15. Note that File 6 or 12
must be used for materials with strong resonances. For charged-particle libraries, simple
radiative capture reactions must be represented using File 3 and File 6. In addition, radiative
capture followed by breakup is common for light targets; an example is d+t→γ+n+α, which is
written as a breakup reaction 3H(d,γ)5He(nα) for the purposes of this format. This reaction isrepresented using MT=102 with the special breakup flag set in File 3. The gamma, neutron, andalpha distributions are all given in File 6.

0.18

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.5.8. Fission
The nomenclature used for fission is identical to that used in previous versions of the ENDF
format.
MT Meaning
18 fission
19 f
20 nf
21 2nf
38 3nf
452 ⎯νT
455 ⎯νd456 ⎯νp
458

Description
total
first chance fission
second chance fission
third chance fission
fourth chance fission
total neutrons per fission
delayed neutrons per fission
prompt neutrons per fission
components of energy release in fission

Cross sections (File 3) can be given using either MT=18 or the combination of MT=19, 20,
21, and 38. In the latter case, MT=18 is also given to contain the sum of the partial reactions.
0.5.9. Nonelastic Reaction for Photon Production
Whenever possible, the same MT number should be used to describe both the emitted
particle and the photons. However, this is usually only possible for discrete photons from lowlying levels, radiative capture, or for photons generated from nuclear models. Any photons thatcannot be assigned to a particular level or particle distribution can be given in a section with thenonelastic summation reaction MT=3 in File 6, 12, or 13 (for neutrons) or in File 6 (for otherprojectiles). As described in Section 0.5.2, MT=4, 103, 104, 105, 106, and 107 can also be usedas summation reactions for photon production in Files 12 and 13.
0.5.10. Special Production Cross Sections
A special set of production cross sections are provided, mostly for use in derived libraries.
MT
201
202
203
204
205
206
207

Meaning
neutron production
photon production
proton production
deuteron production
triton production
3He production
a production

Each one is defined as the sum of the cross section times the particle yield over all reactions(except elastic scattering) with that particle in the final state. The yields counted must include
implicit yields from reaction names, LR flags, or residual nuclei in addition to explicit yields
from File 6. As an example, for an evaluation containing the reactions (n,α) (MT=107), and(n,n′3α) (MT=91, LR=23), the helium production cross section would be calculated using:
MT207 = MT107 + 3×MT91.
August 2004

0.19

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The cross section in File 3 is barns per particle (or photon). A corresponding distribution canbe given using Files 4 and 5, or the distribution can be given using File 6 with a particle yield of
1.0. These MT numbers will ordinarily be used in File 3 of special gas production libraries.
0.5.11. Auxiliary MT Numbers
Several MT numbers are used to represent auxiliary quantities instead of cross sections. The
values 151, 451, 452, 454, 455, 456, 457, 458, and 459 have already been mentioned. The
following additional values are defined
MT
251

252
253
301-450
851-870

MeaningµL, average cosine of the angle for elastic scattering (laboratory system). Derived
files only.
ξ, average logarithmic energy decrement for elastic scattering. Derived files only.
γ, average of the square of the logarithmic energy decrement, divided by 2 * ξ.
Derived files only.
Energy release rate parameters (eV-barns) for the reaction obtained by subtracting
300 from this MT; e.g., 301 is total kerma, 407 is kerma for (n,α), etc. Derived
files only.
Special series used only in covariance files (MF=31-40) to give covariances forgroups of reactions considered together (lumped partials). See Section 30.

The continuous-slowing-down parameters (MT=251-253) and the heat production crosssections (MT=301-450) are usually used in derived libraries only. A complete list of reaction
MT numbers and auxiliary MT numbers is given in Appendix B.
0.5.12. Sum Rules for ENDF
A number of ENDF reaction types can be calculated from other reactions. The rules forthese summation reactions follow.
MT Meaning: components
1 Total cross sections (incident neutrons only): 2, 4, 5, 11, 16-18, 22-26, 28-37, 41-42,
44-45, 102-117.
4 Total of neutron level cross sections: 50-91
18 Total fission: 19-21, 38.
103 Total of proton level cross sections: 600-649
104 Total of deuteron level cross sections: 650-699
105 Total of triton level cross sections: 700-749
106 Total of 3He level cross sections: 750-799
107 Total of alpha level cross sections: 800-849

The nonelastic cross section (MT=3) is only used in connection with photon production. It
contains the following MT numbers: 4, 5, 11, 16-18, 22-26, 28-37, 41-42, 44-45, 102-117.

0.20

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.6. Representation of Data
0.6.1. Definitions and Conventions
The data given in all sections always use the same set of units. These are summarized
following.
Parameters
energies
anglescross sections
temperaturesmass
angular distributions
energy distributions
energy-angle distributions
half lifeUnitselectron volts (eV)dimensionless cosines of the angle
barns
Kelvinin units of the neutron massprobability per unit cosine
probability per electron voltprobability per unit cosine per electron volt
seconds

The first record of every section contains a ZA number that identifies the specific material.
ZA variants are also employed to identify projectiles and reaction products. In most cases, ZA isconstructed by
ZA = 1000.0 * Z + A ,where Z is the atomic number and A is the mass number for the material. If the material is anelement containing two or more naturally occurring isotopes in significant concentrations, A is
taken to be 0.0. For mixtures, compounds, alloys, or molecules, special ZA numbers between 1
and 99 can be defined (see Appendix C).
A material, incident particle (projectile), or reaction product is also characterized by aquantity that is proportional to its mass relative to that of the neutron. Typically, these quantities
are denoted as AWR, AWI, or AWP for a material, projectile, or product, respectively. For
example, the symbol AWR is defined as the ratio of the mass of the material to that of theneutron.12 Another way to say this is that "all masses are expressed in neutron units." Formaterials which are mixtures of isotopes, the abundance weighted average mass is used.
0.6.1.0. Atomic Masses Versus Nuclear Masses
Mass quantities for materials (AWR for all Z) and "heavy" reaction products (AWP for Z >2) should be expressed in atomic units, i.e., the mass of the electrons should be included. Massquantities for incident particles (AWI) and "light" reaction products (AWP for Z≤2) should be
expressed in nuclear mass units. For neutrons, this ratio is 1.00000. For charged particles likely
to appear in ENDF/B-VI, see Appendix H.
0.6.2. Interpolation Laws
Many types of ENDF data are given as a table of values on a defined grid with aninterpolation law to define the values between the grid points. Simple one-dimensional "graphpaper" interpolation schemes, a special Gamow interpolation law for charged-particle crosssections, simple Cartesian interpolation for two-dimensional functions, and two non-Cartesian
schemes for two-dimensional distributions are allowed.
12

See Appendix H for neutron mass.

August 2004

0.21

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.6.2.1. One-dimensional Interpolation Schemes
Consider how a simple function y(x), which might be a cross section, σ(E), is represented.
y(x) is represented by a series of tabulated values, pairs of x and y(x), plus a method forinterpolating between input values. The pairs are ordered by increasing values of x. There will
be NP values of the pair, x and y(x), given. The complete region over which x is defined isbroken into NR interpolation ranges. An interpolation range is defined as a range of the
independent variable x in which a specified interpolation scheme can be used; i.e., the same
scheme gives interpolated values of y(x) for any value of x within this range. To illustrate this,see Fig. 0.1 and the definitions, below:
x(n) is the nth value of x,y(n) is the nth value of y,
NP is the number of pairs (x and y) given,
INT(m) is the interpolation scheme identification number used in the mth range,
NBT(m) is the value of n separating the mth and the (m+1)th interpolation ranges.

The allowed interpolation schemes are given in Table 0.3.

INT
1
2
3
4
5
6

11-15
21-25

Table 0.3
Definition of Interpolation Types
Interpolation Scheme
y is constant in x (constant, histogram)y is linear in x (linear-linear)y is linear in ln(x) (linear-log)
ln(y) is linear in x (log-linear)ln(y) is linear in ln(x) (log-log)
special one-dimensional interpolation law, used for charged-particle crosssections only
method of corresponding points (follow interpolation laws of 1-5)
unit base interpolation (follow interpolation laws of 1-5)

Interpolation code, INT=1 (constant), implies that the function is constant and equal to thevalue given at the lower limit of the interval.
Note that where a function is discontinuous (for example, when resonance parameters areused to specify the cross section in one range), the value of x is repeated and a pair (x,y) is given
for each of the two values at the discontinuity (see Fig. 0.1).
A one-dimensional interpolation law, INT=6, is defined for charged-particle cross sections
and is based on the limiting forms of the Coulomb penetrabilities for exothermic reactions at low
energies and for endothermic reactions near the threshold. The expected energy dependence is

σ=

⎡
A
B ⎤
exp ⎢ −⎥
E
E −T ⎦⎣(0.1)

where T=0 for exothermic reactions (Q>0) and T is the kinematic threshold for endothermic
reactions (Q≤0). Note that this formula gives a concave upward energy dependence near
E=T that is quite different from the behavior of the neutron cross sections.

0.22

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresThis formula can be converted into a two-point interpolation scheme usinglnB=

σ 2 E2σ 1 E11
1−
E1 − TE2 − T

(0.2)

and
⎡ B ⎤
A = exp ⎢⎥ σ 1 E1⎣⎢ E1 − T ⎦⎥(0.3)

where E1, σ1 and E2, σ2 are two consecutive points in the cross-section tabulation.
This interpolation method should only be used for E close to T. At higher energies, nonexponential behavior will normally begin to appear, and linear-linear interpolation is moresuitable.
Next consider an energy distribution represented as a two-dimensional function of E and E′
f(E,E′). Using a simple Cartesian interpolation, the function is represented by a series oftabulated functions f(E,E′). The simple "graph paper" rules are used for interpolating for f(E′) at
each El. An additional interpolation table is given for interpolation between these values to get
the result at E.
Distributions usually show ridges that cut diagonally across the lines of E and E′. An
interpolation scheme is required that merges smoothly between adjacent distributions without
generating the spurious bumps often seen when interpolation along the Cartesian axes E and E′ isused.
The first non-Cartesian scheme allowed is the method of corresponding points. Given
distributions for two adjacent incident energies, f(Ei,E′ik) and f(Ej,E′jk), the interpolation takes
place along the line joining the kth points in the two functions. When the E′ grids are different
and the grid points are well chosen, this interpolation scheme is analogous to following thecontours on a map. Of course, if the E′ grids are the same for Ei and Ej, this method is exactly
equivalent to Cartesian interpolation. The method of corresponding points is selected by using
INT=11-15, where the transformed values follow the interpolation laws INT=1-5, respectively.
The second non-Cartesian interpolation scheme allowed is unit-base interpolation. The
spectra at Ei and Ei+1 are transformed onto a unit energy scale by dividing each secondary energy
by the respective maximum energy. The interpolation is then performed as in the Cartesian
method, and the resulting intermediate spectrum is expanded using the maximum energy
obtained by interpolating between the end points of the original spectra. The unit-base option is
selected by using INT=21-25, where the transformed values follow the interpolation laws
INT=1-5, respectively.

August 2004

0.23

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Figure 0.1
Interpolation of a Tabulated One-dimensional Function
Illustrated for the Case NP=10, NR=3
N B T(2 )= 7

N B T(1 )= 3

RANGE 1IN T (1)RANGE 2
IN T(2 )N B T(3 )= 10
RANGE 3
IN T(3 )

y(6)

y(7)

y(3)
y(5)
y(2)

y(9 )

y(8)

y(4)

y(10 )

y(1)

x(1)

x(2)

x(3)
x(4)

x(5)
x(6)

x(7)

x(8) x(9) x10

0.6.2.1 Two Dimensional Interpolation Schemes
Three schemes are provided for two-dimensional interpolation: 1) simple Cartesianinterpolation, wherein one simply interpolates the function values along constant lines of initialand final energy values, 2) a method called unit-base transform, and 3) the method orcorresponding energies.
Figure 0.2
Interpolation between Two-Dimensional PanelsfSecondary
Energy
Ei
E

E’
Ei+1

Initial Energy
0.24

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Consider Figure 0.2. Here E is the initial energy and there are panels at Ei and Ei +1 . The
panels describe the probabilities of scattering from these energies to other energies; e.g.,f ( Ei , E ′) and are generally probability distributions that will integrate to unity, when they areintegrated over all E ′ . These panels will be presented using the usual tabular schemes forarrays, or may be given in the form of an analytic expression.
For the case of simple Cartesian interpolation, intermediate values are determined byinterpolating along lines of constant E and E ′ as noted earlier. Assume that all interpolation
schemes are linear-linear in energy and that one wants to determine a value for a distribution at
E ∈ ( Ei , Ei +1 ) . The equation for this is:
E − Eif ( E , E ′) = f ( Ei , E ′) +[ f ( E , E ′) − f ( Ei , E ′)](0.4)
Ei +1 − Ei
An examination of the above figure illustrates the major problem with Cartesian interpolation;viz., that the panel at E will have features from the lower panel at the low end, and from theupper panel at the high end. This, of course, is reasonable, but the resulting function will tend tohave artificial peaks when the distributions shift as a function of energy, as is usually the case.
The unit-base transform was devised to try to reduce the non-physical characteristics ofCartesian interpolation. In this case, the data at the two panels surrounding E are transformed toa unit base where the new functions vary according to a variable x that ranges from 0 to 1.
E ′ − E i′(1)x≡(0.5)
Ei′( N ) − E i′(1)In this case, Ei′(1) is the energy of the first sink energy in the panel at Ei and Ei′( N ) is the lastpoint. An exactly analogous equation is used to define the value of x at Ei +1 and at E . From
here, the interpolation is made using an expression such as shown in Eq. (0.7) except that it ismade at a constant value of x . Special care must be taken to properly account for the integralsof the panel; i.e.,(0.6)∫ dE ′ f ( E ′) = ∫ dx g ( x)dE ′. The latter radical is the Jacobian thatdx
is required for the transformation to the unit-base space and is determined from Eq. (0.8). In
other words, when Eqn. (0.7) is used, the interpolation is made at constant values of x and thefunction values must be multiplied by the Jacobians for the respective panels.
Two things can be noted about unit-base transform interpolation: 1) if the end points of twopanels are the same, unit-base transform is exactly equivalent to Cartesian interpolation, and 2)
the same interpolations can be made without transforming to unit-base space and transforming to
the energy space at E. The low energy value of the intermediate panel is simply
E − Ei′ ( E ) = E i′(1) +E low[ Ei′+1 (1) − E i′ (1)](0.7)
Ei +1 − Ei
A similar expression gives the high energy of the intermediate panel, and simply substitutes the
top energies for the two panels in place of the bottom energies.
E − Ei′ ( E ) = Ei′( N ) +E high[ Ei′+1 ( M ) − E i′( N )](0.8)
Ei +1 − Ei

which requires f ( E ′)dE ′ = g ( x)dx , or g ( x) = f ( E ′)August 2004

0.25

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Here we have assumed the upper panel has M points. The Jacobian that should be used with thedE ′( Ei )value from the bottom panel is, and is determined from Eqn (0.12) shown below.
dE ′( E )The secondary energy at Ei that corresponds to an E ′ at E is calculated from′E ′ − ElowEi′( E ′) = Ei′(1) +[ Ei′( N ) − Ei′ (1)](0.9)
′ − Elow′
E highHere we have dropped the (E ) arguments from the E ′ values at E for clarity. An analogous
expression determines the secondary energy at the upper panel, and also the Jacobian for thispanel. When the two values are interpolated at these two secondary energies and multiplied bytheir respective Jacobians, the values are simply interpolated using Eqn. (0.7) (or otherappropriate expression, if the interpolation scheme is not linear in energy).
The Method of Corresponding Energies (MCE) is a scheme that was designed to circumvent
one of the major problems associated with the unit-base transform approach; viz., that the unitbase transform depends directly on the way the end points of the successive distributions aretaken. The MCE approach splits the integrals of distributions into equal integral bins and theninterpolates linearly between corresponding bins.
(The limits of these bins are the“corresponding energies”.) This is a more physical approach than either Cartesian or unit-basetransform interpolation and tends to emphasize the significant portions of the distributions.
Perhaps a better way of saying this is that it tends to de-emphasize the insignificant portions of
the distributions. For example, if 10 equal integral bins are to be used for the interpolation, theenergies where the panels integrate to a tenth of the total integral are determined. Then theenergies where the panels integrate to two-tenths of the total integral are determined, etc., until
10 sets of energy boundaries are defined for the bins in all panels. The interpolations between
corresponding bins of successive panels are then performed using the unit-base transformapproach.
It is important to note that that unit-base transform and MCE will require Jacobians tomultiply the function values at successive panels, because a variable transformation is involved,
while Cartesian interpolation is all done in real energy space, so that the unmodified function
values are used.

0.7. General Description of Data Formats
An ENDF "tape" is built up from a small number of basic structures called "records," such as
TPID, TEND, CONT, TAB1, and so on. These "records" normally consist of one or more 80character FORTRAN records. It is also possible to use binary mode, where each of the basic
structures is implemented as a FORTRAN logical record. The advantage of using these basic
ENDF "records" is that a small library of utility subroutines can be used to read and write therecords in a uniform way.
0.7.1. Structure of an ENDF Data TapeThe structure of an ENDF data tape (file) is illustrated schematically in Fig. 0.3. The tapecontains a single record at the beginning that identifies the tape. The major subdivision between
these records is by material. The data for a material is divided into files, and each file (MF0.26

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

number) contains the data for a certain class of information. A file is subdivided into sections,each one containing data for a particular reaction type (MT number). Finally, a section isdivided into records. Every record on a tape contains three identification numbers: MAT, MF,
and MT. These numbers are always in increasing numerical order, and the hierarchy is MAT,
MF, MT. The end of a section, file, or material is signaled by special records called SEND,
FEND, and MEND, respectively.
Figure 0.3

Structure of an ENDF data tape
Tape Ident(TPID)
First
material

First file

First section

Second file

SecondsectionFirst record(HEAD)
SecondrecordMaterial(MAT)

File (MF)

Section(MT)

Record(MR)

Last
Material
Tape end(TEND)

Last file

Last section

Last record

Material
end(MEND)

File end(FEND

Section end(SEND)

0.7.2. Format Nomenclature
An attempt has been made to use an internally consistent notation based on the following
rules.
a) Symbols starting with the letter I, J, K, L, M, or N are integers. All other symbols referto floating-point (real numbers).
b) The letter I or a symbol starting with I refers to an interpolation code (see Section 0.6.2).
c) Letters J, K, L, M, or N when used alone are indices.
d) A symbol starting with M is a control number. Examples are MAT, MF, MT.
e) A symbol starting with L is a test number.

A symbol starting with N is a count of items.
All numbers are given in fields of 11 columns. In character mode, floating-point numbers
should be entered in one of the following forms:±1.234567±n±1.23456±nn, where nn ≤ 38
depending on the size of the exponent. Both of these forms can be read by the "E11.0" format
specification of FORTRAN. However, a special subroutine available to the NNDC must be used
to output numbers in the above format. If evaluations are produced using numbers written by

August 2004

0.27

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures"1PE11.5" (that is, 1.2345E±nn), the numbers will be standardized into 6 or 7 digit form, but thereal precision will remain at the 5 digit level.
0.7.3. Types of Records
All records on an ENDF tape are one of six possible types, denoted by TEXT, CONT, LIST,
TAB1, TAB2, and INTG. The CONT record has six special cases called DIR, HEAD, SEND,
FEND, MEND, and TEND. The TEXT record has the special case TPID. Every record contains
the basic control numbers MAT, MF, and MT, as well as a sequence number. The definitions of
the other fields in each record will depend on its usage as described below.
0.7.4. TEXT Records
This record is used either as the first entry on an ENDF tape (TPID), or to give the comments
in File 1. It is indicated by the following shorthand notation:[MAT, MF, MT/ HL] TEXT

where HL is 66 characters of text information. The TEXT record can be read with thefollowing FORTRAN statements:
READ(LIB,10)HL,MAT,MF,MT,NS
10 FORMAT(A66,I4,I2,I3,I5)
where NS is the sequence number.13 For a normal TEXT record, MF = 1 and MT = 451. For
a TPID record, MAT contains the tape number NTAPE, and MF and MT are both zero.
0.7.5. Control Records
0.7.5.1. CONT Records
The smallest possible record is a control (CONT) record. For convenience, a CONT record
is denoted by[MAT,MF,MT/C1,C2,L1,L2,N1,N2]CONTThe CONT record can be read with the following FORTRAN statements:
READ(LIB,10)C1,C2,L1,L2,N1,N2,MAT,MF,MT,NS
10 FORMAT(2E11.0,4I11,I4,I2,I3,I5).
The actual parameters stored in the six fields C1, C2, L1, L2, N1, and N2 will depend on theapplication for the CONT record.
0.7.5.2. HEAD Records
The HEAD record is the first in a section and has the same form as CONT, except that the C1
and C2 fields always contain ZA and AWR, respectively.
0.7.5.3. END Records
The SEND, FEND, MEND, and TEND records use only the three control integers, which
signal the end of a section, file, material, or tape, respectively. In binary mode, the six standard
fields are all zero. In character mode, the six are all zero as follows:[MAT,MF,99999/[MAT, 0,0/
[ 0, 0,
0/

0.0,
0.0,
0.0,

0.0,
0.0,
0.0,

0,
0,
0,

0,
0,
0,

0,
0,
0,

13

Records are sequentially numbered within a given MAT/MF/MT.

14

The SEND record has the sequence number 99999.

0.28

0] SEND140] FEND
0] MEND

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures[ -1, 0,

0/

0.0,

0.0,

0,

0,

0,

0] TEND

0.7.5.4. DIR Records
The DIR records are described in more detail in Section 1.1.1. The only difference between
a DIR record and a standard CONT record is that the first two fields in the DIR record are blankin character mode.
0.7.6. LIST Records
This type of record is used to list a series of numbers B1, B2, B3, etc. The values are given
in an array B(n), and there are NPL of them. The shorthand notation for the LIST record is[MAT,MF,MT/ C1, C2, L1, L2, NPL, N2/ Bn] LIST

The LIST record can be read with the following FORTRAN statements:
READ(LIB,10)C1,C2,L1,L2,NPL,N2,MAT,MF,MT,NS
10 FORMAT(2E11.0,4I11,I4,I2,I3,I5)
READ(LIB,20)(B(N),N=1,NPL)
20 FORMAT(6E11.0)
The maximum for NPL varies with use (see Appendix G).
0.7.7. TAB1 Records
These records are used for one-dimensional tabulated functions such as y(x). The dataneeded to specify a one-dimensional tabulated function are the interpolation tables NBT(N) and
INT(N) for each of the NR ranges, and the NP tabulated pairs of x(n) and y(n). The shorthandrepresentation is[MAT,MF,MT/ C1, C2, L1, L2, NR, NP/xint/y(x)]TAB1

The TAB1 record can be read with the following FORTRAN statements:
READ(LIB,10)C1,C2,L1,L2,NR,NP,MAT,MF,MT,NS
10 FORMAT(2E11.0,4I11,I4,I2,I3,I5)
READ(LIB,20)(NBT(N),INT(N),N=1,NR)
20 FORMAT(6I11)
READ(LIB,30)(X(N),Y(N),N=1,NP)
30 FORMAT(6E11.0)
The limits on NR and NP vary with use (see Appendix G). The limits must be strictly
observed in primary evaluations in order to protect processing codes that use the simple binary
format. However, these limits can be relaxed in derived libraries in which resonance parameters
have been converted into detailed tabulations of cross section versus energy. Such derived
libraries can be written in character mode or a non-standard blocked-binary mode.
0.7.8. TAB2 Records
The last record type is the TAB2 record, which is used to control the tabulation of a twodimensional function y(x,z). It specifies how many values of z are to be given and how tointerpolate between the successive values of z. Tabulated values of yl(x) at each value of zl are
given in TAB1 or LIST records following the TAB2 record, with the appropriate value of z in thefield designated as C2. The shorthand notation for TAB2 is[MAT,MF,MT/ C1, C2, L1, L2, NR, NZ/ Zint]TAB2,

The TAB2 record can be read with the following FORTRAN statements:
READ(LIB,10)C1,C2,L1,L2,NR,NZ,MAT,MF,MT,NS

August 2004

0.29

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

10 FORMAT(2E11.0,4I11,I4,I2,I3,I5)
READ(LIB,20)(NBT(N),INT(N),N=1,NR)
20 FORMAT(6I11)

For example, a TAB2 record is used in specifying angular distribution data in File 4. In thiscase, NZ in the TAB2 record specifies the number of incident energies at which angular
distributions are given. Each distribution is given in a LIST or TAB1 record.
0.7.9 INTG records

INTG, or INTeGer, records are used to store a correlation matrix in integer format. The
shorthand notation is
[MAT,

MF,

MT / II, JJ, KIJ ] INTG

where II and JJ are position locators, and KIJ is an array of dimension 18.
The INTG record can be read with the following FORTRAN statements:
DIMENSION KIJ(18)READ (LIB,10) II, JJ, KIJ, MAT, MF, MT, NS
10 FORMAT (2I5, 1X, 18I3, 1X, I4, I2, I3, I5)

See File 32, LCOMP = 2, for details regarding the use of this format.

0.30

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.8. ENDF Documentation

1. BNL 8381, ENDF - Evaluated Nuclear Data File Description and Specifications, January
1965, H.C. Honeck.
2. BNL 50066 (ENDF 102), ENDF/B - Specifications for an Evaluated Nuclear Data File for
Reactor Applications, May 1966, H.C. Honeck. Revised July 1967 by S. Pearlstein.
3. BNL 50274 (ENDF 102), Vol. I - Data Formats and Procedures for the ENDF Neutron
Cross Section Library, October 1970, M.K. Drake, Editor.
4. LA 4549 (ENDF 102), Vol. II - ENDF Formats and Procedures for Photon Production andInteraction Data, October 1970, D.J. Dudziak.
5. BNL-NCS-50496 (ENDF 102), ENDF102 Data Formats and Procedures for the EvaluatedNuclear Data File, ENDF, October 1975, Revised by D. Garber, C. Dunford, and S.
Pearlstein.
6. ORNL/TM-5938 (ENDF-249), The Data Covariance Files for ENDF/B-V, July 1977, F.
Perey.
7. BNL-NCS-50496 (ENDF 102), Second Edition, ENDF-102 Data Formats and Proceduresfor the Evaluated Nuclear Data File, ENDF/B-V, October 1979, Edited by R. Kinsey.
Revised by B.A. Magurno, November 1983.
8. BNL-NCS-28949 (Supplement ENDF 102), Second Edition, Supplement to the ENDF/B-V
Formats and Procedures Manual for Using ENDF/B-IV Data, November 1980, S. Pearlstein.
9. BNL-NCS-44945 (ENDF-102), Revision 10/91, ENDF-102 Data Formats and Proceduresfor the Evaluated Nuclear Data File ENDF-6, October 1991, Edited by P. F. Rose and C. L.
Dunford.

August 2004

0.31

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

0.32

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

1. FILE 1. GENERAL INFORMATION
File 1 is the first part of any set of evaluated cross-section data for a material. Each materialmust have a File 1 that contains at least one section. This required section provides a brief
documentation of how the data were evaluated and a directory that summarizes the files andsections contained in the material. In the case of fissionable materials, File 1 may contain up to
four additional sections giving fission neutron yields and energy release information. Eachsection has been assigned an MT number (see below), and the sections are arranged in order ofincreasing MT number. A section always starts with a HEAD record and ends with a SEND
record. The end of File 1 (and all other files) is indicated by a FEND record. These record types
are defined in detail in Section 0.7.
1.1. Descriptive Data and Directory (MT=451)
This section is always the first section of any material and has two parts:
1) a brief documentation of the cross-section data, and2) a directory of the files and sections used for this material.
In the first part, a brief description of the evaluated data set is given. This information should
include the significant experimental results used to obtain the evaluated data, descriptions of any
nuclear models used, a clear specification of all the MT numbers defined to identify reactions,the history of the evaluation, and references. The descriptive information is given as a series ofrecords, each record containing up to 66 characters.
The first three records of the descriptive information contain a standardized presentation of
information on the material, projectile, evaluators, and modification status. The following
quantities are defined for MF=1, MT=451:
ZA,AWR
LRP

LFI

NLIB

Standard material charge and mass parameters.
Indicates whether resolved and/or unresolved resonance parameters are
given in File 2:
LRP=−1, no File 2 is given (not allowed for incident neutrons);
LRP=0, no resonance parameter data are given, but a File 2 is present
containing the effective scattering radius;
LRP=1, resolved and/or unresolved parameter data are given in File 2 andcross sections computed from them must be added1 to background crosssections given in File 3;
LRP=2, parameters are given in File 2, but cross sections derived from them
are not to be added to the cross sections in File 3. The option LRP=2 isto be used for derived files only.
Indicates whether this material fissions:
LFI=0, this material does not fission;
LFI=1, this material fissions.
Library identifier: NLIB= 0 for ENDF/B.
Additional values have been assigned to identify other libraries using ENDF
format.

1

In the unresolved region, it is also possible to compute a self-shielding factor from File 2 and multiply it by acomplete unshielded cross section in File 3.

April 2001

1.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

NMOD

ELIS
STA

LIS
LISO
NFOR

AWI
EMAX
LREL
NSUB
NVER
TEMP

LDRV

NWD
NXC

ZSYNAM

ALAB
EDATE

1.2

Modification number for this material:
NMOD=0, evaluation converted from a previous version;
NMOD=1, new or revised evaluation for the current library version;
NMOD≥2, for successive modifications.
Excitation energy of the target nucleus relative to 0.0 for the ground state.
Target stability flag:
STA=0, stable nucleus;
STA=1 unstable nucleus. If the target is unstable, radioactive decay data
should be given in the decay data sub-library (NSUB=4).
State number of the target nucleus. The ground state is indicated by LIS=0.
Isomeric state number. The ground state is indicated by LISO=0. LIS isgreater than or equal to LISO.
Library format.
NFOR=6 for all libraries prepared according to the specifications given inthis manual.
Mass of the projectile in neutron units. For incident photons or decay datasub-libraries, use AWI=0.0.
Upper limit of energy range for evaluation.
Release number.
Sub-library number. See Section 0.4 for a description of sub-libraries.
Library version number; for example, NVER=6 for version VI.
Target temperature (Kelvin) for data that have been generated by Doppler
broadening. For derived data only; use TEMP=0.0 for all primaryevaluations.
Special derived material flag that distinguishes between different
evaluations with the same material keys (i.e., MAT, NMOD, NSUB):LDRV=0, primary evaluation:
LDRV≥1, special derived evaluation (for example, a dosimetry evaluation
using sections (MT) extracted from the primary evaluation).
Number of records used to describe the data set for this material. Each
record can contain up to 66 characters.
Number of records in the directory for this material. Each section (MT) in
the material has a corresponding line in the directory that contains MF, MT,
NC, and MOD. NC is a count of the number of records in the section (notincluding SEND), and MOD is the modification flag (see below).
Character representation of the material charge, chemical symbol, atomic
mass number, and metastable state in the form Z-cc-AM withZ, right justified in col. 1 to 3,- (hyphen) in col. 4,
two-character chemical name left justified in col. 5 and 6,- (hyphen) in col. 7,
A, right justified in col. 8 to 10 or blank,
M for the indication of a metastable state in col. 11,
for example, 94-PU-239, 1-H - 2, etc.
Mnemonic for the originating laboratory(s) left adjusted in col. 12-22.
Date of evaluation given in the form "EVAL-DEC74" in col. 23-32.

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

AUTH
REF
DDATE
RDATE

ENDATEHSUB

Author(s) name(s) left adjusted in col. 34-66.
Primary reference for the evaluation left adjusted in col. 2-22.
Original distribution date given in the form "DIST-DEC74" in col. 23-32.
Date and number of the last revision to this evaluation in col. 34-43 in theform "REV2-DEC74”, where "2" is the revision number IREV; IREV iscomputer retrievable.
Master File entry date in the form yyyymmdd right adjusted in col. 56-63.
The Master File entry date will be assigned by NNDC for ENDF/B-VI.
Identifier for the library contained on three successive records.
The first record contains four dashes starting in col. 1, directly followed by
the library type (NLIB) and version (NVER). For example,"---- ENDF/B-VI", followed by MATERIAL XXXX starting in col. 23
where XXXX is the MAT number, and REVISION 2 (starting in col. 45
only if required) where "2" is the revision number IREV.
The second record contains five dashes starting in col. 1, and followed by
the sub-library identifier (see Table 0.1). For example,"----- DECAY DATA,""----- PHOTO-ATOMIC INTERACTION DATA," or"----- INCIDENT NEUTRON DATA."The third record contains six dashes starting in col. 1 and followed by
ENDF-6 where "6" is the library format type (NFOR).

MFn
MTn
NCn
MODn

April 2001

Note: the three HSUB records can be generated by the utility program,
STANEF.
MF of the nth section.
MT of the nth section.
Number of records in the nth section. This count does not include the
SEND record.
Modification indicator for the nth section. The value of MODn is equal to
NMOD if the corresponding section was changed in this revision. MODn
must always be less than or equal to NMOD.

1.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

1.1.1. Formats
The structure of this section is[MAT, 1,451/
ZA,
AWR,
LRP,
LFI, NLIB, NMOD]HEAD[MAT, 1,451/ ELIS,
STA,
LIS,
LISO,
0, NFOR]CONT[MAT, 1,451/
AWI, EMAX, LREL,
0, NSUB, NVER]CONT[MAT, 1,451/ TEMP,
0.0, LDRV,
0, NWD, NXC]CONT[MAT, 1,451/ZSYMAM, ALAB, EDATE,
AUTH
]TEXT
[MAT, 1,451/
REF, DDATE, RDATE, ENDATE]TEXT[MAT, 1,451/ HSUB]TEXT-----------------------------------continue for the rest of the NWD descriptive records-----------------------------------[MAT, 1,451/ blank, blank,
MF1,
MT1, NC1, MOD1]CONT[MAT, 1,451/ blank, blank,
MF2,
MT2, NC2, MOD2]CONT----------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 1,451/ blank, blank, MFNXC, MTNXC,NCNXC,MODNXC]CONT[MAT, 1, 0/
0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0]SEND

1.1.2. Procedures
Note that the parameters NLIB, NVER, NSUB, MAT, NMOD, LDRV, and sometimes
TEMP define a unique set of "keys" that identifies a particular evaluation or "material" in the
ENDF system. These keys can be used to access materials in a formal data base management
system if desired.
The flag LRP indicates whether resolved and/or unresolved resonance parameter data are to
be found in File 2 (Resonance Parameters) and how these data are to be used with File 3 tocompute the net cross section. For incident neutrons, every material will have a File 2. If
LRP=0, the file contains only the effective scattering radius; the potential cross section
corresponding to this scattering radius has already been included in the File 3 cross sections. If
LRP=1, File 2 contains resolved and/or unresolved resonance parameters. Cross sections or selfshielding factors computed from these parameters are to be combined with any cross sections
found in File 3 to obtain the correct net cross section. For other sub-libraries (decay data,
incident photons, incident charged particles, fission product yields), File 2 can be omitted (use
LRP=-1). A number of processing codes exist which reconstruct resonance-region cross sections
from the parameters in File 2 and output the results in ENDF format. Such a code can set LRP=2
and copy the original File 2 to its output ENDF tape. Other processing codes using such a tapewill know that resonance reconstruction has already been performed, but the codes will still haveeasy access to the resonance parameters if needed. The LRP=2 option is not allowed in primaryevaluations.
The flag LFI indicates that this material fissions in the context of the present sub-library. In
this case, a section specifying the total number of neutrons emitted per fission,⎯ν(E), must be
given as MF=1, MT=452. Sections may also be given that specify the number of delayed
neutrons per fission (MT=455) and the number of prompt neutrons per fission (MT=456), andthat specify the components of energy release in fission (MT=458).

1.4

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The flag LDRV indicates that this material was derived in some way from anotherevaluation; for example, it could represent an activation reaction extracted from a more complete
evaluation, it could be part of a gas production library containing production cross sections
computed from more fundamental reactions, it could represent a reconstructed library withresonance parameters expanded into detailed point-wise cross sections, and so on.
The data in the descriptive section must be given for every material. The first three records
are used to construct titles for listings, plots, etc., and the format should be followed closely. The
remaining records give a verbal description of the evaluated data set for the material. The
description should mention the important experimental results upon which the recommended
cross sections are based, the evaluation procedures and nuclear models used, a brief history andorigin of the evaluation, important limitations of the data set, estimated uncertainties andcovariances, references, and any other remarks that will assist the user in understanding the data.
For incident neutron evaluations, the 2200 m/s cross sections contained in the data should betabulated, along with the infinite dilution resonance integrals for capture and fission (ifapplicable). For charged-particle and high-energy reactions, the meaning of each MT should be
carefully explained using the notation of Section 0.5.
1.2. Number of Neutrons per Fission,⎯ν, (MT=452)
If the material fissions (LFI=1), then a section specifying the average total number ofneutrons per fission,⎯ν (MT=452), must be given. This format applies to both particle inducedNCν ( E ) = ∑ n =1 Cn E n −1
(1.1)
and spontaneous fission, each in its designated sub-library. Values of⎯ν may be tabulated as afunction of energy or coefficients provided for the following polynomial expansion of ν (E),where ⎯ν(E) = the average total (prompt plus delayed) number of neutrons per fission
produced by neutrons of incident energy E(eV),Cn= the nth coefficient, andNC = the number of terms in the polynomial.
MT=452 for an energy-dependent neutron multiplicity cannot be represented by apolynomial expansion when MT=455 and MT=456 are utilized in the file.
1.2.1. Formats
The structure of this section depends on whether values of⎯ν (E) are tabulated as a functionof energy or represented by a polynomial. The following quantities are defined:

NP
Eint
⎯ν(E)

Test that indicates what representation of ν (E) has been used:
LNU=1, polynomial representation has been used;
LNU=2, tabulated representation.
Count of the number of terms used in the polynomial expansion. (NC≤4).
Coefficients of the polynomial. There are NC coefficients given.
Number of interpolation ranges used to tabulate values of ⎯ν(E). (See0.6.2.)
Total number of energy points used to tabulate⎯ν(E).
Interpolation scheme (see 0.6.2 for details).
Average number of neutrons per fission.

April 2001

1.5

LNU

NC
Cn
NR

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

If LNU=1, the structure of the section is[MAT, 1, 452/ ZA, AWR,
[MAT, 1, 452/ 0.0, 0.0,
[MAT, 1,99999/ 0.0, 0.0,

0, LNU, 0,
0,0, NC,
0,0, 0,0]HEAD (LNU=1)
0/ C1, C2, ...CNC]LIST
0]SEND

If LNU=2, the structure of the section is[MAT, 1, 452/ ZA, AWR,
[MAT, 1, 452/ 0.0, 0.0,
[MAT, 1,99999/ 0.0, 0.0,

0, LNU, 0, 0]HEAD (LNU=2)0,0, NR, NP/Eint /⎯ν(E)]TAB1
0,0, 0, 0]SEND

1.2.2. Procedures
If a polynomial representation (LNU=1) has been used to specify⎯ν (E), this representation isvalid over any range in which the fission cross section is specified (as given in Files 2 and 3).
When using a polynomial to fit⎯ν (E), the fit shall be limited to a third-degree polynomial(NC≤4). If such a fit does not reproduce the recommended values of⎯ν (E), a tabulated form
(LNU=2) should be used.
If tabulated values of⎯ν (E) are specified (LNU=2), then pairs of energy-⎯ν values are given.
Values of⎯ν (E) should be given that cover any energy range in which the fission cross section is
given in File 2 and/or File 3.
The values of⎯ν (E) given in this section are for the average total number of neutrons
produced per fission event. When another section (MT=455) that specifies the delayed neutrons
from fission is given, the average number of delayed neutrons per fission (⎯νd) must be added to⎯νp given in section MT=456 and included in the value of⎯ν(E) given in this section (MT=452).
In this case, only LNU=2 is allowed for MT=452.
For spontaneous fission, the polynomial representation (LNU=1) is used with NC=1 and Cl =⎯νtotal. There is no energy dependence.
1.3. Delayed Neutron Data, ⎯νd, (MT=455)
This section describes the delayed neutrons resulting from either particle induced or
spontaneous fission. The average total number of delayed neutron precursors emitted per
fission,⎯νd, is given, along with the decay constants, λi, for each precursor family. The fractionof⎯νd generated for each family is given in File 5 (section 5 of this report). The energy
distributions of the neutrons associated with each precursor family are also given in File 5.
For particle-induced fission, the total number of delayed neutrons is given as a function ofenergy in tabulated form (LNU=2). The energy dependence is specified by tabulating⎯νd(E) at aseries of neutron energies using the same format as for MT=452. For spontaneous fission
LNU=1 is used with NC=1 and C1=⎯νd as for MT=452.
The total number of delayed neutron precursors emitted per fission event, at incident energy
E, is given in this file and is defined as the sum of the number of neutrons emitted for each of the
precursor families,
NNFν d = ∑ i =1 ν ( E ),where NNF is the number of precursor families. The fraction of the total, Pi(E), emitted foreach family is given in File 5 (see section 5) and is defined as
Pi ( E ) =1.6

ν i (E)ν d (E)
August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

1.3.1. Formats
The following quantities are defined.
LNU

LDG

NE
NC
NR
NP
Eint
ν d (E)NNF
λi (E)
αi (E)

Test indicating which representation is used:
LNU=1 means that polynomial expansion is used;
LNU=2 means that a tabulated representation is used.
Flag indicating energy dependence of delayed-group constants:
LDG=0 means that decay constants are energy independent;
LDG=1 means that decay constants are energy independent.
Number of energies at which the delayed-group constants are given.
Number of terms in the polynomial expansion. (NC≤4).
Number of interpolation ranges used. (NR≤20).
Total number of energy points used in the tabulation of ν(E)Interpolation scheme (See Section 0.6.2)
Total average number of delayed neutrons formed per fission event.
Number of precursor families considered.
Decay constant (sec-1) for the ith precursor. (May be constant)
Delayed-group abundances.

The structure when values of⎯νd are tabulated (LNU=2) and the delayed-group constants areenergy independent (LDG=0) is:[MAT, 1,455/ ZA, AWR, LDG, LNU,
0, 0]HEAD (LDG=0, LNU=2)[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NNF, 0/λ1,λ2,...λNNF]LIST[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NR, NP/ Eint /⎯νd(E)]TAB1[MAT, 1, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0, 0]SEND

The structure when values of⎯νd are tabulated (LNU=2) and the delayed-group constants areenergy dependent (LDG=1) is:[MAT, 1,455/ ZA, AWR, LDG, LNU,
0, 0]HEAD (LDG=1, LNU=2)[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NR, NE/ Eint]TAB2[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, E1,
0,0, NNF*2, 0/
λ1(E1), α1(E1), λ2(E1), α2(E1), λ3(E1), α3(E1),...λNNF(E1), αNNF(E1)]LIST----------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, ENE,
0,0, NNF*2, 0/
λ1(ENE), α1(ENE), λ2(ENE), α2(ENE), λ3(ENE), α3(ENE),...λNNF(ENE), αNNF(ENE)]LIST[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NR, NP/ Eint /⎯νd(E)]TAB1[MAT, 1, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0, 0]SEND

If LNU=1 (spontaneous fission) and the delayed-group constants are energy independent(LDG=0), the structure of the section is:[MAT, 1,455/ ZA, AWR, LDG, LNU,
0,
[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NNF,[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,1,[MAT, 1, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,
0,
0,

April 20010]HEAD (LDG=0, LNU=1)
0/λ1,λ2,...λNNF]LIST0/⎯νd]LIST
0]SEND

1.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

If LNU=1 (spontaneous fission) and the delayed-group constants are energy dependent(LDG=1), the structure of the section is:[MAT, 1,455/ ZA, AWR, LDG, LNU,
0, 0]HEAD (LDG=1, LNU=1)[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NR, Ne/ Eint]TAB2[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, E1,
0,0, NNF*2, 0/
λ1(E1), α1(E1), λ2(E1), α2(E1), λ3(E1), α3(E1),...λNNF(E1), αNNF(E1)]LIST----------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, ENE,
0,0, NNF*2, 0/
λ1(ENE), α1(ENE), λ2(ENE), α2(ENE), λ3(ENE), α3(ENE),...λNNF(ENE), αNNF(ENE)]LIST[MAT, 1,455/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,1, 0/⎯νd]LIST[MAT, 1, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0, 0]SEND

1.3.2. Procedures
When tabulated values of⎯νd(E) are specified, as is required for particle-induced fission by
Section 1.2., they should be given for the same energy range as that used to specify the fission
cross section.
The probability of producing the precursors for each family and the energy distributions ofneutrons produced by each precursor family are given in File 5 (section 5 of this report). It isextremely important that the same precursor families be given in File 5 as are given in File 1(MT=455) with the same abundances, and the ordering of the families should be the same in both
files. It is recommended that the families be ordered by decreasing half-lives (λ1<λ2<…<λNNF).
For spontaneous fission, the polynomial form (LNU=1) is used with only one term (NC=1,C1=⎯νd).
If MT=455 is used, then MT=456 must also be used as well as MT=452.
1.4. Number of Prompt Neutrons per Fission,⎯νp, (MT=456)
If the material fissions (LFI=1), a section specifying the average number of prompt neutrons
per fission,⎯νp, (MT=456) can be given using formats identical to MT=452. For particle-induced
fission,⎯νp is given as a function of energy. The prompt⎯ν for spontaneous fission can also begiven using MT=456, but there is no energy dependence.
1.4.1. Formats
The following quantities are defined:
LNU

NC
NR
NP
Eint
⎯νp(E)

1.8

Indicates what representation of⎯νp(E) has been used:
LNU=1, polynomial representation has been used;
LNU=2, tabulated representation.
Count of the number of terms used in the polynomial expansion. (NC≤4)
Number of interpolation ranges used to tabulate values of⎯νp(E). (See0.7.7.)
Total number of energy points used to tabulate⎯νp(E).
Interpolation scheme (see section 0.6.2.)
Average number of prompt neutrons per fission.

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

If LNU=2, (tabulated values of ν ), the structure of the section is:[MAT, 1,456/ ZA, AWR,
[MAT, 1,456/ 0.0, 0.0,
[MAT, 1, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,

0, LNU, 0, 0] HEAD
(LNU=2)0,0, NR, NP/Eint/⎯νp(E)]TAB1
0,0, 0, 0]SEND

If LNU=1 (spontaneous fission) the structure of the section is:[MAT, 1,456/ ZA, AWR,
[MAT, 1,456/ 0.0, 0.0,
[MAT, 1, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,

0, LNU,
0,
0,
0,
0,

0,
1,
0,

0]HEAD(LNU=1)0/⎯νp]LIST
0]SEND

1.4.2. ProceduresIf tabulated values of⎯νp(E) are specified (LNU=2), then pairs of energy-ν values are given.
Values of ⎯νp(E) should be given that cover any energy range in which the fission cross section
is given in File 2 and/or File 3. The values of ⎯νp(E) given in this section are for the average
number of prompt neutrons produced per fission event. The energy independent⎯νp for
spontaneous fission is given using LNU=1 with NC=1 and C1=ν p as described for MT = 452.
If MT=456 is specified, then MT=455 must also be specified as well as MT=452.
1.5. Components of Energy Release Due to Fission (MT=458)
The energy released in fission is carried by fission fragments, neutrons, gammas, betas (+and –), and neutrinos and anti-neutrinos. The term fragments includes all charged particles thatare emitted promptly, since for energy-deposition calculations, all such particles have shortranges and are usually considered to lose their energy locally. Neutrons and gammas transport
their energy elsewhere and need to be considered separately. In addition, some gammas andneutrons are delayed, and in a shut-down assembly, one needs to know the amount of energy tied
up in these particles and the rate at which it is released from the metastable nuclides or
precursors. The neutrino energy is lost completely in most applications, but is part of the Qvalue. As far as the betas are concerned, prompt betas, being charged, deposit their energy
locally with the fragments, and their prompt energies are correctly included with the fragment
energies.
ET
EFR
ENP
END
EGP
EGD
EB
ENU
ER

Sum of all the partial energies that follow. This sum is the total energy
release per fission and equals the Q value.
Kinetic energy of the fragments.
Kinetic energy of the "prompt" fission neutrons.
Kinetic energy of the delayed fission neutrons.
Total energy released by the emission of "prompt" γ rays.
Total energy released by the emission of delayed γ rays.
Total energy released by delayed β's.
Energy carried away by the neutrinos.
Total energy less the energy of the neutrinos (ET - ENU); equal to thepseudo-Q in File 3 for MT=18.

All of these energies are given for an incident energy of zero.2
Ei (0) = Ei ( Einc ) + δ Ei
2

(1.2)

Taken from R. Sher and C. Beck, Fission Energy Release for 16 Fissioning Nuclides, EPRI-NP-1771 (1981).

April 2001

1.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

where

Ei is any of the energy release components;
Ei(0) is the value at Einc = 0; Einc = 0 is fictitious and represents an artifice bywhich it is possible to recover the values at any Einc.
Ei(Einc) is the value at incident energy Einc.

The δEi's are given by the following:(δ ET = − 1.057 Einc − 8.07 (ν ( Einc − ν (0) ))δ EB = 0.075Eincδ EGD = 0.075Eincδ ENU = 1.000 Einc
δ EFR = 0(

δ ENP = − 1.307 Einc − 8.07 (ν ( Einc ) − ν (0) ))δ EGP = 0
1.5.1. Formats
The structure of this section always starts with a HEAD record and end with a SEND record.
The section contains no subsections and only one LIST record.
The structure of a section is:[MAT, 1,458/ ZA, AWR,0,0,0,0]HEAD[MAT, 1,458/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, 18,
9/
EFR, ∆EFR, ENP, ∆ENP, END, ∆END,
EGP, ∆EGP, EGD, ∆EGD, EB, ∆EB,
ENU, ∆ENU, ER, ∆ER, ET, ∆ET]LIST[MAT, 1, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0]SEND

where the ∆'s allow the error estimates on the quantities listed above.
1.5.2. ProceduresThis section should be used for fertile and fissile isotopes only.
Consistency should be maintained between the Q values in File 3, the energies calculated
from File 5 and 15 and the energies listed in File 1. Note that ER = the pseudo-Q for fission(MT=18) in File 3.
Other components are not so readily determined or checked. The procedure should be that
File 5 and File 15 data take precedent, whenever available. That is, "prompt" fission neutronenergy calculated from File 5 spectra from MT=18 should be used in File 1; the same holds true
for the delayed neutron spectra given in File 5, MT=455. The "prompt" gamma energy
calculated from File 15 (MT=18 for fission) should be input into File 1, that is the prompt
gammas due to the fission process.
These quantities should be calculated at the lowest energy given in the Files for MT=18
except for fissile isotopes for which the thermal spectra should be used. For fertile materials, thespectrum given at threshold would be appropriate. Note that the File 5 spectra for MT=18

1.10

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Proceduresshould be used with⎯ν prompt (not⎯ν total) for the fission neutrons. MT=455 in File 5 contains
the delayed fission neutron spectra.
In many reactor applications, time dependent energy deposition rates are required rather thanthe components of the total energy per fission which are the values given in this MT. Timedependent energy deposition parameters can be obtained from the six-group spectra in File 5(MT=455) for delayed neutrons. Codes such as CINDER, RIBD, and ORIGEN must be used,however, to obtain more detailed information on the delayed neutrons and all time-dependent
parameters for the betas and the gammas due to the fission process.
The time-integrated energies for delayed neutrons, delayed gammas, and delayed betas ascalculated from the codes listed above may not always agree with the energy components given
in File 1. The File 1 components must sum to ET (the total energy released per fission).
In heating calculations, the energy released in all nuclear reactions besides fission,
principally the gamma-energy released in neutron radiative capture, enters analogously to thevarious fission energy components. Thus the (n,γ) energy-release would be equal to the Q-value
in File 3, MT=102, of the capturing nuclide. The capture gammas can be prompt or delayed, if
branching to isomeric states is involved, and this is relevant to various fission- and burnupproduct calculations. The "sensible energy" in a heating calculation is the sum of ER, definedpreviously, and the energy released in all other reactions.

April 2001

1.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

1.12

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2. FILE 2. RESONANCE PARAMETERS
2.1. General Description
The primary function of File 2 is to contain data for both resolved and unresolved resonanceparameters. It has only one section, with the reaction type number MT=151. A File 2 is required forincident-neutron evaluations, but it may be omitted in other cases. The use of File 2 is controlled by
the parameter LRP (see section 1.1):
LRP=-1No File 2 is given. Not allowed for incident neutrons.

LRP= 0No resonance parameters are given except for the scattering radius AP.
AP is included for the convenience of users who need an estimate of the potential
scattering cross section. It is not used to calculate a contribution to the scattering crosssection, which in this case is represented entirely in File 3.

LRP= 1

Resonance contributions for the total, elastic, fission, and radiative capture cross sections
are to be computed from the resonance parameters and added to the corresponding crosssections in File 31.
The File 2 resonance contributions should also be added to any lumped reactions
included in File 3. For SLBW and MLBW, any other competing reactions in theresonance range must be given in their entirety in File 3 and included in the backgroundfor the total cross section. The effects of the competing reactions on the resonancereactions are included using a single competitive width, Γx. This width is given
explicitly in the unresolved resonance region, and implicitly in the resolved region. In
the latter region, it is permissible for the total width to exceed the sum of the neutron,
Γ x = Γ − ( Γ n + Γγ + Γ f )radiative capture, and fission widths. The difference is interpreted as the competitive
width:For the Reich-Moore or Adler-Adler formalisms competitive reactions are not used.
LRP= 2

1

Resonance parameters are given in File 2 but are not to be used in calculating crosssections, which are assumed to be represented completely in File 3. Used for certain
derived libraries only.

In the unresolved resonance region, the evaluator may, optionally, specify a different procedure, which uses theunresolved resonance parameters in File 2 solely for the purpose of computing an energy-dependent self-shielding
factor. This option is governed by a flag, LSSF, defined in Section 2.3.1, and discussed in Section 2.4.21. When thisoption is specified, File 3 is used to specify the entire infinitely-dilute cross section, and the function of File 2 is tospecify the calculation of self-shielding factors for shielded pointwise or multigroup values.

April 2001

2.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The resonance parameters for a material are obtained by specifying the parameters for eachisotope in the material. The data for the various isotopes are ordered by increasing ZAI values(charge-isotopic mass number). The resonance data for each isotope may be divided into several
incident neutron energy ranges, given in order of increasing energy. The energy ranges for an
isotope should not overlap; each may contain a different representation of the cross sections.
In addition to these parameterized resonance ranges, the full energy range may contain two
additional non-resonance ranges, also non-overlapping. Comments on these ranges follow:
1. The low energy region (LER) is one in which the cross sections are tabulated as smoothfunctions of energy. Doppler effects must be small enough so that the values are essentially zero
degrees Kelvin. For light elements, i.e., those whose natural widths far exceed their Doppler
widths and hence undergo negligible broadening, the entire energy range can often be
represented in this way. For heavier materials, this region can sometimes be used below thelowest resolved resonances. With a good multilevel resonance fit, the LER can often be omitted
entirely, and this is preferred. An important procedure for the LER is described in Section
2.4.6.4.
2. The resolved resonance region (RRR) is one in which resonance parameters for individual
resonances are given. Usually this implies that experimental resolution is good enough to "see"the resonances, and to determine their parameters by area or shape analysis, but an evaluator
may choose to supply fictitious resolved parameters if he so desires. If the evaluator does this,the resonances must have physically-allowed quantum numbers, and be in accord with thestatistics of level densities (Appendix D, Section D.2.2). A File 3 background may be given.
The essential point is that resonance self-shielding can be accounted for by the user for eachresonance individually.
3. The unresolved resonance region (URR) is that region in which the resonances still do not
actually overlap, so that self-shielding is still important, but experimental resolution isinadequate to determine the parameters of individual resonances. In this situation, self-shielding
must be handled on a statistical basis. A File 3 may be given. The interpretation of this crosssection depends on the flag LSSF (see Sections 2.3.1 and 2.4.21). It may be interpreted either asa partial background cross section, to be added to the File 2 contribution, as in the resolved
resonance region or it may be interpreted as the entire dilute cross section, in which case File 2 isto be used solely to specify the self-shielding appropriate to this energy region. It is important tochoose the boundary between the RRR and the URR so that the statistical assumptions
underlying the unresolved resonance treatments are valid. This problem is discussed further in
Section 2.4.
4. The high-energy region (HER) starts at still higher energies where the resonances overlap andthe cross sections smooth out, subject only to Ericson fluctuations. The boundary between the
URR and HER should be chosen so that self-shielding effects are small in the HER.
File 3 may contain "background cross sections" in the resonance ranges resulting frominadequacies in the resonance representation (e.g., SLBW), the effects of resonances outside theenergy range, the average effects of missed resonances, or competing cross sections. If thesebackground cross sections are nonzero, there must be double energy points in File 3 corresponding
to each resonance range boundary (except 10-5eV). See Section 2.4 for a more complete discussionof backgrounds.

2.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Several representations are allowed for specifying resolved resonance parameters. The flag,
LRF, indicates the representation used for a particular energy range:
LRF=1 Single-level Breit-Wigner; (no resonance-resonance interference; one single-channel
inelastic competitive reaction is allowed).
LRF=2 Multilevel Breit-Wigner (resonance-resonance interference effects are included in theelastic scattering and total cross sections; one single-channel inelastic competitive reactionis allowed).
LRF=3 Reich-Moore (multilevel multichannel R-matrix; no competitive reactions allowed).
It is possible to define partial widths Γ l s1 J and Γ l s 2 J with two different values of thechannel spin, as is required when both the target spin and the orbital angular momentum
are greater than zero. This is accomplished by setting the resonance spin parameter AJ to a
positive value for the larger channel spin (s = I + 1/2), and negative for the smaller
channel spin (s = I - 1/2). (See definition of AJ in 2.2.1.) Older ENDF files have not used
this feature, but instead have only positive AJ; in this case, all resonances of a given l,J are
assumed to have the same channel spin.
For a given resonance, the only rigorously conserved quantities are J (total angularmomentum) and π (total parity). Nevertheless, this format assumes that both l (orbital
angular momentum) and s (channel spin) are also conserved quantities.
LRF=4 Adler-Adler (level-level and channel-channel interference effects are included in all crosssections via "effective" resonance parameters; usually applied to low-energy fissionable
materials; no competitive reactions).
LRF=5 This option is no longer available.
LRF=6 This option is no longer available.
LRF=7 R-Matrix Limited format, which contains all the generality of LRF=3 plus unlimited
numbers and types of channels.
Preferred formalisms for evaluation are discussed in Section 2.4.17. Further discussion of theabove formalisms is contained in the Procedures Section 2.4.
Each resonance energy range contains a flag, LRU that indicates whether it contains resolved orunresolved resonance parameters. LRU=1 means resolved, LRU=2 means unresolved.
Only one representation is allowed for the unresolved resonance parameters, namely average
single-level Breit-Wigner. However, several options are permitted, designated by the flag LRF.
With the first option, LRF=1, only the average fission width is allowed to vary as a function ofincident neutron energy. The second option, LRF=2, allows the following average parameters tovary: level spacing, fission width, reduced neutron width, radiation width, and a width for the sum of
all competitive reactions.
The data formats for the various resonance parameter representations are given in Sections 2.2.1(resolved) and 2.3.1 (unresolved). Formulae for calculating cross sections from the various
formalisms are given in Appendix D.

April 2001

2.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The following quantities have definitions that are the same for all resonance parameter
representations:
NIS
ZAI
NER
ABN
LFW

NER
EL
EH
LRU

LRF

NRO

2

3

Number of isotopes in the material (NIS<10).
(Z,A) designation for an isotope.
Number of resonance energy ranges for this isotope.
Abundance of an isotope in the material. This is a number fraction, not a weightfraction, nor a percent.
Flag indicating whether average fission widths are given in the unresolved
resonance region for this isotope:
LFW=0, average fission widths are not given;
LFW=1, average fission widths are given.
Number of resonance energy ranges for isotope.
Lower limit for an energy range2.
Upper limit for an energy range3.
Flag indicating whether this energy range contains data for resolved or unresolved
resonance parameters:
LRU=0, only the scattering radius is given (LRF=0, NLS=0, LFW=0 is
required with this option);
LRU=1, resolved resonance parameters are given.
LRU=2, unresolved resonance parameters are given.
Flag indicating which representation has been used for the energy range. The
definition of LRF depends on the value of LRU:
If LRU=1(resolved parameters), then
LRF=1, single-level Breit-Wigner (SLBW);LRF=2, multilevel Breit-Wigner (MLBW);LRF=3, Reich-Moore (RM);
LRF=4, Adler-Adler (AA);LRF=5, no longer available;
LRF=6, no longer available;
LRF=7, R-Matrix Limite (RML).
If LRU=2 (unresolved parameters), then
LRF=1, only average fission widths are energy-dependent;
LRF=2, average level spacing, competitive reaction widths, reduced neutron
widths, radiation widths, and fission widths are energy-dependent.
Flag designating possible energy dependence of the scattering radius:
NRO=0, radius is energy independent;
NRO=1 (not allowed in the ENDF/B-VI library)3.

These energies are the limits to be used in calculating cross sections from the parameters. Some resolved resonancelevels, e.g., bound levels, will have resonance energies outside the limits.
Formerly used for radius expressed as a table of energy, radius pairs.

2.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

NAPS

Flag controlling the use of the two radii, the channel radius a and the scatteringradius AP.
For NRO=0 (AP energy-independent), if:
NAPS=0, calculate a from Equation (D.0) given in Appendix D, and read AP
as a single energy-independent constant on the subsection CONT
(range) record; use a in the penetrabilities and shift factors, and AP in
the hard-sphere phase shifts;
NAPS=1, do not use Equation (D.0); use AP in the penetrabilities and shift
factor as well as in the phase shifts.
For NRO=1 (AP energy-dependent), if:
NAPS=0, calculate a from the above equation and use it in the penetrabilities
and shift factors. Read AP(E) as a TAB1 quantity in each subsection
and use it in the phase shifts;
NAPS=1, read AP(E) and use it in all three places, Pl, Sl, φl ;NAPS=2, read AP(E) and use it in the phase shifts. In addition, read thesingle, energy-independent quantity "AP, see following, and use it in Pl
and Sl, overriding the above equation for a.

File 2 contains a single section (MT=151) containing subsections for each energy range of eachisotope in the material.
The structure of File 2, for the special case in which just a scattering radius is specified (noresolved or unresolved parameters are given), is as follows: (such a material is not permitted to havemultiple isotopes or an energy-dependent scattering radius)0] HEAD(NIS=1)0] CONT(ZAI=ZA,ABN=1.0,LFW=0,NER=1)[MAT, 2,151/ EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NRO, NAPS] CONT(LRU=0,LRF=0,NRO=0,NAPS=0)[MAT, 2,151/ SPI, AP,
0,0, NLS,
0] CONT(NLS=0)[MAT, 2, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND[MAT, 0, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] FEND[MAT, 2,151/ ZA, AWR,
[MAT, 2,151/ ZAI, ABN,

0,0, NIS,
0, LFW, NER,

If resonance parameters are given, the structure of File 2 is as follows:[MAT, 2,151/ ZA, AWR,
0,0, NIS,
0] HEAD[MAT, 2,151/ ZAI, ABN,
0, LFW, NER,
0] CONT[MAT, 2,151/ EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NRO, NAPS] CONT
<Subsection for the first energy range for the first isotope>(depends on LRU and LRF)
[MAT, 2,151/
EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NRO, NAPS] CONT
<Subsection for the second energy range for the first isotope>------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 2,151/
EL,
EH, LRU, LRF, NRO, NAPS] CONT
<Subsection for the last energy range for the last isotope for this material>[MAT, 2, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND

April 2001

(isotope)(range)(range)(range)

2.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The data are given for all ranges for a given isotope, and then for all isotopes. The data for eachrange start with a CONT (range) record; those for each isotope, with a CONT (isotope) record. The
specifications for the subsections that include resonance parameters are given in Sections 2.2.1 and2.3.1, below. A multi-isotope material is permitted to have some, but not all, isotopes specified by ascattering radius only. The structure of a subsection for such an isotope is:[MAT, 2,151/ SPI,

AP,

0,

0, NLS,(NLS=0)0] CONT

and as above LFW=0, NER=1, LRU=0, LRF=0, NRO=0, and NAPS=0 for this isotope.
In the case that NRO≠0, the "range" record preceding each subsection is immediately followed
by a record giving the energy dependence of the scattering radius, AP.
[MAT, 2,151/ 0.0,

0.0,

0,

0,

NR,

NP/ Eint / AP(E)] TAB1

If NAPS is 0 or 1 the value of AP on the next record of the subsection should be set to 0.0. If
NAPS is 2, it should be set equal to the desired value of the channel radius.
2.2. Resolved Resonance Parameters (LRU=1)
2.2.1.Formats
Six different resonance formalisms are allowed to represent the resolved resonance parameters.
Formulae for the various quantities, and further comments on usage, are given in Appendix D. The
flag LRU=1, given in the CONT (range) record, indicates that resolved resonance parameters are
given for a particular energy range. Another flag, LRF, in the same record specifies which resonanceformalism has been used.
The following quantities are defined for use with all formalisms:

SPI
AP
NLS

AWRI
QX

2.6

Spin, I, of the target nucleus.
Scattering radius in units of 10-12cm. For LRF=1-4, it is assumed to be
independent of the channel quantum numbers.
Number of l-values (neutron orbital angular momentum) in this energy region.
LRF=1-4, a set of resonance parameters is given for each l-value.
LRF=5 and 6, NLS is the number of l-values required to converge thecalculation of the scattering cross section (see Sections 2.4.23 and2.4.24). Another cutoff, NLSC, is provided for converging the angular
distributions. Currently, NLS<4.
Ratio of the mass of a particular isotope to that of a neutron.
Q-value to be added to the incident particle's center-of-mass energy todetermine the channel energy for use in the penetrability factor. The conversion
to laboratory system energy depends on the reduced mass in the exit channel.
For inelastic scattering to a discrete level, the Q-value is minus the level
excitation energy. QX=0.0 if LRX=0.

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

L
LRX

NRS
ER
AJ

GT
GN
GG
GF
GX
a

Value of l.
Flag indicating whether this energy range contains a competitive width:
LRX=0, no competitive width is given, and Γ = Γn + Γγ+ Γf in the resolved
resonance region, while <Γx>=0 in the unresolved resonance region;
LRX must be 0 for LRF=3 or 4;
LRX=1, a competitive width is given, and is an inelastic process to the firstexcited state. In the resolved region, it is determined by subtraction, Γx=Γ - [Γn + Γγ + Γf ]Number of resolved resonances for a given l-value. (NRS<600.)
Resonance energy (in the laboratory system).
The absolute value of AJ is the floating-point value of J (the spin, or total
angular momentum, of the resonance).
When two channel spins are possible, if the sign of AJ is negative, the lower
value for the channel spin is implied; if positive, the higher value is implied.
When AJ is zero, only one value of channel spin is possible so there is noambiguity; the channel spin s is equal to the orbital angular momentum l.
Resonance total width, Γ, evaluated at the resonance energy ER.
Neutron width evaluated at the resonance energy ER.
Radiation width, Γγ, a constant.
Fission width, Γf, a constant.
Competitive width, Γx, evaluated at the resonance energy ER.
It is not given explicitly for LRF=1 or 2 but is to be obtained by subtraction,
GX = GT – (GN+ GG + GF), if LRX≠0.
Channel radius, in 10-12 cm. An uppercase symbol is not defined because it is
not an independent library quantity. Depending on the value of NAPS, it iseither calculated from the equation given earlier (and in Appendix D), or readfrom the position usually assigned to the scattering radius AP.

2.2.1.1. SLBW and MLBW (LRU=1, LRF=1 or 2)
The structure of a subsection is:[MAT, 2,151/

0.0, 0.0,

0,

0,

NR,

[MAT, 2,151/

SPI,

0,

0,

NLS,

AP,

NP/ Eint / AP(E)] TAB1
(if NRO ≠0)0] CONTUse AP=0.0, if AP(E) is supplied and NAPS=0 or 1.
[MAT, 2,151/ AWRI, QX,
L,
LRX, 6*NRS, NRS/
GN1,
GG1, GF1,.ER1, AJ1, GT1,
GN2,
GG2, GF2,.ER2, AJ2, GT2,--------------------------------ERNRS, AJNRS, GTNRS, GNNRS, GGNRS, GFNRS] LIST

The LIST record is repeated until each of the NLS l-values has been specified in order ofincreasing l. The values of ER for each l-value are given in increasing order.

April 2001

2.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.2.1.2. Reich-Moore (LRU=1, LRF=3)
The following additional quantities are defined:
LAD

NLSC
APL
GFA
GFB

Flag indicating whether these parameters can be used to compute angular
distributions.
LAD=0 do not use
LAD=1 can be used if desired. Do not add to file 4.
Number of l-values which must be used to converge the calculation with respect
to the incident l-value in order to obtain accurate elastic angular distributions.
See Sections D.1.5.and D.1.6.5. (NLSC≥NLS).
l-dependent scattering radius. If zero, use APL=AP.
First partial fission width, a constant.
Second partial fission width, a constant.

GFA and GFB are signed quantities, their signs being determined by the relative phase of thewidth amplitudes in the two fission channels. In this case, the structure of a subsection is similar to
LRF=1 and 2, but the total width is eliminated in favor of an additional partial fission width. GFA
and GFB can both be zero, in which case, Reich-Moore reduces to an R-function.
The structure for a subsection is:[MAT, 2,151/

0.0, 0.0,

0,

0,

NR,

NP/ Eint / AP(E)] TAB1
(if NRO≠0)[MAT, 2,151/ SPI, AP, LAD,
0,NLS, NLSC] CONT
[MAT, 2,151/ AWRI, APL,L,
0, 6*NRS, NRS/
ER1, AJ1, GN1, GG1, GFA1, GFB1,
ER2, AJ2, GN2, GG2, GFA2, GFB2,-------------------------------ERNRS,AJNRS, GNNRS,GGNRS,GFANRS,GFBNRS] LIST

The LIST record is repeated until each of the NLS l-values has been specified in order ofincreasing l. The values of ER for each l-value are given in increasing order.

2.8

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.2.1.3. Adler-Adler (LRU=1,LRF=4)
For the case of (LRU=1, LRF=4) additional quantities are defined:
Flag to indicate the kind of parameters given:LI
LI=1, total widths only
LI=2, fission widths only
LI=3, total and fission widths
LI=4, radiative capture widths only
LI=5, total and capture widths
LI=6, fission and capture widths
LI=7, total, fission, and capture widths.
Number of sets of background constants given. There are six constants per set.
NX
Each set refers to a particular cross section type. The background correction for
the total cross section is calculated by using the six constants in the manner
following .
σT
Background = ⎡⎣C E ( AT1 + AT2 E + AT3 E 2 + AT4 E 3 + BT1E + BT2 E 2 ) ⎤⎦where C = π D 2 = π k 2 and k is defined in Appendix D.
The background terms for the fission and radiative capture cross sections arecalculated in a similar manner.
NX=2, background constants are given for the total and capture crosssections.
NX=3, background constants are given for the total, capture, and fission
cross sections.
Number of sets of resolved resonance parameters (each set having its own
NJS
J-value) for a specified l.
Number of resonances for which parameters are given, for a specified AJ and L.
NLJ
AT1, AT2, AT3, AT4, BT1, BT2 Background constants for the total cross section.
AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, BF1, BF2 Background constants for the fission cross section.
AC1, AC2, AC3, AC4, BC1, BC2 Background constants for the radiative capture cross section.
4
Resonance energy, (µ), for the total cross section. Here and below, the subscriptDETrr denotes the rth resonance.
5
Resonance energy, (µ), for the fission cross section.
DEFr
5
Resonance energy, (µ), for the radiative capture cross section.
DECr
5
Value of Γ/2, (v), for the total cross section.
DWTr
5
Value of Γ/2, (v), for the fission cross section.
DWFr
5
Value of Γ/2, (v), for the radiative capture cross section.
DWCr
Symmetrical total cross section parameter, GTr .
GRTr
Asymmetrical total cross section parameter, HTr .
GITrSymmetrical fission parameter, Grf.
GRFr
Asymmetrical fission parameter, Hrf.
GIFr
Symmetrical capture parameter, Grγ.
GRCf
Asymmetrical capture parameter, Hrγ.
GICr4

Note: DETr=DEFr=DECr and DWTr=DWFr=DWCr. The redundancy is an historical carryover.

April 2001

2.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The structure of a subsection for LRU=1 and LRF=4 depends on the value of NX (the number ofsets of background constants). For the most general case (NX=3) the structure is[MAT, 2,151/ 0.0,

0.0, 0, 0, NR, NP/ Eint / AP(E)] TAB1

optional record for energy-dependent scattering radius.
[MAT, 2,151/ SPI, AP,
0,
0,
NLS,
0] CONT0, 6*NX,
NX/[MAT, 2,151/ AWRI, 0.0, LI,
BT1,
BT2,
AT1, AT2, AT3, AT4,
BF2,
AF1, ---------------------,
BC2] LIST
AC1, ---------------------,[MAT, 2,151/ 0.0, 0.0,
L,
0,
NJS,
0] CONT(l)[MAT, 2,151/ AJ, 0.0,
0,0, 12*NLJ, NLJ/
DEF1, DWF1,
DET1, DWT1, GRT1, GIT1,
GRC1, GIC1,
GRF1, GIF1, DEC1, DWC1,
DET2, DWT2, --------------------------------------------------, GIC2,
DET3,--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------, GICNLJ] LISTThe last LIST record is repeated for each J-value (there will be NJS such LIST records). A new
CONT (l) record will be given which NJS LIST records will follow. Note that if NX=2 then thequantities AF1, ---BF2 will not be given in the first LIST record. Also, if LI≠7 then certain of theparameters for each level may be set to zero, i.e., the fields for parameters not given (depending onLI) will be set to zero.
The format has no provision for giving Adler-Adler parameters for the scattering cross section.
The latter is obtained by subtracting the capture and fission cross sections from the total.
Although the format allows separation of the resonance parameters into J-subsets, no use is madeof J in the A-A formalism. There is no analog to the resonance-resonance interference term of the
MLBW formalism. Such interference is represented implicitly by the asymmetric terms in the fission
and capture cross sections.
2.2.1.4. (LRU=1, LRF=5) no longer available
2.2.1.5. (deleted)
2.2.1.6. (LRU=1, LRF=6) no longer available
2.2.1.7 R-Matrix Limited format (LRU=1,LRF=7)
In R-matrix scattering theory, a channel is defined by the two particles inhabiting that channel
and by the quantum numbers for the combination. The two particles are hereafter referred to as aparticle-pair (PP), and are defined by their properties: neutron (or other particle) plus target nuclide(in ground or excited state), with individual identifiers such as mass, spin, parity, and charge. The
additional quantum numbers defining the channel include orbital angular momentum l, channel spins and associated parity, and total spin and parity J π .
NOTE: This format is NOT restricted to one neutron (entrance) channel and two exit channels.
There may be several entrance channels and a multitude of exit channels. Charged-particle exit
channels are not excluded.

2.10

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The term “spin group” may be used to define the set of resonances with the same channels andquantum numbers. For any given spin group, only total spin and parity are constant; there may be
several entrance channels and/or several reaction channels (and, hence, several values of l or s, etc.)
contributing to the spin group.
The “R-Matrix Limited” (RML) format was designed to accommodate the features of R-Matrix
theory as implemented in analyses codes being used for current evaluations. In this format, relevant
parameters appear only once. Particle-pairs are given first: the masses, spins and parities, andcharges for the two particles are specified, as well as the Q-value and the MT value (which defines
whether this particle-pair represents elastic scattering, fission, inelastic, capture, etc.). Two particlepairs will always be present: gamma + compound nucleus, and neutron + target nucleus in groundstate. Other particle-pairs are included as needed.
The list of resonance parameters is ordered by J π, which (as stated above) is the only
conserved quantity for any spin group. For each spin group, the channels are first specified in theorder in which they will occur in the list of resonances. For each channel, the particle-pair number
and the values for l and s are given, along with the channel radii.
2.2.1.7.1 Formats for the basic RML subsection
Additional quantities are defined (or, in some cases, re-defined):
KRM Flag to specify which formulae for the R-matrix are to be used. KRM = 1 for singlelevel Breit-Wigner, KRM = 2 for multilevel Breit-Wigner, KRM = 3 for Reich
Moore, KRM = 4 for full R-matrix. (Others may be added at a later date.)
KRL Flag is zero for non-relativistic kinematics, 1 for relativistic.
NJS Number of values of J π to be included.
NPP Total number of particle-pairs.
IASpin (and parity, if non-zero) of one particle in the pair (the neutron or projectile, if
this is an incident channel).
IB
Spin of the other particle in the pair (target nuclide, if this is an incident channel). IB
is set to zero and ignored if the first particle is a photon.
PA
Parity for first particle in the pair, used only in the case where IA is zero and theparity is negative. (Value = +1.0 if positive, -1.0 if negative.)
PB
Parity for second particle, used if IB= 0 and parity is negative.
MA Mass of first particle in the pair (in units of neutron mass).
MB Mass of second particle (in units of neutron mass).
ZA
Charge of first particle.
ZB
Charge of second particle.
QI
Q-value for this particle-pair. (See Sect. 3.3.2 for details)
PNT Flag is 1 if penetrability is to be calculated, -1 if not (default depends on number;
MT=108 implies PNT = -1, others are generally PNT = +1)
SHF Flag is 1 if shift factor is to be calculated, -1 if not (default = not)MT Reaction type associated with this particle-pair; see Appendix B.
AJ
Floating point value of J (spin); sign indicates parity.
April 2001

2.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

PJ
NCH
IPP
L
SCH
BND
APE

Parity (used only if AJ = 0.0).
Number of channels for the given J π.
Particle-pair number for this channel (written as floating-point number).
Orbital angular momentum (floating-point value).
Channel spin (floating-point value).
Boundary condition for this channel (needed when SHF=+1)
Effective channel radius (scattering radius), used for calculation of phase shift only.
Units are 10-12 cm.
APT True channel radius (scattering radius), used for calculation of penetrability and shift
factors. Units are 10-12 cm.
KBK Non-zero if background R-matrix exists; sees Subsect. 2.2.1.7.2. (Often set to 0.)
KPS Non-zero if non-hard-sphere phase shift are to be specified. (Often set to 0.)
NRS Number of resonances for the given J π.
NX
Number of lines required for all resonances for the given J π, assuming eachresonance starts on a new line; equal to (NCH/6+1)*NRS. If there are no resonances
for a spin group, then NX = 1.
ER
Resonance energy in eV.
IFG Flag is 0 if GAM is channel width in eV, 1 if reduced-width amplitude in eV1/2.
GAM Channel width in eV or reduced-width amplitude in eV1/2.

NOTE: For IFG = 0, the input quantity GAM is the width at the energy of the resonance; reduced
width amplitudes are calculated from Eq. (7) of D.1.7, with E set to Eλ. (For negative-energy
dummy resonances, the convention is that the input quantity is the width evaluated at the absolutevalue of the resonance energy.) In all cases, if the value GAM given in File 2 for the partial width isnegative, the standard convention is assumed: the negative sign is to be associated with the reduced
width amplitude γλc rather than with Γλc (since Γλc is always a positive quantity). More specifically,Γλc = |GAM| and γ λc = sign (GAM)× GAM / 2 P , with P evaluated at the energy of the resonance.
If IFG =1, the input quantity is the reduced width amplitude γ λc .

2.12April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Formats are as follows:[MAT,2,151/

0.0,

0.0,

IFG,

KRM,

NJS,

KRL
CONT

]

(The following record provides all particle-pair descriptions. For KRM=1,2, or 3, the first particlepare is the gamma plus compound nucleus pair.)[MAT,2,151/

0.0,
0.0,
NPP,
0,
12*NPP,
2*NPP/
MA1,
MB1,
ZA1,
ZB1,
IA1,
IB1,
Q1 ,
PNT1, SHF1, MT1,
PA1,
PB1,
MA2,
MB2,
ZA2,
ZB2,
IA2,
IB1,
Q2 ,
PNT2, SHF2, MT2,
PA2,
PB1,
------------------------------------------MANPP, MBNPP, ZANPP, ZBNPP, IANPP,
IBNPP,QNPP,
PNTNPP, SHFNPP, MTNPP, PANPP,PBNPP ] LIST

The following record provides the channel descriptions for one spin group.)[Mat,2,151/

AJ,
PJ,
KBK,
KPS,
6*NCH,
NCH/
IPP1, L1,
SCH1, BND1, APE1,
APT1,
IPP2, L2,
SCH2, BND2, APE2,APT2,----------------------------------------------IPPNCH, LNCH,SCHNCH, BNDNCH, APENCH,APTNCH] LIST(The following record gives the values for resonance energy and widths for each resonance in thisspin group.)[Mat,2,151/

0.0,
0.0,
0,
NRS,
6*NX,
NX/
GAM1,1, GAM2,1
GAM3,1,
GAM4,1, GAM5,1,
ER1,
GAM6,1, GAMNCH,1,
ER2,
GAM1,2, GAM2,2, GAM3,2,
GAM4,2, GAM5,2,
GAM6,2, …,
GAMNCH,2,----------------------------------------------ERNRS, GAM1,NRS,GAM2,NRS, GAM3,NRS,
GAM4,NRS, GAM5,NRS,
GAM6,NRS,…,GAMNCH,NRS] LIST(If the number of resonances is zero for a spin group, then NRS = 0 but NX =1 in this record.)
Other records may be included here, as described below in Sect. 2.2.1.7.2. If KBK is greater thanzero, a “background R-matrix” is given. If KPS is greater than zero, tabulated values exist for phaseshifts. If KBK = 0 and KPS = 0, no additional records are needed.
The above records, beginning with “channel descriptions,” are repeated until each of the NJS J π spingroups has been fully specified.

April 2001

2.13

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.2.1.7.2 Formats for optional extensions to the RML
The formats described in the previous section are sufficient for most evaluations currently (2003)
available (using KRM = 3, KBK = 0, and KPS = 0 ). For the sake of generality, and toaccommodate expected future developments in R-matrix analysis codes, additional capabilities areincluded in the RML format.
2.2.1.7.2.1 Different R-Matrix formulations (KRM = 1,2,4)
Equations given in Appendix D.1.7 are relevant to the Reich-Moore approximation to R-Matrix
theory. The format, however, can also be used for single-level Breit-Wigner (KRM = 1), multilevel
Breit-Wigner (KRM = 2), R-Matrix without approximations (KRM = 4). Equations for KRM = 1 or
2 will be written up if/when the need arises. Equations for KRM = 4 are identical to those given in
Appendix D.1.7 with the elimination of the imaginary term in the denominator of Eq. (6), and theinclusion of each gamma-channel on a equal basis with all other channels.
2.2.1.7.2.2 Background R-matrix (KBK > 0):
As described in Appendix D (D.1.7.7), a background R-Matrix can be defined in a variety ofdifferent methods.
For KBK = 0, Option 0 is used everywhere (that is, for all channels for this spin group) for the
background R-Matrix. No additional formats are required and no additional records need to be
written; the dummy resonances are included along with the physical resonances in the list record
described above.
For KBK > 0, one LIST record (and two TAB1 records, for tabulated values) is included for eachchannel of the current spin group, a total of NCH records. The particular option to be used for thechannel is identified by parameter LBK. The formats for the four options are as follows:
Option 0. Dummy resonances (LBK = 0)
No additional information is conveyed in this record, other than LBK = 0. No terms are added to theR-matrix for this channel.
[Mat,2,151/ 0.0,
0.0,

0.0,
0.0,

0,
0.0,

0,
0.0,

LBK,
0.0,

1/
0.0 ] LIST

Option 1. Tabulated complex function of energy (LBK = 1)
Notation:
RBR
RBI

2.14

Value of real part of tabulated function
Value of imaginary part of tabulated function

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures[Mat,2,151/ 0.0,
0.0,[Mat,2,151/ 0.0,
[Mat,2,151/ 0.0,

0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,

0,
0.0,
0,
0,

0,
0.0,
0,
0,

LBK,
0.0,
NR,
NR,

1/
0.0] LIST
NP/ Eint / RBR(E) / TAB1
NP/ Eint / RBR(E) / TAB1

(Recall that NR and NP are parameters, which define the interpolation scheme for TAB1 records, as
defined in Section 0.7.7. Energy values given by Eint are in units of eV.)
Option 2. SAMMY’s logarithmic parameterization (LBK = 2)
Notion (See Eq. (47) of Sect. D.1.7.7 for meanings of these quantities):
R0
R1

R com ,cR lin ,cS0
S1

s com ,cs lin ,cR2EU

R q ,cE cup

ED

E cdown[Mat,2,151/

ED,
R0,

EU,
R1,

0,
R2,

0,
S0,

LBK,
S1,

1/
0.0] LIST

Option 3. Fröhner’s parameterization (LBK = 3)
Notion (See Eqs. (48 and 49) Sect. D.1.7.7 for meanings of these quantities):
R0
GA

Rc
Γγ

S0

s

EU

E cup

ED

E cdown[Mat,2,151/

ED,
R0,

EU,
SO

0,
GA,

0,
0.0,

LBK,
0.0,

1/
0.0] LIST

2.2.1.7.2.3 Tabulated phase shifts (KPS = 1)
When phase shifts are calculated externally (from optical model potentials, for example), rather
than generated from the usual hard-sphere phase shift formulae, then the phase shifts must bepresented in tabular form.
If parameter KPS is equal to 0, all phase shifts are calculated from the hard-sphere phase shift
formulae (see Table D.1.7.1 for non-Coulomb, Sect. D.1.7.2 for Coulomb hard-sphere phase shifts).
For KPS >0, one LIST record (and two TAB1 records, for tabulated values) is included for eachchannel of the current spin group, a total of NCH records. The particular option to be used for thechannel is identified by parameter LPS. The formats for the two options are as follows:

Option 0. Hard-sphere phase shifts (LPS = 0)
April 2001

2.15

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

No additional information is conveyed in this record, other than LPS = 0.
[Mat,2,151/

0.0,
0.0,

0.0,
0.0,

0,
0.0,

0,
0.0,

LPS,
0.0,

1/
0.0] LIST

Option 1. Phase shift is a tabulated complex function of energy (LPS = 1)
Notation:
PSR
PSI

Value of real part of tabulated phase shift
Value of imaginary part of tabulated phase shift[Mat,2,151/ 0.0,
0.0,[Mat,2,151/ 0.0,
0.0,

0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,

0,
0.0,
0,
0,

0,
0.0,
0,
0,

LPS,
0.0,
NR,
NR,

1/
0.0] LIST
NP/ Eint / PSR (E) / TAB1
NP/ Eint / PSR (E) / TAB1

(Recall that NR and NP are parameters, which define the interpolation scheme for TAB1 records, as
defined in Sect. 0.7.7. Energy values given by Eint are in units of eV.)2.3. Unresolved Resonance Parameters (LRU=2)
2.3.1. Formats
Only the SLBW formalism for unresolved resonance parameters is allowed (see Appendix D for
pertinent formulae). However, several options are available for specifying the energy-dependence ofthe parameters, designated by the flag LRF. Since unresolved resonance parameters are averages ofresolved resonance parameters over energy, they are constant with respect to energy throughout theenergy-averaging interval. However, they are allowed to vary from interval to interval, and it is thisenergy-dependence, which is referred to above and in the following paragraphs.
The parameters depend on both l (neutron orbital angular momentum) and J (total angularmomentum). Each width is distributed according to a chi-squared distribution with a certain numberof degrees of freedom. This number may be different for neutron and fission widths and for
different (l,J) channels.
The following quantities are defined for use in specifying unresolved resonance parameters(LRU=2):
SPI
AP
LSSF

2.16

Spin of the target nucleus, I.
Scattering radius in units of 10-12 cm. No channel quantum number dependence
is permitted by the format.
Flag governing the interpretation of the File 3 cross sections.
LSSF=0, File 3 contains partial "background" cross sections, to be added tothe average unresolved cross sections calculated from the parameters inFile 2.
LSSF=1, File 3 contains the entire dilute cross section for the unresolved
resonance region. File 2 is to be used solely for the calculation of theself-shielding factors, as discussed in Section 2.4.21.

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

NE
NLS
ESi
L
AWRI
NJS
AJ
D
AMUX
AMUN
AMUG
AMUF
MUF
INT
GN0
GG
GF
GX

Number of energy points at which energy-dependent widths are tabulated.
(NE≤250).
Number of l-values (NLS≤3).
Energy of the ith point used to tabulate energy-dependent widths.
Value of l.
Ratio of the mass of a particular isotope to that of the neutron.
Number of J-states for a particular l-state. (NJS≤6).
Floating-point value of J (the spin, or total angular momentum of the set ofparameters).
Average level spacing for resonances with spin J. (D may be energy dependent
if LRF=2).
Number of degrees of freedom used in the competitive width distribution.
(Assuming it is inelastic, 1.0≤AMUX≤2.0, determined by whether the spin of
the first excited state is zero or not.)5
Number of degrees of freedom in the neutron width distribution.
(1.0≤AMUN≤2.0)
Number of degrees of freedom in the radiation width distribution. (At present
AMUG = 0.0. This implies a constant value of Γγ.)
Number of degrees of freedom in the fission width distribution.
(1.0≤AMUF≤4.0)
Integer value of the number of degrees of freedom for fission widths.
(1≤MUF≤4)
Interpolation scheme to be used for interpolating between the cross sections
obtained from average resonance parameters. Parameter interpolation is
discussed in the Procedures Section 2.4.2.
Average reduced neutron width. It may be energy-dependent if LRF=2.
Average radiation width. It may be energy-dependent if LRF=2.
Average fission width. It may be energy-dependent if LRF=1 or 2.
Average competitive reaction width, given only when LRF=2, in which case it
may be energy-dependent.

The structure of a subsection6 depends on whether LRF=1 or LRF=2. If LRF=1, only the fission
width is given as a function of energy. If LRF=1 and the fission width is not given (indicated by
LFW=0), then the simplest form of a subsection results. If LRF=2, energy-dependent values may be
given for the level density, competitive width, reduced neutron width, radiation width, and fission
width. Three sample formats are shown below (all LRU=2).
A. LFW=0 (fission widths not given),
LRF=1 (all parameters are energy-independent).
The structure of a subsection is:[MAT, 2,151/ SPI,
[MAT, 2,151/ AWRI,
D1 ,
5
6

AP, LSSF,
0.0,
L,
AJ1, AMUN1,0,
NLS,0] CONT0, 6*NJS, NJS/
GN01,
GG1, 0.0,

See Appendix D. Section D.2.2.6.
The structure of a section was defined previously, and covers both resolved resonance and unresolved resonancesubsections.

April 2001

2.17

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D2 ,AJ2, AMUN2, GN02,
GG2, 0.0,-------------------------------------DNJS, AJNJS, AMUNNJS, GN0NJS, GGNJS, 0.0] LIST

The LIST record is repeated until data for all l-values have been specified. In this example,
AMUG is assumed to be zero, and there is no competitive width.
B. LFW=1 (fission widths given),
LRF=1 (only fission widths are energy-dependent; the rest are energy-independent).
The structure of a subsection is:[MAT, 2,151/

SPI, AP, LSSF,
0,
NE, NLS] CONT
ES3, -----------ES1, ES2,-------------------------ESNE] LIST
[MAT, 2,151/ AWRI, 0.0,
L,
0, NJS,
0] CONT[MAT, 2,151/ 0.0, 0.0,
L, MUF, NE+6,
0/
D, AJ, AMUN, GN0, GG, 0.0,
GF1, GF2, GF3,----------------------------------------- GFNE] LIST

2.18

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The last LIST record is repeated for each J-value (there will be NJS such LIST records). A new
CONT(l) record will then be given which will be followed by its NJS LIST records until data for all
l-values have been specified (there will be NLS sets of data).
In the above section, no provision was made for INT, and interpolation is assumed to be lin-lin.
AMUG is assumed to be zero, AMUF equals MUF, and there is no competitive width.
C. LFW=0 or 1 (does not depend on LFW).
LRF=2 (all energy-dependent parameters).
The structure of a subsection is:[MAT, 2,151/ SPI, AP, LSSF,0,NLS,0] CONT[MAT, 2,151/ AWRI, 0.0,
L,
0,
NJS,
0] CONT[MAT, 2,151/
AJ, 0.0, INT,
0,(6*NE)+6,
NE/
0.0, 0.0, AMUX, AMUN,
AMUG, AMUF,
ES1,
D1, GX1, GN01,
GG1, GF1,
ES2,
D2, GX2, GN02,
GG2, GF2,----------------------------ESNE, DNE, GXNE, GN0NE,
GGNE, GFNE] LIST

The LIST record is repeated until all the NJS J-values have been specified for a given l-value. A
new CONT(l) record is then given, and all data for each J-value for that l-value are given. The
structure is repeated until all l-values have been specified. This example permits the specification of
all four degrees of freedom.

April 2001

2.19

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.4. Procedures for the Resolved and Unresolved Resonance Regions
CONTENTS OF THIS SECTION
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.4.102.4.11
2.4.122.4.132.4.142.4.152.4.162.4.172.4.182.4.192.4.202.4.212.4.222.4.232.4.24Abbreviations
Interpolation in the Unresolved Resonance Region
Unresolved Resonances in the Resolved Resonance Range
Energy Range Boundary Problems
Numerical Integration Procedures in the Unresolved Resonance Region
Doppler-Broadening of File 3 Background Cross Sections
Assignment of Unknown J-values
Equivalent Single-Level Representations
Use of the Reich-Moore Formalism
Competitive Width in the Resonance Region
Negative Cross Sections in the Resolved Resonance Region
Negative Cross Sections in the Unresolved Resonance Region
Use of Two Nuclear Radii
The Multilevel Adler-Gauss Formula for MLBW
Notes on the Adler Formalism
Multilevel Versus Single-level Formalisms in the Resolved and Unresolved
Resonance Regions
Preferred Formalisms for Evaluating Data
Computer Time for Generating MLBW Cross Sections
Amplitude-Squared Form of the MLBW Formulas
Degrees of Freedom for Unresolved Resonance Parameters
Procedures for the Unresolved Resonance Region
Procedures for Computing Angular Distributions in the Resolved Resonance
Range
Completeness and Convergence of Channel Sums
Channel Spin and Other Considerations

2.4.1. Abbreviations
UR(R)
RR(R)
RRP
URP
SLBW
MLBW
MLAG
UCS

2.20

unresolved resonance (region)
resolved resonance (region)
resolved resonance parameter(s)unresolved resonance parameter(s)single-level Breit-Wigner
multi-level Breit-Wigner
multi-level Adler-Gauss
unresolved cross section(s)April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.4.2. Interpolation in the Unresolved Resonance Region (URR)
For energy-dependent formats (LRF=2, or LRF=1 with LFW=1), the recommended procedure is
to interpolate on the cross sections derived from the unresolved resonance parameters (URP). This isa change from the ENDF/B-III and IV procedure, which was to interpolate on the parameters. Theenergy grid should be fine enough so that the cross sections at intermediate energy values can becomputed with sufficient accuracy using this procedure. Normally, three to ten points per decade
will be required to obtain reasonable accuracy. Some evaluations prepared for earlier versions of
ENDF/B do not meet these standards. In such cases, if two adjacent grid points differ by more than afactor of three, the processing code should add additional intermediate energy points at a spacing ofapproximately ten-per-decade and compute the cross sections at the intermediate points usingparameter interpolation. Additional cross sections can then be obtained by cross section
interpolation in the normal way.
For many isotopes, there is not sufficient information for a full energy-dependent evaluation. In
these cases, the evaluator may provide a single set of unresolved resonance parameters based on
systematics or extrapolation from the resolved range (see LRF=1, LFW=0). Such a set implies adefinite energy-dependence of the unresolved cross sections due to the slowly-varying wave number,
penetrability, and phase shift factors in the SLBW formulas. It is not correct to calculate crosssections at the ends of the URR, and then to compute intermediate cross sections by cross section
interpolation. Instead, the processing code should generate a set of intermediate energies using a
spacing of approximately ten-per-decade and then compute the cross sections on this grid using thesingle set of parameters given in the file. Additional intermediate values are then obtained by linear
cross section interpolation as in the energy-dependent case.
It is recommended that evaluators provide the URP's on a mesh dense enough that the difference
in results of interpolating on either the parameters or the cross sections be small. A 1% maximum
difference would be ideal, but 5% is probably quite acceptable.
Finally, even if the evaluator provides a dense mesh, the user may end up with different numbers
than the evaluator "intended". This is particularly true when genuine structure exists in the crosssection and the user chooses different multigroup breakpoints than those in the evaluation. There is
no solution to this problem, but the dense mesh procedure minimizes the importance of thediscrepancy.
In order to permit the user to determine what "error" he is incurring, it is recommended that
evaluators state in the documentation what dilute, unbroadened average cross sections they intended
to represent by the parameters in File 2. Note that the self-shielding factor option specified by theflag LSSF (Sections 2.3.1 and 2.4.21) greatly reduces the impact of this interpolation ambiguity.
2.4.3. Unresolved Resonances in the Resolved Resonance Range
As discussed in section 2.4.4, the boundary between the resolved and unresolved resonanceregions should be chosen to make the statistical assumptions used in the URR valid. This createsproblems in evaluating the resonance parameters for the RRR.
Problem l: At the upper end of the resolved range, the smaller resonances will begin to be
missed. An equivalent contribution could be added to the background in File 3. This contribution
will not be self-shielded by the processing codes, so it cannot be allowed to become "significant". A
better procedure is to supply fictitious resolved parameters, based on the statistics of the measured
ones, checking that the average cross section agrees with whatever poor-resolution data are
available.

April 2001

2.21

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

If both procedures are employed, care should be taken not to distort the statistics of the underlying
parameter distributions.
Problem 2: Because d-wave resonances are narrower than p-waves, which are narrower thans-waves, everything else being equal, the point at which p-waves will be instrumentally unresolved
can be expected to be lower in energy than for s-waves, and lower still for d-waves. Thus theunresolved region for p-waves will usually overlap the resolved region for s-waves, and similarly ford-waves. Current procedure does not permit representing this effect explicitly - one cutoff-point
must serve for all l-values.
The remedies are the same as above, either putting known or estimated resonances into thebackground in the URR, or putting fictitious estimated resonances into the RRR. The latter ispreferred because narrow resonances tend to self-shield more than broad ones, hence the error
incurred by treating them as unshielded File 3 background contributions is potentially significant.
2.4.4. Energy Range Boundary Problems
There may be as many as four different kinds of boundaries under current procedures which
permit multiple RRR's:
1. between a low-energy File 3 representation (range 1) and EL for the RRR (range 2),
2. between successive RR ranges,
3. between the highest RRR and the URR,
4. between EH for the URR and the high-energy File 3 representation.
Discontinuities can be expected at each boundary. At 1, a discontinuity will occur if range 1 andrange 2 are not consistently Doppler-broadened. In general, only an identical kernel-broadening
treatment will produce continuity, i.e., only if the range-1 cross sections are broadened from thetemperature at which they were measured, and range-2 is broadened from absolute zero. A kernel
treatment of range 1, or no broadening at all, will be discontinuous with a Ψ-χ treatment of range 2.
This effect is not expected to be serious at normal reactor temperatures and presumably, the CTR
and weapons communities are cognizant of the Doppler problem. In view of these problems, adouble energy point will not usually produce exact continuity in the complete cross section, (file 2 +file 3), unless evaluator and user employ identical methods throughout.
Discontinuities will occur between successive RRR's, unless the evaluator takes pains to adjustthe "outside" resonances for each RRR to produce continuity at absolute zero. If the unbroadenedcross sections in two successive RRR's are broadened separately, the discontinuity will be preserved,
and possibly enhanced. These discontinuities are not believed to be technologically significant.
A discontinuity at #3 is unavoidable, because the basic representation has changed. However if
the RRR cross sections are group-averaged or otherwise smoothed, the discontinuity7 should bereasonably small. A discontinuity greater than 10 or 15% obtained with a suitable averaging interval
indicates that the evaluator might want to reconsider his parameterization of the poor-resolution
data. Some materials have large genuine fluctuations in the URR, and for these the 10-15% figure is
not applicable. A double energy point will normally occur at this boundary, but will not eliminate
the discontinuity.

7

This refers to the discontinuity between the average cross section in the RRR, and the dilute (unshielded) pointwisecross section in the URR, which has been generated from the URR parameters. If the self-shielding factor option has
been chosen (LSSF=1, Section 2.3.1), File 3 will contain the entire dilute cross section and no File 2 unresolved
region calculation will be needed to ascertain the discontinuity.

2.22

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Discontinuity at #4 should be small, since both the URR and the high-energy range represent
rather smooth cross sections, and the opportunity for error ought to be small. Anything over 5% or
so should be viewed with suspicion.
The upper and lower energy limits of any energy range indicate the energy range of validity of
the given parameters for calculating cross sections. Outside this energy range the cross sections
must be obtained from the parameters given in another energy range and/or from data in file 3.
The lower energy limit of the URR should be chosen to make the statistical assumptions used inthis range valid. The basic requirement is that there be "many" resonances in an energy-averaging
interval, and that the energy-averaging interval be narrow with respect to slowly-varying functionsof E such as wave number and penetrability. As an example, assume that the energy-averaging
interval can extend 10% above and below the energy point, that the average resonance spacing is 1
eV, and that "many" is 100. Then the lowest reasonable energy for the URR would be about 500
eV, as given by 0.2 E=100×1. Some implications of this choice for the RRR-URR boundary werediscussed in Section 2.4.3.
It is sometimes necessary to give parameters whose energies lie outside a specified energy range
in order to compute the cross section for neutron energies that are within the energy range. For
example, the inclusion of bound levels may be required to match the cross sections at low energies,
and resonances will often be needed above EH to compensate the opposite, positive, bias at the highenergy end.
For materials that contain more than one isotope, it is recommended that the lower energy limitof the resolved resonance region be the same for all isotopes. If resolved and/or unresolved
resonance parameters are given for only some of the naturally occurring isotopes, then AP should begiven for the others.
If more than one energy range is used, the ranges must be contiguous and not overlap.
Overlapping of the resolved and unresolved ranges is not allowed for any one isotope, but it canoccur in an evaluation for an element or other mixture of different isotopes. In fact, it is difficult to
avoid since the average resonance spacing varies widely between even-even and even-odd isotopes.
Such evaluations are difficult to correctly self-shield. A kernel broadening code must first subtract
the infinitely-dilute unresolved cross section, broaden the pointwise remainder, then add back theunresolved component. A multigroup averaging code that uses pointwise cross sections must first
subtract the infinitely-dilute unresolved cross section to find the pointwise remainder, and then add
back a self-shielded unresolved cross section computed for a background cross section which
includes a contribution from the pointwise remainder.
2.4.5. Numerical Integration Procedures in the URR
The evaluation of effective cross sections in the URR can involve Doppler effects,
flux-depression, and resonance-overlap as well as the statistical distributions of the underlying
resonance parameters for a mixture of materials.
The previous ENDF/B recommendation for doing the complicated multi-dimensional
integrations was the Greebler-Hutchins scheme, Reference 1, basically a trapezoidal integration. For
essentially the same computing effort, a more sophisticated weighted-ordinate method can be used
and it has been shown that the scheme in MC2-II, Reference 2, produces results differing by up to
several percent from G-H. The MC2-II subroutine8, is the recommended procedure.

8This subroutine was provided by H. Henryson, II (ANL).

April 2001

2.23

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The M. Beer [Ref.3], analytical method has also been suggested, and is quite elegant, but
unfortunately will not treat the general heterogeneous case.
2.4.6. Doppler-Broadening of File 3 Background Cross Sections
1. In principle, the contribution to each cross section from File 3 should be Doppler-broadened, but
in practice, many codes ignore it. It is therefore recommended that the evaluator keep file 3
contributions in the RRR and URR small enough and/or smooth enough so that omission of
Doppler-broadening does not "significantly" alter combined File 2 plus File 3 results up to 3000
K. Unfortunately, the diversity of applications of the data in ENDF/B makes the word
"significantly" impossible to define.
2. A possible source of structured File 3 data is the representation of multilevel or MLBW crosssections in the SLBW format, the difference being put into File 3. This difference is a series ofresidual interference blips and dips, which may affect the between-resonance valleys andpossibly the transmission in thick regions or absorption rates in lumped poisons, shields,blankets, etc. Users of the SLBW formalism should consider estimating these effects for
significant regions.
A possible remedy is available in the Multilevel Adler-Gauss
form of MLBW. (See Section 2.4.14). If the resonance-resonance interference term in MLBW is
expanded in partial fractions, it becomes a single sum of symmetric and asymmetric SLBW-type
terms. Two coefficients occur which require a single sum over all resonances for each resonance,
but these sums are weakly energy dependent and lend themselves to approximations that could
greatly facilitate the use of ψ- and χ-functions with MLBW.
3. An "in-principle" correct method for constructing resonance cross sections is:a.) Use a Solbrig kernel [Ref.12] to broaden File 2 to the temperature of File 3, since the latter
may be based on room-temperature or other non-zero 0K data.
b.) Add File 2 and File 3.
c.) Sollbrig-broaden the result to operating temperature.
Using a Gaussian kernel instead of Sollbrig incurs a small error at low energies, unless it ismisused, in which case the error can be large. Using Ψ- and χ-functions introduces further
errors. In fact, the Sollbrig kernel already approximates the true motion of the target molecules
by a free-gas law, but anything more accurate is quite difficult to handle.
4. Some heavy element evaluations use a File 3 representation below the resolved resonanceregion. Often these cross sections are room-temperature values, so that if they are laterbroadened assuming they are zero-degrees Kelvin, they get broadened twice.
A simple way to reduce the impact of this procedure without altering the representation of thedata is to calculate the cross sections from the resonance parameters, broadened to room
temperature, and carry the calculation down through the low-energy region. Subtract thesebroadened values from the file 3 values and leave only the difference in file 3. Then extend thelower boundary of the resonance region to the bottom of the file. Now the "double-broadening"problem affects only the (small) residual file 3 and not the entire cross section.
Note that subtracting off a zero degree resonance contribution would accomplish nothing.

2.24

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.4.7. Assignment of Unknown J-values
In all multilevel resonance formalisms except Adler-Adler, the J-value determines which
resonances interfere with each other. Usually, J is known only for a few resonances, and measurers
report 2gΓn for the others. If this number is assumed to be Γn, one incurs an error of uncertain
magnitude, depending on how different
2 J +12 ( 2 I + 1)
is from l/2, how large Γn is relative to the other partial widths, and how important resonanceresonance interference is.
It is recommended that evaluators assign J-values to each resonance, in proportion to the level
density factor 2J+l. To reduce the amount of interference, the J-values of strong neighboring
resonances, which would produce the largest interference effects, can be chosen from different
families.
In the past, some evaluations have put J=I, the target nucleus spin, for resonances with unknown
J-values. This corresponds to putting g=1/2, rather than its true value. Mixing of the J=I resonanceswith the physically correct I±1/2 families can result in negative scattering cross sections, or
distortions of the potential scattering term, depending on what formalism is used and how it isevaluated. For this reason, such J=I resonances must not be used.
In the amplitude-squared form of the MLBW scattering cross section,g=

σ nn = ∑ g J AlsJ + AlsJ
lsJ

pot

resonance

2

(2.1)

the use of J=I resonances will destroy the equivalence between this form and the "squared" form of
MLBW in Appendix D since the sum on lsJ does not go over physically-correct values.
An exception to the prohibition against J=I is the case where no J-values are known, since if allresonances are assigned J=I, the MLBW scattering cross section will be non-negative.
2.4.8. Equivalent Single-Level Representations
The single-level Breit-Wigner formalism is incorporated into the basic structure of manyengineering codes used for reactor design. Its use is so widespread, that despite any shortcomings in
the calculational procedures, such codes must be supplied with SLBW parameters. For ENDF/B
evaluations employing other representations, one requires an "equivalent" set of SLBW parameters.
This is not to minimize the importance of using improved methods, but such improved methods do
not eliminate the need for SLBW parameters in reactor design. For example, the Adler formalism
provides a multilevel, multichannel fission cross section in pseudo-SLBW format, permitting
ψ,χ-broadening. This is very useful, but not to a code that does not recognize asymmetric fission or
capture.
The following equivalences are recommended:
1. MLBW. Use the parameters "as is".
2. Reich-Moore. Use the parameters "as is", except that the absolute values of the partial fission
widths are added together to form Γf. (Alternatively, convert Reich-Moore to Adler-Adler, anduse the equivalence for that formalism).
3. Adler-Adler. Reasonable success in converting A-A parameters for 241Pu and 233U was obtainedusing a method described in Reference 4.

April 2001

2.25

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.4.9. Use of the Reich-Moore Formalism
If the evaluation of fissionable, low energy, s-wave-only, materials is carried out with aReich-Moore formalism, then the parameters may be transformed to the Adler-Adler representation.
R-M has some advantages in evaluating data, mainly that it uses resonance spins, is more closely
tied to familiar resonance parameters, and is more "physical", but the Adler format is moreconvenient for the user since it permits ψ- and χ-functions for Doppler broadening.
The computer code POLLA [Ref.5], as well as some others, will convert a set of Reich-Moore
multilevel s-wave resonance parameters to Adler format. If the conversion causes differences
between the Adler and R-M cross sections which exceed 0.l%, these should be put into File 3, since
it is not the intent of the procedure to in any way alter the original cross sections. Such differences
can possibly be reduced by feeding the POLLA output parameters to a least-squares search code
based on the Adler formalism, and "fitting" the original R-M values.
According to the discussion in BNL-502969, the Reich-Moore code RAMPl, incorporated in
RESEND, sets the shift factor equal to zero. This is correct for s-waves, and should pose no
problem for p- and d-waves, provided that the evaluator has included this shift factor when thecalculation was performed.
2.4.10. Competitive Width in the Resonance Region
2.4.10.1. Resolved Region
Procedures for the Resolved Resonance Region are contained in Section D.3.l of Appendix D.
2.4.10.2. Unresolved Region
Procedures for the Unresolved Resonance Region are contained in Section D.3.2 of Appendix D.
Users are directed to the discussion of the total cross section in Appendix D, Section D.3.3, since, as
pointed out by H. Henryson, II, in connection with MC2 procedures, a possibility for erroneous
calculations exists.
2.4.11. Negative Cross Sections in the Resolved Resonance Region
2.4.11.1. In the SLBW Formalism
Capture and fission use the positive symmetric Breit-Wigner shape and are never negative.
Scattering involves an asymmetric term which goes negative for E < ER and can cause negative
cross sections. A single resonance, or a series of well-separated resonances, will usually not produce
negative cross sections, but when two or more resonances "cooperate", their negative tails can
combine to produce negative values. In nature, the negative tails are compensated by either the
positive tails of lower-lying resonances or multilevel interference effects. However, in evaluateddata files the resonances are usually given only down to "E=0", a quite arbitrary point from thestandpoint of the compound nucleus, so that "negative-energy" resonances are needed to compensate
the negativity bias.

9

M.R. Bhat, BNL-50296 (ENDF l48) ENDF/B Processing Codes for the Resonance Region, June, l97l,

2.26

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Although the negative scattering cross sections themselves can usually be classed as aninconvenience, their effect in distorting the total cross section, which governs neutron penetration,
can be more serious. Perhaps more important is the fact that even when the cross section remains
positive, it is still often too low due to the same effect and this bias again affects the total crosssection and calculated absorption rates. To compensate this bias, the evaluator should put in either aseries of negative energy resonances with reasonable size and spacing ("picket fence", or reflect thepositive-energy ones around E=0) or a few large fictitious ones ("barber poles"), or a compensatingbackground in File 3 (e.g., see Reference 6).
To compensate interior-region negativity requires a multilevel treatment of which MLBW is thesimplest. Although there is no guarantee that MLBW cross sections will be more accurate than
SLBW, they are guaranteed to be non-negative (but see next section) and are generally to bepreferred over SLBW.
A similar bias occurs at the upper end of the resolved resonance range, where it is less noticeable
because it is a positive bias, and most calculations are not as sensitive to this region as they are to thelow-energy end. The remedy is the same - extra resonances above the RRR, or compensation in file
3. The latter remedy requires a negative file 3 contribution, which is physically acceptable, but
produces undesirable side-effects in some processing codes, hence the extra-resonance remedy ispreferred. It is probably safe to say that there is rarely a compelling reason to use the SLBW
formula for the calculation of pointwise scattering cross sections. If one is doing a calculation that issophisticated enough to warrant the use of pointwise cross sections, then a multilevel formalism iscertainly justifiable. If one is merely deriving multigroup cross sections, then the otherapproximations involved justify the use of any reasonable "fix" for the negative scattering, such as
simply setting σS = 0 when it goes negative. Such a procedure should usually be accompanied by acorresponding increase in the total cross section.
2.4.11.2. In the MLBW Formalism
Capture and fission use the SLBW formulas and are positive. Scattering uses a formula, which
can be written as an absolute square and as such is non-negative. The use of J=I resonances (Section
2.4.7) can destroy the correspondence between the absolute-square form and the expanded form
given in Appendix D and result in negative scattering cross sections. Despite its non-negativity,
MLBW still produces biased cross sections at both ends of the RRR unless compensating extra
resonances or File 3 contributions are included above and below. The evaluator should generally
correct for this effect.
2.4.11.3. In the R-matrix, Reich-Moore, and R-function Formalisms
These are again based on an absolute square and cannot be negative. However, they can bebiased and extra resonances, background R-values, or File 3 contributions should be provided. If
conversion of Reich-Moore to Adler format produces negative cross sections, dummy parameters
should be provided to eliminate them.

April 2001

2.27

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.4.11.4. In the Adler Formalism
Although the formulae are derived from an absolute square and are in principle non-negative, inpractice the parameters are chosen to fit measured data, so that the physical and mathematicalconstraints among the parameters, which prevent negative cross sections, are lost, and any of thecross sections can be negative. If the Adler formalism is used for evaluations, negativity should bechecked for. The end-effect bias exists in this formalism also and should be checked for in the
scattering and total cross sections by comparing with experiment.
2.4.12. Negative Cross Sections in the Unresolved Resonance Region
R. Prael, while at ANL, reported a difficulty with SLBW resonance ladders created by VIM fromthe unresolved resonance parameters in Mo (MAT l287), namely that the negative File 3 capture
background sometimes caused negative capture cross sections in the resonance valleys. The
evaluator intended the background to compensate for an excess of capture in the average unresolved
capture cross section, but did not anticipate the problem that would arise when the parameters wereused in a different context. One remedy is to drop out the negative File 3 background and adjust<Γγ> on whatever energy mesh is needed to produce agreement with the dilute poor-resolution data.
The creation of SLBW ladders from average parameters can be expected to produce the samekind of end-effect bias and frequent negative scattering cross sections found in the resolved
resonance region. Again, the scattering cross section per se may not be important, but the biased
total cross section may adversely affect calculated reaction rates.
2.4.l3. Use of Two Nuclear Radii
The current ENDF formats defines two different nuclear radii:a) the scattering radius, AP, andb) the channel radius, a.
The scattering radius is also referred to as "the effective scattering radius" and "the potential
scattering radius". The channel radius is also referred to as "the hard-sphere radius", or "the nuclear
radius". The former is the quantity defined as AP (for a+ or â) in File 2, which must be given even if
no resonance parameters are given. The nuclear radius is defined in Appendix D, Equation (D.0).
The channel radius is a basic quantity in R-matrix theory, where the internal and external
wave-functions are joined and leads to the appearance of hard-sphere phase shifts defined in terms of
it. The necessity to relax the definition and permit two radii can be thought of as a "distant-level
effect", sometimes not explicit in R-matrix discussions.
The original ENDF/B formats made provision for an AM, or "A-minus", although it was always
required that evaluators put AM=0, to signify that it was equal in value to AP. In the current formats,
AM is eliminated, but one can anticipate that more sophisticated evaluation techniques may
eventually force the reinstatement of not only AM, but a more general dependence of the scatteringradius on the channel quantum numbers, especially as higher energies become important.

2.28

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

In theory, the scattering radius depends on all the channel quantum numbers, and in practice it iscommon to find that different optical model parameters are required for different l-values (s, p, d,...)
and for different J-values (p1/2, p3/2, ,,,). This implies that one would require a different scatteringradius for each of these states.
For the special case of s-waves, only two J-values are possible, namely I±1/2, commonly
denoted J+ and J-. This is the origin of the terminology a+ and a-.
Up through ENDF/B-V, the recommended ENDF/B procedure was to use the above equation forthe channel radius in the penetrabilities Pl(ka) and the shift factors Sl(ka), but to use the scatteringradius to calculate the hard-sphere phase shifts φl(ka).
Since the phase-shifts define the potential scattering cross section, the evaluator had the freedom
to fit AP to a measured cross section while still leaving undisturbed those codes that use the A1/3
formula to calculate the channel radius.
For ENDF/B-VI, new parameters NRO and NAPS are available to give the evaluator more
flexibility for the SLBW, MLBW, and RM formalisms, by allowing the evaluator to use AP
everywhere and to make AP energy-dependent (Section 2.1).
The full flexibility of channel-dependent radii is provided for the RML format.
2.4.14. The Multilevel Adler-Gauss Formula for MLBW
Appendix D gives (implicitly) for the MLBW formalism the equations:( E ) ≡ σ n,SLBW(E) ,σ n,MLBWγγ( E ) ≡ σ n,SLBW(E) ,σ n,MLBWff(2.2)
NLS −1MLBW
SLBW( E ) ≡ σ n,n( E ) + Σ σ ln,n,RRI ( E ) ,
σ n,n
l=0

where RRI labels the resonance-resonance-interference term for a given l-value:
NR J r −1
2Γ nr Γ ns [(E − E ′r )(E − E ′s ) + Γ r Γ s / 4]
π .
(2.3)
g
J
Σ
Σ
2
2
2
2
2Σ
k J
r=2 s=1 ⎡ ( E − E ′r ) + ( Γ r / 2 ) ⎤ ⎡ ( E − E ′s ) + ( Γ s / 2) ⎤⎣⎦⎣⎦As most users are aware, this double sum over resonances can eat prodigious amounts ofcomputer time unless handled very tactfully. Thus, for a 200-resonance material, there are ~40,000
cross terms, of which only 20,000 need to be evaluated because the expression is symmetric in r ands.
It has been noted many times in the past that partial fractions can reduce Equation (2.3) to a form
with only a single Breit-Wigner denominator. Most recently, DeSaussure, Olsen, and Perez(Reference 6) have written it compactly as
NR Jπ
Gr Γ r + 2 H r ( E − Er′ )
g
where
∑
J Σ
2
2 ,
2
k J
r=1 ( E − E r′ ) + ( Γ r / 2 )1 NRJ
Γ nr Γ ns ( Γ r + Γ s ),∑2 s =1 ( E ′ − E′ ) 2 + 1 ( Γ + Γ ) 2
r
s
r
s
4
NRJ
Γ nr Γ ns ( Er′ − Es′ ),Hr = ∑12
s =1 ( E ′ − E ′ ) 2 +(Γr + Γs )
r
s
4
Gr =

April 2001

s≠r

(2.4)

s≠r

2.29

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The authors give the special case for I=l=0, but it is valid for any set of quantum numbers. Thus
an existing SLBW code can be converted to MLBW by adding GrΓr to the symmetric part of the
SLBW formula, Γnr2 cos 2φl − 2Γnr (Γr − Γnr ) sin 2 φ l , and 2Hr to the coefficient of (E-E′r) in theasymmetric part, 2Γnr sin 2φ l .
Since Gr and Hr are weakly energy-dependent, via the penetrabilities and shift factors, they lendthemselves to approximations that can sharply reduce computing time compared to the form with the"double" Breit-Wigner denominator. In fact, if the resonances are all treated as s-wave (shifts ofzero, penetrabilities of E ), and the total widths are taken as constant, then Gr/k2 and Hr/k2 become
independent of the neutron energy and consume a negligible amount of computing time so that
MLBW and SLBW become equivalent in that respect.
The amplitude-squared form of MLBW, Section 2.4.19, also reduces computing time.
2.4.l5. Notes on the Adler Formalism
Questions concerning the ENDF/B treatment of the Adler formalism are enumerated below10,
together with recommended procedures for handling them:

1. The resonance energy µ and total half-width v are the same for each reaction for a given
resonance in the Adler formalism, but, for the October l970 version of ENDF-l02, the formulaeon page D-7, and the format descriptions of pages 7.9 and N-l2 permit different values for the
total, fission, and capture cross sections.
This is a misreading of the formalism; the remedy is to constrain the equalities DETN= DEFN=
DECN and DWTN = DWFN = DWCN. The formulas for capture and fission should also have thephases eliminated in Appendix D.
2. The Adler formalism, as applied by the Adlers, breaks the resolved resonance region up into subregions, and each is analyzed separately. This avoids problems with contributions from distantresonances, but requires that the polynomial background be tailored to each sub-region.
However, the ENDF/B formats allow only one resolved resonance energy region, so thisprocedure cannot be used.
If a single set of polynomial background constants is insufficient, additional background can be
put into File 3, point-by-point.
3. The ENDF/B formats formerly permitted incomplete specification of the cross sections. The
allowed values of LI were 5 (total and capture widths); 6 (fission and capture); and 7 (total,
fission, and capture). LI=6 leaves the scattering (and total) undefined and LI=5 is deficient forfissile elements. LI=6 is now restricted to ENDF/A, and LI=5 should be used only for non-fissile
elements.
4. The nomenclature for the G's and H's is not entirely consistent among different authors. The
Adlers use for the total cross section the definitions:
Gt = α cos(2ka)+ β sin(2ka) ;Ht = β cos(2ka)- α sin(2ka) ;10

The following is a condensation and updating of the Appendix in the June, l974, Minutes of the Resonance Region
Subcommittee.

2.30

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

and then the combination:
νGt + (µ – E) Ht .
For the reaction cross sections there are no phases, and they writeνGc + (µ – E) Hc (capture);νGf + (µ – E) Hf (fission);
G and H are properly designated as "symmetrical" and "asymmetrical" parameters. This manualchanges α to Gt and to Ht, viz:
ν [Gt cos(2ka) + Ht sin(2ka)] + (µ – E) [Ht cos(2ka) – Gt sin(2ka)]
These Gt's and Ht's are no longer symmetrical and asymmetrical, but are referred to that way.
The precedent for this nomenclature is probably Reference 7.
DeSaussure and Perez, in their published tables of G and H, incorporate the Adler's constant c
into their definition, but otherwise leave the formalism unchanged.
Users and evaluators should adhere to the definitions in this manual.
5. The flag NX, which tells what reactions have polynomial background coefficients given, should
be tied to LI, so that the widths and backgrounds are given for the same reactions, i.e., use NX=2
with LI=5 (total and capture), and NX=3 with LI=7 (total, capture, and fission). Since no NX is
defined for LI=6 (fission and capture), one is forced to use NX=3 with the background totalcoefficients set equal to zero, but this now occurs only in ENDF/A, if at all.
2.4.16. Multilevel Versus Single-Level Formalisms in the Resolved and Unresolved ResonanceRegions
2.4.16.1. In the Resolved Resonance Region
The SLBW formalism is adequate for resonance treatments that do not require actual pointwise
scattering cross sections, as, e.g., multigroup slowing-down codes. Because of the frequent
occurrence of negative scattering cross sections, when two or more resonance-potential interferenceterms overlap, SLBW should not be used to compute pointwise scattering cross sections. Instead,the MLBW formalism should be used, although MLBW is not a true multilevel formalism, but alimit, which is valid if Γ/D is small.
The Reich-Moore reduced R-matrix formalism is a true multilevel formalism, and isrecommended for low-energy fissionable s-wave evaluations. All of its cross sections are
non-negative, and its only significant drawbacks, apart from the effort required for its application,
are the difficulty of determining a suitable R∞ to represent distant-level effects, and of determining
the parameters of negative-energy resonances.
The Adler form of the Kapur-Peierls formalism is also a true multilevel treatment, but in actual
applications the parameters are determined by fitting data and the theoretical constraints among them
are lost, so that any Adler cross section can be negative.
The simplest true multilevel formalism is the reduced R-function, in which all channels except
elastic scattering have been eliminated. It makes a very adequate evaluation tool for non-fissile
elements up to the threshold for inelastic scattering, since below that the eliminated channels are(usually) simply radiative capture. It can be corrected for distant-level effects by substituting
optical-model phase shifts for the hard-sphere ones which occur in the formalism, and by
April 2001

2.31

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

introducing an appropriate R∞. It can be carried above the inelastic threshold by augmenting it withthe use of SLBW formulas for the reactions other than elastic scattering, since such reactions often
show negligible multilevel effects. For structural and coolant materials, either Reich-Moore or RMatrix Limited can be used. The latter provides more detail in describing competitive reactions, plus
angular distributions, and allows treating resonances with both l>0 and I>0.
Multi-channel multilevel fitting is also feasible for light elements, and permits the simultaneoususe of non-neutron data leading to the same compound nucleus. Due to the complexity of suchcalculations, they may be presented in ENDF/B as file 3 pointwise cross sections, although the
R-Matrix Limited format can handle this case.
2.4.16.2. In the Unresolved Resonance Region
In principle, if the statistical distributions of the resolved resonance parameters are known, any
formalism can be used to construct fictitious cross sections in the unresolved region. At the present
time, only the SLBW formalism is allowed in ENDF/B, for the reason that no significant multilevel
effect can be demonstrated, when SLBW is properly handled.
If resolved region statistics are used without adjustment to poor resolution data, then large
multilevel/single-level differences can result, but there is no simple way to determine which is
better. If both are adjusted to yield the same average cross sections, and for fissile materials, thesame capture-to-fission ratio, then the remaining differences are within the statistical andmeasurement errors inherent in the method. The above comments on multilevel effects in theunresolved resonance region are based on the work of DeSaussure and Perez [Ref.8].
As noted in Section 2.4.l2, the use of SLBW to construct resonance profiles in the unresolved
region will result in the defects associated with this formalism elsewhere, and is not recommended.
This application calls for MLBW or better, and the SLBW scheme should be used only forconstructing average cross sections where the negative scattering effects will combine with the otherapproximations and presumably be "normalized out" somewhere along the line.
2.4.17. Preferred Formalisms for Evaluating Data

Unless there is strong reason to do otherwise, the R-Matrix Limited format (LRF=7) should be
used for reporting results of new evaluations, as it is the most comprehensive of the current formats.
1. Light nuclei: Use multilevel, multichannel R-matrix. Present either as pointwise cross sections infile 3, or as R-matrix parameters using LRF=7.
2. Materials with negligible or moderate multilevel effects, and no multichannel interference:
Reich-Moore or MLBW. These are equivalent in computing time and all require kernel
broadening, although MLBW lends itself to the ψ,χ-approximation discussed in Section 2.4.14.
However, RM and RML provide the angular distribution of elastically-scattered neutrons, which
MLBW does not.
3. Materials with strong multilevel effects, but no multichannel interference: Reich-Moore or RMatrix Limited. The structural materials do not exhibit channel-channel interference, but havelevel-level interference that is too strong for an MLBW treatment.
4. Materials with observable channel-channel interference: Reich-Moore or R-Matrix Limited. In
the past, only low-energy fissionable materials have shown channel-channel interference, andthis is unlikely to change. Reich-Moore evaluations can be converted to Adler format for
presentation in ENDF/B. The reason why Reich-Moore is preferred to Adler-Adler as the basic
2.32

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

evaluation tool is that it has less flexibility and is therefore better able to distinguish between
various grades of experimental data. However, it requires kernel broadening whereas
Adler-Adler uses ψ and χ, making the latter more convenient to broaden. Unfortunately some ofthis convenience is lost in practice because there is no simple equivalence between Adler-Adler
and SLBW (see Section 2.4.8). With modern computers and modern computer codes, the slightadvantage offered by kernel broadening is no longer an important issue.
5. Materials with channel-channel interference and one or more competitive reactions: R-matrix,
using the format LRF=7 to present the parameters.
2.4.18. Computer Time for Generating MLBW Cross Sections
Previous solutions to the problem of evaluating the double-sum form of the MLBW
resonance-resonance interference term in a reasonable amount of time have been to use theamplitude-squared form from which it was derived, and kernel-broaden it, or to optimize thecalculation of inner and outer loop quantities.
A third solution is to use the Multilevel Adler-Gauss formulas discussed in Section 2.4.14 andpossibly approximate the energy-dependence of the Gr- and Hr-coefficients.
The amplitude-squared form of MLBW is discussed in Section 2.4.l9.
2.4.19. Amplitude-Squared Form of the MLBW Formulas
The form of the MLBW scattering cross section given in Appendix D and in Section 2.4.l4, ismathematically identical to the more fundamental "amplitude-squared" form given in Appendix D,
as Equations (5) - (7) of Section D.l.2.
Those equations can be coded in complex Fortran, or broken up into their real and imaginaryparts before coding. The essential point is that they sum the resonances before squaring. This avoids
turning two "linear" sums into one "quadratic" one. If an isotope has 200 resonances, the above
formulas have two sums with 200 terms each, whereas the ENDF form has a sum with 40000 crossterms. A discussion of points to consider in coding the above equations is given in Sections 2.4.23
and 2.4.24.
The main drawback to the above equations is that they do not admit Doppler-broadening with ψand χ-functions, but require kernel methods instead.
2.4.20. Degrees of Freedom for Unresolved Resonance Parameters
A resonance in the system (neutron plus a target of mass A) corresponds to a quasi-stationary
state in the compound nucleus A + 1. Such a resonance can decay in one or more ways, each
described as a channel. These are labeled by the identity of the emitted particle (two-body decay),the spins I and i of the residual nucleus and the emitted particle, and the orbital angular momentum lof the pair. To uniquely specify the channel, two more quantum numbers are needed, since themagnetic quantum numbers can be eliminated for unpolarized particles.

April 2001

2.33

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

It is common to give the channel spin, s, which is the vector sum of I and i, plus J = s + l , since
this facilitates the isolation of the l-dependence of all channel quantities. The important point is thatthe same set of three ingredient angular momenta, I, i, and l, will give rise to a number of different
channels, according to the rules for coupling angular momenta. The resonance will decay into eachof these channels, with a probability that is governed by a real number γαIiJls, the reduced width
amplitude, where α gives the identity of the emitted particle, the state of excitation of the daughter
nucleus, etc. The partial width for the channel is:
ΓαIiJls = 2PαIiJls γ2αIiJls .

The penentrabilities depend only on l, and are given in Appendix D for uncharged particles. For
charged particles, their Coulomb analogs can be found in texts on the subject, and for gamma rays
one uses Γγ rather than γ and P.
If the collection of channel quantum numbers (αIiJls) is denoted by c, then the total width for thelevel is Γ = ΣcΓc. [Σc means a sum over all channels]. The argument from statistical compound
nucleus theory is that the γc's are random variables, normally distributed with zero mean and equalvariance. The population referred to is the set of γc's for a given channel and all the levels (orresonances). It follows that the total width is distributed as a chi-squared distribution with N degrees
of freedom, since this is the statistical consequence of squaring and adding N normal variates. For
N=l, this is the Porter-Thomas distribution. In determining the behavior of any quantity that is going
to be averaged over resonances, it is necessary to know the way in which the widths are distributed,
hence the inclusion of these degrees of freedom in ENDF/B.
1. The neutron width is governed by AMUN, which is specified for a particular l-value. Usually,
only the lowest allowed l-value will be significant in any decay, although the formats would
allow giving both s- and d-wave widths for the same resonance. Since there is only one J-value
for a given resonance, and we label the widths by one l-value, there can be at most two channels
for neutrons (i = 1/2), labeled by the channel spin values s = I±1/2. If I = 0, there is only one
channel, s = i = ½; hence the restriction, 1.0≤AMUN≤ 2.0. AMUN is the quantity µl,J, discussed
in Section D.2.2.2.
Although there is no supporting evidence, it is assumed that the average partial widths for eachchannel spin are equal, and that <Γn> is the sum of two equal average partial widths. In
Appendix D this factor of two is absorbed into the definition of <Γn>, through the use of amultiplicity, which is the number of channel spins, 1 or 2.
2. The competitive width is currently restricted to inelastic scattering, which has the same behavior
as elastic scattering, measured from a different "zero channel energy," hence
1.0 ≤ AMUX ≤ 2.0
Note that one should not set AMUX = 0 out of ignorance of its true value, as suggested inprevious versions of ENDF-l02. This implies a constant from resonance to resonance, since thechi-squared distribution approaches a delta function as N→∞. An inelastic reaction can be
expected to proceed through a small number of channels and hence to fluctuate strongly fromlevel to level.

2.34

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresSpecifically, AMUX = µlJ , where J is the spin of the resonance, and is l the orbital angularmomentum of the inelastically scattered neutron. Since the daughter nucleus may have aspin I different from the target spin I, l may be different from l, and the number of channel spinvalues µ lJ may be different from µ lJ .
3. For the radiative capture process, AMUG should be set equal to zero. Radiative capture
proceeds through many channels and it is not worthwhile deciding if AMUG is 30 or 40. (Ifsome nucleus has selection rules that restrict radiative decay to a few channels, then a different
value of AMUG might be appropriate.)
4. The fission value should be given as 1.0≤AMUF≤4.0 and the value zero would beincorrect. These small values violate the previous discussion of (Wigner-type) channels and obey
instead statistics governed by fission barrier tunneling (Bohr-channels). The actual value of
AMUF is determined by comparison between calculated and measured cross sections.
The degrees of freedom are constant throughout the unresolved resonance region.
2.4.21. Procedures for the Unresolved Resonance Region
Up to 250 energy points are permitted for specifying energy-dependent average parameters. This
number is presumed to be sufficient to reproduce the gross structure in the unresolved cross sections.
Within a given isotope the same energy grid must be used for all J- and l-values. The grids may bedifferent for different isotopes. Unresolved resonance parameters should be provided for neutronenergy regions where temperature-broadening or self-shielding effects are important. It is
recommended that the unresolved resonance region extend up to at least 20 keV.
If the flag LSSF (Section 2.3.1) is set equal to one, the evaluator can specify the gross structurein the unresolved range on as fine an energy grid as he desires, subject only to the overall
10000-point limitation. Under this option, File 3 represents the entire dilute unresolved crosssection, and no File 2 contribution is to be added to it. Instead, File 2 is to be used to compute a"slowly-varying" self-shielding factor that may be applied to the "rapidly-varying" File 3 values.
The self-shielding factor is defined as the ratio of File 2 average shielded cross section to theaverage unshielded value computed from the same parameters. This ratio is to be applied as amultiplicative factor to the values in File 3.
If LSSF is set equal to zero, File 3 will be interpreted in the same way as a resolved-region File3, i.e., it will represent a partial background cross section to be added to the average cross section,
dilute or shielded that is computed from File 2.
The self-shielding-factor procedure has certain advantages over the "additive" procedure:

1. The energy-variation of the dilute cross section in the unresolved region can be more accurately
specified, without the 250-point limitation imposed in File 2.
2. The energy grids in File 2 and File 3 are basically uncoupled, so that the File 2 grid can be madecoarser and easier to process.
3. In principle, the results can be more accurate, since File 2 can be devoted entirely to representingchanges in the average parameters that are significant for shielding. The burden of representing
fluctuations in the size of the dilute cross section is taken over entirely by File 3.

April 2001

2.35

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

4. The same representation can be used by codes requiring probability tables. For this application,
the average parameters in File 2 can be used to generate random ladders of resonances, and theresulting cross sections can be used to calculate probability tables in the usual way. However,instead of using the tables directly, they are normalized by dividing the various cross section
bands by the average cross section in the interval. These normalized probabilities are thenconverted back to cross sections by multiplying them into the File 3 values. The rationale is thesame as for the shielding-factors - the dilute cross section is represented in "poor-resolution"format in File 3, while the real fine-structure is established in File 2.
The following caution should be noted by evaluators in choosing this option:
Because File 3 is energy varying, it inherently has the possibility to energy-self-shield itself. If
File 2 also shields it, one may actually "double-shield". The problem will probably be mostacute just above the boundary between the resolved and unresolved regions, since theexperimental resolution may still be good enough to see clumps of only a few resonances.
One might consider "correcting" for this in the choice of File 2 parameters, but this would be
difficult because the degree of shielding is application dependent. A better procedure would be
to insure that each significant structure in File 3 actually represents a statistically meaningful
number of resonances, say ten or more. If the raw data do not satisfy this criterion, thenadditional smoothing should be applied by the evaluator to make it a correct condition on thedata. A careful treatment will require the use of statistical level theory to determine the true
widths and spacings underlying the File 3 structures.
2.4.22 Procedures for Computing Angular Distributions in the Resolved Resonance Range
2.4.22.1. Background
Quantum mechanical scattering theory, which underlies all of the resonance formalisms in thischapter, describes the angular distribution of exit particles as well as the magnitudes of the various
reactions. When the R-matrix formalism is used to parameterize the collision matrix, as in the
Reich-Moore format (Section D.1.3) or the RML format (Section D.1.7), then the angular
distributions exhibit a resonant behavior, in the sense that they may change substantially in passing
through a resonance. An explicit tabulation of this detailed resonance behavior will usually imply avery large data file.
Blatt and Biedenharn [Ref. 7] simplified the general expression for the angular distribution,
which is an absolute square of an angle-dependent amplitude, so that it became a single sum over
Legendre polynomials. Their expression, particularized to the RML format, is given in Sections
D.1.7. In the past, Reich-Moore has been a vehicle for low-energy fissionable isotope evaluations,
usually s-waves only, so that the angular distribution is isotropic. If it were used for higher energies
and higher angular momenta, then the angular distributions would become anisotropic. Of course,
since the formulas define a center-of-mass distribution, even the isotropic case generally defines ananisotropic laboratory distribution.
In principle, similar angular distribution formulas underlie the SLBW, MLBW, and Adler-Adler
formalisms, but since these are not formulated in terms of collision matrix elements (UlsJ), the Blattand Biedenharn formulas are not immediately applicable to them.

2.36

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Although the Blatt and Biedenharn formulas have been around for thirty-five years, and havebeen much used in the physics literature of scattering theory, they have not been widely employed inneutron cross section evaluation. ENDF/B files most often contain either experimental data or
calculated data derived from an optical model. Both of these types represent a "smoothing" or"thinning" of the underlying resonant angular distributions. In the case of experiment, thesmoothing is done by the resolution-broadening of the measuring apparatus, combined with thenecessarily limited number of energies at which data can be taken. In the optical model case, thesmoothing is done in an obscure, highly implicit manner. It seems quite clear that an explicit
energy-average over resonant Blatt and Biedenharn Legendre coefficients will differ from both of
the above representations.
This raises the question of whether the Blatt and Biedenharn average will be better or worse thanthe others. That question is dealt with in the following paragraphs, which are somewhat"theoretical", since there is not much hard experience in this area.
2.4.22.2 Further ConsiderationsFirstly, if in some ideal case, all the resonance spins and parities were precisely known, then the
Blatt and Biedenharn values would be exact, and clearly superior to any other representation. The
next step down the accuracy ladder would be a case where the major resonances, or anti-resonances("windows") were known, but some minor, narrower ones were uncertain. For this case, one mightfind that errors in the "minor" resonances canceled each other, again producing a superior result, or
one might find an erroneous cooperation, resulting in spurious-values.
Finally, there are evaluations that use compiled resonance parameters, with many guessed J andl-values, in which case the cancellations and/or cooperations dominate the angular distributions. In
both of the two latter cases, the evaluator either will or will not have compared with experiment andmade a decision on the accuracy of the Blatt and Biedenharn representation. The flag LAD allows
him to inform the processing code whether or not it is "safe" to calculate from the Blatt andBiedenharn formulas. Such a flag is necessary because File 4 is limited to 1200 angular
distributions, which is usually not enough to represent a fully-detailed Blatt and Biedenharn
representation. The recommended ENDF/B procedure is for the evaluator to provide an under-1200energy-point representation in File 4, and to signal the user with LAD whether he can independently
generate σ(θ) on a finer energy mesh.
For the File 4 representation, the evaluation should smooth the data so as to preserve significant
structure in the first Legendre coefficient, or µ. As always, the word significant is difficult to define
exactly but the File 4 representation should be adequate for most ordinary reactor engineering
applications.
In any case, a user who wishes to examine the implications for his own work of a finer mesh is
free to use the Blatt and Biedenharn formulas. The flag LAD tells him either that the evaluator has
approved this procedure (LAD=1), or that it is either of unknown quality or known to be poor
(LAD=0). In the case of LAD=0, the evaluator should tell which of these is the case by puttingcomments into File 1 and the associated documentation.

April 2001

2.37

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.4.22.3. Summary of Recommendations for Evaluation

1. Supply an under-1200-point representation of the elastic scattering angular distribution in File 4.
Preserve significant structure in µ.
2. If the Blatt and Biedenharn angular distributions were not examined, or if they were examined
and found to be inaccurate, supply LAD=0 in File 2. Tell which of these is the case in File 1 andin the associated documentation.
3. If the Blatt and Biedenharn angular distributions were found, or are believed, to be accurate,
supply LAD=1, and describe the evaluation procedures in the documentation.
2.4.23. Completeness and Convergence of Channel Sums
Two possible errors in the calculation of cross sections from a sum over individual channels are:1.) omission of channels because they contain no resonances (such "non-resonant" or"phase-shift-only" channels must still be included because they contribute to the potential
scattering cross section), and2.) failure to include enough non-resonant channels to insure convergence of thepotential-scattering cross section with respect to l at high energy.
Avoiding the first is the responsibility of the processing codes for the SLBW, MLBW, A-A, and
R-M formalisms, since the formats do not allow the evaluator to specify empty channels explicitly.
For the RML formalism, where such specification is explicit, the responsibility is the evaluator's.
Avoiding the second is always the evaluator's responsibility, since it would be awkward for aprocessing code to decide whether the omission was intentional or not.
In the channel spin representation, the incident spin, i, is coupled to the target spin, I, to form thechannel spin, s, which takes on the values:|I–i| ≤ s ≤ I+i.
The channel spin couples to the orbital angular momentum to form the total angular momentum
J, with the values:|l–s| ≤ J ≤ l+s.
If I > 0 and l > 0, the same J-value may occur for each of the two channel spins, s = I ± 1/2, andeach of these J-values must be separately included. A width Γ l J is a sum of the two components,
Γ l s1 J and Γ l s 2 J ; and in the SLBW, MLBW, and A-A formalisms, only the sum is used. In the
Reich-Moore format, the specification of J implicit (via the use of a signed AJ value). For the RML
format, the evaluator should specify two separate channels (for the two values of s) within the samespin group in this situation.
There is rarely enough information on channel-spin widths to guide the evaluator in apportioning
the total width between the two sub-channels, but fortunately, most neutron reactions are insensitive
to the split, so that putting it all in one and none in the other, or splitting it 50/50 works equally well.
Angular distributions are in principle more sensitive, but it is similarly unusual to find measured
data of sufficiently high precision to show an effect.

2.38

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The channel sums are infinite,
∞

1
2

l+s

s= I −

1 J = l −s2I+∑ ∑ ∑χ
l =0

lsJ

so the question of convergence arises. The simplest case is where the summand is an SLBW
reaction term, as in Section D.1.6.2, in which case one sums only over channels in which there areresonances. There are then no convergence considerations.
If one is summing scattering cross section terms, as in Section D.1.6.1, there is apotential-scattering amplitude in every channel, independent of whether there are resonances or not.
The l=0, or s-wave amplitudes, are finite at zero energy, but the higher l-waves only come in at
higher energies. The convergence criterion is therefore that the addition of the next higher l-wave
produces a negligible change in the cross section at the highest energy covered by the resonanceregion. In a conventional R-matrix treatment, the non-resonant channels contain hard-sphere phaseshifts whose behavior has to be compared with experiment.
For the R-Moore format, NLS is defined as that value which converges the cross section
calculation. This is different from the SLBW/MLBW definition, which is the number of l-channels
with resonances. The latter is more liable to cause neglect of higher-l non-resonant channels. Suchneglect would show up as incorrect between-resonance scattering at high energies, admittedly not
the easiest defect to see.
If angular distributions are to be calculated, as in Sections D.1.5.9 and D.1.6.5, besides having
more complicated sums, the range of l-values is much greater, the requirement being that the angular
distributions converge at the highest energies. Because the high l-amplitudes interfere with the low
ones, non-negligible cross terms occur which are absent from the cross section sums. The different
convergence criteria, NLS and NLSC, are compatible because only the B0 moment contributes to thecross sections. All the higher moments integrate to zero. Computer codes which reconstruct such
moments should have recursive algorithms for l-dependent quantities up to l=20.
For the R-Matrix Limited format, all terms and only those terms specified by the evaluator (i.e.,
included in the File 2 information) are to be included in every calculation.
2.4.24. Channel Spin and Other Considerations

For the R-Matrix Limited format, channel spin is explicit and the evaluator must in generalprovide partial widths that depend on s as well as l and J.
For the Adler-Adler formalism, the usual area of application is to low-energy fissile nuclides,with l = 0, so that channel spin is not mentioned in the formulae of Appendix D.
For the Reich-Moore formalism, in those cases where two channel spins are possible, thechannel spin is specified by the sign of the AJ parameter. In older evaluations where the channel
spin is not specified (i.e., where all AJ are positive), all resonances are assumed to have the samechannel spin and the hard-sphere contribution from the second channel spin must be added
separately.
For MLBW the absolute square has been expanded out and all imaginary quantities eliminated.
This has several consequences.

April 2001

2.39

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

1. Channel spin is effectively eliminated, because the partial widths occur in "summed" form.

ΓlJ = Γls1J + Γls 2 J
Since only the sum is required, the evaluator is spared the necessity of specifying the separates-values. This converts an (l,s,J) formalism into an (l,J) formalism. The same effect can beachieved by assuming that I=0, a popular assumption often made independently of the truth, as
in many optical model calculations.
2. The convergence criterion is more transparent, because the potential-scattering cross section
splits off from the resonance and interference terms, as
4π(2l + 1) sin 2 φ l .
2kDespite the simpler nature of this term than its parent amplitudes, one must still carry enoughterms to make the results physically correct, and if this cannot be done, then File 3 must be
invoked to achieve that goal.
3. The resonance profiles are expressible in terms of symmetric and asymmetric Breit-Wigner
shapes, and thus admit ψ,χ Doppler broadening. The price one pays for these three advantages isincreased computing time, when the number of resonances is large.
Similar remarks apply to the SLBW formalism, which is MLBW without the resonanceresonance interference terms. The computing time goes way down, but the scattering cross section
is very poor. SLBW has useful applications in certain analytical and semi-analytical procedures, butshould never be used for the calculation of explicit pointwise scattering cross sections.
The omission of an explicit channel-spin quantum number in the SLBW formalism, whileconvenient in the resolved resonance region, has occasioned some difficulty in the unresolved
region. Sections D.2.2 through D.2.4 attempt to clarify the situation with respect to level densities,
strength functions, and spin statistics.
2.5. References for Chapter 2

1. P. Greebler and B. Hutchins. Physics of Fast and Intermediate Reactors, Vienna, 3-11 August
1961, Vol. III (International Atomic Energy Agency, 1962) p. 121
2. H. Henryson II, B. J. Toppel, and C. G. Stenberg, Argonne National Laboratory report
ANL-8144 (1976)
3. M. Beer, Nuc. Sci. Eng. 50 (1973) 171
4. C.R. Lubitz, Equivalent Single-Level Breit-Wigner Resonance Parameters for Adler-Adler
Evaluations, Letter to CSEWG, August 20, 1985
5. G. deSaussure and R.B. Perez, Oak Ridge National Laboratory report ORNL-TM-2599 (1969)
6. G. deSaussure, G. Olsen, and R.B. Perez, Nuc. Sci. Eng. 61 (1976) 496
7. D.B. Adler, Brookhaven National Laboratory report BNL 50045 (1967) page 7
8. G. deSaussure and R.B. Perez,, Nuc. Sci. Eng. 52 (1973) 382
9. A.M. Lane and R. G. Thomas, Rev. Mod. Phys. 30 (1958) 257
10. G.F. Auchampaugh, Los Alamos National Laboratory report LA-5473-MS (1974)

2.40

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

11. N.M. Larson, Oak Ridge National Laboratory report ORNL/TM-9179/R6 and ENDF-364(2003)
12. A.W. Solbrig, Am. J. Phys. 24 (1961) 257

April 2001

2.41

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

2.42

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

3. FILE 3, REACTION CROSS SECTIONS
3.1. General Description
Reaction cross sections and auxiliary quantities are given in File 3 as functions of energy E,
where E is the incident energy in the laboratory system. They are given as energy-cross section(or auxiliary quantity) pairs. An interpolation scheme is given that specifies the energy variationof the data for incident energies between a given energy point and the next higher point. File 3 isdivided into sections, each containing the data for a particular reaction (MT number); see Section
0.5 and Appendix B. The sections are ordered by increasing MT number. As usual, each section
starts with a HEAD record and ends with a SEND record. The file ends with a FEND record.
3.2. Formats
The following quantities are defined
ZA,AWR
QM

QI

LR
NR,NP,Eintσ(E)Standard material charge and mass parameters.
Mass-difference Q value (eV): defined as the mass of the target and projectile
minus the mass of the residual nucleus in the ground state and masses of allother reaction products; that is, for a+A→b+c+...+B, QM=[(ma+mA)(mb+mc+...+mB)](9.315016x108) if the masses are in amu. (See paragraph3.3.2).
Reaction Q value for the (lowest energy) state defined by the given MT value
in a simple two-body reaction or a breakup reaction. Defined as QM for the
ground state of the residual nucleus (or intermediate system before breakup)
minus the energy of the excited level in this system. Use QI=QM forreactions with no intermediate states in the residual nucleus and withoutcomplex breakup (LR=0). (See paragraph 3.3.2.)
Complex or "breakup" reaction flag.
Indicates that additional particles not specified by the MT number will beemitted. See Sections 0.5.5 and 3.4.4.
Standard TAB1 parameters.
Cross section (barns) for a particular reaction (or the auxiliary quantity) given
as a table of NP energy-cross section pairs.

The structure of a section is[MAT, 3, MT/ ZA,[MAT, 3, MT/ QM,[MAT, 3, 0/ 0.0,

AWR,
QI,
0.0,

0, 0, 0, 0] HEAD
0, LR, NR, NP/ Eint / σ(E)] TAB1
0, 0, 0, 0] SEND

3.3. General Procedures
3.3.1. Cross Sections, Energy Ranges, and Thresholds
For incident neutrons, the cross-section data must cover an energy range up to a common upper
limit of at least 20 MeV, and the data must extend to a lower limit of the reaction threshold or
10-5 eV whichever is higher. For other reactions, the cross section should start at the reaction
threshold energy (with a value of 0.0 barns) and should continue up to a common upper energy
limit.

April 2001

3.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

In the case where there is a change in the representation above a given energy, e.g., a change
from separate reactions to MT=5 (sum of reactions not given separately in other sections), thefollowing procedure should be used. For the cross sections in the lower energy region, there
should be a duplicate point with a value of zero at the last energy for a which a non-zero crosssection is given, and a point with a value of zero at the common upper energy limit. Similarly,
for the cross sections in the upper energy region, there should be a duplicate point with a value ofzero at the first energy for a which a non-zero cross section is given, and a zero value at the low
energy limit. The evaluator should document the change in representation in the File 1
comments.
For charged-particle emission, the cross section is usually very small from the threshold (orlower limit) up to an effective threshold defined by a noticeable cross section (for example, 10-10
barns). The evaluator should tabulate a cross section of 0.0 in such a range in order to avoid
interpolation problems.
Sometimes ENDF reactions have an apparent upper limit lower than the upper limit for thematerial due to changes in representation in different sections. For example, there might be achange from discrete levels to a continuum rule, or from separate reactions to MT=5. Such crosssections must be double valued at the highest energy for which the cross section is nonzero. The
second cross section at the discontinuity must be zero, and it must be followed by another zero
value at the upper limit. This will positively show that the cross section has been truncated. For
such reactions, there will be another reaction with an artificial threshold at the discontinuity. The
cross sections must be chosen in such a way that their sum is continuous.
The limit on the number of energy points (NP) to be used to represent a particular crosssection is given in Appendix G. The evaluator should not use more points than are necessary torepresent the cross section accurately. When appropriate, resonance parameters can be used tohelp reduce the number of points needed. The evaluator should avoid sharp features such as
triangles or steps (except for the required discontinuities at the limits of the resonance ranges orwhere reactions change representation), because such features cannot be realistically Doppler
broadened.
3.3.2. Q Values
Accurate Q values should be given for all reactions, if possible. If QI is not well defined (asfor a range of levels in MT=91, 649, 699, 749, 799, or 849), use the value of QI whichcorresponds to the threshold of the reaction. Similarly, if the value of QM is not well defined (asin elements or for summation reactions like MT=5), use the value of QM which gives thethreshold. If there is no threshold, use the most positive Q value of the component reactions.
Note that these ill-defined values of QM cannot be relied on for energy-release calculations.
As an example to clarify the use of QM and QI, consider the reaction α+9Be→n+X. Afterthe neutron has been emitted, the compound system is 12C with QM=5.702 MeV and energy
levels (Ex) at 0.0, 4.439, 7.654, and 9.641 MeV. The ground state is stable against particle
breakup, the first level decays by photon emission, and the higher levels decay with highprobability by breaking up into three alpha particles (7.275 MeV is required). This pattern canbe represented as follows.

3.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Reaction
9Be(a,n0)12C
9Be(a,n1)12C
9Be(a,n2)12C(3α)
9Be(a,n3)12C(3α)
9Be(a,nC)12C(3α)

QM
5.702
5.702
-1.573-1.573-1.573

QI
5.702
1.263
-1.952-3.939-1.573

EX
0.000
4.439
7.654
9.641

MT
50
51
52
53
91

The gamma for the second reaction is not written explicitly in this notation. The last reaction
includes the contributions of all the levels above 9.641 MeV, any missed levels, and any directfour-body breakup; therefore, the threshold for MT=91 may be lower than implied by the fourthlevel of 12C. Note the value used for QI.
3.3.3. Relationship Between File 3 and File 2
If File 2 (Resonance Parameters) contains resolved and/or unresolved parameters (LRP=1),
then the cross sections or self-shielding factors computed from these parameters in the resonanceenergy range for elastic scattering (MT=2), fission (MT=18), and radiative capture (MT=102)
must be combined with the cross sections given in File 3. The resonance contributions must also
be included in any summation reactions that involve the three resonance reactions (for example,
MT=1, 3, or 5). The resonance energy range is defined in File 2. Double-valued energy points
will normally be given in File 3 at the upper and lower limits of the unresolved and resolved
resonance regions.
Some materials will not have resonance parameters but will have a File 2 (LRP=0) that
contains only the effective scattering radius. This quantity is sometimes used to calculate thepotential scattering cross section in self-shielding codes. For these materials, the potential
scattering cross section computed from File 2 must not be added to the cross section given in File
3. The File 3 data for such materials comprise the entire scattering cross section.
In certain derived libraries, the resonance cross sections have been reconstructed and stored
in File 3. Such files may have LRP=0 as described in the preceding paragraph. Alternatively,
they may have LRP=2 and include a full File 2 with complete resonance parameters. In thiscase, resonance cross sections or self-shielding factors computed from File 2 are not to be
combined with the cross sections in File 3.
3.4. Procedures for Incident Neutrons
Cross section data for non-threshold reaction types must cover the energy range from a lower
limit of 10-5 eV to an upper limit of at least 20 MeV for all materials. For non-thresholdreactions, a cross section value must be given at 0.0253 eV. The limit on the number of energy
points (NP) to be used to represent a particular cross section is 50,000. The evaluator should notuse more points than are necessary to represent the cross section accurately.
The choice of data to be included in an evaluation depends on the intended application. For
neutron sublibraries, it is natural to define "transport" evaluations and "reaction" evaluations.
The transport category can be further subdivided into "low-energy transport" and "high-energy
transport."

April 2001

3.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

A reaction evaluation will contain File 1, File 2, File 3, and sometimes File 32 and/or File
33. File 2 can contain resonance parameters. If radioactive products must be described, Files 8,
9, 10, 39, and/or 40 may be present. File 3 may tabulate one or more reaction cross sections.
The total cross section is not usually well defined in reaction evaluations since they are
incomplete. Examples of this class of evaluations include activation data and dosimetry data.
A low-energy transport evaluation should be adequate for calculating neutron transport andsimple transmutations for energies below about 6-10 MeV. Photon production and covariancedata should be included when possible. Typical evaluations will include Files 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, andsometimes Files 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 39, and/or 40. Resonance parameters
will usually be given so that self shielding can be computed. Charged-particle spectra (MT=600849) and neutron energy-angle correlation (MF=6) will usually not be given. File 3 should
include all reactions important in the target energy range, including the total (MT=1) and elastic
scattering (MT=2). Other reactions commonly included are inelastic scattering (MT=4,51-91),
radiative capture (MT=102), fission (MT=18,19-21,38), absorption (MT=103,104,105,...), andother neutron emitting reactions such as MT=16,17,22,28,.... Specific procedures for eachreaction are given below. Examples of this class of evaluations include fission-product data andactinide data.
A high-energy transport evaluation should be adequate for calculating neutron transport,
transmutation, photon production, nuclear heating, radiation damage, gas production,
radioactivity, and charged-particle source terms for energies up to at least 20 MeV. In somecases, the energy limit needs to be extended to 40-100 MeV. These evaluations use Files 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 12, 13, 14, 15, and sometimes 8, 9, 10, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 39, and/or 40. Once again, File
3 should give cross sections for all reactions important in the target energy range, including
MT=1 and 2. This will normally include many of the reactions mentioned above plus the series
MT=600-849. At high energies, some reactions may be combined using the "complex reaction"
identifier MT=5. File 6 will normally be needed at high energies to represent energy-angle
correlation for scattered neutrons and to give particle and recoil energies for heating and damage
calculations. Special attention to energy balance is required. High-energy evaluations areimportant for materials used in fusion reactor designs, in shielding calculations, and in medical
radiation-therapy equipment (including the components of the human body).
3.4.1. Total Cross Section (MT=1)
The total is often the best-known cross section, and it is generally the most important crosssection in a shielding material. Considerable care should be exercised in evaluating this crosssection and in deciding how to represent it.
Cross section minima (potential windows) and cross section structure should be carefully
examined. Sufficient energy points must be used in describing the structure and minima to
reproduce the experimental data to the measured degree of accuracy.
The total cross section, as well as any partial cross section, must be represented by 50,000
incident-energy points or fewer. The set of points or energy mesh for the total cross section must
be a union of all energy meshes used for the partial cross sections. Within the above constraints,
every attempt should be made to minimize the number of points used. The total cross section
must be the sum of MT=2 (elastic) and MT=3 (nonelastic). If MT=3 is not given, then theelastic cross section plus all nonelastic components must sum to the total cross section.

3.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The fact that the total cross section is given at every energy point at which at least one partial
cross section is given allows the partial cross sections to be added together and checked against
the total for any possible errors. In certain cases, more points may be necessary in the total crosssection over a given energy range than are required to specify the corresponding partial crosssections. For example, a constant elastic scattering cross section and a 1/v radiative capture
cross section could be exactly specified over a given energy range by log-log interpolation(INT=5), but the sum of the two cross sections would not be exactly linear on a log-log scale. If
a precise total cross section is required between the energy points provided, it is recommended
that the total be calculated from the sum of the partials rather than interpolated directly from
MT=1.
3.4.2. Elastic Scattering Cross Section (MT=2)
The elastic scattering cross section is generally not known to the same accuracy as the total
cross section. Frequently, the elastic scattering cross section is obtained by subtracting thenonelastic cross section from the total cross section. This procedure can cause problems. The
result is an elastic scattering cross section that contains unreal structure. There may be several
causes. First, the nonelastic cross section, or any part thereof, is not generally measured with thesame energy resolution as the total cross section. When the somewhat poorer resolution
nonelastic data are subtracted from the total, the resolution effects appear in the elastic crosssection. Second, if the evaluated structure in the nonelastic cross section is incorrect or
improperly correlated with the structure in the total cross section (energy-scale errors), an
unrealistic structure is generated in the elastic scattering cross section.
The experimental elastic cross section is obtained by integrating measured angular
distributions. These data may not cover the entire angular range or may contain contributions
from nonelastic neutrons. Such contamination is generally due to contributions from inelastic
scattering to low-lying levels that were not resolved in the experiment. Care must be taken in
evaluating such results to obtain integrated cross sections. Similarly, experimental angular
distribution data can also cause problems when used to prepare File 4.
3.4.3. Nonelastic Cross Section (MT=3)
The nonelastic cross section is not required unless any part of the photon production
multiplicities given in File 12 uses MT=3. In this case, MT=3 is required in File 3. If MT=3 isgiven, then the set of points used to specify this cross section must be a union of the sets used forits partials.
3.4.4. Inelastic Scattering Cross Sections (MT=4,51-91)
A total inelastic scattering cross section (MT=4) must be given if any partials are given; thatis, discrete level excitation cross sections (MT=51-90), or continuum inelastic scattering(MT=91). The set of incident energy points used for the total inelastic cross section must be aunion of all the sets used for the partials.

April 2001

3.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Values should be assigned to the level excitation cross sections for as many levels as possible
and extended to as high an energy as possible. Any remaining inelastic scattering should betreated as continuum. In particular, low-lying levels with significant direct interaction
contributions (such as deformed nuclei with 0+ ground states) should be extended to the upper
limit of the file (at least 20 MeV) in competition with continuum scattering. The secondary
energy distribution for such neutrons resembles elastic scattering more than an evaporation
spectrum.
Level excitation cross sections must start with zero cross section at the threshold energy. If
the cross section for a particular level does not extend to the upper limit for the file (e.g., 20
MeV), it must be double-valued at the highest energy point for which the cross section is nonzero. The second cross section value at the point must be zero, and it should be followed byanother zero value at the upper limit. This will positively show that the cross section has beentruncated.
If LR=0, a particular section (MT) represents (n,n'gamma). The angular distribution for the
scattered neutron must be given in the corresponding section of File 4 or 6. The associatedphotons should be given in a corresponding section of File 6 or 12, if possible. If the inelastic
photons cannot be assigned to particular levels, they can be represented using MT=4 in File 6, 12
or 13. When inelastic photons cannot be separated from other nonelastic photons, they can be
included in MF=13, MT=3.
A LR flag greater than zero indicates inelastic scattering to levels that de-excite by breakup,
particle emission, or pair production rather than by photon emission (see Section 0.6)1 . If LR=1,
the identities, yields, and distributions for all particles and photons can be given in File 6. If
LR>1, angular distributions for the neutron must be given in File 4, and distributions are notavailable for the emitted particles. In this case, photon production is handled as described above
for LR=0.
If a particular level decays in more than one way, then File 6 can be used or several sections
can be given in File 3 for that level. Consider the case in which an excited state sometimes
decays by emitting a proton, and sometimes by emitting an alpha particle. That part of thereaction that represents (n,n'α) would use LR=22, and the other part would be given the next
higher section number (MT) and would use LR=28 (n,n'p). The angular distribution for theneutron would have to be given in two different MT numbers in File 4, even though they
represent the same neutron. The sections must be ordered by decreasing values of QI (increasing
excitation energy).
3.4.5. Fission (MT=18,19-21,38)
The total fission cross section is given in MT=18 for fissionable materials. Every attemptshould be made to break this cross section up into its various parts:first-chance fission (n,f),
MT=19; second-chance fission (n,n'f), MT=20; third-chance fission (n,2nf), MT=21; and fourthchance fission (n,3nf), MT=38. The data in MT=18 must be the sum of the data in MT=19, 20,
21, and 38. The energy grid for MT=18 must be the union of the grids for all the partials.

1

LR=31 is still allowed, however, to uniquely define the γ-decay when using MF=3, and MF=12 (or 15) and MF=4.

3.6

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

If resolved or unresolved resonance parameters are given in File 2, the fission cross section
computed from the parameters must be included in both MT=18 and MT=19.
The Q value for MT=18, 19, 20, 21, and 38 is the energy released per fission minus theneutrino energy. It should agree with the corresponding value given in MT=458 in File 1.
Secondary neutrons from fission are usually stated to be isotropic in the laboratory system inFile 4. Energy distributions are given in File 5. The complex rules associated with the partial
fission reactions are described in Section 5.
3.4.6. Charged-Particle Emission to Discrete and Continuum Levels (MT=600-849)
The (n,p) reaction can be represented using a summation cross section, discrete levels, and acontinuum (MT=103, 600-648, and 649) in the same way that the (n,n') reaction is represented
using MT=4, 51-90, and 91 (see Section 3.4.4). Similarly, (n,d) uses MT=104 and 650-699, andso on for t, 3He, and α. Of course, MT=600, 650, 700, etc., represent the ground state and would
not have corresponding sections in the photon production files, unless the flag LR>0 (such as in
the 10B(n,t)8Be reaction).
3.5. Procedures for Incident Charged Particles and Photons
See Table 0.1 for sublibrary numbers for incident charged particles and photons. Proceduresfor incident charged particles are generally the same as for neutrons as given in section 3.4. The
exceptions are noted below.
3.5.1. Total Cross Sections
The total cross section is undefined for incident charged particles. MT=1 should be used forthe photonuclear total cross section, while MT=501 is used for the total atomic photon
interaction cross section.
3.5.2. Elastic Scattering Cross Sections
As discussed in detail in Section 6.2.6, it is not possible to construct an integrated crosssection for charged-particle elastic scattering because of the Coulomb term. Therefore, σ iseither set to 1.0 or to a "nuclear plus interference" value using a cutoff angle. This value may intheory be 0.0, and, in this case, should be set to epsilon, e.g., 10-38. The first and last energy
points used for MT=2 in File 3 define the range of applicability of the cross section
representation given in File 6. The cross section need not cover the complete range from 10-5 eV
to 20 MeV. MT=2 is used for the elastic scattering cross section for all incident particles andphotons (resonance fluorescence). For photons, MT=502 and 504 are used for coherent andincoherent atomic scattering, respectively.

April 2001

3.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

3.5.3. Inelastic Scattering Cross Sections
The procedure for inelastic cross section for incident charged particles and photons is thesame as for neutrons. The following MT combinations should be used.
Incident Particle
γ
n
p
d
t
3
He
α

MT's for Excited
Statesundefined
51-91
601-649651-699
701-749751-799801-849

MT's for Total
Inelastic σ
102
4
103
104
105
106
107

3.5.4. Stopping PowerThe total charged-particle stopping power in eV×barns is given in MF=3, MT=500. This isbasically an atomic property representing the shielding of the nuclear charge by the electrons, but
it should be repeated for each isotope of the element. It is a "total" stopping power in that mosttabulations implicitly include large-angle coulomb scattering which is also represented here inFile 6. In practice, this contribution is probably small enough to keep double counting frombeing a problem. At low particle energies, mixture effects are sometimes noticeable. They are
not accounted for by this representation.

3.8

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

4. FILE 4, ANGULAR DISTRIBUTIONS OF SECONDARY PARTICLES
4.1. General Description
File 4 is used to describe the angular distribution of emitted particles. It is used for reactions
with incident neutrons only, and should not be used for any other incident particle. Angular
distributions of emitted neutrons should be given for elastically scattered neutrons, and for theneutrons resulting from discrete level excitation due to inelastic scattering. However, angular
distributions must also be given for particles resulting from (n,n′ continuum), (n,2n), and otherneutron emitting reactions. In these cases, the angular distributions will be integrated over all
final energies. File 4 may also contain angular distributions of emitted charged particles for areaction where only a single outgoing charged particle is possible (MT=600 through 849, seesection 3.4.6). Emitted photon angular distributions are given in File 14 when the particle
angular distributions are given in File 4.
The use of File 6 to describe all emitted particle angular distributions is preferred whencharged particles are emitted, or when the emitted particle's energy and angular distributions arestrongly correlated. In these cases, Files 4 and 14 should not be used.
In some cases, it may be possible to compute the angular distributions in the resolved range
from resonance parameters (see section 2.4.22 for further discussion). In such cases, thecomputed distributions may be preferable to the distributions from File 4 for deep penetration
calculations. However, for many practical applications, the smoothed distributions in File 4 will
be adequate.
Angular distributions for a specific reaction type (MT number) are given for a series ofincident energies, in order of increasing energy. The energy range covered should be the same asthat for the same reaction type in File 3. Angular distributions for several different reaction
types (MT's) may be given in File 4 for each material, in ascending order of MT number.
The angular distributions are expressed as normalized probability distributions, i.e.,1∫ f ( µ , E ) dµ = 1−1where f(µ,E)dµ is the probability that a particle of incident energy E will be scattered into theinterval dµ about an angle whose cosine is µ. The units of f(µ,E) are (unit cosine)-1. Since theangular distribution of scattered neutrons is generally assumed to have azimuthal symmetry, thedistribution may be represented as a Legendre polynomial series,

2π
NL 2l + 1σ ( µ , E ) = ∑l = 0
a l ( E ) Pl ( µ )σ s (E)2= cosine of the scattered angle in either the laboratory or the center-ofmass system= energy of the incident particle in the laboratory system= the scattering cross section, e.g., elastic scattering at energy E as given
in File 3 for the particular reaction type (MT)= order of the Legendre polynomial= differential scattering cross section in units of barns per steradian= the lth Legendre polynomial coefficient and it is understood that a0 =
1.0.

f (µ , E ) =
where

µ
E

σs(E)

l

σ(µ,E)al

August 2004

4.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The angular distributions may be given by one of two methods, and in either the center-ofmass (CM) or laboratory (LAB) systems. Using the first method, the distributions are given bytabulating the normalized probability distribution, f(µ,E), as a function of incident energy. Using
the second method, the Legendre polynomial expansion coefficients, al(E), are tabulated as afunction of incident neutron energy.
Absolute differential cross sections are obtained by combining data from Files 3 and 4. Iftabulated distributions are given, the absolute differential cross section (in barns per steradian) is
obtained by

σ (µ , E ) =σ s (E)f (µ , E )2πwhere σs(E) is given in File 3 (for the same MT number) and f(µ,E) is given in File 4. If theangular distributions are represented as Legendre polynomial coefficients, the absolutedifferential cross sections are obtained by

σ (µ , E ) =σ s ( E ) NL 2l + 1∑l =0 2 al ( E ) Pl (µ )2πwhere σs(E) is given in File 3 (for the same MT number) and the coefficients al(E) are given
in File 4.
Elastic transformation matrices are no longer permitted in ENDF formatted files.
4.2. Formats
File 4 is divided into sections, each containing data for a particular reaction type (MTnumber) and ordered by increasing MT number. Each section always starts with a HEAD recordand ends with a SEND record. If the section contains a description of the angular distributions
for elastic scattering, the transformation matrix is given first (if present) and this is followed by
the representation of the angular distributions.
The following quantities are defined.
LTT

LI

LCT

NE
NL
NM

4.2

Flag to specify the representation used and it may have the following values:
LTT=0, all angular distributions are isotropic
LTT=l, the data are given as Legendre expansion coefficients, al(E)LTT=2, the data are given as normalized probability distributions, f(µ,E)
LTT=3, low energy region is represented by as Legendre coefficients; higher
region is represented by tabulated data.
Flag to specify whether all the angular distributions are isotropic
LI=0, not all isotropic
LI=1, all isotropic
Flag to specify the frame of reference used
LCT=l, the data are given in the LAB system
LCT=2, the data are given in the CM system
Number of incident energy points at which angular distributions are given(NE≤2000)
Highest order Legendre polynomial that is given at each energy (NL≤64)
Maximum order Legendre polynomial that will be required (NM≤64) to
describe the angular distributions of elastic scattering in either the center-ofmass or the laboratory system. NM should be an even number.

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Matrix elements of the transformation matrices
VK=U-1l,m, if LCT=1 (data given in LAB system)
VK=Ul,m, if LCT=2 (data are given in CM system)
Number of angular points (cosines) used to give the tabulated probability
distributions for each energy (NP≤20l)

VK
NP

Other commonly used variables are given in the Glossary (Appendix A).
The structure of a section depends on the values of LTT (representation used, al(E) or f(µ,E))
but it always starts with a HEAD record of the form
[MAT, 4, MT/ ZA, AWR,

0, LTT,

0,0]HEAD

4.2.l. Legendre Polynomial Coefficients: LTT=1 and LI=0
When LTT=1 (angular distributions given in terms of Legendre polynomial coefficients), thestructure of the section is[MAT, 4, MT/ ZA, AWR,
0, LTT, 0, 0]HEAD(LTT=1)[MAT, 4, MT/ 0.0, AWR, LI, LCT, 0, 0] CONT
(LI=0)[MAT, 4, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NR, NE/ Eint] TAB2
[MAT, 4, MT/
T, E1, LT,
0, NL, 0/al(E1)]LIST[MAT, 4, MT/
T, E2, LT,
0, NL, 0/al(E2)]LIST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 4, MT/
T, ENE, LT,
0, NL, 0/al(ENE)]LIST[MAT, 4, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, 0, 0]SEND

Note that T and LT refer to temperature (in K) and a test for temperature dependence,
respectively. These values are normally zero, however.
4.2.2. Tabulated Probability Distributions: LTT=2 and LI=0
If the angular distributions are given as tabulated probability distributions, LTT=2, thestructure of a section is[MAT, 4, MT/ ZA, AWR,
0, LTT, 0, 0]HEAD(LTT=2)[MAT, 4, MT/ 0.0, AWR, LI, LCT, 0, 0]CONT(LI=0)[MAT, 4, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NR, NE/Eint] TAB2
[MAT, 4, MT/
T, E1 , LT,
0, NR, NP/µint /f(µ,E1)]TABl[MAT, 4, MT/
T, E2 , LT,
0, NR, NP/µint /f(µ,E2)]TABl--------------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 4, MT/
T, ENE , LT,
0, NR, NP/µint /f(µ,ENE)]TABl[MAT, 4, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, 0, 0]SEND

T and LT are normally zero.
4.2.3. All angular Distributions are Isotropic: LTT=0 and LI=1
When all angular distributions for a given MT are assumed to be isotropic then the section
structure is:[MAT, 4, MT/ ZA, AWR,
[MAT, 4, MT/ 0.0, AWR,
[MAT, 4, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,

August 2004

0, LTT, 0, 0]HEAD
LI, LCT, 0, 0]CONT0,0, 0, 0]SEND(LTT=0)(LI=1)

4.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

4.2.4. Angular Distribution over Two Energy Ranges: LTT=3 and LI=0
If LTT=3, angular distributions are given as Legendre coefficients over the lower energy
range and as Probability Distributions over the higher energy range. The structure of asubsection is[MAT, 4, MT/ ZA, AWR,
0, LTT, 0, 0]HEAD(LTT=3)[MAT, 4, MT/ 0.0, AWR,
LI, LCT, 0, NM]CONT(LI=0)(Legendre coefficients)[MAT, 4, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NR, NE1/Eint]TAB2[MAT, 4, MT/
T, E1,LT,
0, NL, 0/al(E1)]LIST--------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 4, MT/
T, ENE, LT,0,
NL, 0/al(ENE1)]LIST(Tabulated data)[MAT, 4, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,NR, NE2/Eint]TAB2[MAT, 4, MT/
T,
E1, LT,
0, NR, NP/µint /f(µ,ENE1)]TABl----------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 4, MT/
T, ENE, LT,
0,
NR, NP/µint /f(µ,ENET)]TABl(NET = NE1+NE2-1)[MAT, 4, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0]SEND

Note that there is a double energy point at the boundary.
4.3. Procedures
The angular distributions for two-body reactions should be given in the CM system (LCT=2).
It is recommended that other reactions (such as continuum inelastic, fission, etc.) should be given
in LAB system. All angular distribution data should be given at the minimum number of incident
energy points that will accurately describe the energy variation of the distributions. Legendre
coefficients are preferred unless they cannot give an adequate representation of the data.
When the data are represented as Legendre polynomial coefficients, certain proceduresshould be followed. Enough Legendre coefficients should be used to accurately represent therecommended angular distribution at a particular energy point, and to ensure that the interpolated
distribution is everywhere positive. The number of coefficients (NL) may vary from energy
point to energy point; in general, NL will increase with increasing incident energy. A linearlinear interpolation scheme (INT=2) must be used to obtain coefficients at intermediate energies.
This is required to ensure that the interpolated distribution is positive over the cosine intervalfrom −1.0 to +1.0; it is also required because some coefficients may be negative. In no caseshould NL exceed a value of 64. If more than 64 coefficients appear to be required to obtain a
non-negative distribution, a constrained Legendre polynomial fit to the data should be given.
NL=1 is allowed at low energies to specify an isotropic angular distribution.
When angular distributions are represented as tabular data, certain procedures should be
followed. Sufficient angular points (cosine values) should be given to accurately represent therecommended distribution. The number of angular points may vary from distribution to
distribution. The cosine interval must be from −1.0 to +1.0. The interpolation scheme for f(µ,E)
vs. µ should be log-linear (INT=4), and that for f(µ,E) vs. E should be linear-linear (INT=2).
Accurate angular distributions for the thermal energy range can be obtained by using File 7
or a detailed free-gas calculation. File 4 contains distributions for stationary free targets only.

4.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The formats given above do not allow an energy-dependent transformation matrix to begiven, so transformation matrices may not be given for nonelastic scattering reaction types.
When a processing code wishes to transfer inelastic level angular distributions expressed as
Legendre polynomial coefficients from the LAB to the CM system, or CM to LAB system, a
distribution should be generated and transformed point by point to the desired frame ofreference. The point-wise angular distributions can then be converted to Legendre polynomial
coefficients in the new frame of reference.
4.4. Procedures for Specific Reactions
4.4.l. Elastic Scattering (MT=2)

1. Legendre polynomial representations should be used for the elastic scattering angular
distributions and discrete channel scattering, and must be given in the CM system. When
this representation is given, the maximum order of the polynomial for each incident energy
should be even and lmax must be ≤64.
2. Care must be exercised in selecting an incident energy mesh for certain light-to-medium
mass materials. Here it is important to relate any known structure in the elastic scatteringcross section to the energy dependent variations in the angular distributions. These two
features of the cross sections cannot be analyzed independent of one another. Remember,processing codes operate on MT=2 data are given in Files 3 and 4. (Structure of the total
cross section is not considered when generating energy transfer arrays). It is better tomaintain consistency in any structure effects between File 3 and File 4 data than to introduce
structure in one File and ignore it in the other.
3. Consistency must be maintained between angular distribution data given for elastic andinelastic scattering. This applies not only to structural effects, but also to how the
distributions were obtained.
Frequently, the evaluated elastic scattering angular distributions are based on experimental
results that, at times, contain contributions from inelastic scattering to low-lying levels(which in turn may contain direct interaction effects). If inelastic contributions have been
subtracted from the experimental angular distributions, this process must be done in aconsistent manner. The same contributions must be subtracted from both the integrated
elastic scattering and the angular distribution. Be sure that these contributions are includedin the inelastic scattering cross section (both integrated data and angular distributions). Thisis particularly important when the inelastic contributions are due to direct interaction, since
the angular distributions are not isotropic or symmetric about 90°, but they are generally
forward peaked.
4. Do not use an excessive number of incident energy points for the angular distributions. The
number used should be determined by the amount of variation in the angular distributions but
should not exceed 2000.
5. An incident energy point must be given at l0-5 eV. A point must be given at the highest
energy point for which the angular distribution is isotropic. The highest incident energy must
be the highest energy for which cross section data are given in File 3, at least 20 MeV.

August 2004

4.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

6. In the case of neutrons, a relationship exists between the total cross section and thedifferential cross section at forward angles (Wick's limit or optical theorem).
⎛ σ ⎞σ (0°) ≥ σ W = ⎜ T ⎟⎝ 4π D ⎠
AWR 2
barns
σ W = X E0
σ T2
2
(1 + AWR )steradian
where E0 is in eV and σT in barns; see Appendix H for value of X.
2

Care should be taken to observe this inequality, especially at high energies.
4.4.2. Inelastic Scattering Cross Sections

1. Do not give angular distribution data for MT = 4.
2. Always give angular distribution data for any one of the following if they are given in File 3:
MT = 51 through 91.
3. Discrete channel (two body) angular distributions (e.g., MT = 2, 51 - 90, 701...) should begiven as Legendre coefficients in the CM system.
4. The continuum reaction (MT = 91) should be given in the LAB system.
5. Isotropic angular distributions should be used unless the degree of the isotropy exceeds 5%.
If any level excitation cross sections contain significant direct interaction contributions,angular distributions are very important.
6. Use the precautions outlined above when dealing with the level excitation cross sections that
contain a large amount of structure.
7. Do not overcomplicate the data files. Restrict the number of distributions to the minimum
required to accurately represent the data.
4.4.3. Other Neutron Producing Reactions
Neutron angular distribution data must be given for all other neutron producing reactions,such as fission, (n,n′α), or (n,2n) in File 4 or File 6. File 4 is only appropriate if the distributions
are fairly isotropic without strong pre-equilibrium components. The LAB system should be
used.
4.4.4. Charged-Particle Producing Reactions
Distributions for charged particles from two-body reactions in the 600 series can be given in
File 4 using the CM system, if desired. (Continuum reactions where only one charged particle ispossible (e.g., 649, 699, etc.) can also be given in File 4 using the LAB system. If angular data isneeded for more complex reactions, File 6 is more appropriate.)

4.6

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

5. FILE 5, ENERGY DISTRIBUTION OF SECONDARY PARTICLES
5.1. General Description
File 5 is used to describe the energy distributions of secondary particles expressed as
normalized probability distributions. File 5 is for incident neutron reactions and spontaneous
fission only, and should not be used for any other incident particle. Data will be given in File 5
for all reaction types that produce secondary neutrons, unless the secondary neutron energy
distributions can be implicitly determined from data given in File 3 and/or File 4. No data will
be given in File 5 for elastic scattering (MT=2), since the secondary energy distributions can beobtained from the angular distributions in File 4. No data will be given for neutrons that result
from excitation of discrete inelastic levels when data for these reactions are given in both File 3
and File 4 (MT=51, 52, ..., 90).
Data should be given in File 5 for MT=91 (inelastic scattering to a continuum of levels),
MT=18 (fission), MT=16 (n,2n), MT=17 (n,3n), MT=455 (delayed neutrons from fission), andcertain other nonelastic reactions that produce secondary neutrons. The energy distribution for
spontaneous fission is given in File 5 (in sub-library 4).
File 5 may also contain energy distributions of secondary charged particle for continuum
reactions where only a single outgoing charged particle is possible (MT=649, 699, etc.).
Continuum photon distributions should be described in File 15.
The use of File 6 to describe all particle energy distributions is preferred when several
charged particles are emitted or the particle energy and angular distribution are strongly
correlated. In these cases Files 5 and 15 should not be used.
Each section of the file gives the data for a particular reaction type (MT number). The
sections are then ordered by increasing MT number. The energy distributions p(E→E′), arenormalized so that

∫

′
E max

0

p ( E → E ′)dE ′ = 1(5.1)

where E′max is the maximum possible secondary particle energy and its value depends on theincoming particle energy E and the analytic representation of p(E→E′). The secondary particle
energy E′ is always expressed in the laboratory system.
The differential cross section is obtained fromdσ ( E → E ′)(5.2)
= mσ ( E ) p( E → E ′)dE ′where σ(E) is the cross section as given in File 3 for the same reaction type number (MT)and m is the neutron multiplicity for this reaction (m is implicit; e.g., m=2 for n,2n reactions).
The energy distributions p(E→E′) can be broken down into partial energy distributions,fk(E→E′), where each of the partial distributions can be described by different analytic
representations;NKp ( E → E ′) = ∑ p k ( E ) f k ( E → E ′)

(5.3)

k =1

and at a particular incident neutron energy E,

NK∑ p (E) = 1
k =1kwhere pk(E) is the fractional probability that the distribution fk(E→E′) can be used at E.
April 2001

5.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The partial energy distributions fk(E→E′) are represented by various analytical formulations.
Each formulation is called an energy distribution law and has an identification number associatedwith it (LF number). The allowed energy distribution laws are given below.
Secondary Energy Distribution Laws
LF = l,Arbitrary tabulated function:f ( E → E ′) = g ( E → E ′)A set of incident energy points is given, E and g(E→E′) is tabulated as a functionof E′.

LF = 5,General evaporation spectrum:f ( E → E ′) = g ( E ′ θ ( E ) )θ(E) is tabulated as a function of incident neutron energy, E; g(x) is tabulated as afunction of x, x = E′/θ (E).
LF = 7,

Simple fission spectrum (Maxwellian):E ′ − E′ θ ( E )eI
I is the normalization constant,f ( E → E ′) =

(

)

⎤
3 ⎡ π
I =θ 2 ⎢erf ( E − U ) θ − ( E − U ) θ e − ( E −U ) / θ ⎥⎣ 2⎦
θ is tabulated as a function of energy, E;
U is a constant introduced to define the proper upper limit for the final particle
energy such that 0 ≤ E′≤ (E – U).
LF = 9,Evaporation spectrum:E′f ( E → E ′) = e − E ′ / θ ( E )I
I is the normalization constant,⎡
E − U ⎞⎤⎛
I = θ 2 ⎢1 − e − ( E −U ) / θ ⎜1 +
⎟
θ ⎠⎥⎦
⎝
⎣
θ is tabulated as a function of incident neutron energy, E;
U is a constant introduced to define the proper upper limit for the final particle
energy such that 0 ≤ E′ ≤ (E–U)

5.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

LF = 11,

Energy dependent Watt spectrum:e − E′ / asinh bE ′f ( E → E ′) =I
I is the normalization constant,

(

I=

)

⎛ E −Uab ⎞1 πa 3 b⎛ ab ⎞ ⎡ ⎛ E − U⎟ + erf ⎜−+exp⎜ ⎟ ⎢erf ⎜⎜
⎟
⎜
a
a
2
4
4 ⎠
⎝ 4 ⎠ ⎢⎣ ⎝⎝ab ⎞ ⎤⎟⎥
4 ⎟⎠ ⎥⎦⎡ ⎛ E − U ⎞⎤− a exp ⎢− ⎜⎟⎥ sinh b( E − U )⎣ ⎝ a ⎠⎦a and b are energy dependent;
U is a constant introduced to define the proper upper limit for the final particle
energy such that 0 ≤ E′ ≤ (E-U)
LF = 12,

Energy dependent fission neutron spectrum (Madland and Nix):f ( E → E ′) =1[g ( E ′, EFL) + g ( E ′, EFH )]2

whereg ( E ′, EF ) =1
3( EF × TM )1⎡⎣u23 2 E1 (u2 ) − u13 2 E1 (u1 ) + γ (3 2, u2 ) − γ (3 2, u1 ) ⎤⎦2

( E ′ − EF ) TMu = ( E ′ − EF ) TM
u1 =

2

2

2

EFL and EFH are constants, which represent the average kinetic energy per
nucleon of the average light and heavy fragments, respectively.
TM depends upon the incident neutron energy,
E1(x) is the exponential integral,γ(a,x) is the incomplete gamma function.
The integral of this spectrum between zero and infinity is one. The value of theintegral for a finite integration range is given in Sec. 5.4.10.
The data are given in each section by specifying the number of partial energy distributions
that will be used. The same energy mesh should be used for each one. The partial energy
distributions may all use the same energy distribution law (LF number) or they may use different
laws.

Note: Distribution laws are not presented for LF = 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 10. These laws are no longer
used.

April 2001

5.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

5.2. Formats
Each section of File 5 contains the data for a particular reaction type (MT number), starts
with a HEAD record, and ends with a SEND record. Each subsection contains the data for one
partial energy distribution. The structure of a subsection depends on the value of LF (the energy
distribution law).
The following quantities are defined.
NK
U

θ
LF

pk(EN)

Number of partial energy distributions. There will be one subsection foreach partial distribution.
Constant that defines the upper energy limit for the secondary particle so that0 ≤ E′ ≤ E - U (given in the LAB system).
Effective temperature used to describe the secondary energy distribution for
LF = 5, 7, or 9.
Flag specifying the energy distribution law used for a particular subsection(partial energy distribution). (The definitions for LF are given in Section
5.l.).
Fractional part of the particular cross section which can be described by thekth partial energy distribution at the Nth incident energy point.
NOTE:NK∑ p k ( E N ) = 1.0
k =1fk(E→E′)NR
NP
a,b
EFL,EFH
TM
NE
NF

th

k partial energy distribution. The definition depends on the value of LF.
Number of interpolation ranges.
Number of incident energy points at which pk(E) is given.
Parameters used in the energy dependent Watt spectrum, LF = 11.
Constants used in the energy-dependent fission neutron spectrum (Madland
and Nix), LF = 12.
Maximum temperature parameter, TM(E), of the energy-dependent fission
neutron spectrum (Madland and Nix), LF =12.
Number of incident energy points at which a tabulated distribution is given(NE≤200.)
Number of secondary energy points in a tabulation. (NF≤l000.)

The structure of a section has the following form:[MAT, 5, MT/ ZA, AWR,
<subsection for k = 1>
<subsection for k = 2>----------------------<subsection for k = NK>[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,

0,0, NK,0]HEAD0,0,0]SEND0,

The structure of a subsection depends on the value of LF. The formats for the various valuesof LF are given following.

5.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

LF = 1, Arbitrary tabulated function[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,
LF,
NR,
NP/ Eint/p(E)]TAB1[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,
0,
NR,
NE/ Eint]TAB2[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, E1,
0,
0,
NR,
NF/ E′int /E′1, 0.0, E′2,g(E1→E′2), E′3,g(E1→E′3),--------------------------------0.0]TAB1---,E′NF-1,g(E1→E′NF-1), E′NF ,[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, E2 ,
0,
0,
NR,
NF/ E′int /E′1, 0.0, E′2,g(E2→E′2), E′3 ,g(E2→E′3),---------------------------------------, E′NF-1,g(E2→E′NF-1), E′NF ,0.0]TAB1
0,
0,
NR,
NF/ E′int /[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, ENE,
E′1, 0.0, E′2,g(ENE→E′2), E′3,g(ENE→E′3)------------------------------------- ,E′NF-1,g(ENE→E′NF-1), E′NF,
0.0]TAB1

LF=1

Note that the incident energy mesh for pk(E) does not have to be the same as the E mesh used
to specify the energy distributions. The interpolation scheme used between incident energy
points, E, and between secondary energy points, E′, should be linear-linear.
LF = 5, General evaporation spectrum[MAT, 5, MT/U, 0.0,[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,

0, LF, NR, NP/ Eint / p(E)]TAB1
0, 0, NR, NE/ Eint / θ(E)]TAB1
0, 0, NR, NF/ xint / g(x)]TAB1(LF=5)(x=E′/θ(E))

LF = 7, Simple fission spectrum (Maxwellian)[MAT, 5, MT/U, 0.0,[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,

0, LF, NR, NP/ Eint / p(E)]TAB1
0, 0, NR, NE/ Eint / θ (E)]TAB1(LF=7)

0, LF, NR, NP/ Eint / p(E)]TAB1
0, 0, NR, NE/ Eint / θ (E)]TAB1(LF=9)

LF = 9, Evaporation spectrum[MAT, 5, MT/U, 0.0,[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,

LF = 11, Energy-dependent Watt spectrum[MAT, 5, MT/U, 0.0,[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,

0, LF, NR, NP / Eint / p(E)]TAB1
0, 0, NR, NE / Eint / a(E)]TAB1
0, 0, NR, NE / Eint / b(E)]TAB1(LF=11)

LF = 12, Energy-dependent fission neutron spectrum (Madland and Nix)
[MAT, 5, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
[MAT, 5, MT/ EFL, EFH,

April 2001

0,0, LF, NR, NP/ Eint / p(E)]TAB1(LF=12)0, NR, NE/ Eint /TM(E)]TAB1

5.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

5.3. Procedures
As many as three different energy meshes may be required to describe the data in a
subsection (one partial distribution). These are the incident energy mesh for pk(E), the incident
energy mesh at which the secondary neutrons are given, fk(E→E′), and the secondary energy
mesh for fk(E→E′). It is recommended that a linear-linear or a linear-log interpolation scheme
be used for the first two energy meshes, and a linear-linear interpolation for the last energy mesh.
Double energy points must be given in the incident energy mesh whenever there is a
discontinuity in any of the pk(E)'s (this situation occurs fairly frequently). This energy meshmust also include threshold energy values for all reactions being described by the pk(E)'s. Zerovalues for pk must be given for energies below the threshold (if applicable).
Two nuclear temperatures may be given for the (n,2n) reaction. Each temperature, θ, may be
given as a function of incident neutron energy. In this case p1(E) = p2(E) = 0.5. A similar
procedure may be followed for the (n,3n) and other reactions.
A constant, U, is given for certain distribution laws (LF = 5, 7, 9, or 11). The constant, U, isprovided to define the proper upper limit for the secondary energy distribution so that 0 ≤ E′ ≤ E- U. The value of U depends on how the data are represented for a particular reaction type.
Consider U for inelastic scattering.

Case A: The total inelastic scattering cross section is described as a continuum. U is thethreshold energy for exciting the lowest level in the residual nucleus.
Case B: For the energy range considered, the first three levels are described explicitly (either inFile 3, MT = 51, 52, and 53, or in File 5), and the rest of the inelastic cross section istreated as a continuum. U is the threshold energy (known or estimated) for the fourthlevel in the residual nucleus.
If the reaction being described is fission, then U should be a large negative value (U =−20.0×106 eV to −30×106 eV). In this case neutrons can be born with energies much larger than
the incident neutron energy. It is common practice to describe the inelastic cross section as thesum of excitation cross sections (for discrete levels) for neutron energies up to the point wherelevel positions are no longer known. At this energy point, the total inelastic cross section istreated as a continuum. This practice can lead to erroneous secondary energy distributions forincident neutron energies just above the cutoff energy. It is recommended that the level
excitation cross sections for the first several levels (e.g., 4 or 5 levels) be estimated for several
MeV above the cutoff energy. The continuum portion of the inelastic cross section will be zeroat the cutoff energy, and it will not become the total inelastic cross section until several MeV
above the cutoff energy.
It is recommended that the cross sections for excitation of discrete inelastic levels be
described in File 3 (MT = 51, 52, ..., etc.). The angular distributions for the neutrons resulting
from these levels should be given in File 4 (the same MT numbers). The secondary energy
distributions for these neutrons can be obtained analytically from the data in Files 3 and 4. This
procedure is the only way in which the energy distributions can be given for these neutrons. For
inelastic scattering, the only data required in Files 5 are for MT = 91 (continuum part).

5.6

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

5.4. Additional Procedures
5.4.l. General Comments

1. Do not give File 5 data for the discrete level excitation data given in File 3 as MT = 51, 52,..., 90. If MT=91 is given in File 3, a section for MT=91 must be given in File 5 or File 6. A
section must also be given in File 5 or File 6 for all other neutron-producing reactions.
Continuum energy distributions for emitted protons, deuterons etc., may be given in MT=649
etc., and for photons, in File 6 or File 15. When more than one particle type is emitted, File 6
should be used to assure energy conservation.
2. Care must be used in selecting the distribution law number (LF) to represent the data. As arule, use the simplest law that will accurately represent the data.
3. A section in File 5 must cover the same incident energy range as was used for the same MT
number in File 3. The sum of the probabilities for all laws used must be equal to unity for all
incident energy points.
4. If the incident neutron energy exceeds several MeV, pre-equilibrium neutron emission can beimportant, as illustrated from high-resolution neutron and proton spectra measurements andanalysis of pulsed sphere experiments. In these cases either tabulated spectra or "mockedup" levels can be constructed to supplement or replace simple evaporation spectra.
5. Note that prompt fission spectra are given under MT=18, 19, 20, 21, and 38. The delayed
fission spectra are given under MT=455. The energy distribution for prompt spontaneous
fission is given in File 5 for MT=18, but in sublibrary 4. It is used with⎯νp from File 1(MT=456) to determine the prompt spontaneous fission spectrum. The delayed spontaneous
fission spectrum is determined from⎯νd from File 1 (MT=455) and the delayed energy
spectrum in File 5 MT=455. Note that for the specification of spontaneous spectra no crosssections from File 3 are required.
5.4.2. LF = 1 (Tabulated Distributions)
Use only tabulated distributions to represent complicated energy distributions. Use theminimum number of incident energy points and secondary neutron energy points to accurately
represent the data. The integral over secondary neutron energies for each incident energy point
must be unity to within four significant figures. All interpolation schemes must be with linearlinear or linear-log (INT=1,2, or 3) to preserve probabilities upon interpolation. All secondary
energy distributions must start and end with zero values for the distribution function g(E→E′).
5.4.3. LF = 7 (Maxwellian Spectrum)
A linear-linear interpolation scheme is preferred for specifying the nuclear temperature as afunction of energy.
5.4.4. LF = 9 (Evaporation Spectrum)An evaporation spectrum is preferred for most reactions. Care must be taken in describing
the nuclear temperature near the threshold of a reaction. Nuclear temperatures that are too large
can violate conservation of energy.

April 2001

5.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

5.4.5. LF = 11 (Watt Spectrum)
A linear-linear interpolation scheme is preferred for specifying the parameters a and b as afunction of energy.
5.4.6. LF = 12 (Madland-Nix Spectrum)
A log-log interpolation scheme may be used for specifying the parameter TM as a function ofincident neutron energy.
5.4.7. Selection of the Integration Constant, U

1. When LF = 5, 7, 9, or 11 is used, an integration constant U is required. This constant is usedin defining the upper energy limit of secondary neutrons; i.e., E′max = En – U, where En is theincident neutron energy. U is a constant for the complete energy range covered by asubsection in File 5 and is given in the LAB system.
2. U is negative for fission reactions. The preferred value is -20 MeV.
3. In practice, U can be taken to be the absolute value of Q for the lowest level (known or
estimated) that can be excited by the particular reaction within the incident energy range
covered by the subsection. U is actually a function of the incident neutron energy, but it canbe shown that it is always greater than the absolute value of Q and less than the thresholdenergy of the reaction. At large AWR, since Eth and |Q| are approximately equal, either
could be used but the absolute value of Q is preferred. At small AWR, using |Q| for U is thebest approximation and must be used.
4. The following four cases commonly occur in data files; procedures are given for obtaining U
values.
Case A: The complete reaction is treated as a continuum.
U = −Q, where Q is the reaction Q-value.
Case B: The reaction is described by excitation of three levels (in File 3 as MT = 51, 52, 53)
and a continuum part where Q4 is the known or estimated Q-value for the fourthlevel.
U = −Q4.
Case C: The reaction is described by excitation of three levels (in File 3 as MT=51, 52, and53) and a continuum part which extends below the threshold for MT=51. If, forexample, the reaction is a 3-body breakup reaction, use
U = −Q , where Q is the energy required for 3-body breakup.
Case D: The reaction is described by excitation of the first three levels (in File 3 as MT=51,
52, 53) for neutron energies from the level thresholds up to 20 MeV, excitation of
the next five levels (in File 3 as MT=54, ..., 58) from their thresholds up to 8 MeV,
and by a continuum part that starts at 5 MeV.
In this case two subsections should be used, one to describe the energy range from 5
to 8 MeV and another to describe the energy region from 8 to 20 MeV. In the first
subsection (5 - 8 MeV),
U = −Q9,and the second (8 - 20 MeV),
U = −Q4.

5.8

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

5.4.8. Multiple Nuclear Temperatures
Certain reactions, such as (n,2n), may require specification of more than one nuclear
temperature. θ(E) should be given for each neutron in the exit channels; this is done by using
more than one subsection for a reaction. The U value is the same for all subsections. The upper
energy limit is determined by the threshold energy and not by level densities in the residual
nuclei.
5.4.9. Average Energy for a Distribution
The average energy of a secondary neutron distribution must be less than the available
energy for the reaction:
1 + AWRQ,
E avail = E +AWR
where Eavail is greater than the neutron multiplicity times the average energy of all the emitted
neutron ν⎯E′, where ν is the multiplicity. The mean energy should be calculated from the
distribution at each value of E. This mean is analytic in the four cases given below.
LF

E′
3/ 2

7

3
θ 5/ 2 ⎛ E − U ⎞θ−⎜⎟I ⎝ θ ⎠29

θ 3 ⎛ E − U ⎞ − ( E −U ) / θ
2θ − ⎜⎟ e
I ⎝ θ ⎠e − ( E −U ) / θ

2

11

⎧
⎡ ⎛ Er⎛ Erab ⎞⎟⎪+ erf ⎜+−
⎢ erf ⎜⎜
⎜ 4
4 ⎟⎠
1 ⎪
a 3b ⎛ab ⎞ ⎢ ⎝ a⎛ ab ⎞⎝⎟⎜3 +⎨a exp⎜ ⎟ π
2I ⎪4 ⎝2 ⎠ ⎢⎢
2
⎝ 4 ⎠
⎪
⎢
⎣
⎩

ab ⎞⎟ ⎤⎥
4 ⎟⎠ ⎥
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎦

⎤
ab
⎛ E ⎞⎡ E
sinh bE r ⎥− 3a 2 ab exp⎜ − r ⎟ ⎢ r cosh bE r −4⎝ a ⎠ ⎢⎣ a
⎥⎦
⎫
⎪
⎤ ⎪
⎛ E r ⎞ ⎡⎛ E r ab ⎞2+
− 2a exp⎜ −⎟ sinh bE r − bE r cosh bE r ⎥ ⎬⎟ ⎢⎜4 ⎠⎝ a ⎠ ⎣⎝ a
⎦ ⎪⎪⎭where Er = E-U

121
4( EFL + EFH ) + TM
2
3

U is described in Section 5.3. The analytic functions for I are given in Section 5.1 for LF =7, 9, 11. For LF = 12, Section 5.4.10 gives the method for obtaining the integral of the
distribution function.
April 2001

5.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

5.4.10.
Additional procedures for LF = 12, Energy-Dependent Fission Neutron
Spectrum (Madland and Nix)
Integral over finite energy range [a,b].
Set:
α = TM , β = EF

( a + β ) /α
B = ( b + β ) /αA′ = ( a − β ) / α
B′ = ( b − β ) / α
2

A=

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Then,
the integral is given by one of the following three expressions depending on the region of
integration in which a and b lie.
Region I (a > EF, b > EF)b3( ET TM )1/ 2 ∫ g ( E ′, EF )dE ′ =a⎡⎛ 2 2 5 / 2 1⎤⎛ 2 2 5/ 2 12⎞2⎞⎢ ⎜ 5 α B − 2 αβ B ⎟ E1 ( B ) − ⎜ 5 α A − 2 αβ A ⎟ E1 ( A) ⎥
⎠
⎝
⎠
⎣⎝
⎦
1
1
⎡⎛ 2
⎤
⎞
⎛2
⎞
− ⎢ ⎜ α 2 B′5/ 2 + αβ B′2 ⎟ E1 ( B′) − ⎜ α 2 A′5/ 2 + αβ A′2 ⎟ E1 ( A′) ⎥
2
2
⎠
⎝5
⎠
⎣⎝ 5
⎦

+ ⎡⎣ (α 2 B − 2αβ B1/ 2 ) γ (3/ 2, B ) − (α 2 A − 2αβ A1/ 2 ) γ (3/ 2, A) ⎤⎦− ⎡⎣ (α 2 B′ + 2αβ B′1/ 2γ (3/ 2, B′) − (α 2 A′ + 2αβ A′1/ 2 ) γ (3/ 2, A′) ⎤⎦3− α 2 [γ (5 / 2, B ) − γ (5 / 2, A) − γ (5 / 2, B′) − γ (5 / 2, A′) ]53− αβ ⎡⎣ e − B (1 + B ) − e − A (1 + A) + e − B′ (1 + B′) − e − A′ (1 + A′) ⎤⎦5
Region II (a < EF, b < EF)b3( ET TM )1/ 2 ∫ g ( E ′, EF )dE ′ =a⎡ ⎛ 2 2 5/ 2 1⎤⎛ 2 2 5/ 2 12⎞2⎞⎢ ⎜ 5 α B − 2 αβ B ⎟ E1 ( B ) − ⎜ 5 α A − 2 αβ A ⎟ E1 ( A) ⎥
⎠
⎝
⎠
⎣⎝
⎦
1
1
⎡⎛ 2
⎤
⎞
⎛2
⎞
− ⎢ ⎜ α 2 B′5 / 2 + αβ B′2 ⎟ E1 ( B′) − ⎜ α 2 A′5 / 2 + αβ A′2 ⎟ E1 ( A′) ⎥
2
2
⎠
⎝5
⎠
⎣⎝ 5
⎦
+ ⎡⎣(α 2 B − 2αβ B1/ 2 ) γ (3/ 2, B ) − (α 2 A − 2αβ A1/ 2 ) γ (3/ 2, A) ⎤⎦− ⎡⎣ (α 2 B′ − 2αβ B′1/ 2γ (3/ 2, B′) − (α 2 A′ − 2αβ A′1/ 2 ) γ (3/ 2, A′) ⎤⎦5.10

3− α 2 [γ (5 / 2, B ) − γ (5 / 2, A) − γ (5 / 2, B′) + γ (5 / 2, A′) ]53− αβ ⎡⎣ e − B (1 + B ) − e − A (1 + A) + e − B′ (1 + B′) + e − A′ (1 + A′) ⎤⎦5

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Region III (a < EF, b > EF)b3( ET TM )1/ 2 ∫ g ( E ′, EF )dE ′ =a⎡⎛ 2 2 5 / 2 1⎤⎛ 2 2 5/ 2 12⎞2⎞⎢ ⎜ 5 α B − 2 αβ B ⎟ E1 ( B ) − ⎜ 5 α A − 2 αβ A ⎟ E1 ( A) ⎥
⎠
⎝
⎠
⎣⎝
⎦
1
1
⎡⎛ 2
⎤
⎞
⎛2
⎞
− ⎢ ⎜ α 2 B′5/ 2 + αβ B′2 ⎟ E1 ( B′) − ⎜ α 2 A′5/ 2 + αβ A′2 ⎟ E1 ( A′) ⎥
2
2
⎠
⎝5
⎠
⎣⎝ 5
⎦

+ ⎡⎣ (α 2 B − 2αβ B1/ 2 ) γ (3/ 2, B ) − (α 2 A − 2αβ A1/ 2 ) γ (3/ 2, A) ⎤⎦− ⎡⎣ (α 2 B′ + 2αβ B′1/ 2γ (3/ 2, B′) − (α 2 A′ + 2αβ A′1/ 2 ) γ (3/ 2, A′) ⎤⎦3− α 2 [γ (5 / 2, B ) − γ (5 / 2, A) − γ (5 / 2, B′) + γ (5 / 2, A′) ]53− αβ ⎡⎣ e − B (1 + B ) − e − A (1 + A) + e − B′ (1 + B′) + e − A′ (1 + A′) ⎤⎦5
The expression for Region III would be used to calculate a normalization integral I for thefinite integration constant U, if a physical basis existed by which U could be well determined.

April 2001

5.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

5.12

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Procedures

6. FILE 6. PRODUCT ENERGY-ANGLE DISTRIBUTIONS
6.1. General Description
This file is provided to represent the distribution of reaction products (i.e., neutrons, photons,
charged particles, and residual nuclei) in energy and angle. It works together with File 3, whichcontains the reaction cross sections, and replaces the combination of File 4 and File 5.
Radioactive products are identified in File 8. The use of File 6 is recommended when the energy
and angular distributions of the emitted particles must be coupled, when it is important to give a
concurrent description of neutron scattering and particle emission, when so many reaction
channels are open that it is difficult to provide separate reactions, or when accurate chargedparticle or residual-nucleus distributions are required for particle transport, heat deposition, orradiation damage calculations.
For the purposes of this file, any reaction is defined by giving the production cross section
for each reaction product in barns/steradian assuming azimuthal symmetry:σ i ( µ , E , E ′) = σ ( E ) yi ( E ) f i ( µ , E , E ′) / 2π
(6.1)
where i denotes one particular product,
E is the incident energy,
E′ is the energy of the product emitted with cosine µ,σ(E) is the interaction cross section (File 3),
yi is the product yield or multiplicity, andfi is the normalized distribution with units (eV-unit cosine)-1 where(6.2)∫ dE ′∫ d µ fi ( µ , E , E ′) = 1
This representation ignores most correlations between products and most sequential
reactions; that is, the distributions given here are those, which would be seen by an observer
outside of a "black box" looking at one particle at a time. The process being described may be a
combination of several different reactions, and the product distributions may be described using
several different representations.
6.2. Formats
The following quantities are defined for all representations.
ZA, AWR

Standard material charge and mass parameters.

LCT

Reference system for secondary energy and angle (incident energy is always
given in the LAB system).
LCT=1, laboratory (LAB) coordinates used for both;
LCT=2, center-of-mass (CM) system used for both;
LCT=3, center-of-mass system for both angle and energy of light particles(A≤4), laboratory system for heavy recoils (A>4).

NK

Number of subsections in this section (MT). Each subsection describes one
reaction product. There can be more than one subsection for a given particle
or residual nucleus (see LIP). NK≤2000.

ZAP

Product identifier 1000*Z+A with Z=0 for photons and A=0 for electronsand positrons. A section with A=0 can also be used to represent the averagerecoil energy or spectrum for an elemental target (see text).

August 2004

6.1

ENDF-1-2 Formats and Procedures

AWP

Product mass in neutron units.

LIP

Product modifier flag. Its main use is to identify the isomeric state of a
product nucleus. In this case, LIP=0 for the ground state, LIP=1 for the firstisomeric state, etc. These values should be consistent with LISO in File 8,
MT=457.
In some cases, it may be useful to use LIP to, distinguish between different
subsections with the same value of ZAP for light particles. For example,
LIP=0 could be the first neutron out for a sequential reaction, LIP=1 could
be the second neutron, and so on. Other possible uses might be to indicate
which compound system emitted the particles, or to distinguish between theneutron for the (n,np) channel and that from the (n,pn) channel. The exact
meaning assigned to LIP should be explained in the File 1, MT=451
comments.

LAW

Flag to distinguish between different representations of the distributionfunction, fi:
LAW=0, unknown distribution;
LAW=1, continuum energy-angle distribution;
LAW=2, two-body reaction angular distribution;
LAW=3, isotropic two-body distribution;
LAW=4, recoil distribution of a two-body reaction;
LAW=5, charged-particle elastic scattering;
LAW=6, n-body phase-space distribution; andLAW=7, laboratory angle-energy law.

NR, NP, Eint

Standard TAB1 parameters.

A section of File 6 has the following form:[MAT, 6, MT/ ZA, AWR,
0, LCT,[MAT, 6, MT/ ZAP, AWP, LIP, LAW,

NK,
NR,

0]HEAD
NP/Eint/yi(E)]TAB1[LAW-dependent structure for product 1]----------------------------<repeat TAB1 and LAW-dependent structures for rest of theNK subsections>----------------------------[MAT, 6, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,

0,

0,

0,

0]SEND

File 6 should have a subsection for every product of the reaction or sum of reactions being
described except for MT = 3, 4, 103-107 when they are being used to represent lumped photons.
The subsections are arranged in the following order: (1) particles (n, p, d, etc.) in order of ZAP
and LIP, (2) residual nuclei and isomers in order of ZAP and LIP, (3) photons, and (4) electrons.
The contents of the subsection for each LAW are described below.

6.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Procedures

6.2.1. Unknown Distribution (LAW=0)
This law simply identifies a product without specifying a distribution. It can be used to giveproduction yields for particles, isomers, radioactive nuclei, or other interesting nuclei inmaterials that are not important for particle transport, heating, or radiation damage calculations.
No law-dependent structure is given.
6.2.2. Continuum Energy-Angle Distributions (LAW=1)
This law is used to describe particles emitted in multi-body reactions or combinations ofseveral reactions, such as scattering through a range of levels or reactions at high energies where
many channels are normally open. For isotropic reactions, it is very similar to File 5, LF=1
except for a special option to represent sharp peaks as "delta functions" and the use of LIST
instead of TAB1.
The following quantities are defined for LAW=1:
LANG

LEP

NR, NE, Eint

NW
NEP
ND

NA

August 2004

Indicator which selects the angular representation to be used; if
LANG=1, Legendre coefficients are used,
LANG=2, Kalbach-Mann systematics are used,
LANG=11-15, a tabulated angular distribution is given using NA/2 cosines
and the interpolation scheme specified by LANG−10 (for example,
LANG=12 selects linear-linear interpolation).
Interpolation scheme for secondary energy;
LEP=1 for histogram,
LEP=2 for linear-linear, etc.
Standard TAB2 parameters.
INT=1 is allowed (the upper limit is implied by file 3),
INT=12-15 is allowed for corresponding-point interpolation,
INT=21-25 is allowed for unit base interpolation.
Total number of words in the LIST record; NW = NEP (NA+2).
Number of secondary energy points in the distribution.
Number of discrete energies given.
The first ND≥0 entries in the list of NEP energies are discrete, and theremaining (NEP-ND)≥0 entries are to be used with LEP to describe acontinuous distribution. Discrete primary photons should be flagged withnegative energies.
Number of angular parameters.
Use NA=0 for isotropic distributions (note that all options are identical ifNA=0).
Use NA=1 or 2 with LANG=2 (Kalbach-Mann).

6.3

ENDF-1-2 Formats and Procedures

The structure of a subsection is[MAT, 6, MT/[MAT, 6, MT/

0.0,
0.0,
LANG, LEP,NR,
NE/Eint]TAB2
0.0,
E1,
ND,
NA,
NW, NEP/
E′1, b0(E1,E′1),b1(E1,E′1),------ bNA(E1,E′1),
E′2, b0(E1,E′2), ---------------------E′NEP,b0(E1,E′NEP), ------------ bNA(E1,E′NEP)]LIST---------------------------------------<continue with LIST structures for the rest of the NE incident energies>---------------------------------------

where the contents of the bi depend on LANG.
The angular part of fi can be represented in several different ways (denoted by LANG).
LANG=1
If LANG=1, Legendre coefficients are used as follows:
NA 2l + 1
(6.3)
f i ( µ , E , E ′) = ∑ l =0f l ( E , E ′) Pl ( µ )2where NA is the number of angular parameters, and the other parameters have their previous
meanings. Note that these coefficients are not normalized like those for discrete two-bodyscattering (LAW=2); instead, f0(E,E′) gives the total probability of scattering from E to E′
integrated over all angles. This is just the function g(E,E′) normally given in File 5. The
Legendre coefficients are stored with f0 in b0, f1 in b1, etc.
LANG=2
For LANG=2, the angular distribution is represented by using the Kalbach-Mann systematics[Ref.1] in the extended form developed by Kalbach [Ref.2], hereinafter referred to as KA88. The
distribution is given in terms of the parameters r and a, which are described below. If NA = 1, theparameter r is given and a is calculated. If NA = 2, then both parameters r and a are given
explicitly.

This formulation addresses reactions of the form
A + a → C → B + b,
where:A is the target, a is the incident projectile,
C is the compound nucleus,b is the emitted particle, B is the residual nucleus.

The following quantities are defined:Ea
εaenergy of the incident projectile a in the laboratory systementrance channel energy, the kinetic energy of the incident projectile a and thetarget particle A in the center-of-mass system
AWR A
AWR A + AWRa
energy of the emitted particle in the laboratory systememission channel energy, the kinetic energy of the emission particle b and theresidual nucleus B in the center-of-mass system
AWRB
ε b = Eb ×
AWRB + AWRb

ε a = Ea ×

Eb
εb

6.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Proceduresµb

cosine of the scattering angle of the emitted particle b in the center-of-mass system

It is required that LCT=2 with LANG=2.
The KA88 distribution is represented by⎡ a( E , E )⎡cosh ( a ( Ea , Eb ) µb )⎤⎤abf ( µb , Ea , Eb ) = 0.5 * f 0 ( Ea , Eb ) ⎢⎢⎥ ⎥ (6.4)⎢⎣ sinh ( a ( Ea , Eb ) ) ⎢⎣ + r ( Ea , Eb ) sinh ( a( Ea , Eb ) µb ) ⎥⎦ ⎥⎦where r(Ea,Eb) is the pre-compound fraction as given by the evaluator and a(Ea,Eb) is a
simple parameterized function that depends mostly on the center-of-mass emission
energy Eb, but also depends slightly on particle type and the incident energy at higher
values of Ea.
The center-of-mass energies and angles Eb and µb are transformed into the laboratory systemusing the expressions
AWRa AWRb
AWRa AWRb
Eb,lab = Eb,cm +Ea ,lab + 2
Ea ,lab Eb,cm µb,cm
2( AWRA + AWRa )AWRA + AWRa
(6.5)
Eb,cm
AWRa AWRb Ea ,lab
µb,lab =µb,cm +
Eb,labAWRA + AWRa Eb,lab
The pre-compound fraction r, where r goes from 0.0 to 1.0, is usually computed by a model
code, although it can be chosen to fit experimental data.
The formula for calculating the slope value a(Ea,Eb)1 is:a ( E a , E b ) = C1 X 1 + C 2 X 13 + C 3 M a mb X 34

whereea = εa + Sa
R1 = minimum(ea,Et1)
X1 = R1eb/ea

eb = εb + Sb
R3 = minimum(ea,Et3)
X3 = R3eb/ea

The parameter values for light particle induced reactions as given in KA882 are:C1 = 0.04/MeV
C2 = 1.8×10-6/MeV3
C3 = 6.7×10-7/MeV4
Et1 = 130 MeV
Et3 = 41 MeV
Mp = 1
Mn = 1
Md = 1Mα = 0mp = 1mn = 1/2
mt = 1
md = 1
m3He = 1mα = 2
Sa and Sb are the separation energies for the incident and emitted particles, respectively,
neglecting pairing and other effects for the reaction A + a → C → B + b. The formulae for the
separation energies in MeV3 are:1

Equation 10 of Ref. 2.
Table V of ref. 2.
3
Equation 4 of Ref. 2.
2

August 2004

6.5

ENDF-1-2 Formats and Procedures⎡ ( N − ZC )2 ( N A − Z A )2 ⎤−S a = 15.68 [ AC − A ] − 28.06 ⎢ C
⎥
AA
AA
⎣
⎦
⎡ ( N − Z )2 ( N A − Z A )2 ⎤− 18.56 ⎡⎣ AC2 / 3 − AA2 / 3 ⎤⎦ + 33.22 ⎢ C 2 / 3 C −⎥AC
AA2 / 3⎣⎦
⎡ Z C2⎡ Z C2 Z A2 ⎤Z A2 ⎤− 0.717 ⎢ 1/ 3 − 1/ 3 ⎥ + 1.211 ⎢−⎥ − IaAA ⎦⎣ AC⎣ AC AA ⎦and⎡(N − Z C )2 (N B − Z B ) 2 ⎤S b = 15.68[ AC − AB ] − 28.07 ⎢ C
−
⎥
AA
AB
⎦
⎣
⎡(N − Z ) 2 (N B − Z B ) 2 ⎤− 18.56 AC2 / 3 − AB2 / 3 + 33.22 ⎢ C 2 / 3 C −⎥AC
AB2 / 3⎣⎦[]

⎡Z 2 Z 2 ⎤
⎡ Z2
Z2 ⎤
− 0.717 ⎢ 1C/ 3 − 1B/ 3 ⎥ + 1.211⎢ C − B ⎥ − I b
AB ⎦⎣ AC AB ⎦
⎣ AC

where
subscripts A, B, and C refer to the target nucleus, the residual nucleus, and the compound
nucleus, as before,
N, Z, and A are the neutron, proton, and mass numbers of the nuclei,
Ia and Ib are the energies required to separate the incident and emitted particles into theirconstituent nucleons (see Appendix H for values used for given particles).
The parameter f0(Ea,Eb) has the same meaning as f0 in Eq. (6.3); that is, the total emission
probability for this Ea and Eb. The number of angular parameters (NA) is always 1 for LANG=2,
and f0 and r are stored in the positions of b0 and b1, respectively.
This formulation uses a single-particle-emission concept; it is assumed that each and every
secondary particle is emitted from the original compound nucleus C. When the incident
projectile a, and the emitted particle b, are the same, Sa = Sb, regardless of the reaction. For
incident projectile z, if neutrons emitted from the compound nucleus C are detected, there will be
one and only one Sb appropriate for all reactions, for example, (z,nα), (z,n3α), (z,2nα), (z,np),(z,2n2α), and (z,nt2α). Furthermore, if the incident projectile is a neutron (z=n in previous
examples), then Sa = Sb in all cases; even for neutrons emitted in neutron-induced reactions, Sa
and Sb will be identical.
LANG = 11-15
For LANG=11-15, a tabulated function is given for f(µ) using the interpolation scheme
defined by LANG minus 10. For example, if LANG=12, use linear-linear interpolation (don't
use log interpolation with the cosine). The cosine grid of NA/2 values, µi, must span the entire
angular range open to the particle for E and E′, and the integral of f(µ) over all angles must givethe total emission probability for this E and E′ (that is, it must equal f0, as defined above). The
value of f below µNA/1 or above µNA/2 is zero.

6.6

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Procedures

The tabulation is stored in the angular parameters as follows:b0 = f0,
b1 = µ1,b2 = 0.5f1(µ1)/f0,
b3 = µ2,...
...
bNA = 0.5fNA/2(µNA/2)/f0.
The preferred values for NA are 4, 10, 16, 22, etc.
In order to provide a good representation of sharp peaks, LAW=1 allows for a superpositionof a continuum and a set of delta functions. These discrete lines could be used to represent
particle excitations in the CM frame because the method of corresponding points can be used tosupply the correct energy dependence. However, the use of LAW=2 together with MT=50-90,
600-650, etc., is preferred. This option is also useful when photon production is given in File 6.
6.2.3. Discrete Two-Body Scattering (LAW=2)
This law is used to describe the distribution in energy and angle of particles described by
two-body kinematics. It is very similar to File 4, except its use in File 6 allows the concurrent
description of the emission of positrons, electrons, photons, neutrons, charged particles, residual
nuclei, and isomers. Since the energy of a particle emitted with a particular scattering cosine µ is
determined by kinematics, it is only necessary to givepi ( µ , E ) = ∫ dE ′f i ( µ , E , E ′)NL
(6.6)
2l + 1al ( E ) Pl ( µ ) ,= 0.5 + ∑2
l +1

where the Pl are the Legendre polynomials with the maximum order NL. Note that theangular distribution pi is normalized.
The following quantities are defined for LAW=2:
LANG

NR, NE, Eint
NL
NW

Al

August 2004

flag that indicates the representation:
LANG=0, Legendre expansion;
LANG=12, tabulation with pi(µ) linear in µ;LANG=14, tabulation with 1n pi linear in µ.
standard TAB2 parameters.
for LANG=0, NL is the highest Legendre order used;for LANG>0, NL is the number of cosines tabulated.
number of parameters given in the LIST record:for LANG=0, NW=NL;
for LANG>0, NW=2*NL.
for LANG=0, the Legendre coefficients,for LANG>0, the, µ,pi pairs for the tabulated angular distribution

6.7

ENDF-1-2 Formats and Procedures

The format for a subsection with LAW=2 is[MAT, 6, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0, 0, NR, NE/ Eint ]TAB2[MAT, 6, MT/ 0.0, E1 ,LANG, 0, NW, NL/Al(E)]LIST---------------------------<continue with LIST records for the
rest of the incident energies>---------------------------

Note that LANG=0 is very similar to File 4, LTT=1, and LVT=0. The tabulated option issimilar to File 4, LTT=2, LVT=0, except that a LIST record is used instead of TAB1. The
kinematical equations require AWR and AWP from File 6 and QI from File 3.
LAW=2 can be used in sections with MT=50-90, 600-648, 650-698, etc., only, and the center-ofmass system must be used (LCT=2).
6.2.4. Isotropic Discrete Emission (LAW=3)
This law serves the same purpose as LAW=2, but the angular distribution is assumed to be
isotropic in the CM system for all incident energies. No LAW-dependent structure is given.
This option is similar to LI=1 in File 4. The energy of the emitted particle is completely
determined by AWR and AWP in this section and QI from File 3.
6.2.5. Discrete Two-Body Recoils (LAW=4)
If the recoil nucleus of a two-body reaction (e.g., nn?, pn) described using LAW=2 or 3
doesn't break up, its energy and angular distribution can be determined by kinematics. No LAWdependent structure is given. If isomer production is possible, multiple subsections with LAW=4
can be given to define the energy-dependent branching ratio for the production of each excitednucleus. Finally, LAW=4 may be used to describe the recoil nucleus after radiative capture(MT=102), with the understanding that photon momentum at low energies must be treatedapproximately.
6.2.6. Charged-Particle Elastic Scattering (LAW=5)
Elastic scattering of charged particles includes components from Coulomb scattering, nuclear
scattering, and the interference between them. The Coulomb scattering is represented by the
Rutherford formula and electronic screening is ignored.
The following parameters are defined.

σcd(µ,E)σci(µ,E)Eµ
m1
Z1 and Z2
s
A
k
η

6.8

differential Coulomb scattering cross section (barns/sr) for distinguishable
particles
cross section for identical particles
energy of the incident particle in the laboratory system (eV)cosine of the scattering angle in the center-of-mass system
incident particle mass (AMU)
charge numbers of the incident particle and target, respectively
spin (identical particles only, s = 0, 1/2, 1, 3/2, etc.)
target/projectile mass ratio
particle wave number (barns-1/2)
dimensionless Coulomb parameter

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Procedures

The cross sections can then be written

σ cd ( µ , E ) =η2
k 2 (1 − µ ) 2

(6.7)

and

σ ci ( µ , E ) =⎡ 1 + µ 2 ( −1) 2 s⎛ 1 + µ ⎞⎤2η 2+cosη ⎜ ln
⎟⎥
2
2 ⎢
2
2s + 1k (1 − µ ) ⎣ 1 − µ⎝ 1 − µ ⎠⎦

(6.8)

where
1/ 2

k=

A ⎡2
⎤
m1E ⎥
⎢
1+ A ⎣h⎦(6.9)
1⎡⎛ e 4 ⎞ m1 ⎤ 2
η = Z1Z 2 ⎢⎜ 2 ⎟ ⎥⎣ ⎝ 2h ⎠ E ⎦(6.10)

Note that A = 1 and Z1 = Z2 for identical particles.
The net elastic scattering cross section for distinguishable particles may be written as⎧⎫2η
1 − µ ⎞ NL 2l + 1⎛
σ ed ( µ , E ) = σ cd ( µ , E ) −Re ⎨exp ⎜ iη lnal ( E ) Pl ( µ ) ⎬⎟∑1− µ2 ⎠ l =0 2⎝⎩⎭NL
2l + 1bl ( E ) Pl ( µ )
+∑
2
l =0
and the cross section for identical particles is
σ ei ( µ , E ) = σ ci ( µ , E )(6.11)⎧ ⎡⎫1− µ ⎞⎤⎛⎪ NL ⎢ (1 + µ ) exp ⎜ iη ln
⎟
⎪
⎥
2 ⎠
2η
⎪
⎝
⎥ 2l + 1 al ( E ) Pl ( µ ) ⎪⎬ (6.12)
Re ⎨ ∑ ⎢−2
1− µ⎪ l =0 ⎢ + ( −1)l (1 − µ ) exp ⎛ iη ln 1 + µ ⎞ ⎥ 2
⎪
⎜
⎟⎥
⎪⎩ ⎣⎢
⎪
2
⎝
⎠⎦
⎭
NL
4l + 1bl ( E ) P2 l ( µ )
+∑
2
l =0
where the al are complex coefficients for expanding the trace of the nuclear scattering
amplitude matrix and the bl are real coefficients for expanding the nuclear scatteringcross section. The value of NL represents the highest partial wave contributing to nuclear
scattering. Note that σei(-µ,E) = σei(µ,E).
The three terms in Equations (6.11) and (6.12) are Coulomb, interference, and nuclear
scattering, respectively. Since an integrated cross section is not defined for this representation, avalue of 1.0 is used in File 3.
When only experimental data are available, it is convenient to remove the infinity due to σC
by subtraction and to remove the remaining infinity in the interference term by multiplication,
thereby obtaining the residual cross sections
σ Rd ( µ , E ) = (1 − µ ) [σ ed ( µ , E ) − σ cd ( µ , E ) ](6.13)

August 2004

6.9

ENDF-1-2 Formats and Proceduresandσ Ri ( µ , E ) = (1 − µ 2 ) [σ ei ( µ , E ) − σ ci ( µ , E ) ]Then σR can be given as a Legendre polynomial expansion in the forms
NL
2l + 1cld ( E ) Pl ( µ )σ Rd ( µ , E ) = ∑
2
l =0
and
NL
4l + 1cli ( E ) P2 l ( µ )σ Ri ( µ , E ) = ∑2
l =0(6.14)(6.15)(6.16)A cross section value of 1.0 is used in File 3.
Because the interference term oscillates as µ goes to 1, the limit of the Legendre
representation of the residual cross section at small angles may not be well defined. However, if
the coefficients are chosen properly, the effect of this region will be small because the Coulomb
term is large.
It is also possible to represent experimental data using the "nuclear plus interference" crosssection and angular distribution in the CM system defined byµ max

σ NI ( µ , E ) = ∫ [σ e ( µ , E ) − σ c ( µ , E )] d µ(6.17)µ min

and
PNI ( µ , E ) =σ e (µ, E ) − σ c (µ, E ), µ min ≤ µ ≤ µ max
σ NI ( E )(6.18)= 0 , otherwise,
where µmin is -1 for different particles and 0 for identical particles. The maximum cosine
should be as close to 1.0 as possible, especially at high energies where Coulomb scattering is lessimportant. The Coulomb cross section σc(µ,E) is to be computed using Eqs. (6.7) or (6.8) for
different or identical particles, respectively. The angular distribution pNI is given in File 6 as atabulated function of µ, and σNI(E) in barns is given in File 3.
The following quantities are defined for LAW=5:
SPI
LIDP
LTP

NR, NE, Eint
NL

6.10

Spin of the particle. Used for identical particles (SPI=0, 1/2, 1, etc.).
Indicates that the particles are identical when LIDP=1; otherwise, LIDP=0.
Indicates the representation:
LTP=1, nuclear amplitude expansion (Eq. 6.11, 6.12);
LTP=2, residual cross section expansion as Legendre coefficients (Eq. 6.13
through 6.16);
LTP=12, nuclear plus interference distribution with pNI linear in µ (Eq. 6.17
and 6.18);
LTP=14, tabulation with ln PNI linear in µ (Eq. 6.17 and 6.18).
LTP=15, tabulation with PNI linear in µ (Eq. 6.17 and 6.18).
Standard TAB2 parameters.
For LTP≤2, NL is the highest Legendre order of nuclear partial waves used;
For LTP>2, NL is the number of cosines tabulated.

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Procedures

NW

Ai(E)

Number of parameters given in the LIST record:for LTP=1 and LIDP=0, NW=4*NL+3;
for LTP=1 and LIDP=1, NW=3*NL+3;
for LTP=2, NW=NL+1; and for LTP>2, NW=2*NL.
Coefficients (ai, bi, or ci as described below) in barns/sr or µ,p pairs with pdimensionless.

A subsection for LAW=5 has the following form:[MAT, 6, MT/ SPI, 0.0, LIDP, 0, NR, NE/ Eint ]TAB2[MAT, 6, MT/ 0.0, E1, LTP, 0, NW, NL/A1(E1)]LIST-------------------------------<continue with LIST records for the rest of the NE
incident energies>-------------------------------

The coefficients in the text of the LIST are organized as follows:
LTP=1 and LIDP=0,b0, b1, ...b2NL, Ra0, Ia0, Ra1, Ia1, ...IaNL;
LTP=1 and LIDP=1,
b0, b1, ...b2NL, Ra0, Ia0, Ra1, Ia1, ...IaNL;
LTP=2,
c0, c1, ... cNL; and
LTP>2,µ1, pNI(µ1), ... µNL, pNI(µNL).
6.2.7. N-Body Phase-Space Distributions (LAW=6)
In the absence of detailed information, it is often useful to use n-body phase-space
distributions for the particles emitted from neutron and charged- particle reactions. These
distributions conserve energy and momentum, and they provide reasonable kinematic limits forsecondary energy and angle in the LAB system.
The phase-space distribution for particle i in the CM system is
Pi cm ( µ , E , E ′) = Cn E ′ ( Eimax − E ′)(3n / 2) −4(6.19)
max
where Ei is the maximum possible center-of-mass energy for particle i,µ and E′ are in the cm system, andCn are normalization constants:
4C3 =(6.20)
π ( Eimax ) 2105
C4 =(6.21)
32( Eimax )7 / 2
256
C5 =(6.22)
14π ( Eimax )5

August 2004

6.11

ENDF-1-2 Formats and Procedures

In the laboratory system, the distributions become()

Pi lab ( µ , E , E ′) = Cn E ′ ⎡ Eimax − E * + E ′ − 2 µ E * E ′ ⎤⎢⎣⎥⎦*where µ and E ′ are in the laboratory system and E is given by(3 n / 2) − 4(6.23)

Aincident(6.24)E =E( AWR + Aexit ) 2
and A incident and A exit are the mass ratios of the incident and exit particles, respectively.
*

In the general case, the range of both E′ and µ is limited by the condition that the quantity insquare brackets remains non-negative.
The value of Eimax is a fraction of the energy available in CM,
M − miEimax =
Ea
(6.25)
M
where M is the total mass of the n particles being treated by this law.
Note that M may be less than the total mass of products for reactions such as
α + 9Be → n + 3α
where the neutron can be treated as a two-body event and the alphas by a 3-body phasespace law. The parameter APSX is provided so that Eimax can be determined without
having to process the other subsections of this section.
The energy available in CM for one-step reactions is
mT
Ea =
E +Q
m p + mT
where mT is the target mass,
mp is the projectile mass,
E is the LAB energy, andQ is the reaction QI value from File 3.

(6.26)For two-step reactions such as the one discussed above, Ea is just the recoil energy from thefirst step.
The following quantities are defined for LAW=6:
APSX
NPSX

total mass in neutron units of the n particles being treated by the law.
number of particles distributed according to the phase-space law.

Only a CONT record is given[MAT, 6, MT/ APSX, 0.0,0,0,0, NPSX]CONT

6.2.8. Laboratory Angle-Energy Law (LAW = 7)
The continuum energy-angle representation (LAW=1) is good for nuclear model code results
and for experimental data that have been converted to Legendre coefficients. However, since
experiments normally give spectra at various fixed angles, some evaluators may prefer to enter
data sorted according to (E,µ,E′), rather than the LAW=1 ordering (E,E′,µ).
The following quantities are defined for LAW=7:

6.12

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Procedures

normal TAB2 parameters for incident energy, E.
NR, NE, Eint
NRM, NMU, µint normal TAB2 parameters for emission cosine, µ.
NRP, NEP, E′int normal TAB1 parameters for secondary energy, E′.
The structure of a subsection is:[MAT, 6, MT/ 0.0,
0.0,
0, 0,
NR,
NE/Eint ]TAB2[MAT, 6, MT/ 0.0,
E1 ,
0, 0,
NRM, NMU/µint ]TAB2[MAT, 6, MT/ 0.0,
µ1 ,
0, 0,
NRP, NEP/E′int/
E′1 ,f(µ1,E1,E′1), E′2,f(µ1,E1,E′2), ---------------------- E′NEP, f(µ1,E1,E′NEP)]TAB1------------------------------------<continue with TAB2 structures for the rest of the
NMU emission cosines>-------------------------------------<continue with TAB2/TAB1 structures for the restof the NE incident energies>------------------------------------

where f(µ,E,E′) is defined as in Eq. (6.1).
Emission cosine and secondary energy must be given in the laboratory system for LAW=7.
Also, both variables must cover the entire angle-energy range open to the emitted particle.
6.3. Procedures
File 6 and incident charged particles are new for ENDF/B-VI, and it will take time fordetailed procedures to evolve. The following comments are in tended to clarify some features ofthe format.
6.3.1. Elastic Scattering
For ENDF/B-VI, neutron elastic scattering is represented by giving a cross section in File 3,
MT=2 (with resonance contributions in File 2) and an angular distribution in File 4, MT=2. This
representation is compatible with previous versions of the ENDF format.
Charged-particle elastic scattering uses MF=3, MT=2, and MF=6, MT=2, but the crosssection in File 3 is set equal to 1.0 at all energies represented using LTP=1 and LTP=2. For
LTP=12 and LTP=14, File 3 must contain σNI(E) in barns. The elastic File 6 uses LAW=5.
Whenever possible, the nuclear amplitude expansion should be used. Note that the a and bcoefficients are not independent, being related by their mutual dependence on the nuclear
scattering amplitudes, which are themselves constrained by unitarity and various conservation
conditions. Thus, any attempt to fit data directly with expressions (6.13) or (6.14) would
underdetermine the a's and b's, giving spurious values for them. The only feasible procedure is
to fit the experimental data in terms of a direct parametrization of the nuclear scattering
amplitudes (phase shifts, etc.) and extract the a and b coefficients from them.
The second representation (LTP=2) can be used when an approximate direct fit to theexperimental data is desired. The simple pole approximation for the Coulomb amplitude impliedby this representation becomes increasingly poor at lower energies and smaller angles. Since thedeficiencies of the approximation are masked by the dominance of the Rutherford cross sectionin the same region, however, one could expect a reasonable representation of the net scattering

August 2004

6.13

ENDF-1-2 Formats and Procedurescross section at all energies and angles, provided that the coefficients C1 are determined byfitting data excluding the angular region where the Rutherford cross section is dominant.
Tabulated distributions (LTP=12 or 14) are also useful for direct fits to experimental data. In
this case, the choice of the cutoff cosine is used to indicate the angular region where Rutherford
scattering is dominant.
Figures 6.1 and 6.2 illustrate a typical cross section computed with amplitudes and thecorresponding residual cross-section representation.
500

p+3He elastic
10 MeV

400

300

200

100

0

0

30

60
90
120
c.m. Scattering Angle (degrees)

150

180

Figure 6.1 Example of Charged-Particle Elastic Scattering Cross Section

0.4

p+3He elastic
10 MeV

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.0

-0.1

0

30

60
90
120
c.m. Scattering Angle (degrees)

150

180

Figure 6.2 Example of Residual Cross Section for Elastic Scattering
6.14

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Procedures

6.3.2.Photons
Emitted photons are described using a subsection with ZAP=0. The spectrum is obtained asa sum of discrete photons (delta functions) and a continuum distribution packed into one LIST
record. The discrete photons (if any) are given first. They are tabulated in order of decreasingenergy, and their energy range may overlap the continuum. The continuum (if any) is given
next, and the energies must be in increasing order. Corresponding-point or unit-baseinterpolation is applied separately to the discrete and continuum segments of the record. A
separate angular distribution can be attached to each discrete photon or to each energy of a
distribution, but the isotropic form (NA=0) is usually adequate.
For a two-body discrete-level reaction, all the discrete photons produced by cascades fromthe given level should be included under the same reaction (MT) so that the reaction explicitly
conserves energy. This scheme also gives simple energy-independent yields and simple spectra.
If the level structure is not known well enough to separate the contributions to the intensity of aparticular photon by reaction, the photons can be lumped together in a summation MT with therestriction that energy be conserved for the sum of all reactions.
As an example, consider the typical level structure for the reaction A(i,p)R shown in Figure
6.3. Assume that the secondary protons are described by discrete levels in MT=600-603 and acontinuum in MT=649. As many discrete photons as possible should be given with theirassociated direct level. Thus, the production of arising from direct excitation of the first levelshould be given in MT=601 (the yield will be 1.0 in the absence of internal conversion).

649

603

γ2

602
γ1

γ3
601

Figure 6.3
Typical Level Structure for Proton-Induced Photon Production

Photons (γ1, γ2, and γ3) should be given in MT=602 using the simple constant yields
computed from the branching factors and conversion ratios. This process should be continued
until the knowledge of the cascades begins to get fuzzy. All the remaining production of γ1, γ2,γ3, and all photons associated with higher levels (603 and 649 in this case), are then given in the
redundant MT=103 using energy-dependent yields and a combination of discrete bins and acontinuous distribution.
Photons produced during multi-body reactions should also be tabulated under the reaction
MT number so that each reaction independently conserves energy when possible. If necessary,
the photons can be lumped together under the redundant MT=3 as long as energy is conserved
for the sum of all reactions.

August 2004

6.15

ENDF-1-2 Formats and Procedures

6.3.3.Particles
Isotropic or low-order distributions are often sufficient for the charged particles emitted incontinuum reactions because of their short ranges. The angular distributions of emitted neutrons
may be needed in more detail because of their importance in shielding calculations.
Note that the angular distributions of identical particles must be symmetric in the CM
system. This is true whether the identical particles are in the entrance channel or the exit channel.
Symmetry is enforced by setting all odd Legendre components to zero, or by making pi(µ) =pi(-µ).
6.3.4.Neutron Emission
It is important to represent the spectrum of emitted neutrons as realistically as possible due totheir importance for shielding, activation, and fission. Small emission probabilities for lowenergy neutrons may acquire increased importance due to the large cross sections at low
energies. However, many modern evaluations are done with nuclear model codes that represent
emission in energy bins (that is, histograms). Direct use of such calculations would severely
distort the effects of emitted neutrons (although the representation would be reasonable for
emitted charged particles). In such cases, the evaluator should fit a realistic evaporation shape to
his low-energy neutron emission and use this shape to generate additional points for the energy
distribution.
6.3.5.Recoil Distributions
The energy distribution of the recoil nucleus is needed to compute radiation damage andshould be provided for structural materials whenever possible. Nuclear heating depends on the
average recoil energy, and an average or full distribution should be provided for all isotopes thatare used in reasonable concentrations in the common applications. All recoil information can beomitted for minor isotopes that only affect activation. Recoil angular distributions are rarely
needed. Particle, photon, and recoil distributions taken together should conserve energy.
To enter only recoil average energy, use NEP=1 and ND=1; the recoil spectrum becomes adelta function at the average energy. Average energy must be entered even though it can becomputed from the other distributions.
At high energies, it becomes difficult to represent the recoil distribution in the center-of-massframe, even when that frame remains appropriate for the distribution of light particles (A≤4). In
such cases, use LCT=3,4 giving the light particles in the CM frame (normally with Kalbach
systematics), and the heavy recoil energy spectrum as isotropic in the laboratory frame. Suchisotropic distributions are normally adequate for representing energy deposition and damage.
6.3.6.Elements as Targets
Targets which are elements can be represented by using a ZA with A=0 as usual. An attemptshould be made to tabulate every product of a reaction with an element.

4

LCT=3 is only appropriate for LAW=1 and LANG≠2.

6.16

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Procedures

As an example, natFe(n,2n) will produce 53Fe and 54Fe in addition to more 56Fe and 57Fe. The
product yields in File 6 can be converted to production or activation cross sections for each ofthese species without having recourse to isotopic evaluations. However, it would be difficult togive a recoil spectrum for each of these nuclei in full detail. Therefore, the evaluator is allowed
to give a single total recoil spectrum with ZAP=ZA, where A=0. The yield should be 1.0 and
AWP should be an appropriate average recoil mass. This subsection is redundant, and the user
should be careful to avoid double counting.
6.3.7. CM versus LAB
Some energy-angle distributions show relatively sharp features (from levels) superimposedon a smoother continuum (see Figure 6.4). If such a distribution is given in the CM system, theposition of these peaks in E′ is independent of the scattering angle as shown in Eq. (C.5). This
helps assure that the angular distribution given for each E and E′ will be fairly simple. Further
more, the E′ for a given sharp peak is a linear function of incident energy E, thus thecorresponding-point or unit-base interpolation schemes can be set up to follow the peak exactly.
Sharp lines can be represented as delta functions as described for photons, or a more realistic
width and shape can be given in tabulated form.

σ
E

E2

E1

Figure 6.4
Typical Energy Spectrum Showing Levels on a Continuum

Therefore, the CM system should be used for representing secondary energy and scattering
angle whenever relatively sharp features are found, even for reactions with three or moreparticles in the final state. The transformation to LAB coordinates is made by doing vector sumsof the emitted particle CM velocities and the LAB velocity of the center of mass of the initialcolliding system.
Experimental data are usually provided at fixed angles in the LAB system. It may often be
difficult to convert the data to constant energies in the CM system as recommended by thisformat. However, transport calculations require data for the full range of angle and energy, andfull ranges are required to get accurate values of the integrated cross sections from theexperimental distributions. The most accurate way to do this process of interpolation andextrapolation is probably to model the distribution in the CM and adjust it to represent the LAB
data. The numbers recommended for this format automatically arise from this process.

August 2004

6.17

ENDF-1-2 Formats and Procedures

6.3.8. Phase Space
Comparison of experimental data with a phase-space prediction will often show overall
qualitative agreement except for several broad or narrow peaks. It is desirable to represent thosepeaks using LAW=2 or 3. The remainder may be small enough to represent reasonably wellwith one of the phase-space laws.
In the absence of complete experimental data, it is recommended that the evaluator supply aphase-space distribution. This assures that energy will be conserved and gives reasonablekinematic limits on energy and angle in the laboratory system. Later comparisons between theevaluation and data may indicate possible improvements in the evaluation.
REFERENCES
1. C. Kalbach and F. M. Mann, Phenomenology of continuous angular distributions. I.
Systematics and parametrization, Phys. Rev. C 23 (1981) 112
2. C. Kalbach, Systematics of Continuum Angular Distributions: Extensions to Higher
Energies, Phys. Rev. C 37 (1988) 2350

6.18

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

7. FILE 7. THERMAL NEUTRON SCATTERING LAW DATA
7.1. General Description
File 7 contains neutron scattering data for the thermal neutron energy range (E<5 eV) for
moderating materials. Sections are provided for elastic (MT=2) and inelastic (MT=4) scattering.
Starting with ENDF/B-VI, File 7 is complete in itself, and Files 3 and 4 are no longer required toobtain the total scattering cross section in the thermal energy range.
7.2. Coherent Elastic Scattering
The coherent elastic scattering from a powdered crystalline material may be represented asfollows:
E <E
2d σ ( E → E ′, µ ,T ) = 1 i s (T )δ ( µ − )δ ( E − E ′) / 2π
(7.1)
µi
i
dEd Ω
E Σ
i=1
where
2E
(7.2)
µi = 1− i
E
In these formulas:
E = incident neutron energy (eV),E′ = secondary neutron energy (eV),µ = cosine of the scattering angle,
T = moderator temperature (K),Ei = energies of the Bragg edges (eV),si = proportional to the structure factors (eV-barns),µi = characteristic scattering cosines for each set of lattice planes.

The Bragg edges and structure factors can be calculated from the properties of the crystal lattice
and the scattering amplitudes for the various atoms in the unit cell.1
The quantity actually given in the file isEi < ES ( E,T ) = Σ Si (T )

(7.3)

i=1

which is conveniently represented as a stair-step function with breaks at the Bragg edges using
histogram interpolation.
7.2.1. Formats for Coherent Elastic
The parameters to be used to calculate coherent elastic scattering are given in a section of File 7
with MT=2. The following quantities are defined:
ZA, AWR
LTHR
Ti

1Standard charge and mass parameters.
Flag indicating which type of thermal data is being represented.
LTHR=1 for coherent elastic scattering.
Temperature (K).

As an example, the HEXSCAT code [Ref. 1] can be used for hexagonal lattices.

August 2004

7.1

ENDF-102 DataFormats and Procedures

LT
LI
NR,Eint
NP

Flag for temperature dependence. The data for the first temperature are given
in a TAB1 record. The data for subsequent temperatures are given in LIST
records using the same independent variable grid as the TAB1 record.
Flag indicating how to interpolate between the previous temperature andcurrent temperature. The values are the same as for INT in standard TAB1
records.
Standard TAB1 parameters. Use INT=1 (histogram).
Number of Bragg edges given.

The structure of a section is[MAT, 7, 2/
ZA, AWR, LTHR, 0, 0, 0] HEAD
LTHR=1
LT, 0, NR, NP/ Eint / S(E,T0) ] TAB1
[MAT, 7, 2/
T0, 0.0,
LI, 0, NP, 0/ S(Ei,Ti) ] LIST
[MAT, 7, 2/
T1, 0.0,--------------------------<repeat LIST for T2, T3, ...TLT+1>-------------------------[MAT, 7, 0 / 0.0, 0.0,
0, 0, 0, 0] SEND

7.2.2. Procedures for Coherent Elastic
The coherent elastic scattering cross section is easily computed from S(E,T) by reconstructing
an appropriate energy grid and dividing S by E at each point on the grid. A discontinuity should be
supplied at each Ei, and log-log interpolation should be used between Bragg edges. The crosssection is zero below the first Bragg edge.
The function S(E,T) should be defined up to 5 eV. When the Bragg edges get very close to eachother (above 1 eV), the "stair steps" are small. It is permissible to group edges together in thisregion in order to reduce the number of steps given while still preserving the average value of thecross section. Either discrete-angle or Legendre representations of the angular dependence ofcoherent elastic scattering can be constructed. It is necessary to recover the values of si(T) from
S(E,T) by subtraction.
7.3. Incoherent Elastic Scattering
Elastic scattering can be treated in the incoherent approximation for partially ordered systems
such as ZrHx and polyethylene. The differential cross section is given by2dσσ( E → E′, µ ,T ) = b e −2 EW ′(T )(1− µ ) δ ( E − E ′)(7.4)
dE d Ω
4π
where
σb is the characteristic bound cross section (barns),
W′ is the Debye-Waller integral divided by the atomic mass (eV-1),
and all the other symbols have their previous meanings. The integrated cross section is easily
obtained:σ b ⎛ 1 − e −4 EW ′ ⎞(7.5)
σ (E) = ⎜⎟2 ⎝ 2 EW ′ ⎠Note that the limit of σ for small E is σb.

7.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

7.3.1. Format for Incoherent Elastic
The parameters for incoherent elastic scattering are also given in a section of File 7 with MT=2,
because coherent and incoherent representations never occur together for a material. The following
quantities are defined:
standard material charge and mass parameters.
ZA, AWRflag indicating which type of thermal data is being represented.
LTHR
LTHR=2 for incoherent elastic.
number of temperatures.
NP
characteristic bound cross section (barns)
SB
Debye-Waller integral divided by the atomic mass (eV-1) as a function ofW′(T)temperature (K).

The structure of a section is[MAT, 7, 2/ ZA, AWR, LTHR,[MAT, 7, 2/ SB, 0.0,0,[MAT, 7, 0/ 0.0 0.0,
0,0, 0, 0] HEAD
0, NR, NP/ Tint / W’(T) ] TAB1
0, 0, 0] SEND(LTHR=2)

7.3.2. Procedures for Incoherent Elastic
This formalism can be used for energies up to 5 eV.
For some moderator materials containing more than one kind of atom, the incoherent elastic
cross section is computed as the sum of contributions from two different materials. As an example,
H in ZrHx is given in MAT 0007, and Zr in ZrHx is given in MAT 0058.
7.4 Incoherent Inelastic Scattering
Inelastic scattering is represented by the thermal neutron scattering law, S(α,β,T), and is definedfor a moderating molecule or crystal byNSd 2σE′ − β / 2( E → E ′, µ ,T ) = ∑ M nσ bn(7.6)
e
S n (α , β ,T )d Ω dE ′E
n =0 4π kT

where (NS+1) types of atoms occur in the molecule or unit cell (i.e., for H2O, NS=1) and
Mn
T
E
E′
Β
α
An
σfn

Number of atoms of n-type in the molecule or unit cell
Moderator temperature (K)Incident neutron energy (eV)Secondary neutron energy (eV)Energy transfer, β = (E′–E)/kT
momentum transfer, α = (E′+E–2µ sqrt(EE′)/A0kT
Mass of the nth type atom
A0 is the mass of the principal scattering atom in the molecule,Free atom scattering cross section of the nth type atom
⎛ An + 1 ⎞σ bn = σ fn ⎜⎟⎝ An ⎠kµAugust 2004

2

(7.7)

Boltzmann's constantCosine of the scattering angle (in the lab system)

7.3

ENDF-102 DataFormats and Procedures

The data in File 7 for any particular material contain only the scattering law for the principal
scatterer, S(α,β,T), i.e., the 0th atom in the molecule. These data are given as an arbitrary tabulated
function. The scattering properties for the other atom types (n=1,2,...,NS) are represented byanalytical functions. Note that the scattering properties of all atoms in the molecule may be
represented by analytical functions. In this case there is no principal scattering atom.
In some cases, the scattering properties of other atom types in a molecule or crystal may bedescribed by giving S0(α,β,T) in another material. As an example, H in ZrHx and Zr in ZrHx are
given in separate MATs.
For high incident energies, α and/or β values may be required that are outside the ranges
tabulated for S(α,β). In these cases, the short-collision-time (SCT) approximation should be used asfollows:S

SCT(α , β ,T ) =e⎡ ( α− β )2 T |β | ⎤+ ⎥−⎢⎢⎣ 4α Teff (T ) 2 ⎥⎦T (T )
4πα effT(7.8)

where Teff(T) is the effective temperature, and the other symbols have their previous meanings.
The constants required for the scattering law data and the analytic representations for the
non-principal scattering atoms are given in an array, B(N), N=1,2,...,NI, where NI = 6(NS+1). Six
constants are required for each atom type (one 80-character record). The first six elements pertain to
the principal scattering atom, n=0.
The elements of the array B(N) are defined as:
B(1) =
M0f0, the total free atom cross section for the principal scattering atom.
If B(1) = 0.0, there is no principal scattering atom and the scattering properties forthis material are completely described by the analytic functions for each atom type inthis material.
B(2) =ε, the value of E/kT above which the static model of elastic scattering is adequate(total scattering properties may be obtained from MT=2 as given in File 2 or 3 andFile 4 of the appropriate materials).
B(3) =
A0, the ratio of the mass of the atom to that of the neutron that was used to computeα.

B(4) =
B(5)
B(6) =

7.4⎛⎞
E ′ + E − 2 µ EE ′
kT ⎟
⎜α =
A0
⎝
⎠
Emax, the upper energy limit for the constant σf0 (upper energy limit in which
S0(α,β,T) may be used).
not used.
M0, the number of principal scattering atoms in the material. (For example, M = 2
for H2O).

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The next six constants specify the analytic functions that describe the scattering properties of thefirst non-principal scattering atom, (n = 1); i.e., for H20, this atom would be oxygen if the principal
atom were hydrogen.
B(7) =
a1, a test indicating the type of analytic function used for this atom type.
a1 = 0.0, use the atom in SCT approximation only (see below).
a1 = 1.0, use a free gas scattering law.
a1 = 2.0, use a diffusive motion scattering law.
B(8) = M1σf1, the total free atom cross section for this atom type.
B(9) = A1, effective mass for this atom type.
B(10) = 0.0, B(10) is not used.
B(11) = 0.0, B(11) is not used.
B(12) = M1, the number of atoms of this type in the molecule or unit cell.
The next six constants, B(13) through B(18), are used to describe the second non-principal
scattering atom (n=2), if required. The constants are defined in the same way as for n=1; e.g., B(13)is the same type of constant as B(7).
A mixed S(α,β) method has sometimes been used. Using BeO as an example, the S(α,β) for Be
in BeO is combined with that for O in BeO and adjusted to the Be free-atom cross section and mass
as a reference. The mixed S(α,β) is used for the principal atom in Eq. (7.6) as if NS were zero.
However, all of the NS+1 atoms are used in the SCT contribution to the cross section.
The scattering law is given by S(α,β,T) for a series of β values. For each β value, the function
versus β is given for a series of temperatures. Thus, the looping order is actually first β, then T, then
α. S(α,β) is normally a symmetric function of β and only positive values are given. For ortho- andpara-hydrogen and deuterium, this is no longer true. Both negative and positive values must be given
in increasing value of β and the flag LASYM is set to one.
In certain cases, a more accurate temperature representation may be obtained by replacing thevalue of the actual temperature, T, that is used in the definition of α and β with a constant, T0 (T0 =0.0253 eV or the equivalent depending of the units of Boltzmann's constant). A flag (LAT) is given
for each material to indicate which temperature has been used in generating the S(α,β) data.
For down scattering events with large energy losses and for low temperatures, β can be large andnegative. The main contribution to the cross section comes from the region near α + β = 0.
Computer precision can become a real problem in these cases. As an example, for water at room
temperature, calculations using Eq. (7.6) for incident neutrons at 4 eV require working with products
like e80x10-34. For liquid hydrogen at 20 Kelvin and for 1 eV transfers, the products can be e300x10130. These very large and small numbers are difficult to handle on most computers, especially 32-bit
machines. The LLN flag is provided for such cases: the evaluator simply stores ln S instead of S andchanges the interpolation scheme accordingly (that is, the normal log-log law changes to log-lin).
Values of S = 0.0 like those found in the existing ENDF/B-III thermal files really stand for somevery small number less than 10-32 and should be changed to some large negative value, such as -999.

August 2004

7.5

ENDF-102 DataFormats and Procedures

7.4.1. Formats for Incoherent Inelastic
The parameters for incoherent inelastic scattering are given in a section of File 7 with MT=4.
The following quantities are defined:
LAT
LASYM
LLN
NS
NI
B(N)
NR
LT
LI
NT
Teff0
Teff1,Teff2,
Teff3
NB
NP
βint, αint

7.6Flag indicating which temperature has been used to compute α and β
LAT=0, the actual temperature has been used.
LAT=1, the constant T0 = 0.0253 eV has been used.
Flag indicating whether an asymmetric S(α,β) is given
LASYM=0, S is symmetric.
LASYM=1, S is asymmetric
Flag indicating the form of S(α,β) stored in the file
LLN=0, S is stored directly.
LLN=1, ln S is stored.
Number of non-principal scattering atom types.
For most moderating
materials there will be (NS+1) types of atoms in the molecule (NS≤3).
Total number of items in the B(N) list. NI = 6(NS+1).
List of constants. Definitions are given above (Section 7.4).
Number of interpolation ranges for a particular parameter, either β or α .
Temperature dependence flag. The data for the first temperature are given in a
TAB1 record, and the data for the LT subsequent temperatures are given in
LIST records using the same α grid as for the first temperature.
Interpolation law to be used between this and the previous temperature. Valuesof LI are the same as those specified for INT in a standard TAB1 interpolationtable.
Total number of temperatures given. Note that NT = LT+1.
Table of effective temperatures (K) for the short-collision-time approximation
given as a function of moderator temperature T(K) for the principal atom.
Table for effective temperatures for the first, second, and third non-principal
atom. Given if a1 = 0.0 only.
Total number of β values given.
Number of α values given for each value of β for the first temperaturedescribed, NP is the number of pairs, α and S(α,β), given.
Interpolation schemes used.

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The structure of a section is[MAT, 7, 4 / ZA, AWR,
0, LAT, LASYM, 0] HEAD
[MAT, 7, 4 / 0.0, 0.0, LLN,
0,
NI, NS/ B(N) ] LIST
[MAT, 7, 4 / 0.0, 0.0,0,0,NR, NB/ βint ] TAB2
β1, LT,
0,
NR, NP/ αint / S(α,β1,T0) ] TAB1
[MAT, 7, 4 / T0,
β1, LI,0,
NP, 0/ S(α,β1,T1) ] LIST
[MAT, 7, 4 / T1,-----------------------------<continue with LIST records for T2,T3,...TLT+1>-----------------------------β2, LT,
0,
NR, NP/ αint / S(α,β2,T0) ] TAB1
[MAT, 7, 4 / T0,-----------------------------<continue with TAB1 and LIST records for remaining values of β and T>-----------------------------[MAT, 7, 4 / 0.0, 0.0,0,0,NR, NT/ Tint / Teff0(T) ] TAB1-----------------------------<continue with TAB1 records for Teff1, Teff2 and/ or Teff3 if thecorresponding value of a1, a2, or a3 in B(7), B(13), or B(19) is zero>-----------------------------[MAT, 7, 0 / 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND

If the scattering law data are completely specified by analytic functions (no principal scattering
atom type, as indicated by B(1)=0), tabulated values of S(α,β) are omitted and the TAB2 and TAB1
records are not given.
7.4.2. Procedures for Incoherent Inelastic
The data in MF=7, MT=4 should be sufficient to describe incoherent inelastic scattering forincident neutron energies up to 5 eV. The tabulated S(α,β) function should be useful to energies ashigh as possible in order to minimize the discontinuities that occur when changing to theshort-collision-time approximation. The β mesh for S(α,β) should be selected in such a manner as
to accurately represent the scattering properties of the material with a minimum of β points. The αmesh at which S(α,β) is given should be the same for each β value of and for each temperature.
Experience has shown that temperature interpolation of S(α,β) is unreliable. It is recommended
that cross sections be computed for the given moderator temperatures only. Data for othertemperatures should be obtained by interpolation between the cross sections.
REFERENCES
1. Y.D. Naliboff and J.V. Koppel, HEXSCAT:Coherent Scattering of Neutrons by Hexagonal
Lattices, General Atomic report GA-6026 (1964).

August 2004

7.7

ENDF-102 DataFormats and Procedures

7.8

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

8. FILE 8, RADIOACTIVE DECAY AND FISSION PRODUCT YIELD DATA
Information concerning the decay of the reaction products (any MT) is given in this file. In
addition, fission product yield data (MT=454 and 459) for fissionable materials (see Section 8.2) andspontaneous radioactive decay data (MT=457) for the nucleus (see Section 8.3) are included. See
descriptions of File 9 and File 10 for information on isomeric state production from the various
reactions. Since a reaction may result in more than one unstable end product, data for the mostimportant product should be entered, while others are allowed.
8.1. Radioactive Nuclide Production
For any isotope, sections may be given which specify that the end product from the interaction of
any incident particle or photon is radioactive. Information is given for any MT by identifying theend products in the reaction by their ZAP (ZA for the product), and noting how these end products
decay. A section will contain only minimal information about the chain that follows each reaction.
One or more isomeric states of the target or the radioactive end product isotope will be described.
The following quantities are defined:
Designation of the original nuclide (ZA = 1000Z + A).
ZA
Designation of the nuclide produced in the reaction (ZAP = 1000Z + A).
ZAP
Material number for the reaction product (ZAP).
MATP
Total number of states (LFS) of the radioactive reaction product for which decayNSdata are given.
File number (3, 6, 9, or 10) in which the multiplicity or cross section for this MT
LMF
number will be found.
State number (including ground and all levels) of the target (ZA).
LIS
Isomeric state number of the target.
LISO
Level number (including ground and all levels) of the state of ZAP formed by
LFS
the neutron interaction (to be given in ascending order).
Excitation energy of the state of ZAP produced in the interaction (in eV above
ELFS
ground state).
Flag denoting where the decay information is to be given for an importantNOradioactive end product.
NO = 0, complete decay chain given under this MT.
NO = 1, decay chain given in MT = 457 in MATP.
Number of branches into which the nuclide ZAP decays.
ND
Half-life of the nuclide ZAP in seconds.
HL
Z and mass identifier of the next nuclide produced along the chain.
ZAN
Branching ratio for the production of that particular ZAN and level.
BR
End-point energy of the particle or quantum emitted (this does not include the
END
gamma energy, following beta decay, for example).
Chain terminator that gives minimal information about the formation and decay
CTof ZAN. The hundredths digit of CT designates the excited level in which ZAN
is formed.
1.0 ≤ CT < 2.0 indicates that the chain terminates with ZAN, possibly after one
or more gamma decays.
CT ≥ 2.0 indicates that ZAN is unstable and decays further to other nuclides.
For example, consider the nuclide (ZAP) formed via a neutron reaction (MTnumber) in a final state (LFS number); ZAP then decays to a level in ZAN; theAugust 2004

8.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

RTYP

level number is part of the CT indicator and includes non-isomeric states in the
count.
The following examples may help explain the use of CT:
CT = 1.00, ZAN was formed in the ground state which is stable.
CT = 1.06, ZAN was formed in the sixth excited state; the sixth state decayed to
the ground state which is stable.
CT = 2.00, ZAN was formed in the ground state which is unstable. (No delayed
gammas are associated with the formation and decay of this particular ZAN).
The next decay in the chain is specified under the RTYP.
CT = 2.11, ZAN was formed in the 11th excited state but the chain does not
terminate with that ZAN. The next decay in the chain is specified under the
RTYP.
It is readily apparent from the above that CT = "1." indicates that the chain
terminates with that particular ZAN and CT = "2." means that one or more
decays are involved before stability is reached. Note, however, that stability canbe reached instantaneously upon occasion with the emission of one or more
light particles.
Mode of decay using the same definitions specified in MT=457 (see Section
8.3).
As an example, consider MT=102. Then RTYP = 1.44 would be interpreted asfollows:
The first two columns of the RTYP (1.) indicates β- decay of ZAP; the third andfourth columns (44) indicate that the nucleus ZAN (formed in the β- decay) then
immediately emits two α particles.
This example is represented by the following reaction:n + 7Li → γ + 8Li (ground state)β(MT=102)Ô

2.94 2+,0
8
Be
Ô

2α
For this example:
ZA(7Li) = 3.007E+03 LIS(7Li) = 0
LISO(7Li) = 0
88ZAP( Li) = 3.008E+03 LFS( Li) = 0
ZAN(8Be) = 4.008E+03 CT(8Be) = 2.01
Since Be has a half-life of the order of compound-nucleus formation times,
decay data for MT = 457 are not required, and the complete chain can easily be
represented and read from the information given here.

8.2

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

8.1.1. Formats
The structure of each section always starts with a HEAD record and ends with a SEND record.
Subsections contain data for a particular final state of the reaction product (LFS).
The number of subsections NS is given on the HEAD record for the section. The subsections areordered by increasing value of LFS.
The structure of a section is:[MAT, 8, MT/

ZA, AWR, LIS, LISO,NS,NO] HEAD<subsection for LFS1><subsection for LFS2>---------------------------------<subsection for LFSNS>[MAT, 8, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND
For NO=0 the structure of the subsection is:[MAT, 8, MT/ ZAP, ELFS, LMF, LFS, 6*ND, MATP/
END1, CT1,
HL1, RTYP1, ZAN1, BR1,
END2, CT2,
HL2, RTYP2, ZAN2, BR2,--------------------------------HLND,RTYPND, ZANND, BRND, ENDND, CTND] LIST

If NO=1, then the reaction gives rise to a significant product which is radioactive, and theevaluator wishes only to identify the radioactive product. The evaluator must supply MF=8,
MT=457 data elsewhere to describe the decay of the product. It is understood that the cross section
for producing this radioactive product can be determined from the data in File 3, 6, 9, or 10
depending upon the value of LMF.
For NO=1, the structure of the subsection is:[MAT, 8, MT/

ZAP, ELFS,

LMF,

LFS,

0,

MATP] CONT

8.1.2. Procedures
1. Data should be given for all unstable states of the reaction product nucleus for which crosssections are given in File 3 or File 10 or multiplicities in File 6 or File 9. No information of thistype is allowed in evaluations for mixtures of elements, molecules, or elements with more than
one naturally occurring isotope.
2. In order to provide more general usefulness as these files are being constructed, the following
procedures are mandatory. For each reaction type (MT), File 6 yields, File 9 multiplicities, orFile 10 cross sections must be provided, except when LMF=3.
3. If the ENDF/B file also contains a complete evaluation of the neutron cross sections for thereaction product nucleus (ZAP, LIS), then the radioactive decay data for the evaluation of (ZAP,
LIS) found in MF=8, MT=457 must be consistent with the decay data in this section.
4. The method for calculating the nuclide production cross section is determined by the choice of
LMF: LMF = 3 implies that the production cross section is taken directly from thecorresponding sections in File 3.
LMF = 6 implies that the production cross section is the product of the cross sectionin File 3 and the yield in File 6.
LMF = 9 implies that the production cross section is the product of the cross sectionin File 3 and the multiplicity in File 9.
LMF = 10 implies that the production cross section is given explicitly in File 10 (in barns).

August 2004

8.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

8.2. Fission Product Yield Data (MT = 454 and MT = 459)
MT numbers 454 and 459 specify the energy-dependent fission product yield data for each
incident particle or photon. These MT numbers can also be used to identify yields for spontaneous
fission. A complete set of fission product yield data is given for a particular incident neutron energy.
Data sets should be given at sufficient incident energies to completely specify yield data for theenergy range given for the fission cross section (as determined from Files 2 or 3). These data are
given by specifying fission product identifiers and fission product yields.
MT=454 is used for independent yields (YI), and MT=459 is used for cumulative yields (YC).
The formats for MT=454 and MT=459 are identical. Independent yields (YI) are direct yields per
fission prior to delayed neutron, beta, etc., decay. The sum of all independent yields is 2.0 for any
particular incident neutron energy. Cumulative yields (YC) are specified for the same set of fission
products. These account for all decay branches, including delayed neutrons.
The fission products are specified by giving an excited state designation (FPS) and a (charge,mass) identifier (ZAFP). Thus, fission product nuclides are given, not mass chains. More than one(Z,A) may be used to represent the yields for a particular mass chain.
The following quantities are defined
Number of fission product nuclide states to be specified at each incident energy
NFP
point (this is actually the number of sets of fission product identifiers - fission
product yields). (NFP≤2500).
(Z,A) identifier for a particular fission product. (ZAFP = (1000Z + A).
ZAFP
State designator (floating-point number) for the fission product nuclide (FPS =FPS
0.0 means the ground state, FPS = 1.0 means the first excited state, etc.)(MT=454), independent yield for a particular fission product prior to particle
YI
decay.
(MT=454) 1σ uncertainty in YI.
DYI(MT=459) cumulative yield.
YC(MT=459) 1σ uncertainty in YC.
DYC
Array of yield data for the ith energy point. This array contains NFP sets of fourCn(Ei)
parameters in the order ZAFP, FPS, YI, and DYI in MT=454 and ZAFP, FPS,
YC, and DYC in MT=459.
Number of items in the Cn(Ei) array, equal to 4*NFP.
NN
Incident neutron energy of the ith point (eV).
Ei
Test to determine whether energy-dependent fission product yields given:LE
LE = 0, implies no energy-dependence (only one set of fission product yielddata given);
LE > 0, indicates that (LE + 1) sets of fission product yield data are given at(LE + 1) incident neutron energies.
Interpolation scheme (see Appendix E) to be used between the Ei-1 and Ei
Ii
energy points.

8.4

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

8.2.1. Formats
The structure of a section always starts with a HEAD record and ends with a SEND record. Setsof fission product yield data are given for one or more incident energies. The sets are ordered byincreasing incident energy. For a particular energy the data are presented by giving four parameters(ZAFP, FPS, YI, and DYI in MT=454 and ZAFP, FPS, YC, and DYC in MT 459) for each fission
product state. The data are first ordered by increasing values of ZAFP. If more than one yield isgiven for the same (Z,A) the data are ordered by increasing value of the state designator (FPS).
The structure for a section is[MAT, 8, MT/ ZA, AWR, LE+1,0, 0,0] HEADLE,
0, NN, NFP/ Cn(E1) ] LIST
[MAT, 8, MT/ E1, 0.0,I,0, NN, NFP/ Cn(E2) ] LIST
[MAT, 8, MT/ E2, 0.0,I,0, NN, NFP/ Cn(E3) ] LIST
[MAT, 8, MT/ E3, 0.0,------------------------0,0, 0,0] SEND[MAT, 8, 0 / 0.0, 0.0,

where MT = 454 for independent yield data, and MT = 459 for cumulative yield data. There are(LE + 1) LIST records.
8.2.2. Procedures
The data sets for fission product yields should be given over the same energy range as that usedin Files 2 and/or File 3 for the fission cross section. The yields are given as a fractional value at eachenergy, and normally the independent yields will sum to 2.0.
This format provides for the yields (YI or YC) to each excited state (FPS) of the nuclide
designated by ZAFP, and hence accommodates the many metastable fission products having direct
fission yields. Data may be given for one or more fission product nuclide states to represent theyield for a particular mass chain. If independent yield data are given for more than one nuclide, theyield for the lowest Z (charge) nuclide state for a particular mass chain should be the same as the
cumulative yield in MT=459, and all other independent yields for this same chain should be directyields.
The direct fission product yields are those prior to delayed neutron emission; for this reason, thesummation of independent yields over the nuclides in each mass chain does not necessarily equal theisobaric chain yield. The cumulative yield for each nuclide (ZAFP, FPS) can be determined by useof the branching fractions in MT=457 or directly from MT=459.
Yields for the same fission product nuclides should be given at each energy point. This will
facilitate interpolation of yield data between incident energy points. Also, a linear-linear
interpolation scheme should be used.
8.3. Radioactive Decay Data (MT=457)
The spontaneous radioactive decay data are given in Section 457. This section is restricted tosingle nuclides in their ground state or an isomeric state. (An isomeric state is a "long-lived" excitedstate of the nucleus.) The main purpose of MT=457 is to describe the energy spectra resulting fromradioactive decay and give average parameters useful for applications such as decay heat, waste
disposal, depletion and buildup studies, shielding, and fuel integrity. The information in this section
can be divided into three parts:

August 2004

8.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

a. General information about the material
Designation of the original (radioactive) nuclide (=1000Z+A).
ZA
Ratio of the LIS state nuclide mass to that of neutron.
AWR
State of the original nuclide (LIS=0, ground state, LIS=1, first excited state,
LIS
etc.)
Isomeric state number for the original nuclide (LISO=0, ground state; LISO=1,
LISO
first isomeric state; etc.)
Nucleus stability flag (NST=0, radioactive; NST=1, stable)
NST
Half-life of the original nuclide (seconds).
T1/2
Total number of decay energies (eV) given (NC = 3 or 17).
NC
Average decay energy (eV) of "x" radiation, e.g., for decay heat applications.
E"x"
The average energies must be given in an order specified in Section 8.3.2.
Unknown average radiation energies are indicated by a value of –1.0.
Spin of the nuclide in its LIS state.
SPI(SPI = –77.777 = spin unknown)
Parity of the nuclide in its LIS state (±1.0).
PAR
b. Decay mode information - for each mode of decay
NDK
RTYP

8.6

Total number of decay modes given (cannot be zero).
Mode of decay of the nuclide in its LIS state.
Decay modes defined:
RTYP
Decay Mode0. γγ-ray (not used in MT457)
1.
β–Beta decay+
2.
e.c., (β ) Electron capture and/or positron emission
3.
IT
Isomeric transition (will in general be present only
when the state being considered is an isomeric state)4.
αAlpha decay
5.
nNeutron emission (not delayed neutron decay, below)
6.
SF
Spontaneous fission
7.
pProton emission
10.
Unknown origin
Multiple particle decay is also allowed using any combination of the above
RTYP variables as illustrated in the following examples:
RTYP
Decay Mode
–
1.5
β ,n
Beta decay followed by neutron emission (delayed
neutron decay)
1.4β–,αBeta decay followed by alpha emission (16N decay)
+
2.4
β ,α
Positron decay followed by alpha emission.

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

RFS

Q

BR

Isomeric state flag for daughter nuclide.
RFS=0.0, ground state;
RFS=1.0, first isomeric state, etc.
Total decay energy (eV) available in the corresponding decay process. This is
not necessarily the same as the maximum energy of the emitted radiation. In
the case of an isomeric transition Q will be the energy of the isomeric state.
For both β+ and β–, Q equals the energy corresponding to the mass difference
between the initial and final atoms).
Fraction of the decay of the nuclide in its LIS state which proceeds by thecorresponding decay mode, e.g., if only β– occurs and no isomeric states in thedaughter nucleus are excited then BR = 1.0 for β– decay.

c. Resulting radiation spectra
NSP
STYP

Total number of radiation types (STYP) for which spectral information is
given (NSP may be zero).
Decay radiation type
Decay radiations defined:
STYP
0.
l.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

ER
RI
RP
TYPE

RICC
RICK
RICL

August 2004

Radiation typeγ
Gamma rays–
β
Beta rayse.c., (β+) Electron capture and/or positron emissionα
Alpha particlesnNeutronsSF
Spontaneous fission fragmentspProtonse–"Discrete electrons"x
X-rays and annihilation radiation (photons notarising as transitions between nuclear states)
discrete energy (eV) of radiation produced(Eγ,Eβ-,Ee.c.,etc.)
intensity of discrete radiation produced (relative units).
spectrum of the continuum component of the radiation in units ofprobability/eV such that ∫RP(E)dE = 1.
Type of transition for beta and electron capture.
Types Defined:
TYPE
Spectrum Definition
0.0
not required for STYP
1.0
allowed, non-unique
2.0
First-forbidden unique
3.0
Second-forbidden unique
Total internal conversion coefficient (STYP=0.0 only)
K-shell internal conversion coefficient (STYP=0.0 only)
L-shell internal conversion coefficient (STYP=0.0 only)

8.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

RIS
LCON

NT
FC
FD
NER
ERAV
NR
NP
Eint
NK
∆
LCOV

LB
NPP

Internal pair formation coefficient (STYP=0.0)
STYP=2.0, positron intensity,
STYP=0.0 otherwise.
1
Continuum spectrum flag
LCON = 0, no continuous spectrum given
LCON = 1, only continuous spectrum given
LCON = 2, both discrete and continuum spectra.
Number of entries given for each discrete energy (ER).
1
Continuum spectrum normalization factor (absolute intensity/relative
intensity).
1
Discrete spectrum normalization factor (absolute intensity/relative intensity).
Total number of tabulated discrete energies for a given spectral type (STYP).
2
Average decay energy of radiation produced.
Number of interpolation ranges for the continuum spectrum.
Number of points at which the distribution will be given.
Interpolation scheme for the continuum spectrum.
Number of partial energy distributions when LCON = 5 is used.
Uncertainty in any quantity.
Flag indicating whether covariance data are given for continuum spectrum
data. (LCON = 1 or 2).
LCOV=0, no covariance data given
LCOV=1, covariance data given
Flag indicating the meaning of the numbers given in the array{Ek,Fk}. (Only
LB=2 presently allowed, See chapter 33).
Number of pairs of numbers in the {Ek,Fk} array.

{Ek,Fk} is an array of pairs of numbers, referred to as an Ek table. In each Ek table the firstmember of a pair is an energy, Ek, the second member of the pair, Fk, is a number associated with theenergy interval between the two entries Ek and Ek+1.
The Ek table must cover the complete range of secondary particle energies. Some of the Fk's
may be zero, as must be the case below threshold for a threshold reaction, and the last value of F
in an E table must be zero or blank since it is not defined.
The meaning of the Fk values in the Ek table for the allowed LB=2 is as follows:
LB=2 Fractional components fully correlated over all Ek intervals
COV ( Xi , X j) = Σ Sik Skj ′ Fk Fk ′ Xi X j

where

Sik

kk ′

= 1 when the energy Ei is in the interval Ek to Ek+1 of the Ek table= 0 otherwise
Here Xi is the normalized spectral intensity at decay particle emitted kinetic energy range Ei
obtained from the {E,RP} TAB1 record indicated.

1

Spontaneous _v for RTYP = 6. and STYP = 5., LCON = 1 and FC =_vp and FD = _vd.

2

For STYP = 2, this is the average positron energy, for STYP = 4, this includes energy of recoil nucleus.

8.8

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

8.3.1. Formats
The structure of this section always starts with a HEAD record and ends with a SEND record.
For a radioactive nucleus (NST=0), this section is divided into subsections as follows:[MAT, 8,457/[MAT, 8,457/[MAT, 8,457/[MAT, 8,ZA,
AWR, LIS, LISO,
NST, NSP] HEAD
(NST=0)0,0, 2*NC,
0/ (E"x",∆_E"x")3 / LIST
T1/2, ∆T1/2,
SPI,
PAR,
0,
0, 6*NDK, NDK/
BR1, ∆BR1,
RTYP1, RFS1, Q1, ∆Q1,--------------------------------RTYPNDK, RFSNDK, QNDK, ∆QNDK, BRNDK,∆BRNDK] LIST
<Subsection for Spectrum1><Subsection for Spectrum2>--------------------------------<Subsection for SpectrumNSP>
0/
0.0,
0.0,
0,
0,
0,
0] SEND

The structure of a subsection is:[MAT, 8,457/

0.0, STYP, LCON,
0,
6,
NER/
∆FD,
ERAV, ∆ERAV,FC,∆FC] LIST
FD,
0,
0,
NT,
0/
[MAT, 8,457/
ER1, ∆ER1,
RI1, ∆RI1, RIS1, ∆RIS1,
RTYP1, TYPE1,
RICC1,∆RICC1, RICK1,∆RICK1, RICL1,∆RICL1] LIST-------------------------------------0,
0,
NT,
0/
ERNER, ∆ERNER,
RTYPNER,TYPENER, RINER, RINER, ------------] LIST

(omit these LIST records if LCON=1)[MAT, 8,457/ RTYP,(omit if LCON=0)[MAT, 8,457/

0.0,

0.0,

0, LCOV,

0.0,

0,

NR,

LB, 2*NPP,(omit if LCOV=0 or LCON=0)

NP/ Eint / RP(E) ] TAB1
NPP/ (Ek,Fk) ] LIST

For a stable nucleus (NST=1), this section is divided into subsections as follows:[MAT, 8,457/[MAT, 8,457/[MAT, 8,457/

ZA,
0.0,
0.0,
SPI,
0.0,

AWR,
0.0,
0.0,
PAR,
0.0,

LIS,
0,
0.0,
0,
0.0,

LISO,
0,
0.0,
0,
0.0,

NST,
6,
0.0,
6,
0.0,

0] HEAD0/0.0] LIST
0]0.0] LIST(NST=1)

8.3.2. Procedures
1. The initial state of the parent nucleus is designated by LISO, which equals 0 for the ground stateand equals n for the nth isomeric state. Only isomeric states are included in the count of LISO.
(In other files isomeric and non-isomeric states may be included in the count of levels.)
2. The average decay energy E_ "x" for decay heat application is given for three general radiation
types, ELP (for light particles), EEM (for electromagnetic radiation), and EHP (for heavy particles),followed by the individual components. The sum of these three general quantities is the total
3

Data must be given in order specified in Section 8.3.2.

August 2004

8.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

average (neutrino energies excluded) energy available per decay to the decay heat problem. The
three quantities are more precisely defined as

E LP = E β − + E β + + E e − + K
E EM = E γ + E x −ray + E ann.rad . + K
E HP = E α + E SF + E p + E n + K
where E LP means the average energy of all "electron-related" radiation such as β-, β+conversion-electrons, Auger, etc. The quantity E EM , means the average energy of all"electromagnetic" radiations such as gamma rays, x-rays, and annihilation radiation. The
quantity E HP is the average energy of all heavy charged particles and neutrons, and also includes
the recoil energy; but the alpha energy alone can be separated out by the usual MR/(MR+Mα)
factor, where MR and Mα are the recoil nucleus and alpha masses, respectively.
The average decay energies E "x " must be given in the following order:
E LP
E EM
E HP
Eβ−

Average energy of all light particles.
Average energy of all electromagnetic radiation.
Average energy of all heavy particles.
Average β- energy.

Eβ+

Average β+ energy.

E Ae−
E ce−
Eγ

Average Auger-electron energy.
Average conversion-electron energy.
Average gamma-ray energy.

E x −ray

Average x-ray energy.

E InB
E ann .rad .
Eα
E recoil
E SF

En

Average internal Bremsstrahlung energy.
Average annihilation energy.
Average α energy.
Average recoil energy.
Average SF energy.
Average prompt and/or delayed neutron energy.

Ep

Average proton energy.

Eν

Average neutrino or antineutrino energy.

3. The symbol RTYP indicates the mode of decay as determined by the initial event. A nucleus
undergoing beta decay to an excited state of the daughter nucleus, which subsequently decays by
gamma emission, is in the beta decay mode. RTYP = 0.0 is not allowed in MT = 457 (althoughused under 8.l).
An isomeric state of the daughter nuclide resulting from the decay of parent nuclides isdesignated by RFS following the procedures used for LISO. Q represents the total energy
available in the decay process and is equal to the energy difference available between the initialand final states (both of which may be isomeric). The branching ratio BR for each decay mode
8.10

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Proceduresis given as a fraction and the sum over all decay modes must equal unity.
Multiple particle emission is also allowed by using any combination of the RTYP variables. This
will account for particle emission from nuclear states excited in the decay of the parent("delayed-particle" emission) whose half-lives are too short to warrant separate entry in the file.
It will also allow users and processing codes to identify the various intermediate states, without
having to examine all the spectrum listings to determine radiation types. The multiple-particle
RTYP should be constructed in the order in which the particles are emitted. (e.g., RTYP = 1.5
indicates decay followed by neutron emission).
4. The source-of-radiation should be specified for each spectral line or continuous spectra. The
source of radiation is a floating-point integer corresponding to the RTYP definitions. If thesource-of-radiation is not known RTYP = 10. should be used.
5. The energy spectra should be specified if they are known and identified by STYP. Gamma
spectra are described using STYP = 0.0. Relative intensities and errors in the relative intensity
should be specified. Absolute normalization is made through multiplication by FC and FD. If
absolute discrete spectra are given FD must equal unity. The radiation intensity should total thecontributions from all decays leading to radiation within a particular decay type, STYP, havingenergy Er±∆Er.
a. For gamma ray emission (STYP = 0.0), no other information is required if X-ray, Auger
electron, conversion electron, and pair formation intensities have not been calculated forthese transitions. In this case NT = 6.
The amount of additional information depends upon the detail in which quantities wereobtained for inclusion in STYP = 8. or 9. spectra, and the number of decay modes. (Thisdetail will also be reflected in the uncertainties assigned in STYP = 8. or 9. spectra.) If only
the total conversion electron emission is calculated, RICC and ∆RICC should be included
and NT is specified as 8. If contributors from the individual K, L, and M shells arecalculated, the K and L shell conversion coefficients should be included and NT = 12. In therare case (i.e., 167 N ), where internal pair formation is needed, the internal pair formation
coefficient should be included as the quantities RIS and ∆RIS.
b. For electron capture (STYP = 2.), the quantity RIS is 0.0 provided Ee.c.≤1.022 MeV. If
positron emission is energetically possible, RIS and ∆RIS must be specified (as Iβ+and ∆iβ+).
c. The spectra should be ordered in increasing values of STYP, and discrete spectral data
should be specified before continuous spectra.
d. For STYP = 5. (spontaneous fission neutrons), LCON = 0, NER = 0, and EAV and ∆EAV
should be given.
e. For STYP = 6. (spontaneous fission fragments) LCON = 0, NER = 0, and E_ SF and ∆ E_ SFshould be given.
6. The specification of data uncertainties is an important quantity which is difficult to represent in a
simple way. Although a one sigma variance is desired, a number should be entered that at leastindicates qualitatively how well the parameter is known.

August 2004

8.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

For STYP = 8. and 9., ∆E will reflect the detail in which these values were derived. For
example, if only the total conversion electron emission has been calculated, ∆E would be thespread between K-conversion and M-conversion electron energies. If a very detailed calculation
has been made, ∆E would reflect the uncertainties in the electron binding energy and thetransition energy.
7. The spontaneous fission spectrum is specified using MF = 5 in sub-library 4 (no incoming
projectile).
8. Every effort should be made to determine the spin and parity of the original nucleus, either byexperimental evidence or by strong theoretical arguments. If the spin cannot be determined, itshould be reported as -77.777; if the parity cannot be determined it should be reported as zero.
9. Because the continuum spectrum is normalized, the absolute covariance matrix of a multicomponent normalized spectrum processed from this file must have zero for the sum of each row
and column. (Processing codes should perform this check).
Since the covariance form for radioactive product spectra is confined to LB = 2, meeting this test
is equivalent to the following condition on the Fk of the Ek covariance table:∑ F y = 0,kkwhere, y k = ∫E k +1k

Ek

RP( E ) dE

and yk is the energy spectrum on the uncertainty evaluation grid. Σyk = 1. If the initial Fk do notmeet this condition, the corrected values F′k are given by:
Fk′ = Fk − ∑ k Fk y kNote that unlike the case for File 33, some of the Fk′ will be negative. Also, the processed
multigroup correlation matrix will show some off-diagonal components that are -1 as well asothers that are +1.
When a processing code constructs the absolute covariance Vmn on the user's energy grid Em, thesimplest relations to use are
V mn = σ mσ n ,where, σ n = ∫E n +1En

F ( E ) RP ( E ) dE

and the integral is easy because F(E) is piece-wise continuous on the Ek grid. By thisconstruction we are assured that the null sum condition will be retained for the covariance matrixof the processed multigroup spectrum.

8.12

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

9. FILE 9. MULTIPLICITIES FOR PRODUCTION OF RADIOACTIVE NUCLIDES
9.1. General Description
Neutron activation cross sections can be obtained by the use of multiplicities in File 9. The
multiplicity represents that fraction of the cross section in File 3 that produces the LFS state in thedaughter nucleus. The multiplicities are given as a function of energy, E, where E is the incident
neutron energy (in eV) in the laboratory system. They are given as energy-multiplicity pairs. Aninterpolation scheme must be given to specify the energy variation of the data for incident energies
between a given energy point and the next higher energy point. File 9 is divided into sections, eachsection containing data for a particular reaction type (MT number). The sections are ordered byincreasing MT number. Within a section for a given MT are subsections for different final states ofthe daughter product (LFS). File 9 is only allowed for evaluations that represent data for single
nuclides.
9.2. Formats
File 9 is made up of sections where each section gives the multiplicity for a particular reaction
type (MT number). Each section always starts with a HEAD record and ends with a SEND record.
For File 9, the following quantities are defined:
Indicator to specify the level number of the target.
LIS
Indicator to specify the level number of the nuclide (ZA P) (as defined in
LFSMF=8) produced in the reaction (MT number).
LFS = 0: the final state is the ground state.
LFS = 1: the final state is the first excited state.
LFS = 2: the final state is the second excited state.
------------------LFS = 98: an unspecified range of final states.
Mass-difference Q value (eV) defined as the mass of the target and projectile
QM
minus the mass of the residual nucleus in the ground state and masses of allother reaction products; that is, for a+A→b+c+… + B. If the masses are in
amu, QM = [(ma+mA) - (mb+mc+...+mB)] × (amu/eV)1.
Reaction Q value (eV) for the state described by the subsection. For isomeric
QI
states it is defined as QM minus the residual excitation energy of the isomer.
For the ground state QI=QM.
1000*Z+A for the product nucleus
ZAP
Number of final states for each MT for which multiplicities are to be given.
NS
Number of energy ranges. A different interpolation scheme may be given forNReach range. (NR≤20).
NP
Total number of energy points used to specify the data (NP≤5000)2.
Interpolation scheme for each energy range. (For details, see Section 0.6.2.)
Eint
Multiplicity for a particular reaction type at incident energy E(eV). Data areY(E)given for energy-multiplicity pairs.

1

2

See Appendix H for conversion factor.
50,000 energy points are allowed for the total cross section.

August 2004

9.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The structure of a section is:[MAT, 9, MT/ ZA, AWR, LIS,
0, NS,
0] HEAD<NS subsections, one for each value of LFS>
[MAT, 9, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND

The structure of a subsection is:[MAT, 9, MT/

QM,

QI, ZAP, LFS,

NR,

NP/ Eint / Y(E)] TAB1

9.3. Procedures
Multiplicities must be given in File 9 for those reactions described in MF=8 which have LMF=9
in the LIST record of the subsection for that particular MT number and value of LFS. The
multiplicities in File 9 describe the fraction of the cross section that produces the LFS state in thedaughter nucleus. For a reaction represented by resonance parameters in File 2, File 10 cannot be
used; only multiplicities in File 9 are allowed.
The data in File 9 must cover the entire energy range for each reaction in File 3 from threshold to
20 MeV. That is, multiplicities cannot be used over a portion of the incident neutron energy range
with cross sections covering another portion. For negative Q reactions, the first energy point should
be at the threshold given in File 3. If a subsection QI is not equal to the QI in File 3, the multiplicity
should be given as zero up to the energy point corresponding to the threshold of the subsection.
The set of points or energy mesh used for the total cross section in File 3 must include the unionof all energy meshes in File 9 for each MT number. Although 50,000 incident energy points areallowed for the total cross section, every attempt should be made to minimize the number of points
in File 9.
The multiplicities in File 9 should be equal to or less than unity since the cross sections to begenerated must be equal to or less than the cross sections in File 3 for each MT number.
In summary, the proper procedure would be to not enter data in MF=8 and given MT until theFile 9 multiplicities (or File l0 cross sections) are added to the evaluations. That is, every MT
number (except MT=454, 457, or 459) in MF=8 with LMF=9 as an indicator in the LIST record of
the subsection for that particular MT and value of LFS must have the corresponding multiplicities inFile 9.

9.2

April2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

10. FILE 10. CROSS SECTIONS FOR PRODUCTION OF RADIOACTIVE NUCLIDES
10.1. General Description
Neutron activation cross sections [such as the (n,p) and (n,2n) cross sections] and cross sections
for a particular state of a radioactive target are given in File 10. These cross sections are given as afunction of energy, E, where E is the incident particle or photon energy (in eV) in the laboratory
system. They are given as energy-cross-section pairs. An interpolation scheme must specify theenergy variation of the data for energies between a given energy point and the next higher energy
point.
File 10 is divided into sections, each section containing the data for a particular reaction type
(MT number). The sections are ordered by increasing MT number. Within a section for a given MT
are subsections for different final states (LFS) of the daughter product nucleus. File 10 is allowed
only for evaluations that represent the data for single isotopes.
10.2 Formats
File 10 is made up of sections where each section gives the cross section for a particular reaction
type (MT number). Each section always starts with a HEAD record and ends with a SEND record.
For File 10, the following quantities are defined:
Indicator to specify the level number of the target.
LIS
Indicator to specify the level number of the nuclide (ZAP) produced in the
LFS
reaction (MT) number. LFS = 0 the final state is the ground state.
LFS = 1 the final state is the first excited state.
LFS = 2 the final state is the second excited state.
------LFS = 98 an unspecified range of final states.
Mass-difference Q value (eV) defined as the mass of the target and projectile
QM
minus the mass of the residual nucleus in the ground state and masses of allother reaction products; that is, for a+A→b+c+...+B, if the masses are in amu,
QM = [(ma+mA) - (mb+mc+...+mB)]×(amu/eV)1
Reaction Q value (eV) for the state described by the subsection.
QI
For isomeric, states QI is defined as QM minus the residual excitation energyof the isomer.
For the ground state, QI=QM.
1000*Z+A for the product nucleus
ZAP
Number of final states for each MT for which cross sections are to be given.
NS
Number of energy ranges. A different interpolation scheme may be given forNReach range. (NR≤20).
NP
Total number of energy points used to specify the data (NP≤5,000)2.
Interpolation scheme for each energy range. (For details, see Section 0.4.3.)
Eint
Cross section in barns for a particular reaction type at incident energy E(eV).
σ(E)
Data are given for energy, cross-section pairs.

1
2

See Appendix H for conversion factor.
50,000 energy points are allowed for the total cross section.

April 2001

10.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The structure of a section is:[MAT, 10, MT/ ZA, AWR, LIS,
0, NS, 0] HEAD
<NS subsections, one for each value of LFS>
[MAT, 10, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, 0, 0] SEND

The structure of a subsection is:[MAT, 10, MT/

QM,

QI, ZAP, LFS, NR, NP/ Eint / σ(E)] TAB1

10.3. Procedures
Isomer production cross sections must be given in File 10 for those reactions described in MF=8
which have LMF=10 in the LIST record of the subsection for that particular MT number and valueof LFS. The data in File 10 are the cross sections for the production of a final state (LFS) of thedaughter product nucleus. For a reaction represented by resonance parameters in File 2, File 10cannot be used; only multiplicities in File 6 or File 9 are allowed.
The data in File 10 must cover the entire energy range for each reaction from the threshold of thesubsection in File 10 up to 20 MeV. That is, cross sections cannot be used over a portion of theincident neutron energy range with multiplicities covering another portion. For negative Q
reactions, the first energy point should be at the threshold of the subsection in File 10 and the crosssection at this point must be zero.
The set of points or energy mesh used for the total cross section in File 3 must be the union of allenergy meshes in File 10 for each MT number. Although 10000 incident energy points are allowed
for the total cross section, every attempt should be made to minimize the number of points in File 10.
Using the 93Nb(n,2n)92Nb cross section as an example, only the cross section for the productionof the 10.16-day isomer in 92Nb would appear under MT=16 with LIS=0 and LFS=1 in File 10. The
sum of all partial cross sections for the (n,2n) reaction would still be found in File 3 under MT=16[note that this is the only (n,2n) cross section required for neutron transport calculations]. It should
be noted, however, in this particular case, that the evaluator would have the choice of using
energy-dependent multiplicities in File 9 instead of cross sections in File 10.
The cross sections that appear in File 10 are redundant; that is, they should not be included in the
check sum for the total cross section. The cross sections in File 10 must be equal to or less than the
cross sections for that MT number that appears in File 3.
In summary, the proper procedure would be to not enter data in MF=8 and given MT until theFile 10 cross sections (or File 9 multiplicities) are added to the evaluations. That is, every MT
number (except MT=454, 457, or 459) with LMF=10 as an indicator in the LIST record of thesubsection for that particular MT and value of LFS must have the corresponding cross sections inFile 10.

10.2

August 2004

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

11. FILE 11. GENERAL COMMENTS OF PHOTON PRODUCTION
Photon production data not represented in MF=6 may be presented in four distinct files.
File
12
13
14
15

Description
Multiplicities and transition probability arrays
Photon production cross sections
Photon angular distributions
Continuous photon energy spectraWith the exception of File 12, all the files are closely analogous to the corresponding neutron
data files with the same number (modulo 10). The purpose of File 12 is to provide additional
methods for representing the energy dependence of photon production cross sections. The allowed
reaction type (MT) numbers are the same as those assigned for neutron reactions, Files 1 through 7.
However, they may have somewhat different meanings for photon production that require additional
explanation in some cases:
1. MT=3 should be used in File 12 through 15 to represent composite cross sections, that is, photon
production cross sections from more than one reaction type that have been lumped together.
2. There is no apparent reason to have redundant or derived data for the photon production files, asis the case for the neutron files, i.e., MT=3, 4, etc. Therefore, to avoid confusion, the join of all
sections of Files 6, 12 and 13 should represent the photon production, with each section being
disjoint from all others.
3. Using Figure 11.1 as a guide, let us consider how one might represent inelastic γ-ray production.
The differential cross section for producing γ-ray of energy Eγ resulting from the excitation of
the m0th level of the residual nucleus and the subsequent transition between two definite levels(j→i), which need not be adjacent, including the effects of cascading from the m0-j levels higher
than j, is
dσ
dE γ
where
σm0

m0 − j( Eγ ,E,m0 ,i, j ) = δ ⎡⎣ Eγ − (ε j − ε i ) ⎤⎦ Ajiσ m0 ( E ) ∑ Rm0 jα ,(11.1)

α =1=

Cross section for exciting the m0th level with incident particle energy
E, taken from file 3 for MT corresponding to the m0th level,

δ[Eγ–(εj-εi )] =Delta function defining the discrete gamma of energy Eγ that resultsfrom the transition level j to level i,Aji=Probability that a gamma ray of energy of Eγ is emitted in thetransition from level j to i, taken as the gamma ray branching ratio ofj→i,

R m0 jα=

Probability that the nucleus initially excited at level m0 will de-excite
to level j in α transitions, where α ranges from 1 to m0-j,=

April 2001

m0 −1

m1 −1

m1 =α + ( j −1)

m2 =α + ( j − 2)∑∑mα − 2 −1

L ∑mα −1 = j +1

j

α

mα

l =1

∑ ∏ TP

ml −1ml

11.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Tpk,l

=

probability of the residual nucleus having a transition to the lth level
given that it was in the excited state corresponding to the kth level, i.e.,the branching ratio for a gamma ray transition from the k→l level.

In general, Rm0jα is the sum of the products of α transition probabilities (branching ratios) leadingfrom level m0 through intermediate levels to level j. In the example shown for initial excitationof level m0=5 and interest being in the resulting γ-ray due to transition between levels 2 and 1

Rm0 j = TPm0 j = TP52
Rm0 j 2 = TPm0m1 TPm1 j + TPm0m2 TPm2 j = TP52 ⋅ TP42 + TP53TP32 = 0 + 0 = 0[Eγ = Eγ2 = (ε2-ε1)], the relevant quantities arefor this example, and
Rm0 j 3 = TPm0m1 TPm1m2 TPm2 j = TP54 ⋅ TP43 ⋅ TP32
If m0 and j are separated by many levels, the scheme becomes very involved.

We are at once beset by the problem that no clear choice of ENDF representation in terms ofsection number is possible. The data may naturally be identified with both the m0th level and thejth level. To avoid this problem, we can sum Eq. (11.1) over m0:
dσ 1

N( Eγ ,E,i, j ) = Σdσ( Eγ ,E,m0 ,i, j )(11.2)
dE γ
m0 = j dE γ
where N is the highest level that can be excited by a neutron of incident energy E [i.e., εN ≤AWR/(AWR + E)]. This gives a de-excitation cross section that can single out a definite γ-ray
transition and has the advantage when experimental data are to be represented. The
de-excitation cross section is identified with the jth level.
Alternatively, we can sum Eq. (11.1) over i and j:
dσ 2
dE γ

11.2

dσ
( E ,E,m ) = Σ Σ dE
( E ,E,m ,i, j )m0 j −1γ0

j=1 i=0γγ

0(11.3)

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresThis gives an excitation cross section that can single out a definite excited state and has theadvantage when calculated data are to be represented. The excitation cross section is identified
with the m0th level. If Equation (11.2) is summed over i and j, or if Equation (11.3) is summed
over m0 then
dσ
dE γ

dσ 2
( Eγ ,E,m0 )
m0 =1 dE γ

( Eγ ,E ) = ∑
N

j −l

dσ 1

j =1 i =0

dE γ

N

≡ ∑∑

( E ,E,i, j ) .

(11.4)γ

This gives a cross section for all possible excitations and transitions and thus corresponds to thetotal inelastic neutron cross section for discrete levels. It is recommended that MT=4 be used forthe data represented by Equation (11.4), as well as for the continuum. If, however, it isexpedient or useful to use MT=51 through 91, then one must use either the de-excitation crosssections of Equation (11.2) or the excitation cross sections of Equation (11.3), but not both. A
restriction is imposed if the transition probability array option is used and if the entire neutronenergy range is not covered by the known transition probabilities. Then, for MT=51 through 90
in File 12 to be used for the remaining neutron energy range, a representation by excitation
multiplicities must be used. The integrated cross sections of File 13 are obtained by integrating
Equations (11.1) through (11.4) over Eγ.
4. The remarks in Item 3 apply for discrete rays from (n,pγ), (n,dγ), (n,tγ), (n,3Heγ), (n,αγ)
reactions, and the use of MT=103, 101, 105, 106, and 107 is recommended for these cases.

April 2001

11.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

11.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

12. FILE 12. PHOTON PRODUCTION MULTIPLICITIES AND TRANSITIONPROBABILITY ARRAYS
File 12 can be used to represent the neutron energy dependence of photon production crosssections by means of either multiplicities or transition probability arrays. Both methods rely upon
processing codes that use neutron cross sections from File 2 and/or File 3 to generate absolute
photon production cross sections.
Multiplicities can be used to represent the cross sections of discrete photons and/or the integrated
cross sections of continuous photon spectra. The MT numbers in File 12 designate the particularneutron cross sections (File 2 and/or File 3) to which the multiplicities are referred. The use ofmultiplicities is the recommended method of presenting (n,γ) capture γ-ray cross sections, provided,of course, that the (n,γ) cross section is adequately represented in File 2 and/or File 3.
For well-established level decay schemes, the use of transition probability arrays offers a concise
method for presenting (n,xγ) information. With this method, the actual decay scheme of the residual
nucleus for a particular reaction (defined by MT number) is entered in File 12. This information canthen be used by a processing code together with discrete level excitation cross sections from File 3
to calculate discrete γ-ray production cross sections. This option cannot be used to represent the
integrals of continuous photon spectra.
12.1. Formats
Each section of File 12 gives information for a particular reaction type (MT number), either as
multiplicities (LO=1) or as transition probability arrays (LO=2). Each section always starts with a
HEAD record and ends with a SEND record.
12.1.1. Option 1 (LO=1): Multiplicities
The neutron energy dependence of photon production cross section is represented by tabulating a
set of neutron energy and multiplicity pairs {E,yk(E)} for each discrete photon and for the photon
energy continuum1. The subscript k designates a particular discrete photon or a photon continuum,
and the total number of such sets is represented by NK.
The multiplicity or yield yk(E) is defined byγy k(E) =σ k (photons)
σ (E)(12.1)

where E designates neutron energy and σ(E) is the neutron cross section in File 2 and/or File 3 towhich the multiplicity is referred (by the MT number). For discrete photons, σkγ(E) is the photon
production cross section for the discrete photon designated by k. For photon continua, σkγ(E) is the
cross section for the photon continuum integrated over photon energy.
In the continuum case,d σ γk( Eγ ← E ) dE γγ
σ k ( E ) ∫ dE γ=yk(E) =σ (E)
σ (E)(12.2)=1∫ σ ( E ) y ( Eγ ← E ) dE γ =kσ (E )

∫

Eγmax

0

y k ( Eγ ← E ) dEγ

There should be no more than one energy continuum for each MT number used. If the decomposition of a continuum
into several parts is desired, this can be accomplished in File 15.

April 2001

12.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

where Eγ designates photon energy (eV),dσ kγ( Eγ ← E)
Eγ

is the absolute photon energy distribution in barns/eV, and yk(Eγ←E) is the relative energy
distribution in photons/eV. The quantity yk(Eγ←E) can be broken down further asyk ( Eγ ← E ) = y k ( E ) f k ( Eγ ← E ) ,which results in the requirements that

∫

Eγmax

0

f k ( Eγ ← E ) dEγ = 1

Any time a continuum representation is used for a given MT number in either File 12 or 13, then thenormalized energy distribution fk(Eγ←E) must be given in File 15 under the same MT number.
As a check quantity, the total yield NK
NK

Y(E) = Σ yk ( E )(photons)

k=1

is also tabulated for each MT number if NK>1.
The structure of a section for LO=1 is[MAT, 12, MT/ ZA, AWR, LO, 0, NK, 0] HEAD
[MAT, 12, MT/ 0.0, 0.0, 0, 0, NR, NP/ Eint / Y(E)] TAB1 2<subsection for k =1><subsection for k=2>......
......
<subsection for k=NK>[MAT, 12, 0/ 0.0, 0.0, 0, 0, 0, 0] SEND ,(LO=1)and the structure of each subsection is[MAT, 12, MT/ Egk,

where
NK
ESk
EGk
LP

2

ESk, LP, LF, NR, NP/ Eint / yk(E)] TAB1,= number of discrete photons including the continuum.
= energy of the level from which the photon originates. If the level is unknown or if acontinuous photon spectrum is produced, then ESk ≡ 0.0 should be used.
= photon energy for LP=0 or 1 or Binding Energy for LP=2. For a continuous photon
energy distribution, EGk ≡ 0.0 should be used.
= indicator of whether or not the particular photon is a primary:
LP=0, origin of photons is not designated or not known, and the photon energy is
EGk;
LP=1, for non-primary photons where the photon energy is again simply EGk;
LP=2, for primary photons where the photon energy EGk′ is given by
AWR
EGk′ = EGk +En .
AWR +1

If the total number of discrete photons and photon continua is one (NK=1), this TAB1 record is omitted.

12.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

LF= the photon energy distribution law number, which presently has only two values
defined:
LF=1, a normalized tabulated function (in File 15), and
LF=2, a discrete photon energy.

12.1.2. Option 2 (LO=2): Transition Probability Arrays
With this option, the only data required are the level energies, de-excitation transition
probabilities, and (where necessary) conditional photon emission probabilities. Given thisinformation, the photon energies and their multiplicities can readily be calculated. Photon production
cross sections can then be computed for any given level from the excitation cross sections in File 3,along with the transition probability array. Similarly, multiplicities and photon production crosssections can be constructed for the total cascade. For any given level, the transition and photon
emission probability data given in the section are for photons originating at that level only; anyfurther cascading is determined from the data for the lower levels.
Now define the following variables.
LG=1, simple case (all transitions are γ emission).
LG
LG=2, complex case (internal conversion or other competing processes occur).
Number of levels below the present one, including the ground state. (TheNS
present level is also uniquely defined by the MT number and by its energy
level).
Number of transitions for which data are given in a list to follow (i.e., numberNTof nonzero transition probabilities), NT≤NS.
Energy of the ith level, i=0,1,2... NS.
ESi
ES ≡ 0.0, ground state
TPNS,i, probability of a direct transition from level NS to level i, i=0,1,2...
TPi(NS-1).
GPNS,i, the probability that, given a transition from level NS to level i, theGPitransition is a photon transition (i.e., the conditional probability of photon
emission).
Array of NT doublets or triplets depending on LG value.
Bi

Note that each level can be identified by its NS number. Then the energy of a photon from atransition to level i is given by Eγ = ESNS - ESi, and its multiplicity is given by y(Eγ←E) = (TPi)(GPi). It is implicitly assumed that the transition probability array is independent of incident neutronenergy.
The structure of a section for LO=2 is[MAT, 12, MT/
ZA, AWR, LO,[MAT, 12, MT/ ESNS, 0.0, LP,[MAT, 12, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,

LG,
NS,
0] HEAD
0,(LG+1)*NT, NT/B] LIST0,0,0] SEND(LO=2)

If LG=1, the array Bi consists of NT doublets {ESi,TPi}; if LG=2, it consists of NT triplets{ESi,TPi,GPi}. Here the subscript i is a running index over the levels below the level for which thetransition probability array is being given (i.e., below level NS). The doublets or triplets are given in
decreasing magnitude of energy ESi.

April 2001

12.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

12.2. Procedures

1. Under Option 1, the subsections are given in decreasing magnitude of EGk.
2. Under Option 1, the convention is that the subsection for the continuum photons, if present, islast. In this case, the last value of EGk (EGNK) is set equal to 0.0, and logical consistency with
Procedure 1 is maintained.
3. Under Option 1, the values of EGk should be consistent to within four significant figures withthe corresponding EGk values for the File 14 photon angular distributions. This allows
processing and "physics" checking codes to match photon yields with the corresponding angular
distributions.
4. Under Option 1, ESk is the energy of the level from which the photon originates. If ESk is
unknown or not meaningful (as for the continuous photon spectrum), the value 0.0 should beentered.
5. If capture and fission resonance parameters are given in File 2, photon production for thesereactions should be given by using Option 1 of File 12, instead of using photon production crosssections in File 13. This is due to the voluminous data required to represent the resonancestructure in File 13 and the difficulty of calculating multigroup photon production matrices fromsuch data.
6. Under Option 1, the total yield table, Y(E), should exactly span the same energy range as the
combined energy range of all the yk(E). Within that range,NK

Y ( E ) = Σ yk ( E )k=1should hold within four significant figures.
7. The excitation cross sections for all the levels appearing in the transition probability arrays must,of course, be given in File 3.
8. The join of all sections, regardless of the option used, should represent the photon production
data, with no redundancy. For example, MT=4 cannot include any photons given elsewhere
under MT=51 through 91. Likewise, there can be no redundancy between Files 12 and 13.
9. If only one energy distribution is given under Option 1 (NK=1), the TAB1 record for the Y(E)table is deleted to avoid repetitive entries.
10. Data should not be given in File 12 for reaction types that do not appear in Files 2 and/or 3.
11. Under Option 2, the level energies, ESi, in the transition probability arrays are given in
decreasing magnitude.
12. The MT numbers for which transition probability data are given should be for consecutive
levels, beginning at the first level, with no embedded levels omitted.
13. The energies of photons arising from level transitions should be consistent within four
significant figures with the corresponding EGk values in File 14. Therefore, care must be taken
to specify level energies to the appropriate number of significant figures.

12.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

14. Under Option 2, the sum of the transition probabilities (TPi) over i should equal 1.0000 (that is,should be unity to within five significant figures).
15. The limit on the number of energy points in any tabulations of Y(E) or yk(E) is 1000. This is anupper limit that will rarely be approached in practice because yields are normally smoothly
varying functions of incident neutron energy.
16. The limit on the number of interpolation regions is 10.
17. Tabulations of non-threshold data should normally cover at least the energy range 10-5 eV ≤ E ≤2×107 eV, where practical. Threshold data should be given from threshold energy up to 2×107
eV, where practical.
18. Transition Probability Arrays for (n,n′γ) photons.
a.

The use of transition probability arrays (File 12, LO=2) is a convenient way to represent a
portion of the γ-rays produced by de-excitation of discrete levels populated by (n,n′γ) andother reactions.

b.

Several conditions must be met before this representation can be used. Level excitation
cross sections (given in File 3 as MT=51,...) must be given from threshold energies up to
the same maximum energy (no exceptions). Decay properties of all n levels must be
known. The information given in File 12 must be consistent with data given in File 3.

c.

Usually, not all the conditions can be met. Part of the problem is the recommendation thatlevel excitation cross sections for the first few levels be given for neutron energies up to 20
MeV. It is seldom that all level data can be given for neutron energies up to 15 MeV.

April 2001

12.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

12.6

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

13. FILE 13. PHOTON PRODUCTION CROSS SECTION
The purpose of File 13 is the same as that of File 12, namely, it can be used to represent theneutron and photon energy dependence of photon production cross sections. In File 13, however,absolute cross sections in barns are tabulated, and there is no need to refer to the neutron files.
13.1. Formats
As in File 12, each section in File 13 gives information for a particular reaction type (MTnumber). Each section always starts with a HEAD record and ends with a SEND record.
The representation of the energy dependence of the cross sections is accomplished by tabulating
a set of neutron energy-cross section pairs {E,σkγ(E)} for each discrete photon and for the photon
energy continuum. The subscript k designates a particular discrete photon or the photon continuum,
and the total number of such sets in NK. For discrete photons, σkγ(E) is the photon production crosssection (b) for the photon designated by k. For the photon continuum, σkγ(E) is the integrated (overphoton energy) cross section for the photon continuum1 designated by k. In the continuum case,Eγmax d σ γ
kσ kγ ( E ) = ∫(13.1)( Eγ ← E ) dEγ (barns)0dEγ
where Eγ designates photon energy (eV), and dσkγ/dEγ (Eγ←E) is the absolute photon energy
distribution in b/eV. The energy distribution can be further broken down asdσ kγ(13.2)( Eγ ← E ) = σ kγ ( E ) f k ( Eγ ← E ) ,dE γ
which obviously requires that

∫

Eγmax

0

f k ( Eγ ← E )dEγ = 1 .

Any time a continuum representation is used for a given MT number in File 13, the normalizedenergy distribution, fk(Eγ←E), must be given in File 15 under the same MT number.
As a check quantity, the total photon production cross section,
NK

γ
σ tot
( E ) = ∑σ kγ ( E ) (barns) ,(13.3)

k =1

is also tabulated for each MT number, unless only one subsection is present (i.e., NK=1).
The following quantities are defined.
NK
ESk
EGk

1

Number of discrete photons including the continuum.
Energy of the level from which the photon originates. If the level is unknown
or if a continuous photon spectrum is produced, then ESk≡0.0 should be used.
Photon energy for LP=0 or 1 or Binding Energy for LP=2. For a continuous
photon energy distribution, EGk=0.0 should be used.

There should be no more than one energy continuum for each MT number used. If the decomposition of a continuum
into several parts is desired, this can be accomplished in File 15.

April 2001

13.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

LP

LF

Indicates whether or not the particular photon is a primary:
LP=0, origin of photons is not designated or not known, and the photon energy
is EGk;
LP=1, for non-primary photons where the photon energy is again simply Egk;
AWR
EGk′ = EGk +En
AWR +1
LP=2, for primary photons where the photon energy EG′k is given by
Photon energy distribution law number, which presently has only two values
defined:
LF=1, a normalized tabulated function (in File 15), and
LF=2, a discrete photon energy.

The structure of a section in File 13 is[MAT, 13, MT/ ZA, AWR,
0,0,
[MAT, 13, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0,<subsection for k=1>
<subsection for k=2>
<subsection for k=NK>[MAT, 13, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0,

and the structure of each subsection is[MAT, 13, MT/

Egk,

Esk,

LP,

LF,

NK,
NR,

0] HEADNP/ Eint / σtotγ (E)] TAB1 2

0,0] SENDNR,

NP/ Eint / σkγ(E)] TAB1,

13.2. Procedures

1. The subsections are given in decreasing magnitude of EGk.
2. The convention is that the subsection for the continuum photons, if present, is last. In this case,
EGNK ≡ 0.0.
3. The values of EGk should be consistent to within four significant figures with the corresponding
EGk values in File 14.
4. ESk is the energy of the level from which the photon originates, if known. Otherwise ESk ≡ 0.0.
5. If capture and fission resonance parameters are given in File 2, the corresponding photon
production should be given by using Option 1 of File 12, instead of using photon production
cross sections.
6.The total photon production cross section table, σtotγ (E) should exactly span the same energy
range as the combined energy range of all the σkγ(E). Within that range,
NK

γ
σ tot
( E ) = ∑ σ kγ ( E )k =1should hold within four significant figures. If only one energy distribution is given, eitherγ(E) is deleted.
discrete or continuous (NK=1), the TAB1 record for the σtot

2

If the total number of discrete photons and photon continua is one (NK=1), this TAB1 record is omitted.

13.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

7. The join of all sections in File 12 and 13 combined should represent the photon production datawith no redundancy. For example, MT=4 cannot include any photons given elsewhere under
MT=51 through 91.
8. The limit on the number of energy points in a tabulation for any photon production subsection is1000. This is an upper limit; in practice, the minimum number of points possible should be
used. If there is extensive structure, the use of File 12 should be seriously considered, because
yields are normally much smoother functions of incident neutron energy than cross sections.
9. The limit on the number of interpolation regions is 10.
10. Tabulations of non-threshold data should normally cover at least the energy range 10-5 eV ≤ E ≤2×107 eV, where practical. Threshold data should be given from threshold energy up to 2x107
eV, where practical.
13.3. Preferred Representations

1. The recommended representation for (n,n′γ) reactions is photon production cross section (File13) using MT=4. All discrete and continuum γ rays are given in a series of subsections.
2. Photon production cross sections resemble the frequently measured or reported results.
3. The use of MT=4 eliminates confusion about whether the data represent an excitation orde-excitation cross section (see File 11).
4. If for any reason MT=51,52 ... is used, it is understood that these data represent de-excitationand not excitation cross sections (see 3 above). MT=51, 52, ... in File 3, of course, means
excitation cross sections.
5. Combined use of MT=4 and MT=51, 52, ... is not allowed.
6. Above a certain energy point it probably will not be possible to separate the various componentsof the total γ production cross section. When this happens, it is preferred that the data be given
as MT=3.
7. All other reactions. Data for other reactions should be given as photon production cross sections(File 13) using the appropriate MT numbers. The same general rule outlined above should be
used.

April 2001

13.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

13.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

14. FILE 14. PHOTON ANGULAR DISTRIBUTIONS
The purpose of File 14 is to provide a means for representing the angular distributions ofsecondary photons produced in neutron interactions. Angular distributions should be given for eachdiscrete photon and photon continuum appearing in Files 12 and 13, even if the distributions are
isotropic.
The structure of File 14 is, with the exception of isotropic flag (LI), closely analogous to that ofFile 4. Angular distributions for a specific reaction type (MT number) are given for a series ofincident neutron energies in order of increasing neutron energy. The energy range covered shouldbe the same as that for the data given under the corresponding reaction type in File 12 or File 13.
The data are given in ascending order of MT number.
The angular distributions are expressed as normalized probability distributions,that is,1∫ p ( µ ,E ) d µ = 1 ,−1kwhere pk(µ,E) is the probability that an incident neutron of energy E will result in a particular
discrete photon or photon energy continuum (specified by k and MT number) being emitted into unit
cosine about an angle whose cosine is µ. Because the photon angular distribution is assumed to haveazimuthal symmetry, the distribution may be represented as a Legendre series expansion,
2π dσ kγpk ( µ ,E ) = γ( Ω ,E )σ k ( E ) dΩ
(14.1)
NL
2l + 1 k=Σal ( E ) P l ( µ )
2
l=0
where
µ
= cosine of the reaction angle in the lab system,E= energy of the incident neutron in the laboratory system,= photon production cross section for the discrete photon or photon continuum
σkγ(E)
specified by k, as given in either File 13 or in File 2, 3, and 12 combined,l= order of the Legendre polynomial,
dσkγ/dΩ = differential photon production cross section in barns/steradian,= the l-th Legendre coefficient associated with the discrete photon or photonalk(E)
continuum specified by k. (It is understood that a0k(E) ≡ 1.0.)
1alk ( E ) = ∫ p k ( µ ,E ) Pl ( µ ) d µ−1

Angular distributions may be given in File 14 by tabulating as a function of incident neutronenergy either the normalized probability distribution function, pk(µ,E), or the Legendre polynomial
expansion coefficients, alk(E). Provision is made in the format for simple flags to denote isotropic
angular distributions, either for a block of individual photons within a reaction type or for all
photons within a reaction type taken as a group.
Note that File 14 assumes separability of the photon energy and angular distributions for thecontinuum spectrum. If this is not the case, File 16 (analogous to File 6) must be used instead ofFiles 14 and 15. (Since File 14 implicitly specifies an energy-angle distribution for discrete photons,
File 16 is required only for the continuum spectrum).

April 2001

14.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

14.1. Formats
As usual, sections are ordered by increasing reaction type (MT) numbers. The following
definitions are required.
LI=0, distribution is not isotropic for all photons from this reaction type, but may
LIbe for some photons.
LI=1, distribution is isotropic for all photons from this reaction type.
LTT
LTT=1, data are given as Legendre coefficients, where a0k(E) ≡ 1.0 isunderstood.
LTT=2, data are given as a tabulation.
Number of discrete photons including the continuum (must equal the value givenNK
in File 12 or 13).
Number of isotropic photon angular distributions given in a section (MTNI
number) for which LI = 0, i.e., a section with at least one anisotropic
distribution.
Numberof neutron energy points given in a TAB2 record.
NE
Highest value of l required at each neutron energy Ei.
NLi
Energy of the level from which the photon originates.
ESk
If the level is unknown or if a continuous photon spectrum is produced, thenESk=0.0 should be used.
Photon energy as given in File 12 or 13.
EGk
For a continuous photon energy distribution, EGk,=0.0 should be used.
a. LI=1: Isotropic Distribution
If LI=1, then all photons for the reaction type (MT) in question are assumed to be isotropic. Thisis a flag that the processing code can sense, and thus needless isotropic distribution data are notentered in the file. In this case, the section is composed of a HEAD card and a SEND card, as
follows:[MAT, 14, MT/ ZA, AWR,
[MAT, 14, 0 / 0.0, 0.0,

LI,
0,

0,
0,

NK,
0,

0] HEAD0] SEND(LI=1)

b. LI=0: Anisotropic Distribution
If LI=0, there are two possible structures for a section, depending upon the value of LTT.
i. LTT=1: Legendre Coefficient Representation
The structure of a section with LI=0 and LTT=1 is[MAT, 14, MT/ ZA, AWR, LI, LTT, NK,<subsection for k=1>
<subsection for k=2>..........
..........
..........
<subsection for k=NK>[MAT, 14, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,
0, 0,

NI] HEAD(LI=0, LTT=1)0] SEND

The structure of each record in the first block of NI subsections, which is for the NI isotropic
photons, is[MAT, 14, MT/

14.2

EGk, ESk,

0,

0,

0,

0] CONT

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

There is just one CONT record for each isotropic photon. (The set of CONT records is empty if
NI=0). The subsections are ordered in decreasing magnitude of EGk (photon energy), and thecontinuum, if present and isotropic, appears last, with EGk=0.0.
This block of NI subsections is then followed by a block of NK-NI subsections for the
anisotropic photons in decreasing magnitude of EGk. The continuum, if present and anisotropic,
appears last, with EGk=0.0. The structure for the last NK-NI subsections is[MAT, 14, MT/ EGk, ESk,0,0,
NR, NE/ Eint ] TAB2
0,0, NL1,0/ alk(E1)] LIST
[MAT, 14, MT/ 0.0, E1,0,0, NL2,0/ alk(E2)] LIST
[MAT, 14, MT/ 0.0, E2,------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 14, MT/ 0.0, ENE,
0,0, NLNE, 0/ alk(ENE)] LIST

Note that lists of the alk(E) start at l=1 because a0k(E) ≡ 1.0 is always understood.
ii. LTT=2: Tabulated Angular Distributions
The structure of a section for LI=0 and LTT=2 is[MAT, 14, MT/[MAT, 14,

ZA, AWR, LI, LTT, NK, NI] HEAD
<subsection for k=1>
<subsection for k=2>------------------------------------------------------------------------------------<subsection for k=NK>0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND(LI=0, LTT=2)

The structure of the first block of NI subsection (where NI may be zero) is the same as for thecase of a Legendre representation; i.e., it consists of one CONT record for each of the NI isotropic
photons in decreasing magnitude of EGk. The continuum, if present and isotropic, appears last, with
EGk ≡ 0.0.
The structure of the first Ni subsections is[MAT, 14, MT/ EGk,

ESk,

0,

0,

0,

0] CONTThis block of NI subsections is then followed by a block of NK-NI subsections for the
anisotropic photons, again in decreasing magnitude of EGk, with the continuum, if present andanisotropic, appearing last, with EGk ≡ 0.0.
The structure of the last NK-NI subsections is[MAT, 14, MT/[MAT, 14, MT/[MAT, 14, MT/[MAT, 14, MT/

April 2001

EGk, Esk,
0,0, NR, NE/ Eint ] TAB2
0,0, NR, NP/ µint / pk(µ,E1)] TAB1
0.0, E1,
0,0, NR, NP/ µint / pk(µ,E2)] TAB1
0.0, E2,--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0,
0, NR, NP/ µint / pk(µ,ENE)] TAB1
0.0, ENE,

14.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

14.2. Procedures

1. The subsections are given in decreasing magnitude of EGk within each of the isotropic andanisotropic blocks.
2. The convention is that the subsection for the continuous photon spectrum, if present, appears last
in its block. In this case, EGNK ≡ 0.0.
3. The values of EGk should be consistent within four significant figures with the corresponding
EGk values in File 12 or 13. File 12, Option 2 (transition probability arrays), the values of EGk
are implicitly determined by the level energies.
4. ESk is the energy of the level from which the photon originates, if known. Otherwise, ESk=0.0(as is always the case for the continuum).
5. Data should not appear in File 14 for photons that do not have production data given in File 12
or 13. Conversely, for every photon appearing in File 12 or 13 an angular distribution must be
given in File 14. The neutron energy range for which the angular distributions are given shouldbe the same as that for which the photon production data are given in File 12 or 13.
6. For LTT=1 (Legendre coefficients), the value of NL should be the minimum number ofcoefficients that will reproduce the angular distribution with sufficient accuracy and be positive
everywhere. In all cases, NL should be an even number, ≤20.
7. The TAB1 records for the pk(µ,Ei) within a subsection are given in increasing order of neutronenergy, Ei.
8. The tabulated probability functions, pk(µ,Ei), should be normalized within four significant
figures (to unity).
9. The interpolation scheme for pk(µ,E) with respect to E must be linear-linear or log-linear (INT=2
or 4) to preserve normality of the interpolated distributions. It is recommended that theinterpolation in µ be linear-linear (INT=2).
10. For Li=1 (isotropic distribution), the parameter NK is the number of photons in that section andshould be consistent with the NK values in Files 12 and 13.
11. The minimum amount of data should be used that will accurately represent the angular
distribution as a function of both m and E.
12. If all photons for a reaction type (MT number) are isotropic, the LI=1 flag should be used. The
use of LI=0 and NI=NK is strongly discouraged. Likewise, isotropic distributions should not beentered explicitly as a tabulation or as a Legendre expansion with alk(E) ≡ 0, l ≥ 1.
13. Angular distributions for photons must be given for all discrete and continuum photons. Thiscan be done by specifying the data explicitly (by giving distributions) or implicitly by using aflag meaning that all photons for a particular reaction (MT number) are isotropic. Isotropic
angular distributions should be specified unless the anisotropy is ≥ 20%.

14.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

15. File 15. CONTINUOUS PHOTON ENERGY SPECTRA
File 15 provides a means for representing continuous energy distributions of secondary photons,
expressed as normalized probability distributions. The energy distribution of each photon
continuum occurring in Files 12 and 13 should be specified in File 15 over the same neutron energy
range used in Files 12 and 13. Each section of File 15 gives the data for a particular reaction type
(MT number) and the sections are ordered by increasing MT number. The energy distributions,f(Eγ←E), are in units of eV-1 and are normalized so that

max

∫

Eγmax

0

f ( Eγ ← E ) dEγ = 1 ,where Eγ is the maximum possible secondary photon energy and its value depends on theincoming neutron energy as well as the particular nuclei involved.1 The energy distributionsf(Eγ←E) can be broken down into the weighted sum of several different normalized distributions in
the following manner:f ( Eγ ← E ) = ∑ p j ( E ) g j ( Eγ ← E )NC(eV)-1(15.1)

j =1

where
NC
= the number of partial distributions used to represent f(Eγ←E),gj(Eγ←E) = the jth normalized partial distribution in the units eV–1 , andpj(E)= the probability or weight given to the jth partial distribution, gj(Eγ←E).
The following condition is imposed.

∫

Eγmax

0

g j ( Eγ ← E ) dEγ = 1.

Thus,
NC

∑ p ( E ) = 1.
jj =1

The absolute energy distribution cross section, σγ(Eγ←E), can be constructed from the expression

σ γ ( Eγ ← E ) = σ γ ( E ) f ( Eγ ← E )(b/eV) ,where σγ(E) is the integrated cross section for the continuum given either directly in file 13 or
through the combination of Files 2, 3, and 12.
The system used to represent continuous photon energy distributions in File 15 is similar to thatused in File 5. At present, however, there is only one continuous distribution law activated for File15, i.e.,g j ( Eγ ← E ) = g ( Eγ ← E ) ,where g(Eγ←E) represents an arbitrary tabulated function. In the future, new laws (for example,
the fission gamma-ray spectrum) may be added.

1

Note that the subscript k used in describing Files 12 and 13 has been dropped from f(Eγ←E). This is done because
only one energy continuum is allowed for each MT number, and the subscript k has no meaning in File 15. It is, infact, the NKth subsection in File 12 or 13 that contains the production data for the continuum.

April 2001

15.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

15.1. Formats
The structure of a section is[MAT, 15, MT/[MAT, 15,

ZA, AWR,

0,

0,

NC,

0] HEAD0/ 0.0, 0.0,

0,

0,

0,

0] SEND<subsection for j=1>
<subsection for j=2>--------------------------------------------------------------<subsection for j=NC>

For LF=1, the structure of a subsection is[MAT, 15, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0, LF, NR, NP/ Eint / pj(E)] TAB1 (LF=1)0,0, NR, NE/ Eint ] TAB2
[MAT, 15, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NR, NP/ Eγ int / g(Eγ←E1)] TAB1
[MAT, 15, MT/ 0.0,E1,
0,0, NR, NP/ Eγ int / g(Eγ←E2)] TAB1
[MAT, 15, MT/ 0.0,E2,--------------------------------------------------------0,
0, NR, NP/ Eγ int/g(Eγ←ENE)] TAB1
[MAT, 15, MT/ 0.0, ENE,

Only one distribution law is presently available (tabulated secondary photon energy distribution).
Therefore, formats for other laws remain to be defined, but their structures will probably closely
parallel those in File 5 for LF=5, 7, 9, and 11. When histogram representations are used
(interpolation scheme, INT=1), 0.25 to 0.5-MeV photon energy bands should be used. The incident
energy ranges must agree with data given in file 12 and/or 13. Other procedures are the same as
those recommended for File 5 data (tabulated distribution).
15.2. Procedures
1. Photon energies, Eγ, within a subsection are given in order of increasing magnitude.
2. The TAB1 records for the g(Eγ←Ei) within a subsection are given in increasing order of neutronenergy, Ei.
3. The tabulated functions, g(Eγ←Ei), should be normalized to unity within four significant figures.
4. The interpolation scheme for pj(E) must be either linear-linear or log-linear (INT=1, 2, or 3) topreserve probabilities upon interpolation. Like-wise, the interpolation scheme for g(Eγ←E)
must be linear-linear or log-linear with respect to E.
5. The neutron energy mesh should be a subset of that used for the yNK(E) tabulation in File 12 orfor the σγNK(E) tabulation in File 13, and the energy ranges must be identical. However, theneutron energy mesh for pj(E) need not be the same as that for g(Eγ←E), as long as they span
the same range.
6. For an MT number appearing in both File 12 and File 13, a continuous photon energy
distribution (LF=1) can appear in only one of those files. Otherwise the distribution as given in
File 15 could not in general be uniquely associated with a corresponding multiplicity or
production cross section.

15.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

7. Use the minimum amount of data that will accurately represent the energy distribution as afunction of both Eγ and E. However, do not use too coarse a mesh for E, even if the
distributions are slowly varying functions of E, since the interpolated distribution will always
have a nonzero component up to the maximum energy at which either of the original
distributions has a non-zero component.
8. The limit on the number of neutron energy points for either pj(E) or g(Eγ←E) is 200. The limiton the number of photon energy points for g(Eγ←E) is 1000.

April 2001

15.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

15.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

23. FILE 23. "SMOOTH" PHOTON INTERACTION CROSS SECTIONS
23.1. General Comments on Photon Interaction
Photon interaction data are divided into two files. File 23 is analogous to File 3 and contains the"smooth" cross sections. File 27 contains the coherent scattering form factors and incoherent
scattering functions (see Chapter 27).
Electron interaction data are divided into two different files. The smooth cross sections forelastic scattering, bremsstrahlung, excitation, and the ionization of different atomic subshells are
given in File 23. File 26 is used to give the angular distribution for elastically scattered electrons,
the outgoing photon spectra and energy loss for bremsstrahlung, the energy transfer for excitation,and the spectra of the scattered and recoil electrons associated with subshell ionization.
Both photo-atomic and electro-atomic reactions can leave the atom in an ionized state. See
Section 28 for a description of the atomic relaxation data needed to compute the outgoing X-ray andelectron spectra as an ionized atom relaxes back to neutrality.
23.2. General Description
This file is for the integrated photon and electron interaction cross-sections. The reaction type(MT) numbers for photon and electron interaction are in the 500 series. Several common photon andelectron interactions have been assigned MT numbers:
MT
523
526
527
528
533
534-572

Reaction Description
Photo-excitation cross sections
Electro-atomic elastic scattering
Electro-atomic bremsstrahlung
Electro-atomic excitation cross section
Atomic relaxation data (see Section 28)
Photo-electric or electro-atomic subshell ionization

Photon cross sections, such as the total cross section, coherent elastic scattering cross section,and incoherent (Compton) cross section, are given in File 23, which has essentially the samestructure as File 3. These data are given as a function of energy, Eγ, where Eγ is the energy of theincident photon (in eV). The data are given as energy-cross section pairs.
Similarly, electron cross sections, such as elastic scattering, bremsstrahlung, ionization, andexcitation, are given in File 23. These data are given as a function of the electron energy in eV,and they are also given as energy-cross section pairs.
Each section in File 23 contains the data for a particular reaction type (MT number). The
sections are ordered by increasing MT number.

April 2001

23.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

23.3. Formats
The following quantities are defined:
ZA,AWREPE
EFLNR,NP,Eintσ(E)Standard material charge and mass parameters.
Subshell binding energy (equal to the photoelectric edge energy) in eV. The
value is zero if MT is not in 534-599.
Fluorescence yield (eV/photoionization).
Value is zero if not a photoelectric subshell ionization cross section.
Standard TAB1 parameters (see Section 1.3.1).
Cross section (barns) for a photon or electron of energy E given as a table of
NP energy-cross section pairs.

The structure of a section is[MAT, 23, MT/ ZA,[MAT, 23, MT/ EPE,
[MAT, 23, 0/ 0.0,

AWR,
EFL,
0.0,

0,
0,
0,

0,
0,
0,

0,
NR,
0,

0] HEADNP/ Eint / σ(E)] TAB1
0] SEND

23.4. Procedures
1. Values are usually for elements; hence, except for mono-isotopic elements, ZA=Z × 1000.0;
also, AWR should be for the naturally occurring element.
2. Photoelectric edges will not be multi-valued. The edge will be defined by two energies
differing in the fourth or fifth significant figure.
3. Interpolation is normally log-log (INT=5).
4. Kerma factor (energy deposition coefficients) libraries will normally be local because there isno universal definition. The application will determine whether annihilation or other radiation
fractions are subtracted.

23.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

26. FILE 26. SECONDARY DISTRIBUTIONS FOR PHOTO- AND ELECTROATOMIC DATA
26.1. General Description
This file is used to represent the secondary photons or electrons emitted after electro-atomic
reactions, energy given to the residual atom, and the energy transfer associated with excitation.
It is based on File 6 with appropriate simplifications.
Elastic scattering is represented by the normalized angular distribution for the scatteredelectron given in tabulated form (LAW=2, LANG=12) for scattering cosines ranging from -1 to.999999. Because of the very large mass of the residual atom with respect to the mass of theelectron, it is assumed that the electron scatters without a change of energy, and there is noenergy transfer to the residual atom.
Bremsstrahlung is represented using two subsections. The electron is assumed to scatterstraight ahead with an energy loss described using the LAW=8 format. The photon is assumed
to be emitted isotropically with spectra given as tabulated distributions (LAW=1, LANG=1,
NA=0). Energy transfer to the residual atom is ignored.
Excitation occurs when the incident electron losses some of its energy by exciting the outerelectrons of the atom to higher energy states. The energy transfer to the residual atom isrepresented using LAW=8. The electron is assumed to continue in the straight-ahead direction.
Ionization is represented by giving a section of File 26 for each sub-shell (MT=534,535,...).
There are two electrons coming out of each ionization reaction: the scattered electron and therecoil electron. Because these two particles are identical, it is arbitrarily assumed that theparticle with the lower energy is the "recoil" electron, and the one with the higher energy is the"scattered" electron. If Ek is the binding energy for the sub-shell, the energy of the recoil
electron varies from 0 to (E-Ek)/2, and the energy of the scattered electron varies from (E-Ek)/2
to E-Ek. Only the distribution for the "recoil" electron is given in File 26. The user can select a
recoil energy Er from the distribution and then generate the corresponding scattered electron withenergy E-Ek-Er. The value of Ek is given in the corresponding section of File 3. It is assumed
that both the scattered and the recoil electrons continue in the direction of the incident electron,and that no kinetic energy is transferred to the residual atom.
The relaxation of the residual atom left after ionization results in the emission of additional
X-rays and electrons. Those spectra can be computed using the atomic relaxation data describedin Section 28.

April 2001

26.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

26.2. Formats
The following quantities are defined:
ZA,AWRNK

ZAP
LAW

NR,NP,Eint
y(E)
ET(E)

Standard material charge and mass parameters
Number of subsections in this section (MT).
Each subsection describes one reaction product (in this case, photons orelectrons), or a subsection can describe the energy transfer associated withexcitation or bremsstrahlung.
Product identifier: zero for photons, and 11 for electrons.
Distinguishes between different representations of the product distributions:
LAW=1, continuum distribution (used for bremsstrahlung andionization);
LAW=2, two-body angular distribution (used for elastic); andLAW=8, energy transfer for excitation (used for excitation andbremsstrahlung).
Standard TAB1 parameters.
Yield for the particle being described (always 1 in File 26, but we keep thisfor consistency with File 6).
Energy transfer during electro-atomic excitation or bremsstrahlung (eV).

The structure of a section is:[MAT,26, MT/ZA, 0.0,
0,0, NK,
0] HEAD[MAT,26, MT/ZAP, 0.0,
0, LAW, NR, NP/ Eint / y(E)] TAB1
[LAW-dependent structure for product]----------------------------repeat TAB1 and LAW-dependent structures
for the rest of the NK subsections----------------------------[MAT,26,MT/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND

The subsections for bremsstrahlung are given in the order photons, then electrons. The
contents of the subsection for each LAW are given below.
26.2.1. Continuum Distribution (LAW=1)
This law is the same as LAW=1 for File 6, except that only LANG=1, NA=0, representing asimple tabulated energy distribution without angle dependence, is allowed.
26.2.2. Two-Body Angular Distribution (LAW=2)
This law is the same as LAW=2 for File 6, except that only LANG=11-15 for linear-linear
tabulated angular distributions, is allowed. It is only used for the electro-atomic elastic scattering
reaction, and the cosine range is -1 to 0.99999.
26.2.3. Energy Transfer for Excitation (LAW=8)
This law is used to give only the energy transfer during excitation and the energy loss forbremsstrahlung:[MAT,26, MT/

26.2

0.0,

0.0,

0,

0,

NR,

NP/ Eint / ET(E)] TAB1

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

27. FILE 27. ATOMIC FORM FACTORS OR SCATTERING FUNCTIONS
27.1. General Description
The ENDF system for neutron and photon production data allows two alternatives for storing
angular distribution data. One is by probability per unit cos θ vs. cos θ, and the other is by Legendre
coefficients. Actually, neither of these is a "natural" method for photons. The natural method would
be atomic form factors or incoherent scattering functions. These are discussed briefly below.
a. Incoherent Scattering. The cross section for incoherent scattering is given by

where dσc/dµ =S(q;Z) =q=dσ i ( E,E ′, µ )dσ ( E,E ′, µ )= S ( q;Z ) i,(27.1)dµdµ
the Klein-Nishina cross section1 which can be written in a closed form.
the incoherent scattering function. At high momentum transfer (q), S
approaches Z. In the other limit, S(0,Z) = 0.
the momentum of the recoil electron (in inverse angstroms2).
12⎡ ⎛ α ′ ⎞2
⎛ α ′ ⎞⎤
(27.2)
q = α ⎢1 + ⎜ ⎟ − 2 µ ⎜ ⎟ ⎥⎝ α ⎠ ⎦⎥⎣⎢ ⎝ α ⎠where α = Eγ /m0c2,
Eγ′ = scattered photon energy,µ = cosθ.
The angular distribution can then easily be calculated, given a table of S(q;Z) are tabulated as afunction of q in File 27. The user presumably will have subroutines available for calculating q forenergies and angles of interest and for calculating Klein-Nishina cross sections. The user will thengenerate the cross sections for the appropriate cases by calculating q's, looking up the appropriate
values of S, and substituting them in the above formula.

b. Coherent Scattering. The coherent scattering cross section is given bydσ coh ( E,E ′, µ )22= π r02 1+ µ 2 ⎡( F ( q;Z ) + F ′ ( E ) ) + F ′′ ( E ) ⎤ ,(27.3)⎣⎦
dµwhere q= α[2(1–µ)]1/2, the recoil momentum of the atom (in inverse angstroms),= e2/m0c2 , the classical radius of the electron.
r0= the real anomalous scattering factor.
F′(E)= the imaginary anomalous scattering factor.
F″(E)

(

)

The quantity F(q;Z) is a form factor. This quantity is also easily tabulated. At high momentum
transfer (q), F approaches zero. In the other limit F(0;Z)=Z. The anomalous scattering factors are
assumed to be isotropic. In addition, they smoothly approach zero at 1.0 MeV and can be assumed
to be zero at higher energies.

1

O. Klein and Y. Nishina, Z. Phys. 52, 853 (1929).
In ENDF, q is given in inverse angstroms, as customarily reported in the literature. The above equation shows q in
m0c units. See Appendix H for unit conversions.
2

April 2001

27.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

An alternative way of presenting the photon scattering data, then, would be to tabulate
incoherent scattering functions and form factors. Users could then provide processing codes togenerate the cross sections from this information. The calculation is quite straightforward andallows the user to generate all his scattering data from a relatively small table of numbers. The
incoherent and coherent scattering data should always be presented as scattering functions and form
factors, respectively, whether or not data are included in File 6.
27.2. Formats
The structure of a section is very similar to that of File 3 (and 23) and is[MAT, 27, MT/ ZA,[MAT, 27, MT/ 0.0,
[MAT, 27, 0/ 0.0,

AWR,
Z,
0.0,

0,
0,
0,

0, 0, 0] HEAD
0, NR, NP/ qint / H(q;Z)] TAB1
0, 0, 0] SEND

The general symbol H(q;Z) is used for either F(q;Z) or S(q;Z) for coherent and incoherent
scattering, respectively, or for the anomalous factors[MAT, 27, MT/ ZA,[MAT, 27, MT/ 0.0,
[MAT, 27, 0/ 0.0,

AWR,
Z,
0.0,

0,
0,
0,

0, 0, 0] HEAD
0, NR, NP/ Eint / F(E)] TAB1
0, 0, 0] SEND

27.3. Procedures

1. Values of H(q;Z) should be entered in each case for the entire energy range for which integrated
coherent and incoherent cross sections are given in File 23. This is true even though therespective values may be 0.0 or Z over most of the (higher) energy range.
2. The value of Z is entered in floating-point format.

27.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

28. FILE 28. ATOMIC RELAXATION DATA
28.1. General Comments on Atomic Relaxation
An atom can be ionized due to a variety of interactions. For example, due to photon or electroninteractions the probability of ionizing a particular subshell of the atomic structure (K, L1, L2, etc.) is
determined by using the subshell cross sections (MT=534-599). For example, if an incident photon ofenergy E ionizes the K subshell with binding energy EK, the atom will emit an electron with energy EEK, and the atomic structure will be left ionized, with a "hole" in the K subshell. One way the atom
can proceed to fill this hole is to bring down an electron from a higher energy level, for example L1,with the simultaneous emission of an X-ray of energy EK-EL1. This is a radiative transition. An
alternative path is to bring down an electron from a higher level with the simultaneous emission of anelectron from that level or a higher one. As an example, you might see an electron of energy EK-EL1EM1, which fills the vacancy in the K shell and leaves new holes in the L1 and M1 shells. These arecalled non-radiative transitions. The process will then continue by filling the new holes from higher
levels, etc., until all the ionization energy has been accounted for by the emission of X-rays andelectrons.
The electrons produced by this atomic relaxation can be used as a source for a subsequent electrontransport calculation, or their energy can just be added to the local heating. The X-rays can betransported elsewhere to cause additional photo-atomic reactions. In general, the use of File 28 isindicated when high-Z materials are present and photon energies of less than 1 MeV are of interest.
This file is provided to give the information necessary to compute the emission of X-rays andelectrons associated with atomic relaxation cross section. It is based on EADL, the Evaluated Atomic
Data Library developed by D. E. (Red) Cullen at the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory(LLNL).
28.2. General Description
This file gives the subshell energies, emission energies, transition probabilities, and otherquantities needed to compute the X-ray and electron spectra from ionized atoms. It always uses
MT=533. It works together with the photoelectric subshell cross sections from MF=23, MT=534-599.
28.3. Formats
The following quantities are defined
ZA, AWR
NSS
SUBI
SUBJ
SUBK

EBI
ELN
NTR
FTR
ETR

April 2001

Standard material charge and mass parameters
Number of subshells
Subshell designator (see the table below)
Secondary subshell designator
Tertiary subshell designator(if SUBK is zero for a particular transition, it is a radiative transition;otherwise, it is a non-radiative transition.)
Binding energy for subshell (eV)Number of electrons in subshell when neutral (given as a floating-pointvalue)
Number of transitions
Fractional probability of transition
Energy of transition (eV)28.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Table of Subshell Designators
Designator
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
etc.

Subshell
K (1s1/2)
L1 (2s1/2)
L2 (2p1/2)
L3 (2p3/2)
M1 (3s1/2)
M2 (3p1/2)

MT
534
535
536
537
538
539

The structure of a section of File 28 is as follows:[MAT,28,533/
ZA,
AWR,
0,
0, NSS,0]HEAD[MAT,28,533/SUBI1,
0.0,
0,0, NW, NTR/ NW=6*(1+NTR)
EBI1 ,
ELN1,
0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,
SUBJ1,SUBK1, ETR1, FTR1, 0.0, 0.0,-----------------------------------SUBJNTR,SUBKNTR,ETRNTR,FTRNTR, 0.0, 0.0]LIST-----------------------------------[repeat LIST for the rest of the NSS subshells][MAT,28,533/ 0.0,
0.0,
0,
0,
0,
0] SEND

28.4 Procedures
Sections with MF=28,MT=533 are used together with either photo-atomic or electro-atomic data
evaluations. The value of NSS must be consistent with the number of subshell ionization crosssections given in File 23 (MT=534,535, ...). Note that the subshell cross section MT value equals thesubshell designator number SUBI plus 533. Subshell LIST records are given in order of increasing
SUBI. Similarly, transitions are given in order of increasing SUBJ first, and increasing SUBK second.
This means that radiative transitions appear before non-radiative ones for each subshell.
It is possible to have NTR=0 if there are no allowed transitions from higher subshells to aparticular subshell.

28.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Example 1: Atomic Relaxation Data
1 0 0
0 600 1451
6 600 1451
6 600 1451
2 600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
451
12
0 600 1451
533
17
0 600 1451
600 1 0600 0 06.000000+3 11.9078164
0040 60028533
1.000000+0 0.000000+00054
8 60028533
2.910100+2 2.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
5.000000+0 0.000000+0 2.820200+2 5.614880-4 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
6.000000+0 0.000000+0 2.820300+2 1.120600-3 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
3.000000+0 3.000000+0 2.558900+2 4.136090-1 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
3.000000+0 5.000000+0 2.644600+2 1.361900-1 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
3.000000+0 6.000000+0 2.644700+2 2.710990-1 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
5.000000+0 5.000000+0 2.730300+2 4.207480-3 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
5.000000+0 6.000000+0 2.730400+2 1.100120-1 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
6.000000+0 6.000000+0 2.730500+2 6.320080-2 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
3.000000+0 0.000000+00060 60028533
1.756000+1 2.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
5.000000+0 0.000000+00060 60028533
8.990000+0 6.700000-1 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
6.000000+0 0.000000+00060 60028533
8.980000+0 1.330000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 0.000000+0 60028533
60028 0600 0 00 0 0
-1 0 06.000000+3 11.9078164-10.000000+0 0.000000+000.000000+0 0.000000+000.000000+0 0.000000+00
6-C - 0 LLNLEVAL-DEC90 CULLEN
DIST----ENDF/B-VI
MATERIAL 600-----ATOMIC RELAXATION DATA------ENDF-6 FORMAT
converted from EADL
1
28

April 2001

0
0
0
0

0
0
6
6

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

28.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Example 2: Electron Interaction Dataelectron interaction data converted from EEDL
6.000000+3 11.9078164-1
00.000000+0 0.000000+0005.438673-4 1.00000+11000.000000+0 0.000000+000
6-C - 0 LLNLEVAL-DEC89 CULLEN
DIST----ENDF/B-VI
MATERIAL 600-----ELECTRO-ATOMIC DATA------ENDF-6 FORMAT
converted from EEDL
1
451
23
526
23
527
23
528
23
534
23
536
23
538
23
539
26
526
26
527
26
534
26
536
26
538
26
539

1 0 0
0 600 1451
6 600 1451
6 600 1451
14 600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
600 1451
24
0 600 1451
37
0 600 1451
31
0 600 1451
64
0 600 1451
120 600 1451
140 600 1451
150 600 1451
150 600 1451
353
0 600 1451
197
0 600 1451
120
0 600 1451
151
0 600 1451
155
0 600 1451
155
0 600 1451
600 1 0600 0 06.000000+3 11.9078164
0000 60023526
0.000000+0 0.000000+0001
101 60023526
101
260023526
1.000000+1 3.063510+9 1.258930+1 2.498030+9 1.584890+1 2.036940+9 60023526
1.995260+1 1.660950+9 2.511890+1 1.354370+9 3.162280+1 1.104370+9 60023526
3.981070+1 9.008210+8 5.011870+1 7.347880+8 6.309570+1 5.993570+8 60023526
7.943280+1 4.889770+8 1.000000+2 3.991460+8 1.258930+2 3.258180+8 60023526
1.584890+2 2.659610+8 1.995260+2 2.171000+8 2.511890+2 1.772160+8 60023526
3.162280+2 1.447630+8 3.981070+2 1.183030+8 5.011870+2 9.667950+7 60023526
6.309570+2 7.900840+7 7.943280+2 6.458900+7 1.000000+3 5.282720+7…
6.000000+3 11.9078164
0010 60026526
1.100000+1 5.438673-4
02
12 60026526
2260026526
1.000000+1 1.000000+0 1.00000+11 1.000000+060026526
0.000000+0 0.000000+0001
16 60026526
16
260026526
0.000000+0 1.000000+1120
42 60026526-1.000000+0 5.000000-1 9.999990-1 5.000000-1
60026526
0.000000+0 1.000000+3
12
0
54
27 60026526-1.000000+0 7.349540-3-6.350000-1 1.014680-2-3.300000-1 1.408430-2 60026526-7.500000-2 1.996880-2 1.350000-1 2.832790-2 3.000000-1 3.982680-2 60026526
4.300000-1 5.580130-2 5.350000-1 7.828660-2 6.225000-1 1.108190-1 60026526
6.925000-1 1.559570-1 7.500000-1 2.204030-1 7.950000-1 3.078220-1 60026526
8.325000-1 4.339260-1 8.625000-1 6.085020-1 8.875000-1 8.591520-1 60026526
9.080000-1 1.212620+0 9.250000-1 1.713720+0 9.390000-1 2.413930+0 60026526
9.510000-1 3.432260+0 9.610000-1 4.874960+0 9.690000-1 6.802370+0 60026526

28.4

0
0
113
6

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

9.760000-1 9.598280+0 9.820000-1 1.360430+1 9.870000-1 1.914880+1 60026526 239
9.915001-1 2.744700+1 9.956001-1 4.014720+1 9.999990-1 6.259920+1 60026526 240
0.000000+0 2.000000+3
12
064
32 60026526 241-1.000000+0 3.008670-3-9.000000-1 3.301630-3-5.350000-1 4.906250-3…
6.000000+3 11.9078164
0010 60026534 775
1.100000+1 5.438673-4
0
1
12 60026534 776
2260026534 777
2.910100+2 1.000000+0 1.00000+11 1.000000+060026534 778
0.000000+0 0.000000+0
12
1
7 60026534 779
7260026534 780
0.000000+0 2.910100+20042 60026534 781
1.000000-2 1.111110+1 1.000000-1 1.111110+1
60026534 782
0.000000+0 2.973140+20042 60026534 783
3.152220-2 3.265060-1 3.152220+0 3.143760-1
60026534 784
0.000000+0 1.995260+30028
14 60026534 785
1.000000-1 7.771360-3 6.309570+0 7.133700-3 1.412540+1 6.229690-3 60026534 786
3.162280+1 5.440240-3 6.309570+1 4.054250-3 8.912520+1 3.138130-3 60026534 787
1.258930+2 2.429030-3 1.778280+2 1.605960-3 2.511890+2 1.061790-3 60026534 788
3.162280+2 7.491710-4 3.758380+2 5.767510-4 4.869680+2 3.895820-4 60026534 789
6.309570+2 2.631530-4 8.521260+2 2.098710-4
60026534 790
0.000000+0 3.981070+4
0
070
35 60026534 791
1.000000-1 7.237010-3 6.309570+0 6.655140-3 1.412540+1 5.837310-3 60026534 792
3.162280+1 5.119990-3 6.309570+1 3.846900-3 8.912520+1 2.990940-3 60026534 793
1.258930+2 2.325440-3 1.496240+2 1.886340-3 1.938660+2 1.378130-3…
2.06836+10 4.46563-21 2.51189+10 3.13693-21 3.16228+10 2.30613-21 60026539 1357
3.98107+10 1.69536-21 5.00000+10 1.51523-21
60026539 1358
60026 0 1359
600 0 0 1360
0 0 0 1361
-1 0 0 1362

April 2001

28.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

28.6

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

30. INTRODUCTION TO DATA COVARIANCE FILES
30.1. General Comments
The inclusion of uncertainty estimates is intrinsic to any evaluation of physical constants because
the practical utility of a "constant" depends on whether the true magnitude of the quantity is
sufficiently close to the quoted best value. The need is now accepted to include uncertainties in
evaluated nuclear cross section files in order that the propagated uncertainties in nuclear analytic
results can be estimated. The resulting files are called "covariance files" as shorthand for a more
complete name such as "files of nuclear variance and covariance data." The priority fordevelopment of formats for and evaluation of covariance data is highest where the sensitivity ofimportant calculated results to the quantities in the associated cross section file is high.
Until ENDF/B-IV, the only means available to evaluators for communicating the estimateduncertainties in the evaluated data was through publication of the documentation of the evaluations.
During the preparation of ENDF/V-IV, a Data Covariance Subcommittee of CSEWG was formed tocoordinate the efforts at standardizing statements made about the data uncertainties and correlations.
One of the important aspects of nuclear data and of cross sections in particular is that the various
data tend to be correlated to an important degree through the measurement processes and thedifferent corrections made to the observable quantities to obtain the microscopic cross sections. In
many applications when one is interested in estimating the uncertainties in calculated results due tothe cross sections, the correlations among the data play a crucial role.
In principle, the uncertainties in the results of a calculation due to the data uncertainties can becalculated, provided one is given all of the variances in and covariances among the data elements. In
practice, in addition to the uncertainties due to the basic data, the results of calculations have
uncertainties due to imperfections in the calculational models used. In some situations "modelinguncertainties" may dominate the uncertainties in computed results; in others they are negligible
compared to the effects of microscopic data uncertainties. In principle improving the models may
reduce “modeling uncertainties”, although sometimes at large cost. The data uncertainties may also
be reduced, often at large cost, by performing better measurements, new kinds of measurements, orsometimes a more refined analysis of existing data.
One of the requirements of the uncertainty information is that it be easily processed to yield the(variances and) covariances for the multigroup or other "data" used directly in the calculations. For
ENDF/B-IV, the principle of having the uncertainty information on the data file was adopted and atrial formalism was developed. This formalism has the virtue that the information is in such a form
that it can be easily processed with minor modification to existing processing codes. Only a few
evaluations of ENDF/B-IV were issued with data covariance information in this format. Since then,considerably more work has been done in trying to quantify data covariances within the ENDF
formalism and using the information for purposes of sensitivity studies. These sensitivity studies
have been made in three different areas where the data covariances play a crucial role: propagationof uncertainties to final calculated results, adjustment of data sets incorporating information fromsome integral measurements, and determination of data accuracies needed to meet targeted
uncertainties in results. The formalism and formats for representing data covariances in ENDF/B-V
were extended to cover all neutron cross section data in the files.

April 2001

30.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Formats and procedures exist in ENDF-6 for representing the data covariances in fission neutron
multiplicity (File 1), resonance parameters (File 2), the neutron cross sections (Files 3 and 10),energy distributions (File 4) and angular distributions (File 5). There is also the capability torepresent data covariances obtained from parameter covariances and sensitivities. The ability torepresent cross section uncertainties is rather complete, while in the other cases there are restrictions.
In some cases such as inelastic scattering one may employ the subterfuge of pseudo-discrete levels
to treat a continuum using the formats and procedures of File 3 and 33.
Since covariance files will be incomplete, the absence of covariance data in a file in ENDF-6
formats does not imply that the uncertainty component of interest has been evaluated as zero.
Evaluators should not unintentionally enter explicit zero covariance components into a file, sincethese would imply to a user that the uncertainty or correlation has been evaluated as negligibly
small.
The dominant reason for the inclusion of covariance files in the ENDF system is to enableestimation of the nuclear data contributions to the uncertainties in calculated results for nuclear
systems having broad (neutron) spectra. Therefore, in developing the ENDF formats the highest
priority was given to attaining this goal. The ENDF covariance files are structured to enable
processing them to any energy group structure. As is explained most fully in Chapter 33, except for
LB=8 sub-subsections, the stored quantities are defined to yield the covariances between point crosssections. To simplify processing, the magnitudes of these components are constant between the
points on the defined energy grid.
The files have a histogram appearance, but the quantities have a precise definition that can leadto incorrect inferences if the encoded values are used for other than the primary purpose of
uncertainty propagation with broad particle energy spectra. For example, File 33 except for LB=8
sub-subsections literally implies that the cross sections at any two points within the same energy gridinterval are perfectly correlated, and that the uncertainty is no larger for a cross section averaged
over a tiny energy interval than if it were averaged over the whole interval between grid points. The
new LB=8 format allows the evaluator to avoid this unrealistic implication. A broadly spaced
energy grid was usually chosen in the past to achieve the primary purpose without attempting toprovide greater covariance data detail than is warranted by the available information.
As indicated above, the main purpose of the covariance information in ENDF-6 formats is topermit the propagation of nuclear data uncertainties for applications with broad neutron spectra.
Users of the file should interpret the files as they were designed. If modifications to the covariancedata must be made by users to place the data on a finer grid without reconsideration of theuncertainties in the underlying data, those modifications should be designed so that the original
evaluator's covariance data is recovered if the modified results are collapsed to the evaluator's energy
grid.
Modifications of covariance files to a finer grid have been required in the past by users who
employ the adjustment equations to update an existing evaluation by "adding" new data and theirassociated covariances. To minimize the extent to which such users will be tempted to make ad hocchanges to covariance files, covariance evaluators for reactions of particular importance should
employ relatively fine energy meshes to reduce the difficulties to be encountered by futureevaluator-users of the covariance files. Overlapping structures in energy and other techniquesshould be used to reduce the occurrence of large changes in correlation as one crosses any arbitraryenergy boundary. The new file-30 format provides an alternate way to avoid the effects of artificial
energy boundaries.

30.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

It is appropriate to define uncertainty quantities1. Each cross section or related quantity in an
ENDF file represents a physical quantity that has a definite though unknown true magnitude. The
knowledge of each such quantity X is summarized by its density function defined so that f(X) ∆X is
the probability that the true numerical value of X lies in the range ∆X at X. The marginal density
function f(X) is the average over all other independent variable Y, Z, ... of the overall multivariate
density function for the cross section data base. The shape of a density function depends on theexperiments that have been performed relevant to estimating the true values of the data elements.
The density function has unit normalization for each variable.
The "expected value", <g(X)>, of any function g(X) is given by the average value of thatfunction over the marginal density function. The simplest example is the expected value of thequantity itself:< X >= ∫ X f ( X ) dX
In practice, one often uses the same symbol for a physical quantity, its expected value, and its
value in a particular data set. In this Chapter, the last is written X = <X> + δX, where <δX>=0. In
this language the cross section, etc., quantities in ENDF-6 files are expected values.
The width of the density function reflects the scatter among experimental cross section results
and/or the uncertainties ascribed to the values by the experimenters. That width is a property of theexperiments, not of the cross section quantity, so one cannot in the usual sense "measure" nuclear
covariance data. The width arises from the ambiguity with which each underlying experimental
result defines the true value. These ambiguities are quantified as "errors" with modifiers like"systematic" or "statistical" to indicate the origin of the ambiguities and modifiers like "standard" or"relative" to indicate the normalization of the uncertainty quantities. Since both systematic errors
and statistical counting errors broaden the density functions of evaluated quantities, evaluateduncertainty data must combine both types. The systematic uncertainties are harder to estimate, andare larger than statistical counting uncertainties in most modern nuclear experiments.
The ENDF-6 formats deal only with the expected values of quantities and the second-degree
moments of the joint density function describing the evaluator's knowledge of the true value of thenuclear data vector. It is not necessary to assume that the density functions are normal in shape, orotherwise, unless one must estimate the probability that the true value lies within a certain range ofthe expected value. The ENDF-6 covariance quantities are not intended to represent, and cannot
well represent, any known difference between and ENDF-6 formatted cross section and somemore-recently realized "better" evaluation, or any cross-section imprecision induced by ENDF-6
procedures, or the widths of any physical distributions such as the fission neutron multiplicity
distribution P(ν).
The following quantities are defined that relate to the second moments of the density function.
Here <X> and <Y> are cross section or related quantities in a file using ENDF-6 formats. The
quantity f(X,Y) is the full density function averaged over all variables other than X and Y. Recall
that δX = X - <X>.

1

The treatment below is paraphrased from R. Peelle, Sensitivity and Uncertainty Analysis of Reactor Performance
Parameters, Advances in Nuclear Science and Technology, Vol. 14, pp 11, Lewins and Becker, Eds., Plenum Press,
New York, 1982.

April 2001

30.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresCov( X , Y ) =< δ X δ Y >= ∫∫ ( X − < X > )(Y − < Y > ) F ( X , Y ) dX dY , the covariance between X and Y,

Var ( X ) = Cov ( X , X ) =< δ X 2 > ,s(X)= ⎡⎣ Var ( X )⎤⎦12

the standard error or uncertainty in <X>,,

ρ ( X < Y ) = Cov ( X < Y ) {s( X ) s(Y )} ,the variance of X,
the correlation coefficient between X and Y.

The relative standard error, s( X ) X , the relative variance Var( X ) < X > 2 , and the relative
covariance, Cov( X , Y ) ( < X >< Y > ) , are often used.
Knowledge of the covariance is crucial to the joint application of the quantities X and Y; forexample, the standard error in the sum X+Y can lie anywhere between s(X)+s(Y) ands ( X ) − s (Y ) depending upon the degree of correlation between X and Y. A nonzero covariance
between two quantities can arise from a partial dependence of one upon the other or from a common
dependence upon some third uncertain quantity.
30.1. FILE 30. DATA COVARIANCES OBTAINED FROM PARAMETER
COVARIANCES AND SENSITIVITIES
30.1.1. General Description
File 30 is provided as a means of describing the covariances of tabulated cross sections,multiplicities, and energy-angle distributions that result from propagating the covariances of a set ofunderlying parameters (for example, the input parameters of a nuclear-model code) using anevaluator-supplied set of parameter covariances and sensitivities. Whenever nuclear data areevaluated primarily through the application of nuclear models, the covariances of the resulting data
can be described very adequately, and compactly, by specifying the covariance matrix for theunderlying nuclear parameters, along with a set of sensitivity coefficients giving the rate of changeof each nuclear datum of interest with respect to each of the model parameters. Although motivatedprimarily by these applications of nuclear theory, use of File 30 is not restricted to any one particularevaluation methodology. It can be used to describe data covariances of any origin, so long as they
can be formally separated into a set of parameters with specified covariances and a set of data
sensitivities.
The need for a covariance format of this type became clear in connection with the R-matrix
analysis of the ENDF/B-VI light-element standards. The key parameters here are the parameters ofa few high-energy resonances in the relevant compound systems. Another area where this format is
expected to find early application is in representing the covariances of cross sections andsecondary-particle emission spectra and angular distributions due to neutron interactions in the
0.1-20 MeV range, when the data are obtained primarily from the optical model and statistical-preequilibrium theory. Relevant parameters here include the optical parameters, level-densityprescription, pre-equilibrium matrix elements, and gamma-ray strength functions.

30.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

It is shown below that multi-group averages of parameter sensitivities are identical to theparameter sensitivities of the corresponding multi-group data. It is the latter that are actually neededin most applications. (See Section 30.1.4.) To take maximum advantage of this equivalence,
sensitivity information is represented in File 30 in a format that is as close as possible to the format
for the actual data, so that the sensitivities can be retrieved and integrated by processing codes withthe least possible modification.
It should be emphasized that File 30 is not intended as a repository for complete "evaluations ofparameters." In fact, to limit the bulk of the files and to minimize processing costs, evaluators areencouraged to reduce the number of parameters and the number of sensitivities per parameter to theminimum necessary to describe data uncertainties of practical importance. In defining the format forFile 30, no attempt is made to prejudge the parameter definitions or types of nuclear theory that may
be most appropriate or useful. Discussion of such points is obviously encouraged in the printed
documentation, but the format itself is deliberately kept totally general. One advantage of thisgenerality is that the results of a wide variety of evaluation methodologies can be described using asingle format. As discussed in Section 30.1.3 below, this generality also facilitates various
mathematical operations, such as diagonalizing the parameter covariance matrix.
30.1.1.1. Definitions
In the context of File 30 the word "sensitivity" is defined as the derivative of an evaluatedquantity, call it σ, with respect to the logarithm of one of the parameters, αi,∂σ∂σ(30.1)= αi
σ i′ ≡∂ ( ln α i )∂α iAn advantage of employing such derivatives is that σ′i is expressed in exactly the same units as
σ, whether it be an actual cross section or a distribution (energy distribution, angle distribution,
double-differential quantity, etc.). This means, among other things, that integrations over energy
and angle can be performed with minimal changes in multi-group processing codes. The use ofderivatives with respect to the logarithms of the parameters also meshes nicely with the use of
relative parameter-covariance matrices, as shown below in Eq. (30.7).
As discussed in detail in Section 30.1.2.3, a sub-section of one section of File 30 is employed tostore the sensitivities of the data in one section (called the referenced section) of a file elsewhere in
the material of interest.
It should be emphasized that normally there will not be a direct, one-to-one correspondence
between the energy or angular grid in a subsection of File 30 and that used in the referenced section.
This follows from the fact that the derivatives in File 30 are not actually the derivatives ofindividual data values. Rather, the collection of data in one such subsection should form anadequate representation of the energy-and angle-dependence of the relevant derivative function,
making effective use of the standard interpolation laws.
File 30 does not permit the representation of the uncertainty in independent variables (thefloating-point numbers that define the energy and angle grids of an ENDF section). This would
seriously complicate the calculation of the uncertainty in averaged quantities, as discussed below.
Further, if σ is thought of as the output of a model calculation, quantities such as the incident energy
or outgoing angle are specified by the model-code user and have no meaningful uncertainty.

April 2001

30.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

In addition, File 30 may not be used to represent uncertainty of any integer, nor the uncertainty ofstand-alone (untabulated) quantities that affect energy or angle grids, such as masses, Q-values, andthe boundaries of energy ranges. Thus, it is understood that the data fields normally used to store
probability information (cross sections, multiplicities, or normalized distributions) are used in File
30 to record sensitivity information, but that other quantities have standard (MF≠30) ENDF
definitions.
30.1.1.2 Treatment of Various Data Types
Following the general guidelines stated above, subsections of File 30 describing cross-section (asopposed to multiplicity or distribution) sensitivities would have the same mechanical structure as
sections of File 3. Of course, since sensitivities are derivatives, many more negative numbers would
appear in the floating-point data fields than one normally expects to see File 3. One can treat ν data
in File 1 in the same way as cross sections.
Some interesting points arise with respect to distributions, for example tabulated data in File 4for elastic scattering. If the derivatives of the normalized angular distribution p(θ) with respect to agiven parameter are large, they should be described in a subsection with (MFSEN,MTSEN) = (4,2).
Note that since p(θ) is normalized to unity by definition, the angle integral of the sensitivities(equal to the parameter-derivative of the angle integral) should be zero. A second important aspectof the use of two separate functions to build the actual desired data is that, in order to build thecorresponding sensitivities, the product rule is employed. For example, the differential elastic crosssection γ(θ) (barns/steradian) at angle θ is formed as a product,γ (θ ) ≡ dσ /d Ω = σ p (θ ) ,(30.2)
So that∂γ (θ )∂p (θ )∂σ=σ
+ p (θ ).
(30.3)∂αi∂αi∂α i
Multiplying both sides of Eq. (30.3) by α1, and recalling the notation of Eq. (30.1), one gets,
γ i′ (θ ) = σ pi′ (θ ) + σ i′ p (θ ) .
(30.4)
Equation (30.4) shows, then, how the sensitivity γ′i(θ) is constructed from the data in two different
subsections (σ′i and p′i) of File 30, plus data (σ and p) from Files 3 and 4, respectively. The
generalizations needed to treat three or more separate factors are obvious.
Both to reduce the bulk and to reduce processing costs, evaluators should simply omit reference
to sections in the main evaluation that exhibit little sensitivity to a given parameter. Such omissions
will be treated as if zeroes had been entered explicitly. For example, if the angular distributions areomitted from File 30, then the first term on the right in Eq. (30.4) will be omitted.
Just as one is permitted to employ a Legendre representation of p(θ) in File 4, one is permitted inFile 30 to use a Legendre expansion to represent p′i(θ). In fact, if it reduces the size of the files, it ispreferable to use Legendre moments for p′i (θ), even if p(θ) itself is given in tabular form. As
mentioned above p′i (θ) must integrate to zero, so the magnitude of the implied zero-th Legendre
moment of p′i (θ) is zero, not unity. These considerations of File 4-type sensitivities can be extended
in an obvious way to treat neutron spectra in file 5, isomer-ratios in File 9, photon-production
multiplicities in File 12, fission-product yields, etc.

30.6

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

No fundamental new problems are introduced by considering double-differential data, asrepresented in File 6. In that case, p becomes a function p(E′,θ) of both the final energy and angle ofthe outgoing particle. The only complication that this adds is that p′i in Eq. (30.4), for example, isalso doubly differential, p′i = p′i (E′,θ). It is conceivable that p′i for some parameter will exhibit
more severe angle-energy correlations than p(E′,θ) itself, so it is permitted to represent the emission
sensitivities for a given reaction in File-6 format in File 30, even though the angle and energy
distributions for that reaction are given separately in Files 4 and 5. In this case, the entry MFSEN=6
in the File-30 dictionary really points to both File 4 and File 5 in the main evaluation. Since theFile-6 type matrix information will in general occupy more space than the approximate treatment inFiles 4 and 5, this option should be exercised only on those parameters (i.e., in those sections) where
it is crucial.
30.1.1.3 Multi-grouped Sensitivities
Multi-group operations on the data in an evaluation can be summarized as the performance of
certain weighted integrations over incident energy, secondary particle type, secondary energy, andsecondary angle. Although these operations are very complicated, there is no commonality between
variables (or limits) of integration and the parameters of concern in File 30. One can take advantageof this in calculating the derivatives of multigroup-averaged data with respect to the parameters. If
we introduce g as a generic group-averaged quantity (such as a single Legendre moment of one
element of a multigroup scattering matrix), which corresponds to a differential quantity γ, theng = ∫ dE dE ′ d Ω γ i ( E,E ′,θ ) ω ( E,E ′,θ ) ,(30.5)
where ω is some weighting function. As discussed below, one frequently is interested in theuncertainty in such multi-group quantities, and to obtain this uncertainty, one will first need to
calculate the derivative of g with respect to the parameter αi.
gi′ =
or

∂γ ( E,E ′,θ )∂g
ω ( E,E ′,θ ) ,= α i ∫ dE dE ′ d Ω∂( lnαi )∂α igi′ = ∫ dE dE ′ d Ω γ i′ ( E,E ′,θ ) ω ( E,E ′,θ ) ,(30.6)

Comparing Equations (30.5) and (30.6), we obtain the useful result that the sensitivity of amultigroup value to a given parameter is equal to the multigroup average of the (energy- and angledependent) parameter sensitivity. Thus an ENDF processing program that calculates multigroupcross sections, Equation (30.5), can be used, with few modifications, to calculate the parameter
sensitivity of multigroup constants, Equation (30.6). As mentioned in the General Description
above, this is the motivation for storing the sensitivities γ′i in a format that is as close as possible tothe format of the data γ.
30.1.2. Formats
File 30 is divided into sections identified by the value of MT. (In File 30, MT does not refer to areaction type). Each section of File 30 begins with a HEAD record and ends with a SEND record.
30.1.2.1. Directory and Correspondence Table (MT=1)
The first section, MT=1, of File 30 consists of a "directory" that displays the contents andordering of information in other sections of the file, plus an optional, cross-material "correspondence
table," described below.

April 2001

30.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The following quantities are defined.
Total number of distinct parameters.
NP
Number of CONT records in the MF=30 directory, including the internal
NDIR
data-block "marker" records described below, but
excluding both the correspondence table and the SEND
record.
Number of CONT records in the correspondence table, excluding the SEND
NCTAB
record.
Parameter index.
MPi
If non-zero, location of a section of data in the main body of the evaluation
MFSENi,(the referenced data) that are sensitive to parameter MPi.
MTSENiMFSEN and MTSEN determine the formats to be used to represent theenergy- and angle-dependence of the sensitivities. For example, if thereferenced section describes a normalized angular distribution, MFSEN=4,
then any of the formats described in Chapter 4 of this manual may be
employed to describe the sensitivity of the distribution in(MFSEN,MTSEN) to parameter MPi.
Number of records used to represent this sensitivity information. These NC
NCi
records constitute a single subsection of a later section of File 30.
Sublibrary number.
LIBFi
Material number.
MATFi
Parameter number.
MPFi
A section with MT=1 has the following structure:[MAT,30,1/ ZA, AWR,0,0,0,NP] HEAD[MAT,30,1/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NDIR, NCTAB] CONT
NC1] CONT[MAT,30,1/ 0.0, 0.0, MP1, MFSEN1, MTSEN1,
NC2] CONT[MAT,30,1/ 0.0, 0.0, MP2, MFSEN2, MTSEN2,------------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT,30, 1/ 0.0, 0.0, MPNDIR,MFSENNDIR,MTSENNDIR, NCNDIR] CONT
LIBF1,
MATF1, MPF1] CONT
[MAT,30, 1/ 0.0, 0.0,
MP1,
LIBF2,
MATF2, MPF2] CONT
[MAT,30, 1/ 0.0, 0.0,MP2,------------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT,30, 1/ 0.0, 0.0,MPNCTAB,LIBFNCTAB, MATFNCTAB,MPFNCTAB] CONT
[MAT,30, 1/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND

The directory serves as a guide for the processing codes and provides, in addition, a detailed,
eye-readable list of the files and sections elsewhere in the current evaluation that are significantly
sensitive to the parameters under consideration. As shown above, this information is presented in aformat that is similar to the main index for this material in (MF,MT) = (1,451).

30.8

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

In general, a given parameter will affect the data in several different sections, so the same valueof MP will appear in several consecutive entries in the dictionary. MP is higher in the ENDF
hierarchy than MFSEN, which is in turn higher that MTSEN. Within the File-30 framework, then,MP can be considered an index to a "sub-material". The first value of MP1 must be 1, the next new,non-zero value must be 2, and so on. Except for marker records, MP, MFSEN, and MTSEN mustoccur in normal ENDF ascending order.
Unlike the main directory in (MF,MT) = (1,451) the File-30 directory contains internal file-end
and sub-material end “markers”. That is, within the range of records describing a given parameter
MP, and following the final reference to a given value of MFSEN, an explicit directory entry with
MFSEN=0 is given in order to indicate the end of information concerning MFSEN-type sensitivities
for parameter MP.
[MAT,30, 1/ 0.0, 0.0, MP,0,0,0] CONT

Similarly, following the final reference to a given value of MP in the directory, a directory entry
with MP=0 is given to indicate the end of information concerning the current parameter.
[MAT,30, 1/ 0.0, 0.0,

0,

0,

0,

0] CONTIt may occur that the evaluated data for two different materials are sensitive to the same
parameter, or to a common set of parameters. Here "sensitive to the same parameter" means that thesame numerical value of some particular quantity was employed in generating both evaluations. If,
in addition, the numerical value thus employed has a substantial uncertainty, then this would imply
substantial cross-material and/or cross-library data covariances. These covariances may be
important in some applications, for example, in uncertainty analyses involving physical mixtures ofthe materials in question. In order to represent these cross-library or cross-material covariances, theevaluator may include a correspondence table in the first section of MF=30 to identify the common
set. The covariances of these parameters must be given in both evaluations, and the covariances
must be identical. However, since the parameter-numbering scheme need not be the same thedifferent evaluation evaluations, the correspondence table is also used to specify the relationship ofthe numbers assigned to these parameters in the two evaluations.
The index parameter NCTAB indicates the number of CONT records appearing in thecorrespondence table of the current evaluation. NCTAB may be zero, in which case the table isomitted. If present, the table includes, in the format shown above, the sub-library number LIBF, thematerial number MATF, and the parameter number MPF of a parameter in some external, or"foreign" evaluation that is identical to parameter MP of the current evaluation. A value of LIBF=0
is entered if the foreign sub-library is the same as that of the current evaluation. The correspondence
table should be ordered (in ascending order) first on MP, then on LIBF, then MATF, and then MPF.
No internal "marker" records are included in the correspondence table.
30.1.2.2. Covariance Matrix (MT=2)
The second section of File 30, MT=2, contains the NP(NP+1)/2 unique, relative covariances
RCOV(I,J) of the ith parameter with the jth parameter in the form of NP separate LIST records. This
structure permits the inclusion of a large number of parameters without requiring excessive
computer storage during routine data handling. There is one such LIST record for each MP value.

April 2001

30.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The structure of MT=2 is as follows:[MAT,30, 2/
ZA, AWR, 0, 0,
0, NP] HEAD
LIST
[MAT,30, 2/ PARM1, 0.0, 0, 0, NCS1, 1/ {RCOV(1,K, K=1,NCS1}][MAT,30, 2/ PARM2, 0.0, 0, 0, NCS2, 2/ {RCOV(2,1+K, K=2,NCS2}] LIST
[MAT,30, 2/ PARM3, 0.0, 0, 0, NCS3, 3/ {RCOV(3,2+K, K=3,NCS3}] LIST--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1, NP/ {RCOV(NP,NP)}] LIST
[MAT,30, 2/ PARMNP, 0.0, 0, 0,[MAT,30, 2/
0.0, 0.0, 0, 0,
0,0] SEND

Since the filing of the MPth row of covariance matrix begins with the diagonal element,
RCOV(MP,MP), the number of matrix elements NCSMP explicitly given in the list must be less thanor equal to (NP-MP+1). If the number given is smaller than this, the remaining covariances in thatrow are taken to be zero. Evaluators can take maximum advantage of this zero-suppression featureby assigning consecutive MP-values to members of groups of strongly correlated parameters. The
numerical value PARMMP of the MPth parameter (or optionally just a zero) is entered in the first
floating-point field of the LIST.
30.1.2.3. Sensitivities (MT=11-999)
Sections MT≥11 contain the sensitivities. A single section in this range of MT-values is thecollection of all sensitivities (or subsections) relevant to a given parameter MP. These section
number is determined by the parameter index, using the relation MT=MP+10. While evaluators
should employ the minimum number of parameters necessary, no particular limit is placed on MP,
other than the obvious one that MT may not exceed 999. The structure of a section with MT≥11 is
as follows:[MAT,30,MT/

ZA, AWR,0,0,0, NL] HEAD
<subsection for NSUB=1><subsection for NSUB=2>--------------------------------------------------------<subsection for NSUB=NL>[MAT,30, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND

MT=MP+10

NL in the HEAD record is the number of subsections in the current section. In other words, NL
is the number of referenced sections for the current parameter. The format of a subsection of asection with MT≥11 is, with very few exceptions, the same as the format of the referenced section in
the main body of the evaluation. Certain minor "bookkeeping" changes are unavoidable; forexample, the MF and MT positions of a data record will contain 30 and (MP+10), respectively, not
MFSEN and MTSEN.
Of necessity, the subsections of a section of File 30 are simply abutted to one another without
intervening SEND of FEND records. In a sense, the roles of the usual SEND and FEND records in
defining data-type boundaries are taken over here by the contents of the File-30 directory. (See
Section 30.1.2.1.) For example, by reading a copy of the directory in parallel with the reading of thesubsections of a single File-30 "source section" with MT≥11, a processing code could create a new
ENDF-formatted evaluation on a third file from the information encountered, with MFSEN and
MTSEN written into the usual MF and MT positions, and with the required SEND, FEND, and
MEND records inserted.

30.10

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Each subsection of the source section must be constructed so that the sensitivity information insection (MFSEN,MTSEN) of a new evaluation created in this way will comply, in all mechanicaldetails, with the correct, current ENDF formats, as described in the chapter of this manual devoted todata of the type (MFSEN,MTSEN). Of course, requirements of completeness (for example, therequirement that MT=2 must appear in File 4 if MT=2 appears in File 3) do not apply in this context,
since the absence of such information simply indicates small sensitivities.
Because of the application of the product rule, as described in Section 30.1.1.2. above, eachsubsection of a section with MT≥11 leads in principle to a complete multigroup, multi-Legendretable, "transfer" matrix in which the sensitivities corresponding to the referenced section are
combined with regular data from the other sections of the evaluation. These NL matrices, whensummed, give the net sensitivity of all multigroup data to parameter MP, as in Equation (30.4).
30.1.3. Additional Procedures
30.1.3.1. Relation of MP-values to Physical Parameters
Since the actual parameter definitions will vary from one evaluation to the next, it is clear thatchoices concerning:a) the assignment of particular MP-values to different physical parameters, andb) what physical parameters to omit altogether,
are left to the evaluator.
30.1.3.2. Parameter Values
Because many models are nonlinear, the actual numerical values of the parameters PARMn may
be included in the file, in order to record the point in parameter space where the sensitivities were
calculated. See the discussion of this item in Section 30.1.2.2. The value of PARMn has no effecton propagated data uncertainties, so the units of PARMn are given only in the printed
documentation. At the evaluator's option, a zero may be entered in place of the actual parametervalue.
30.1.3.3. Eigenvalue Representation
By use of eigenvalue methods2, it is straightforward to find a linear transformation that
diagonalizes a given covariance matrix. This is a useful method of locating blunders (indicated by
the existence of negative eigenvalues) and redundancies (indicated by zero eigenvalues) and isrecommended as a general procedure prior to submission of any covariance evaluation. Moreover,once having performed such a diagonalization of a parameter covariance matrix, one could report in
MT=2 of File 30 only the eigenvalues of the matrix and, in MT=11 and above, sensitivities of thedata to variations in the effectively-independent linear combinations of the parameters (assummarized in the eigenvectors). If it proves feasible in individual evaluation situations, and if itleads to a substantial reduction in the overall size of the file, evaluators are encouraged to employ
this technique.

2

For example, the SSIEV routine described in B.T. Smith, et. al., Matrix Eigenvalue Routines - EISPACK Guide, 1976.

April 2001

30.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

30.1.3.4. Thinning of Sensitivity Information
The collection of sensitivities in one subsection should form an adequate representation of theenergy-and angle-dependence of the relevant derivative function, making effective use of thestandard interpolation laws. "Thinning" the sensitivity information (that is, removing intermediate
grid points) is encouraged, in order to reduce the size of the file, but, as a general guide, suchthinning should not induce changes greater than about 10% in the reconstructed covariances.
30.1.3.5. Cross-file Correlations
The information in File 30 is considered to describe sources of uncertainty that are independentof those described in Files 31-40. Thus, for a given set of multigroup cross sections, the multigroupcovariance matrix obtained from File 30 should be added, in a matrix addition sense, to such amatrix derived from the other files. This is the only level on which File 30 "communicates" with theother files.
A complication that can occur with respect to cross-file correlations is that there may exist
strong correlations (due to normalization procedures, for example) between certain low-energy crosssections that are evaluated directly from measurements and the parameters employed to calculate theevaluated data at higher energies. If the evaluator wishes to describe these correlations, thecovariances for the low-energy normalization reaction (and those for other reactions strongly
correlated to it) can be "moved" from File 33 to File 30. A possible method for accomplishing this is
to consider the moved data to have been evaluated by multiplying a well-known reference crosssection by an uncertain, energy-dependent, correction factor. The correction factor can be assumed
to have been evaluated on some fixed, coarse energy grid, with linear interpolation applied between
grid points. In this case the "parameters" would be the values of the correction factors at thecoarse-grid points EGi . The sensitivities [see Eq. (30.1)] of the "experimentally evaluated" crosssections σ to these new parameters would be a series of triangular "hat" functions, with peak values
σ(EGi). (Alternative approaches exist.)
30.1.4. Multigroup Applications of Parameter Covariances
Given the relative covariances, RCOV(αi,αj) ≡Cov(αi,αj)/αiαj, from (MF30, MT2), and themultigrouped sensitivities g′mi from Eq. (30.6), it is straightforward to obtain the covariance between
one multigroup datum gm and another gn. It is necessary to add the additional index to keep track of
the multiplicity of data types, as well as the possible multiplicity of materials. (See discussion of thelatter point at the end of Section 30.1.2.1.) Making the usual approximation that gm is not an
extremely nonlinear function of the parameters, we expand in a Taylor series and retain only the firstterm,∂g ∂gnCov ( g m , g n ) = ∑ mCov(α i , α j )ij ∂α i ∂α j= ∑α i α j
ij∂gm ∂gn
Cov(αi ,α j ) / α iα j
∂αi ∂α j(30.7)= ∑ g′mi g′nj RCOV(αi , α j ) .
ij

Equation (30.7) gives the desired multigroup covariance matrix in terms of the multigrouped(logarithmic) sensitivities from Eq. (30.6) and data read directly from the second section of File 30.

30.12

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

In addition to providing a direct route to the calculation of the uncertainty of multigroup crosssections due to parameter uncertainties, data provided in File-30 format have the potential for
additional kinds of application, not involving straightforward application of Equation (30.7). Since
these issues relate to computing requirements, it is necessary to deal with specific examples. In
situations presently foreseen, the number of nuclear parameters might be in the range of 10 to 100,
so we take 50 as typical. On the other hand, it is easy to imagine neutronics applications where thenumber of individual multigroup constants exceeds 10000. For example, if there are 3
high-threshold neutron-emitting reactions for a given material, the number of individual crosssection items might be 3 reactions × 10 "source" groups × 80 "sink" groups × 4 Legendre tables =9600. In such cases, the data covariance matrix Cov(gm,gn) becomes prohibitively large (108 items),
while the sensitivity matrix g′mi (containing 500000 items) and parameter covariance matrix
RCOV(αi,αj) (with 2500 items) remain fairly manageable. Since, according to Equation (30.7), allcovariance information content is already contained in the latter two items, it seems likely thatmultigroup libraries for high-energy neutronics applications will store these items separately, rather
than in the expanded product form.
Further efficiencies are possible if the ultimate aim is to calculate the uncertainties in a set ofpredicted integral quantities (dose, radiation damage, fuel-breeding ratio, etc.), which can be denotedby a column vector, y. A typical number of such quantities might also be around 50. The
covariance matrix D(y) for the integral quantities is related (again in the first-order approximation)
to the cross section covariance matrix D(g), with elements given by Equation (30.7), by the familiar
propagation of errors relation,
D( y ) = S D( g ) S T(30.8)
where S is the 50 × 10000 sensitivity matrix relating the integral quantities y to the multigroupcross sections g. S can be obtained from standard neutronics analyses. If we introduce a 10000 × 50
matrix R, having elements g′mi, Equation (30.7) can be re-written in matrix form,
D ( g ) = R D (α ) R T

Equation (30.8) can then becomesD ( y ) = S ⎡⎣ R D (α ) RT ⎤⎦ S T = T D (α ) T T(30.9)The product matrix T = S R, which contains the direct sensitivity of the integral data to the
nuclear-model parameters, is very compact, having about the same size as the covariance matrix
D(α). Note that in evaluating the matrix products in Equation (30.9) one actually never needcalculate the full 10000 × 10000 cross section covariance matrix.
In cases where the evaluator chooses to use File 33 for certain data and File 30 for others, there
is no logical problem with adding together integral covariances D33(y) based on conventional
sensitivity and uncertainty analysis (i.e., based on Files 3 and 33 only) with analogous data D30(y)obtained from File 30, using Equation (30.9), because the data covariances due to the parameter
covariances are, by definition, independent of those described in the other covariance files.

April 2001

30.13

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

30.14

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

31. FILE 31. COVARIANCES OF THE AVERAGE NUMBER OF NEUTRONS PERFISSION31.1. General Description
For materials that fission, File 31 contains the covariances of the average number of neutrons per
fission, given in File 1. MT=452 is used to specify ν , the average total number of neutrons per
fission. MT=455 and MT=456 may be used to specify the average total number of delayed neutrons
per fission, ν d , and the average number of prompt neutrons per fission, ν p , respectively.
The average number of neutrons per fission is given as a function of incident energy for induced
fission. This energy dependence may be given by tabulating the values as a function of incident
neutron energy or (if MT=452 alone is used) by providing the coefficients for a polynomial
expansion as a function of incident neutron energy. Whichever method is used, the result is that thequantities are specified as a function of incident neutron energy and in this sense are similar to thedata given in File 3. Therefore, the problems associated with representing the covariances of theaverage number of neutrons per fission are identical to those in File 33.
For spontaneous fission, in the sub-library for a radioactive decay, the average multiplicities are
given by zero-order terms in polynomial expansions, and the lack of any energy dependence isrecognized in the formats.
31.2. Formats
Induced fission formats for fission neutron multiplicity in File 31, MT=452, 455, and 456, aredirectly analogous to those for File 33 given in Section 33.2.
Spontaneous fission formats for neutron multiplicity in File 31, MT=452, 455 and 456, aremodified from those in Section 33.2 because there is no energy dependence to express for ν or its
covariance components. There, NC- and NI-type sub-subsections for spontaneous fission neutron
multiplicity have no energy variables present.
"NC-type" sub-subsections for spontaneous fission ν , MT=452, 255, or 456, have the following
structure, using definitions given in Section 33.2.
For LTY=0:[MAT,31, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0, LTY,0,0] CONT(LTY=0)[MAT,31, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0, 2*NCI, NCI/ {CI,XMTI}] LIST
For LTY=1, 2, or 3:[MAT,31, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0, LTY,0,0] CONT[MAT,31, MT/ 0.0, 0.0, MATS, MTS,
4,
1/------(XMFS,XLFSS)(0.0, Weight) ] LIST

"NI-type" sub-subsections for spontaneous fission neutron multiplicity are allowed with LB=0
and LB=1, and have the structure:[MAT,31, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,

0,

LB,

2,

1/(0.0,F)] LIST

where F gives the absolute or relative covariance component depending on whether LB=0 or LB=1.
(See Section 33.2 of this manual for notation.)

April 2001

31.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

31.3. Procedures
All procedures given in 33.3 concerning the ordering and completeness of sections of File 33
apply to sections of File 31: ν (MAT,31,452), ν d (MAT,31,455) and ν p (MAT,31,456).
Note that in File 1 ν (MT=452), ν d (MT=455) and ν p (MT=456) satisfy the relation:

ν (E ) = ν d (E ) +ν p
Therefore, if one of these quantities is "derived" in terms of the other two, it is permissible to use"NC-type" sub-sections with LTY=0 to indicate that it is a "derived redundant cross section". See
section 33.2.1.a. for an explanation of this format.
If a section of File 31 is used with MT=456, there must also be a section of File 31 with
MT=452.
When a section of File 31 for either MT=452, 455 or 456 is used for induced fission, there must
be a section in File 33 for the fission cross sections, i.e., section (MAT,33,18).
Note:
1. Since ν d is much smaller than ν p , it should never be evaluated by subtracting ν p from ν .
2. When a polynomial representation is used to describe the data in File 1 MT=452, the covariancefile applies to the tabular reconstruction of the data as a function of energy and not to thepolynomial coefficients.
3. The ENDF-6 formats do not provide for covariance references between different sublibraries
except by use of File 30. Therefore, it is not possible to express the covariances between, forexample, the ν for spontaneous fission of 252Cf and the ν (E) for the major fissile materials byuse of NC-type sub-subsections with LTY=1, 2, and 3.
4. In ENDF-6 formats there is no provision to express uncertainty in MT=455 for the decay
constants for the various precursor families.

31.2

April 2001

32. FILE 32, COVARIANCES OF RESONANCE PARAMETERS
32.1. General Description
File 32, MT=151, contains the variances and covariances of the resonance parameters given in
File 2, MT=151. The resonance parameters, used with the appropriate resonance formulae, provide
an efficient way to represent the complicated variations in the magnitudes of the different resonantpartial cross sections, compared to the use of File 3 alone. Similarly for File 32, the use of thecovariances of the resonance parameters of individual resonances provides an efficient way ofrepresenting the rapid variation over the individual resonances of the covariances of the partial crosssections. The covariance data of the processed cross sections include the effects of both File 32 andFile 33 within a given energy region, similar to the way the cross sections themselves are the sum ofcontributions from File 2 and File 3.
In the resonance region, the covariances of the partial cross sections are often characterized by a)"long-range" components that affect the covariances over many resonances, and b) "short-range"
components affecting the covariances of the different partial cross sections in the neighborhood ofindividual resonances. The former often can best be represented in File 33, while the latter can begiven in File 32.
When the material composition is dilute in the nuclide of concern and the cross sections are to beaveraged over an energy region that includes many resonances, the effects of "short-range"
components are unimportant and the covariances of the averaged cross sections can be well
represented by processing the long-range components given in File 33. Therefore, the covariancesof the cross sections in the unresolved resonance energy region should be given entirely by means ofFile 33 unless resonance self-shielding in this energy region is thought to be of practical significancefor a particular nuclide. For many nuclides these conditions may also be valid in the high-energy
portion of the resolved resonance energy region.
In the resolved resonance region it may be necessary to calculate covariances for the resonanceself-shielding factors to obtain the uncertainty in the Doppler effect. As another example, one may
require group cross-section covariances where the groups are narrow compared to the resonancewidth or where only a few resonances are within a group. In these cases File 32 should be used.
Because this situation may be important only in the lower energy portion of the resolved resonanceregion, File 32 need not include the whole set of resonances given in File 2. File 33 remains
available for use in combination with File 32.
The ENDF-6 formats for File 32 are structured to maintain compatibility with those of
ENDF/B-V, and there are new features to permit representation of covariance components among
the parameters of different resonances. Covariances between resonance energies and widths are now
also allowed. While File 32 was limited in ENDF-5 to the Breit-Wigner representations (LRF=1 or
2), in ENDF-6 formats covariances may also be given for the Reich-Moore (LRF=3) and
Adler-Adler (LRF=4) formulations. A limited representation is offered for unresolved resonanceparameter covariance data. The conventions are retained that the cross section covariances for the
resonance region are combined from covariance data in File 32 and File 33, and that relative
covariances given in File 33 apply to the cross sections reconstructed from File 2 plus File 3 whenthat option is specified in File 2. (There is a partial exception for LRF=4.) Since the ENDF-6
formats do not allow a continuous range of values for the total angular momentum J of a resonance,
covariance data for the resonance spin are no longer recognized.

June 2005

32.1

Note that File 32 formats retain many restrictions. For example, there is no provision for
representing covariances between the parameters of resonances in two different materials or in two
isotopes within the same elemental evaluation. Since File 32 can become cumbersome if many
resonances are treated, evaluators will do so only for nuclides of greatest practical importance.
The strategy employed for File 32 is similar to that for smooth cross sections in that the varianceof a resonance parameter or the covariance between two such parameters can be given as a sum of
several components. Some contributions can be labeled by resonance energy and parameter type,while others can arise from long-range covariances among parameters of the same type for different
resonances in the same isotope. The latter are labeled by energy bands, and the same uncertainty
characteristic is applied to the indicated parameter of all the File 2 resonances in a given band.
The idea of assigning the same relative covariance to all parameters of a given type in an energy
region has limited validity. One limit arises because long-range uncertainties in reaction yields don't
generally carry over proportionately to uncertainties in the corresponding reaction widths. However,gamma-ray widths are sometimes known only for resonances at low neutron energy, and then the
average of these values is used for the resonances at higher energy. This situation motivates formats
resembling File 33 except that a relative uncertainty in the file applies to the indicated parameter(e.g., Γγ) of every resonance in the indicated energy range. The approach here is to allow the longrange correlations to extend over any energy interval in which consistent resolved resonanceformulations are utilized.
The definitions of common quantities are as given in Chapter 2.
32.2. Formats
The format for File 32, MT=151, parallels the format for File 2, MT=151, with the restriction to
LRF=1,2,3 or 4 for LRU=1 (resolved parameters) and to LRF=1 for LRU=2 (unresolved
parameters).
The general structure of File 32 is as follows:[MAT,32,151/
ZA, AWR,
0,0, NIS,
0] HEAD[MAT,32,151/ ZAI, ABN,
0,0, LFW, NER] CONT
(isotope)[MAT,32,151/
EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NRO, NAPS] CONT
(range)<subsection for the first energy range for the first isotope>[MAT,32,151/
EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NRO, NAPS] CONT
(range)<subsection for the second energy range for the first isotope>----------------------------------------------------------[MAT,32,151/
EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NRO, NAPS] CONT
(range)<subsection for the last energy range for the first isotope>----------------------------------------------------------[MAT,32,151/ ZAI, ABN,
0,0, LFW, NER] CONT
(isotope)[MAT,32,151/
EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NRO, NAPS] CONT
(range)<subsection for the first energy range for the last isotope>----------------------------------------------------------[MAT,32,151/ EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NRO, NAPS] CONT
(range)<subsection for the last energy range for the last isotope>--------------------------------------------------------[MAT,32, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] SEND[MAT, 0, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0] FEND

32.2

June, 2005

Data are given for all ranges for a given isotope, then for successive isotopes. The data for eachisotope start with a CONT (isotope) record; those for each range with a CONT (range) record. Filesegments need not be included for all isotopes represented in the corresponding File 2.
If the "range" record preceding a subsection has NRO≠0, indicating that the energy dependenceof the scattering radius is given in File 2, the initial file segment within the subsection has the form:[MAT,32,151/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,NI] CONT<NI sub-subsections as defined in Chapter 33.2 for theenergy-dependent covariances of the scattering radius>

The next record of a subsection (the first record if NRO=0) has the form:[MAT,32,151/ SPI,

AP,

0, LCOMP, NLS,

0] CONT.

If the compatibility flag, LCOMP, is zero, NLS is the number of L-values for which lists ofresonances are given in a form compatible with that used in ENDF-5, as described in Section 32.2.1.
If LCOMP=1, then NLS=0 and subsection formats are as shown in Sections 32.2.2. If LCOMP=2,
the covariance matrix is expressed in compact form as described in Sect. 32.3 and 32.4.
32.2.1 Compatible resolved resonance subsection format.
This format differs from that used for ENDF-5 only in that covariances of the resonance spin are
all zero. It is applicable only for resolved parameters (LRU=1) and for the Breit-Wigner formalisms(LRF=1 or 2). The following covariance quantities are defined:
DE2
DN2
DNDG
DG2
DNDF
DGDF
DF2
DJDN
DJDG
DJDF
DJ2

Variance of the resonance energy in units eV2.
Variance of the neutron width GN in units eV2.
Covariance of GN and GG in units eV2.
Variance of the gamma-ray width in units eV2
Covariance of GN and GF in units eV2.
Covariance of GG and GF in units eV2.
Variance of the fission width GF in units eV2.
(null) covariance of resonance J-value and GN.
(null) covariance of resonance J-value and GG.
(null) covariance of resonance J-value and GF.
(null) variance of resonance J-value.

A complete subsection for LCOMP = 0 has the following form:<If NRO is not 0, a control record and NI sub-subsections for energy-dependent
covariances of the scattering radius>[MAT,32,151/ SPI,
AP,
0, LCOMP,NLS,
0] CONT (LCOMP=0)[MAT,32,151/AWRI,
0.0,
L,0, 18*NRS,
NRS/
ER1,
AJ1,
GT1,
GN1,
GG1,
GF1,
DE12, DN12, DNDG1,
DG12, DNDF1, DGDF1,
DF12, DJDN1, DJDG1, DJDF1,
DJ12,
0.0,
(DJDN1,DJDG1,DJDF1=0.0)<three physical records for each resonance through resonance NRS> ] LIST<a similar list record for each additional value of L through NLS>

June 2005

32.3

Note that in this compatible format no covariance can be given between parameters of different
resonances even if they overlap.
32.2.2 General resolved resonance subsection formats.
Following the record that starts with the target spin, SPI, if it states LCOMP=1, the next card of
a subsection defines for that isotope and energy range how many (NSRS) sub-sections will occur forcovariances among parameters of specified resonances and how many (NLRS) sub-sections are tocontain data on long-range parameter covariances. The complete structure of an LCOMP=1
subsection is as follows:<f NRO≠0, a control record and NI sub-subsections for energydependent covariances of the scattering radius>[MAT,32,151/ SPI, AP,
0, LCOMP, NLS,
0] CONT (LCOMP=1,NLS=0)[MAT,32,151/AWRI, 0.0,
0,0, NSRS, NLRS] CONT<NSRS sub-subsections each giving covariances among specified
parameters of enumerated sets of resonances><NLRS sub-subsections each giving long-range covariances contributions
for stated energy regions for a particular type of resonance parameter>

Covariance formats for NSRS-type sub-subsections
The formats here differ from the LCOMP=0 formats of Section 32.2.1 in that covariance
between parameters of different resonances appear, resonance representations LRF=1 to 4 areallowed, there is no segregation by L-value, and the number of parameters considered per resonanceis declared in each sub-subsection primarily to avoid tabulating zero covariances for fission widths
in files concerning structural materials. The listed resonances must be present in File 2, but there is
no requirement that all resonances be included in File 32 that are given in File 2.
The following paragraphs cover the formats for the NSRS sub-subsections for the various (LRF)
resonance formulations for resolved parameters (LRU=1). LRF=1 through 4 are allowed.
LRF=1,2, LRU=1. These cases have the same formats. All the resonances for whichcovariances are to be included are divided into blocks. Covariances between parameters can only be
included for resonances in the same block. (A given resonance can appear in more than one block.)A sub-subsection covers the data for a block. Within each such block, the parameters are given of
those resonances for which covariances are included, and the upper triangular representation of theparameter covariance matrix is included for the whole block of resonances. For each block one
specifies the number MPAR of parameters to be included for each listed resonance in the block,since for most cases there is, for example, no fission width and the size of the covariance matrix cantherefore be minimized.
The NSRS-type sub-sections have the form below for LRF=1 and 2:[MAT,32,151/

0.0,

Parameters foreach resonance forwhich there iscovariance data.
Resonance parameter
32.4

0.0, MPAR,
0, NVS+6*NRB,.NRB/
ER1, AJ1, GT1, GN1, GG1, GF1,…
…
ERNRB, AJNRB, GTNRB, GNNRB, GNNRB, GGNRB, GFNRB,
V11, V12, .... V1,MPAR*NRB, V22,

June, 2005

variances andcovariances for all
resonances listed.

...,
...,

V2,NPAR*NRB,
V33,
VMPAR*NRB,MPAR*NB, 0.0, 0.0] LIST

Note that the record first lists all the parameters of resonances in the group, for positive
identification, and then lists the covariance terms.
MPAR

Number of parameters per resonance in this block which have covariance data
(In order: ER, GN, GG, GF, GX, indices 1-5)

NVS

Number of covariance elements listed for this block of resonances,
NVS = [NRB×MPAR×(NRB×MPAR+1)]/2.

NRB

Number of resonances in this block and for which resonance parameter andcovariance data are given in this sub-section.
Lab system energy of the kth resonance (in this block).
Floating-point value of the spin for the kth resonance.
Total width (eV) for the kth resonance. GT=GN+GG+GF+GX.
Neutron width of the kth resonance.
Gamma-ray width for the kth resonance.
Fission width of the kth resonance.

ER
AJk
GTk
GNk
GGk
GFk
Vmn

Variance (eV2) or covariance matrix element, row m and column, n ≥ m. If
j ≤ MPAR is the parameter index (j=4 for fission width) for the kth resonancein the block, m = j + (k-1)×MPAR. The indexing is the order defined above
under MPAR.

LRF=3, LRU=1. The representation for the Reich-Moore resonance formulation is very similar.
The listing of the parameters among which covariance terms are allowed takes the form used in File2, namely:
ER, AJ, GN, GG, GFA, GFB.
Similarly, in interpreting the indices for the covariance matrix of the parameters in a given blockof resonances, the order when LRF=3 is ER, GN, GG, GFA, GFB and the largest possible value of
MPAR is 5.
LRF=4, LRU=1. The Adler-Adler resonance representation includes background constants aswell as resonance parameters. The uncertainty in the background constants is to be treated indirectly
just as the smooth background given in File 3. (That is, in the energy region EL, EU for LRF=4 any
relative uncertainty data in File 33 applies to the sum of the cross section in File 3 and thecontribution of the cross sections computed from the Adler-Adler background constants. Great care
will be required if this uncertainty representation for Adler-Adler fits is used in other thansingle-isotopes evaluations.) The inherent assumption is that covariance data will be detailed for thelargest resonances, and those representing the Adler-Adler backgrounds. It is assumed that LI=7.

June 2005

32.5

An LRF=4 NSRS sub-subsection takes the following form, using the previous definitions where
possible:[MAT,32,151/
Parameters foreach referencein the block.
Resonance parametervariances for all
resonances listed.

0.0,
0.0, MPAR,
0,NVS+6*NRB, NRB/
DEF1, DWF1,
DET1, DWT1, GRT1, GIT1,
GRF1, GIF1, DEC1, DWC1,
GRC1, GIC1,-------------------------------------DETNRB, DWTNRB, GRTNRB, GITNRB, DEFNRB, DWFNRB,GRFNRB, GIFNRB, DECNRB, DWCNRB, GRCNRB, GICNRB,
V11, V12, -------------, V1,MPAR*NRB,
V22,-----------------------, V2,NPAR*NRB,
V33,----------, VMPAR*NRB,MPAR*NB,
0.0, 0.0] LIST

The Adler-Adler parameters of the selected list of resonances are given in the same redundantstyle indicated in section 2.2.1.3. For LRF=4 the maximum value of MPAR is 8 and for a given
resonance the covariance matrix indexing is in the order:µ = DET = DEF = DEC,DWT = DWF = DWD = v,
GRT, GIT, GRF, GIF, GRC, GIC
Format for Long-Range Covariance Sub-subsections (LRU=1). Here are described the forms thatthe sub-subsections may take to represent long-range (in energy) covariances among parameters of agiven type. The strategy is to use formats that resemble those for File 33 but refer to a particularparameter and equally to all resonances of a given isotope within the indicated energy regions.
Here each sub-subsection must identify the resonance parameter considered (Γn, Γγ, etc.) via theparameter IDP, indicate the covariance pattern via a value of LB, and give the energy regions andcovariance components. The following table defines the permitted values of LB. Note the definitionof one LB value not defined in File 33, and that LB=3 and 4 are not employed in File 32 because of
LB=5 is typically much more convenient. The term COV[Γα(i),Γα(j)] is defined as the covariance
between the Γα parameters for two different resonances (indexed i and j) in the same nuclide.
LB=-1

Relative variance components entirely uncorrelated from resonance-to- resonancebut having constant magnitude within the stated energy intervals.
NE −1

Cov [ Γα (i )Γα ( j )] = δ ij ∑ Sik Fα(k−1) Γα2 (i )
k =1

LB=0

Absolute covariance components correlated only within each E interval.
NE −1

Cov [ Γα (i ) Γα ( j ) ] = ∑ Pji,,kk Fα(0k )
k =1

LB=1

Relative covariance components correlated only within each E interval
NE −1

Cov [ Γα (i ) Γα ( j )] = ∑ Pji,,kk Fα(1)k Γα (i ) Γα ( j )
k =1

LB=2

32.6

Fractional covariance components fully correlated over all E intervals with variablemagnitude.

June, 2005

NE 1

(2)
Cov [ Γα (i )Γα ( j )] = ∑ Pji,,kk′ Fα(2)k Fα k ′ Γα (i ) Γα ( j )k ,k ′=1

LB=5

Relative covariance components in an upper triangular representation of a symmetricmatrix.

Cov [ Γα (i )Γα ( j )] = ∑ Pji,,kk′ Fα(5)kk ′ Γα (i ) Γα ( j )k ,k ′=1

Note that the F(–1), F(1), and F(5) parameters have the dimensions of relative covariances, the F(0) are
absolute covariances, and the F(2) are relative standard deviations.
The S and P are dimensionless operations defined in Section 33.2
The sub-subsection format for LB=–1, 0, 1, or 2 is:[MAT,32,151/

0.0,

0.0,

IDP,

LB, 2*NE,

NE/{Ek,F(LB)}] LIST

IDP,

LB,

NE/{Ek},{Fkk(5)}] LIST(LB=5)

For LB=5 the requisite format is[MAT,32,151/

0.0,

0.0,

NT,

In the above:

LB
NE
NT
IDP

Indicator of covariance pattern as defined above.
Number of energies in the parameter table for a given sub-section.
NE*(NE+1)/2.
Identification number of a resonance parameter type. This index depends on theresonance formulation used, as summarized in the table below. This table isconsistent with the order of parameters used in the NSRS-type sub-subsections
to define the parameter covariances included, the first NPAR parameters in thelist for the given LRF value.
LRF
IDP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
Er
Γn
Γγ
Γf
Γx

2
Er
Γn
Γγ
Γf
Γx

3
Er
Γn
Γγ
Γf
Γx

4
Er=µ
v
GRT
GIT
GRF
GIF
GRC
GIC

For LB=0, ±1, 2, and 5 the energy values in the tables are monotonically increasing and cover
the range EL to EH. For LB=5 the F-values are given in the upper triangular representation of asymmetric matrix by rows, i.e. F11, F12, ..., F1,NE-1; F22, F2,NE-1; FNE-1,NE-1

June 2005

32.7

32.2.3 Unresolved resonance subsection format (LRU=2)

For the unresolved resonance region a simplified covariance formulation is permitted. For the
purposes of covariance representation, no energy dependence is specified for the average parameter
relative covariances, even though in file 2 the unresolved region may be represented withenergy-dependent average Breit-Wigner parameters using LRF=2. Relative covariance elements aretabulated, unlike the cases above.
If the evaluator wishes to represent the relative covariance of the unresolved resonanceparameters, the subsection for a given isotope has the following form.
[MAT,32,151/ SPI,
AP,
0,
0,
NLS,
0] CONT[MAT,32,151/ AWRI, 0.0,L,0, 6*NJS, NJS/
AJ1, GNO1, GG1,
GF1, GX1,
D1 ,-----------------------------------DNJS, AJNJS, GNONJS, GGNJS, GFNJS, GXNJS] LIST<NJS card images for each L value in successive LIST records>[MAT,32,151/ 0.0, 0.0, MPAR,
0,(NPAR*(NPAR+1))/2,NPAR/
RV11, RV12, -------------------------,-----------, RV1,NPAR,--------, RNNAPR,NPAR] LIST

MPAR is the number of average parameters for which relative covariance data are given for each
L and J, in the order D, GNO, GG, GF, and GX, for a maximum of 5. That is, relative covariancevalues for the first MPAR of these are tabulated for each (L,J) combination. If MPAR is given as 4
when LFW=0 on the CONT (isotope) record, then the four covariance matrix indices per (L,J)
combination represent D,GNO, GG, and GX.
NPAR=MPAR*(sum of the values of NJS for each L).
The LSSF flag is defined in Section 2.3.1.
RVij, the relative covariance quantities among these average unresolved parameters for the given
isotope. The final LIST record contains the upper triangular portion of the symmetric relative
covariance matrix by rows.
32.3. General Description of Compact Covariance Matrix.

This format was developed in order to provide a means of communicating the actual
resonance-parameter covariance matrix (as determined during the data-evaluation process) in acompact, legible, and accurate form, for those situations in which it is not practical to provide theentire covariance matrix using the LCOMP=1 format. The covariance matrix is specified as
uncertainties plus correlation matrix. The correlation coefficients (whose values range from -1 to 1)
are presented in a compact representation; each approximated correlation coefficient differs from theoriginal value by at most 0.005.
If the covariance matrix element connecting parameter number i with parameter number j isdenoted by Vij, the uncertainty on parameter i by Di, and the correlation coefficient by Cij, then thesequantities are related by

32.8

June, 2005

Di2 = Vii

Vij = Di Cij DjValues for Cij range from -1 to +1; values for Di are always positive. Note that the diagonal
elements of Cij, those for which i = j, are always exactly 1.0 and therefore are never specified
explicitly. Compacting the off-diagonal correlation coefficients is accomplished as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Drop (set to zero) all values of Cij between -0.02 and +0.02.
Multiply the remaining coefficients by 100.
Map all positive values greater than K and less than or equal to K+1 to the integer K.
Map all negative values less than -K and greater than or equal to -K-1 to the integer -K.

The reverse mapping takes the integer to the center of the range. For example, the positive
integer 87 (which corresponds to original correlation coefficients in the range from 0.87 up to andincluding 0.88) maps to 0.875. The negative integer -12 (which corresponds to original correlation
coefficients in the range from -0.12 inclusive down to -0.13 exclusive) maps to correlation
coefficient -0.125.
Two types of records are used to read the mapped correlation coefficients. A CONT
record defines NNN (the number of parameters) and NM (the number of lines of INTG
records that follow).
[MAT, 32, 151 / 0.0, 0.0, 0, NNN, NM,[MAT, MF, MT / II, JJ, KIJ ] INTG
[MAT, MF, MT / II, JJ, KIJ ] INTG
< Continue until a total of NM INTG records are read >

NM]

CONT

The information stored in the INTG records may be summarized as follows: Let i and j
represent two of the parameters in the numbering scheme defined above, with i > j. All thosecorrelation coefficients mapped to non-zero integers Kij are printed in File 32; zero-valued
Kij are printed (as blanks or zeros) only when they occur on the same record with non-zerovalues. Each line (record) in the file begins by specifying the location (i.e., by specifying iand j, with i > j); other K=s on the same line correspond to (i, j +1), (i, j +2), ... (i, j +17) [solong as j + 17 < i ]. If there are more non-zero K=s for the same i, they are given on anotherline, again beginning with the next non-zero K.
The following FORTRAN can be used to read the mapped correlation coefficients andreconstruct the correlation matrix:
DIMENSION K(18), CORR(n,n)
Note that n must be greater than or equal to NNN
READ (LIB,10) NNN, NM, NX, MAT, MF, MT, NS
10 FORMAT (33X, 3I11, I4, I2, I3, I5)C
The CONT record: NNN is dimension of CORR(NNN,NNN), andC
NM is the number of lines to follow in the file
DO I=1,NNNDO J=1,I-1
CORR(J,I) = 0.0
C

June 2005

32.9

END DO
CORR(I,I) = 1.0
END DO
DO M=1,NM
READ (LIB,20) I, J, (K(N),N=1,18), MAT, MF, MT, NS
20
FORMAT (I5, I5, 1X, 18I3, 1X, I4, I2, I3, I5)
CThis is the INTG record
JP = J – 1
DO N=1,18
JP = JP + 1
IF (JP.GE.I) GO TO 30
IF (K(N).NE.0) THEN
IF (K(N).GT.0) THEN
CORR(JP,I) = (K(N)+0.5)/100.0
ELSE
CORR(JP,I) = - (-K(N)+0.5)/100.0
END IF
END IF
END DO
30 CONTINUEEND DO

Note that only the upper-triangular portion of the correlation matrix [CORR(J,I) for J < I ] isdefined by this procedure. The lower-triangular portion can be found by invoking symmetry[CORR(I,J) = CORR(J,I)].

32.10

June, 2005

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

32.4 Formats for Compact Covariance Matrix

The compact format for covariances uses File 32, MT=151, with LCOMP = 2 (with LRF = 1, 2,
3, and 7) for LRU=1 (resolved-resonance parameters). The format parallels the format for File 2,
MT = 151, with parameter uncertainties specified along with parameter values. Correlation
coefficients are given separately.
The general structure of File 32 is as given in Section 32.2.
[MAT, 32, 151 / ZA, AWR,
0,0, NIS,0]HEAD[MAT, 32, 151 / ZAI, AWR,
0, LFW, NER,
0]CONT (isotope)[MAT, 32, 151 / EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NIS, NAPS]CONT (range)<subsection for the first energy range for the first isotope>[MAT, 32, 151 / EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NIS, NAPS]CONT (range)<subsection for the second energy range for the first isotope>----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 32, 151 / EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NIS, NAPS]CONT (range)<subsection for the last energy range for the first isotope>----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 32, 151 / ZAI, AWR,
0, LFW, NER,
0]CONT (isotope)[MAT, 32, 151 / EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NIS, NAPS]CONT (range)<subsection for the first energy range for the last isotope>--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT, 32, 151 / EL, EH, LRU, LRF, NIS, NAPS]CONT (range)<subsection for the last energy range for the last isotope>[MAT, 32,
0 / 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0]SEND[MAT, 0,0 / 0.0, 0.0,0,0,0,0]FEND

Formats for the individual subsections differ depending on the value of LRF, and are discussed
in Sections 32.4.1.

April 2001

32.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

32.4.1 Compact covariance matrix formats for subsections of a particular energy range andisotopeIn the format descriptions to follow, the notation is as defined in Section 2. Uncertainties aredenoted by parameters whose names begin with AD@ but are otherwise identical to the parameter ofSection 2. For example, ER represents the resonance energy in the laboratory system, in units of eV.
Therefore, DER represents the uncertainty (square root of the variance) associated with theresonance energy; DER has the same units as ER.
Parameters which are not variables (that is, which are not searchable parameters in the analysis
process) do not have uncertainties associated with them. For example, the total spin of a resonance,
denoted by parameter AJ, has no associated uncertainty DAJ. In File 32, the value 0.0 is given
instead of DAJ (for LRF = 1,2,3).
For LRF = 1 and 2, the redundant parameter GT (which is equal to GN + GG + GF) has nocorresponding uncertainty DGT specified explicitly. Instead, if needed, DGT may be calculatedusing values for DGN, DGG, and DGF, and the correlation matrix.
During the evaluation process, not all potential variables are treated as searchable parameters.
For example, if no capture cross section data were available, the evaluator might choose to set all
capture widths GG to a constant value. The associated uncertainty DGG is then specified in File 32
as -1.0, indicating that this parameter=s uncertainty is not known. (The proper procedure to be usedin evaluating the effect of these unvaried parameters on the final covariance matrix remains an open
question, and is not addressed in this document.)
In order to express the correlation matrix as compactly as possible, the resonance parameters(those which may be varied during the evaluation process) are implicitly numbered, in the order inwhich they occur in the listing of File 2. For LRF = 1, 2, or 3, the non-searchable parameter AJ is
included in the list but is NOT included in this numbering, nor (for LRF=1 or 2) is the redundantparameter GT. Parameters whose value is given but whose uncertainty is unknown (as described in
the previous paragraph) are nevertheless included in the numerical ordering. For completely nonfissile nuclides, fission widths are not included in the numbering scheme; likewise, for fissile orfissionable nuclides for which the evaluator chose to use only one fission width, the second fission
width (for LRF = 3) would not be counted.
Notation used here not previously defined:
NRSA

32.12

Total number of resonances for all L values

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

32.4.1.2 SLBW and MLBW (LRU=1, LRF=1 or 2)

The structure of the subsection (assuming NRO = 0) is:[MAT, 32, 151 / SPI, AP,
0,LCOMP,NLSA,
0] CONT[MAT, 32, 151 /AWRI, QX,0,0,12*NRSA, NRS /ER1, AJ1,
GT1,
GN1,
GG1, GF1,
DER1, 0.0 ,0.0, DGN1,
DGG1, DGF1,
ER2, AJ2,
GT2,
GN2,
GG2, GF2,
DER2, 0.0 ,0.0, DGN2,
DGG2, DGF2,-----------------------------------------------ERNRS, AJNRS, GTNRS,GNNRS, GGNRS, GFNRSDERNRS, 0.0,
0.0, DGNNRS, DGGNRS, DGFNRS ] LIST
[MAT, 32, 151 / 0.0, 0.0,
0,
NNN,
NM, 0
] CONT[MAT, MF, MT / II, JJ, KIJ ] INTG
[MAT, MF, MT / II, JJ, KIJ ] INTG
< Continue until a total of NM INTG records are read >Note that NNN is the total number of unique resonance parameters included in this listing, notincluding AJ or GT. For fissile nuclides, NNN = NRS Η 4; for non-fissile nuclides, NNN = NRS
Η3.
32.4.1.3 Reich Moore Limited (LRU=1, LRF=7)

The structure of the subsection is[MAT, 32, 151/ SPI, AP,
LAD, LCOMP, NLS, NLSC]CONT[MAT, 32, 151/AWRI,
0,0,
0,
12*NRSA,NRSA /ER1,
AJ1, GN1,
GG1,
GFA1,
GFB1,
DER1, 0.0 , DGN1, DGG1, DGFA1, DGFB1,
ER2,
AJ2, GN2,
GG2,
GFA2,
GFB2,
DER2, 0.0 , DGN2, DGG2, DGFA2, DGFB2,----------------------------------------------------ERNRS, AJNRS, GNNRS, GGNRS, GFANRS, GFBNRS,DERNRS, 0.0, DGNNRS, DGGNRS, DGFANRS, DGFBNRS]LIST[MAT, 32, 151 / 0.0, 0.0, 0,
NNN,
NM,
0
]CONT
[MAT, MF, MT / II, JJ, KIJ ] INTG
[MAT, MF, MT / II, JJ, KIJ ] INTG
< Continue until a total of NM INTG records are read >Note that NNN is the total number of resonance parameters in this listing (again not including AJ).
For non-fissile nuclides, NNN = NRSA Η 3. For fissile nuclides, NNN = NRSA Η 4 if only one
fission channel is used, and NNN = NRSA Η 5 if both are used.

April 2001

32.13

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

32.4.1.3 Reich Moore Limited (LRU=1, LRF=7 )The structure of the subsection is[MAT,32,151/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,LCOMP,NJS,
0] CONT[MAT,32,151/ 0.0, 0.0,
NPP,0, 12*NPP,
2*NPP/
MA1,
MB1,
ZA1,
ZB1,
IA1,
IB1,
Q1, PNT1,
SHF1,
MT1,
PA1,
PB1,
MA2,
MB2,
ZA2,
ZB2,
IA2,
IB1,
Q2, PNT2,
SHF2,
MT2,
PA2,
PB1,
-----------------------------------------------ANPP, MBNPP,ZANPP, ZBNPP,
IANPP,
IBNPP,
QNPP, PNTNPP, SHFNPP, MTNPP,
PANPP,PBNPP] LIST[MAT,32,151/ AJ, PJ,
0,0, 6*NCH,
NCH/
IPP1,
L1 ,
SCH1, BND1,
APE1,
APT1,
IPP2,
L2 ,
SCH2, BND2,
APE2,
APT2,
-----------------------------------------------IPPNCH, LNCH,SCHNCH, BNDNCH, APENCH, APTNCH] LIST------------------------------------------------[MAT,32,151/0.0,
0.0,
0,NRS, 12*NX, NX/
R1, GAM1,1, GAM2,1, GAM3,1, GAM4,1, GAM5,1,
GAM6,1,...,GAMNCH,1,
DER1, DGAM1,1, DGAM2,1, DGAM3,1, DGAM4,1,DGAM5,1,
DGAM6,1,..., DGAMNCH,1,
ER2, GAM1,2, GAM2,2,
GAM3,2, GAM4,2, GAM5,2,
GAM6,2,...,GAMNCH,2,
DER2, DGAM1,2, DGAM2,2, DGAM3,2, DGAM4,2,DGAM5,2,
DGAM6,2,..., DGAMNCH,2,------------------------------------------------ERNRS, GAM1,NRS, GAM2,NRS, GAM3,NRS, GAM4,NRS, GAM5,NRS,...,GAMNCH,NRS
GAM6,NRS,DERNRS,DGAM1,NRS,DGAM2,NRS,DGAM3,NRS,DGAM4,NRS,DGAM5,NRS,
DGAM6,NRS,..., DGAMNCH,NRS] LIST<The above two list records are repeated until each of
the NJS J π states has been specified.>
[MAT,
[MAT,

MF,
MF,

MT / II, JJ, KIJ ] INTG
MT / II, JJ, KIJ ] INTG

< Continue until a total of NM INTG records are read >For LRF = 7 (unlike other formats), the number of channels may vary from one spin group toanother. The number of resonance parameters NNN is therefore given by the sum (from 1 to NJS)
of ( NCH Η NRS ).

32.14

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

32.5 Procedures
As indicated earlier, it is desirable to utilize File 32 when self shielding is important or when
only a few resonances fall within an energy group of the processed cross sections. It is believed thatin most cases the covariances the evaluator needs to represent will not use many of the available File
32 options. One does not expect to find covariance data in File 32 for all the resonance parametersin File 2.

Correspondence Between Files 2 and 32. Completeness of File 32.
1. The overall energy range for a given isotope in File 32 is nested within the corresponding rangeof File 2. In either case, there may be several energy range control records. The following rules
apply separately for each isotope:
a. The smallest lower range limit EL for files 2 and 32 must agree.
b. The highest upper range limit EH for File 32 may be smaller than or equal to that for File 2.
c. In file 32 as in File 2, the energy ranges of the subsections may not leave gaps. Subsections
with LRU=1 may overlap if consistent resonance formulations are referenced (LRF=1 or 2).
d. An unresolved energy region (LRU=2) may be used in File 32 if one is employed in File 2.
If one is used, its lower energy range limit must equal the corresponding limit for File 2.
2. In a file 32 LCOMP=0 subsection, any selection of the resonances shown in File 2 with LRF=1
or 2 must be listed in order of increasing energy. The resonance energy given in File 32 shallagree with that in File 2 for the same resonance to a relative tolerance of ≤10-5 to assume
positive identification.
3. In LCOMP=1, LRU=1 subsections, any selection of the resonances shown in File 2 forconsistent resonance formulations may be listed in NSRS-type sub-subsections. The listed
resonances should be in order of increasing energy within each block, and the blocks should bearranged by order of increasing energy for the lowest-energy resonance in the block. A given
resonance may appear in more than one block. The resonance energy given in File 32 shallagree with that in File 2 for the same resonance to a relative tolerance of ≤10-5.
4. The energy identifiers of every NLRS-type sub-subsection must cover the entire energy range(EL,EH) of the subsection. However, any desired covariance components may be null.
5. NLRS-type sub-subsections may be included in any order in LCOMP=1, LRU=1 subsections.
Obtaining Cross Section Covariances From File 32 and File 33.
1. Outside the combined energy range covered by File 32, whether in part or all of the energy range
covered by File 2, the covariance data in File 33 refers to the cross sections reconstituted from
File 2 plus File 3 according to the value of the LSSF flag.
2. In LCOMP=0 subsections a non-zero variance or covariance involving the resonance spin J (AJ)
will be treated as null.
3. When File 32 is present for a resolved resonance range (LRU=1), the covariances among theeffective cross sections in the region are obtained by combining data from Files 32 and 33.
a. A resonance parameter covariance matrix is developed by summing all the contributions forApril 2001

32.15

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedureseach resonance from the File 32 subsections with LRU=1.
b. The resonance parameter covariance file is processed to obtain the covariance data ofeffective cross sections implied by File 32. (This data will in general be a function of isotopic
dilution and temperature.) Covariance for the various isotopes are summed with appropriate
weights if the evaluation is an "elemental" one.
c. Covariances derived from File 32 are summed with those given in File 33. With one
exception, relative covariances given in File 33 apply to the effective cross sections
reconstituted from File 2 and File 3. In that exception, when the Adler-Adler (LRF=4)
resonance formulation is employed, any relative covariances in File 33 for that energy region
apply to the sum of the cross section from File 3 with the smooth background given for the
LRF=4 resonance data.
4. When File 32 is present for the unresolved resonance range (LRU=2), covariance data for theregion are obtained as follows:a. File 33 covariance data for this energy region are taken to represent the covariances of
evaluated average cross sections for "infinite isotopic dilution."b. To obtain covariances among effective cross sections for material dilutions such that
uncertainties in self shielding can become important, the effects of the unresolved resonanceparameter covariances in File 32 and the evaluated average cross section covariances in File 33
are to be combined. A means for this combination was described by deSaussure and Marable[Ref. 1]. (Note that covariances of the effective cross sections in one test case were not muchaffected by uncertainties in average parameters. See B.L. Broadhead and H.L. Dodds [Ref. 2].)
Example For Mat 3333.
The nucleus of concern in this example has resonances represented by LRF=2 for the energy
range (1,50). Five (5) resonances are given in File 2, one of which lies at negative energy, but theresonance at 15 eV is considered only relative to long-range uncertainties. Table 32.1 shows the File
2 for the example, and Table 32.2 shows the corresponding file 32.
In File 32, there are included three NSRS-type sub-subsections and four NLRS-typesub-subsections. Of the former, the first refers only to the negative energy resonance and indicatesthe following parameter covariance contribution for that resonance, in eV2
Er
Γn
Γγ
Γf

1.0
-1.5
0
-0.2

-1.5
4.0
0
-1.0

0
0
0
0

-0.2
-1.0
0
0.8

This block is mostly to express the negative correlation between neutron width and apparent
resonance energy for this guessed resonance.
The second sub-subsection refers only to the 5-eV resonance, and conveys the following
covariance contribution:

32.16

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Er
Γn
Γγ
Γf

0.5×10-6

0
1×106
1×106
0.2×106

0
1×106
0.0
2.0×106

00.2×106
2.0×106
4×106

The third block covers Γn covariances for the 30 and 40 eV resonances.
The first NLRS sub-subsection gives the Γγ uncertainty correlated among all the resonances.
The value is assumed to have been determined solely by analysis of the 5-eV resonance. Note thatthe variance for the 5-eV resonance generated by the sub-subsection fills the "hole" in the table justabove (with the value 16×10-6).
The second sub-subsection expresses the expectedresonance-to-resonance uncorrelated fluctuation in Γγ. The third and fourth sub-subsections coverlong-range uncertainties in Γn and Γf - the example for the former might be hard for the evaluator to
defend for a real nuclide.

Example 32.1. File 2 for Sample of File 32
99.280+3
99.280+3
1. +0
1.0 +02.7 +2.1.0 +0
5.0 +0
1.5 +1
3.0 +1
4.0 +1
0.0 +00.0 +0April 2001

2.70 +2
1.00 +0
5.00 +1
0.6 +00.0 +0
1.5 +0
1.5 +00.5 +0
1.5 +0
1.5 +00.0 +00.0 +0

0
0
LRU=1
0
L=0
4.04 +00.07 +00.08 +0
7.04 +0
6.04 +0
0
0

0
NIS=1
LFW=0
NER=1
LRF=2
NRO=0
0
NLS=1
LRX=0 6*NRS=30
3.0 +0 0.04 +0
0.01 +0 0.04 +0
0.01 +0 0.04 +0
1.0 +0 0.04 +0
5.0 +0 0.04 +000000333332151 HEAD
0333332151 CONTNAPS=0333332151 CONT
0333332151 CONT
NRS=5333332151
1.0 +0333332151
0.02 +0333332151
0.03 +0333332151
6.0 +0333332151
1.0 +0333332151 LIST
0333332 0 SEND
03333 0 0 FEND

32.17

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Example 32.2. Sample File 32
99.280+ 3 2.70 + 2
0
0
NIS=1
0333332151 HEAD
99.280+ 3 1.00 + 0
0
LFW=0
NER=1
0333332151 CONT
1. + 0 5.00 + 1
LRU=1
LRF=2
NRO=0
NAPS=0333332151 CONT
1.0 + 0 0.6 + 0
0 LCOMP=1NLS=00333332151 CONT
2.7 + 2 0.0 + 0
00
NSRS=3NLRS=4333332151 CONT
NRB=1333332151
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0
MPAR=416*-1.0 + 0 1.5 + 0 4.04 + 0 3.0 + 0 0.04 + 0 1.0 + 0333332151
1.0 + 0 -1.5 + 0
0.0 + 0 -0.2 + 0 4.0 + 0 0.0 + 0333332151-1.0 + 0 0.0 + 0
0.0 + 0 0.8 + 0 0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0333332151 LIST
NRB=1333332151
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0
MPAR=416*
5.0 + 0 1.5 + 0 0.07 + 0 0.01 + 0 0.04 + 0 0.02 + 0333332151
0.5 - 6 0.0 + 0
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0 1.0 - 6 -1.0 -6333332151-0.2 - 6 0.0 + 0 -2.0 - 6 4.0 - 6 0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0333332151 LIST
NRB=2333332151
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0
MPAR=222*
3.0 + 1 1.5 + 0 7.04 + 0 1.0 + 0 0.04 + 0 6.0 + 0333332151
4.0 + 1 1.5 + 0 6.04 + 0 5.0 + 0 0.04 + 0 1.0 + 0333332151
2.0 - 3 0.0 + 0
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0 1.0 - 3 0.0 + 0333332151-0.5 - 4 2.0 - 3
0.0 + 0 2.0 - 3 0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0333332151 LIST
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0
IDP=3
LB=1
2*NE=4
NE=2333332151-2.0 + 0 1.0 - 2
5.0 + 1 0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0333332151 LIST
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0
IDP=3
LB=-1
2*NE=8
NE=4333332151-2.0 + 0 1.0 - 2
1.0 + 0 0.0 + 0 1.0 + 1 1.0 - 2333332151 LIST
5.0 + 1 0.0 + 0
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0333332151 LIST
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0
IDP=2
LB=5
NT=6
NE=3333332151
1.0 - 5 2.0 + 1
5.0 + 1 1.0 - 4 1.0 - 4 2.0 - 4333332151 LIST
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0
IDP=4
LB=1
2*NE=4
NE=2333332151
1.0 - 5 4.0 - 4
5.0 + 1 0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0 0.0 + 0333332151 LIST
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 00000333332 0 SEND
0.0 + 0 0.0 + 000003333 0 0 FENDREFERENCES
1. G. DeSaussure and Marable, Nucl. Sci. Eng. 101, 285 (1989)
2. B. L. Broadhead and H. L. Dodds, Trans. Am. Nucl. Soc. 39, 929 (1981)** NVS+6*NRB

32.18

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

33. FILE 33, COVARIANCES OF NEUTRON CROSS SECTIONS
33.1. General Description
File 33 contains the covariances of neutron cross section information appearing in File 3. It is
intended to provide a measure of the "accuracies and their correlations" of the data in File 3, anddoes not indicate the precision with which the data are entered in the File 3. Since ENDF/B
represents our knowledge of the microscopic data, the File 33 is used to give the covariances ofthese microscopic data. However, it should be stressed that for most practical applications to which
the files are intended, the data will be processed into multigroup variance-covariance matrices.
When generating File 33, it should be remembered that major aims are to represent adequately:i.
the variances of the group cross sections,ii. the correlations between the cross sections of the several adjacent groups, andiii. the long-range correlations among the cross sections for many groups.
Table 33.1 illustrates a typical relation of these three covariances with experimental
uncertainties.
These primary considerations and the inherent difficulties associated with quantifying
uncertainties should dictate the level of detail given in File 33.
In the resolved resonance region, some of the covariances of the cross sections may be given
through the covariances of the resonance parameters in File 32. In this case, the long-range
components of the covariance matrix of the cross sections, which span many resonances, may be
given in File 33, since often the most important components of the matrix are long-range.
Table 33.1
Analogies Between File 33 Covariances Within One Section
and Uncertainties in a Hypothetical Experiment 1
File 33
Short range
Medium range
Long range

Experimental
Statistical
Detector Efficiency
Multiple Scattering
In/Out Scattering
Geometry
Background
Normalization

Energy Dependence
Rapid variation
Slowly varying
More or less constant

Example: If there is 2% uncertainty due to statistics (short-range), 2% due to multiple scattering(medium-range) and, 1% due to geometry (long-range), cite a 3% uncertainty for a discretemeasurement (one group covering a small energy range); ≈2.5% over an energy range
encompassing several measurements (several groups which together cover a 1- to 2-MeV
range); and closer to 1% average over the entire energy range.

1

As with all analogies, this should be used with care. It is designed to show in a familiar way of thinking how thecovariances within a section are related.

April 2001

33.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

33.2. Formats
File 33 is divided into sections identified by the value of MT. Within a section, (MAT, 33,MT),several subsections may appear. Each section of File 33 starts with a HEAD record, ends with a
SEND record.
The following quantities are defined:
ZA,AWRMTL

NLStandard material charge and mass parameters.
Nonzero value of MTL is used as a flag to indicate that reaction MT is one
component of the evaluator-defined lumped reaction MTL, as discussed inparagraphs at the end of 33.2. and 33.3. below; in this case, no covarianceinformation subsections are given for reaction MT and NL=0.
Number of subsections within a section.

The structure of a section is:[MAT, 33, MT/[MAT, 33,

ZA, AWR, 0, MTL, 0, NL] HEAD
<subsection for n = 1>
<subsection for n = 2>
<subsection for n = NL>
0/ 0.0, 0.0, 0,
0, 0, 0] SEND

33.2.1. Subsections
Each subsection of the section (MAT,33,MT) is used to describe a single covariance matrix. It isthe covariance matrix of the energy-dependent cross sections given in section (MAT,3,MT) andenergy-dependent cross sections given in section (MAT1,MF1,MT1) of the ENDF tape. [If MF1=0,
then in the subsection (MAT1,10,MT1.LFS1)]. The values of MAT1, XMF1 = Float(MF1), MT1,and XLFS1 =Float(LFS1) if MF1=10, are given in the CONT record which begins each subsection.
Each File 33 subsection is therefore identified with a unique combination of values (MAT,MT) and(MAT1,MF1,MT1,[LFS1]), and we may use the notation (MAT,MT;MAT1,MF1,MT1,[LFS1]) to
specify a subsection.
Each subsection may contain several sub-subsections. Two different types of sub-subsections
may be used; they are referred to as "NC-type" and "NI-type" sub-sections. Each sub-subsection
describes an independent contribution, called a component, to the covariance matrix given in thesubsection. The total covariance matrix given by the subsection is made up of the sum of thecontributions from the individual sub-subsections.
The following quantities are defined:
Floating point equivalent of MF for 2nd energy-dependent cross section of pair
XMF1
for which correlation matrix is given. If MF1=MF, XMF1 = 0.0 or blank.
Floating point equivalent for final excited state of 2nd energy-dependent cross
XLFS1
section, For MF1=10, XLFS1 = 10; if MF1≠10, XLFS1 = 0.0 or blank.
MAT for 2nd energy-dependent cross section
MAT1
MT for 2nd energy-dependent cross section
MT1
Number of "NC-type" sub-subsections which follow the CONT record.
NC
Number of "NI-type" sub-subsections which follow the "NC-type"NI
sub-subsections.

33.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The structure of a subsection describing the covariance matrix of the cross sections given in the
ENDF/B tape (MAT,3,MT) and (MAT1,MF1,MT1,[LFS1]) is:[MAT,33,MT/ MF1, XLFS1, MAT1, MT1, NC, NI]CONT<sub-subsection for n =1><sub-subsection for n =2>--------------------------------------------------------<sub-subsection for n = NC><sub-subsection for n =1><sub-subsection for n =2>--------------------------------------------------------<sub-subsection for n = NI>

33.2.2. Sub-subsections
The "NC-type" and "NI-type" sub-subsections have different structures.
The "NC-type" sub-subsections may be used to indicate that some or all of the contributions tothe covariance matrix described in the subsection are to be found in a different subsection of the
ENDF/B tape. The major purpose of the "NC-type" sub-subsections is to eliminate from the
ENDF/B tape a large fraction of the mostly redundant information which would otherwise be needed
if only "NI-type" sub-subsections were used.
The "NI-type" sub-subsections are used to describe explicitly various components of thecovariance matrix defined by the subsection.
I. "NC-type" sub-subsections
The "NC-type subsections may be used to describe the covariance matrices in energy ranges
where the cross sections in (MAT,3,MT) can be "derive" in terms of other "evaluated" cross sectionsin the same energy range. In the context of File 33, and for purposes of discussing "NC-type"sub-subsections, we define an "evaluated" cross section, in a given energy range, as one for which
the covariance matrix in that energy range is given entirely in terms of "NI-type" sub-subsections.
The covariance matrices involving the "derived" cross sections may be obtained in part in terms ofthe covariance matrices of the "evaluated" cross sections given elsewhere in File 33.
The following quantity is defined:
Flag used to indicate the procedure used to obtain the covariance matrix
LTYa.) LTY=0, "Derived Redundant Cross Sections". In File 33, the evaluator may indicate bymeans of an LTY=0 sub-subsection that in a given energy range the cross sections in(MAT,3,MT) were obtained as a linear combination of other "evaluated" cross sections having
the same MAT number but different MT values. By the definition of "evaluated" thecovariances of these cross sections are given in File 33 wholly in terms of "NI-type"sub-subsections. [In general the linear relationship given in an LTY=0 sub-subsection applies
not only to the range of energy specified, but also over the whole range of the file.]

April 2001

33.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The following additional quantities are defined:
Energy range (eV) where the cross sections given in the section (MAT,3,MT)
were "derived" in terms of other "evaluated" cross sections given in thesections (MAT,3,MTI)s.
Number of pairs of values in the array {CI, XMTI}2.
NCI{CI, XMTI} Array of pairs consisting of coefficient CI and a value of XMTI, (MTI given as
a floating point number). The pair of numbers indicate that, in the energy
range E1 to E2, the cross sections in file (MAT,3,MT), were obtained interms of the cross sections in files (MAT,3,MTI), as follows:
E1, E2

NC 1

MAT
MAT
σ MT
( E ) = ∑ Ci × σ MT
(E) .
i =1

[At the minimum, the use of an LTY=0 sub-subsection implies that theevaluator wishes the corresponding covariance components to be derived as if
this expression were valid.]
In this expression we have written the CI's as Ci, and XMTI's as MTi. The
numbers CI are constant numbers over the whole range of energy E1 and E2,
usually ± 1.
The structure of an "NC-type" sub-subsection with LTY=0 is:[MAT,33,MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
[MAT,33,MT/ EL, E2,0, LTY,0,0] CONT(LTY=0)0,0, 2*NCI, NCI/ {CI, XMTI}] LIST

Note: In general, each subsection describes a single covariance matrix. However, when an"NC-type" sub-subsection with LTY=0 is used in a subsection, portions of NCI+1
covariance matrices are implied and these are not explicitly given as subsections in the File33 (see procedure 33.3.2-a-3). In such cases the subsection may be thought of as describing
in part several covariance matrices.

b.) LTY=1, 2 and 3, "Covariances of Cross Sections Derived via Ratio Measurements toStandard Cross Sections".
Many important cross sections of ENDF/B are based on measurements of cross sections
ratios. When an evaluated cross section is obtained from such measurements, covariances so
generated between the cross sections for the two reactions may become important. This is a
primary origin of ENDF-6 covariances linking cross sections for different materials. As seen
below, these covariances depend on the covariances of the standard cross section and on thecovariances of the evaluated cross section ratios to those standards. When the resulting
multigroup covariance files are utilized, the covariances of the ratios themselves play animportant role if the performance of some system depends on the relative magnitude of two crosssections.

2

The Notation {AI,BI} stands for A1, B1; A2, B2; ...; Ai, Bi in a list record.

33.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

In order efficiently to represent in File 33 the covariances that depend on "absolute" ratio
measurements to standards, evaluators may use "NC"-type sub-subsections with LTY=1, 2 and 3
in appropriate File 33 subsections. [In other cases of covariance components induced by ratio
measurements, it is necessary for the evaluator to represent the covariance components that arise
may be found in the literature.3]
First we identify the covariances induced if an evaluator obtains cross section σa(E) for(MAT,MT) within the interval (E1,E2) entirely from absolute ratio measurements to a crosssection standard σS(E) for (MATS,MTS). That is,
σa(E) = α(E) σS(E) , for (E1 ≤ E < E2)
The evaluated ratio itself is assumed to be independent of the standard cross section
evaluation because the relevant measurements are similarly independent. If so, thenRvar[σa(E)] = Rvar[α(E)] + Rvar[σS(E)], for (E1 ≤ E < E2)
Rvar[σa(E),σa(E′)] = Rvar[α(E),α(E′)] + Rvar[σS(E),σS(E′)],for (E1 ≤ E < E2) and (E1 ≤ E′ < E2)
Rvar[σa(E),σS(E′)] = Rvar[σS(E),σS(E′)], for (E1 ≤ E < E2) and (E1 ≤ E′ < E2)
Rvar and Rcov are the relative variance and relative covariance defined in Chapter 30, and thevalues generated by the specified ratio evaluation are zero outside the specified ranges. The
variance and covariance terms in (MAT,MT) depend on those for both the standard and the ratio,
and only for energies in ranges where the cross section is specified to depend on this standard.
However, the covariance matrix between the cross sections (MAT,MT) and (MATS,MTS) does
not depend on the covariances of the ratio determination but spans all values o the energy E′.
A cross section σa(E) may be obtained from measurements relative to (MATS,MTS) energy
region (E1 ≤ E < E2) and cross section σb(E′) from (MATS′,MT′) in energy region (E1′ ≤ E′ <E2′). If the cross sections for the two standards are correlated and the two sets of ratio
measurements are uncorrelated, then one obtains the additional results:
Rvar[σa(E),σb(E′)] = Rvar[σS(E),σS′(E′)], for (E1 ≤ E < E2) and (E1′ ≤ E < E2′), zero otherwise;
Rvar[σa(E),σS′(E′)] = Rvar[σS(E),σS′(E′)], for (E1 ≤ E < E2) and all E′ ,zero otherwise;
Rvar[σS(E),σb(E′)] = Rvar[σS(E),σS′(E′)], for (E1′ ≤ E′ < E2′) and all E, zero otherwise;
Note that the above expressions apply when σa(E) and σb(E′) refer to the same (MAT,MT) for
which cross sections are obtain by ratios to different standards in the two energy regions.
The most far-reaching relationship correlates σa(E) with all cross sections correlated to thestandard relative to which it was measured. That is,
Rcov[σa(E), σx(E')] = Rcov[σS(E), σx(E;)], for (E1 ≤ E < E2) and all σS(E′), zero otherwise.
The right side may nonzero for many (MATX, MTX), and discretion may be required to avoid
generation in cross section processing of negligible but nonzero multigroup covariances matrices.

3

W. P. Poenitz, "Data Interpretation, Objective Evaluation Procedures, and Mathematical Techniques for the
Evaluation of Energy-Dependent Ratio, Shape, and Cross Section Data", BNL-NCS-51363, Conf. on Nuclear Data
Evaluation and Techniques, p. 264, B. A. Magurno and S. Pearlstein, eds. (March, 1981)
R. W. Peele, "Uncertainties and Correlations in Evaluated Data Sets Induced by the Use of Standard Cross Sections",
NBS Special Publication 425, Conf. on Nuclear Cross Sections and Technology, p.173, R. A. Schrack and C. D.
Bowman, eds. (1975)

April 2001

33.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Let the cross sections in (MAT,3,MT) be strictly "derived" in the energy range E1 to E2 throughthe evaluation of ratio measurements to the "evaluated" cross sections given in(MATS,MFS,MTS,[LFSS]), referred to also as the "standard" cross sections for this "ratio
evaluation". Then, in the subsection (MAT,MT;MAT,3,MT,0) of the File 33 for the material MAT,
an LTY=1 sub-subsection must be used to describe, in part, the covariance matrix in the energy
range E1 to E2. (LFS=0 when MF=3). The part, or component, of the covariance matrix
represented by the LTY=1 sub-subsection is obtained by the user from the covariance matrix of the"standard" cross sections in the File (MFS+30) subsection (MATS,MTS,[LFSS];
MATS,MFS,MTS,[LFSS]) of the material MATS. The other part, or component, of the covariancematrix comes from the evaluation of the "ratios" and is given explicitly, over the range E1 to E2, bymeans of "NI-type" sub-subsections in the File 33 subsection (MAT,MT;MAT,3,MT,0).
This method of evaluation introduces a covariance of the "derived" cross sections in(MAT,3,MT) over the energy range E1 to E2 and the "standard" cross section in over its complete
energy range. Therefore, in the File 33 of the material MAT, in subsection contsining the covarianceof the "standard" cross section, there must be an LTY=2 sub-subsection to represent this covariancematrix. This LTY=2 sub-subsection [which contains the same information as the previously given
LTY=1 sub-subsection in the subsection (MAT,MT; MAT,3,MT,0)] refers to a different covariancematrix than the LTY=1 sub-subsection previously mentioned, but it can also be derived from thecovariance matrix of the "standard" cross sections in File MFS+30 subsection of the standard
material MATS.
Finally, as a consequence of the evaluation of the cross sections in (MAT,3,MT) in the energy
range E1 to E2, as a "ratio" to the "standard" cross sections, there must be in the subsection(MATS,MTS,[LFSS]; MAT,MT) of the File (MFS+30) of the "standard" material MATS and
LTY=3 sub-subsection in the File 33 subsection (MAT,MFT; MAT,3,MT,0)] which serves in thematerial MATS the same role as the LTY=2 sub-subsection in the material MAT since they describe
the same covariance matrix. In addition, the LTY value of 3 serves as a "flag" to the user, and theprocessing codes, to indicate existence of any additional covariances among cross sections using thesame "standard" cross sections, covariances not explicitly given in the covariance files. These
additional covariance matrices can be derived from the appropriate LTY=3 sub-subsections and thecovariance matrix of the "standard" cross sections in the File (MFS+30) subsection.
The following quantities are defined:
E1, E2NEI
WEI

Energy range where the cross sections given in the section (MAT,3,MT) wereobtained to a significant extent in terms of ratio measurements to "standard"cross sections.
Number of energies that demarcate (NEI-1) regions where this standard was
employed in measurements with WEI.
Fractional evaluated weight.

The structure of "NC-type" sub-subsections with LTY=1,2 and 3 is:[MAT,33,MT/0.0, 0.0,
0, LTY,0,0] CONT[MAT,33,MT/ E1, E2, MATS, MTS, 2*NEI+2, NEI/(XMFS,XLFSS), {EI,WEI}] LIST

33.6

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The number of items in the list record is 2*NEI+2. The file number that contains the standard crosssections is the integer equivalent of XMFS, except that XMFS=0.0 is entered when MFS=3. The
value of XLFSS is always zero unless MFS=10.
The use of the format LTY=1, 2 and 3 is allowed when the cross sections given in (MAT,3,MT)
are only partially determined from ratio measurements to the "standard" cross section. In such cases
the list {EI,WEI} indicates the fractional weight of the ratio measurements to this standard in theevaluation of the cross sections in (MAT,3,MT). That fractional weight is WEi in the interval Ei ≤ E< Ei+1. The first value of Ei in the sub-subsection shall equal the E1 given, and ENEI =E2.
Note A: LTY=1, 2 and 3 sub-subsections are all used as flags in subsections to represent relative
covariance matrix components obtained from the relative covariance matrix of the "standard" crosssections that is given in a File 33, 31, or 40. There is, however, as seen in the formulae above, amajor difference between covariance matrices obtained with LTY=1 sub-subsections and thoseobtained from LTY=2 and 3 sub-subsections. This difference results from the definition of theiruse given above. LTY=2 and 3 sub-subsections are always used in subsections where one of thecross sections involved is the "standard" cross section used. The LTY=2 subsection appears in theFile 33 [in the present case] of the material whose cross sections are "derived," whereas the
LTY=3 sub-subsection appears in the File (MFS+30) of the material whose cross sections are the"standard",; LTY=1 sub-subsections always appear in subsections describing covariance matrices
of cross sections "derived" from a "standard" and no LTY=2 or 3 sub-subsections may appear insuch subsections. An LTY=1 sub-subsection represents a covariance matrix which in principle isa "square matrix" covering the ranges E1 to E2. An LTY=2 or 3 sub-section describes in principle
a "rectangular matrix": the covariance matrix of the "derived" cross sections over the energy
range E1 or E2 and of the "standard" cross sections over their complete energy range.
In general, if cross sections in (MAT,3,MT,0) are "derived," over an energy range E1 to E2,
by "ratios" to "standard" cross sections, there will be three "NC-type" sub-subsections with
LTY=1, 2 and 3 generated in the covariance files. The LTY=1 sub-subsection is given in thesubsection (MAT,MT; MAT,3,MT,0); the LTY=2 sub-subsection is given in the subsection(MAT,MT; MATS,MFS,MTS,[LFSS]). Both of these subsections are given in the File 33 of thematerial MAT of the "derived" cross sections (MAT,3,MT). The LTY=3 sub-subsection is givenin the subsection (MATS,MFS,MTS,[LFSS]; MAT,3,MT,0) which is in the File (MFS+30) of thematerial MATS of the "standard" cross sections.
There are, however, some instances, such as the one taken in the Example 33.1, where othercross sections, such as those in (MAT,3,MTI), are "indirectly derived" from the cross sections in(MATS,3,MT) through evaluation of ratios of the cross sections in (MAT,3,MTI) to those in(MAT,3,MT). In such cases, an LTY=1 sub-subsection will also be used in the subsections(MAT,MT1,MAT,MT1) and (MAT,MT; MAT,MT1) and LTY=2 sub-subsection will also be usedin the subsection (MAT,MT1; MATS,MFS,MTS,[LFSS]). All three of these subsections are inFile 33 of the material MAT. Corresponding to the LTY=2 sub-subsection in the subsection(MAT,MT1; MATS,MFS,MTS,[LFSS]) of the File 33 of the material MAT, there will also be an
LTY=3 sub-subsection in the subsection (MATS,MTS,[LFSS]; MAT,MT1) of the File (MFS+30)
of the material MATS.

April 2001

33.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Note B: For purposes of discussing the covariance matrices of cross sections derived throughevaluation of ratio measurements, the label "standard" cross sections is used for the cross sections
relative to which the ratio measurements were made. The cross sections for which the label"standard" was used may be any "evaluated" cross sections of ENDF/B and are not restricted tothe special set of "standard cross sections" maintained in the ENDF/B library. The "standard crosssections of ENDF/B" are the preferred ones to use for ratio measurements in order to minimize themagnitude of the covariance matrix elements obtained from LTY=1, 2 and 3 sub-subsections.
However, they may not always be the ones that were used in the data available to evaluators to
perform evaluations.

II. "NI-type" Sub-subsections
The "NI-type" sub-subsections are used to describe explicitly the various components of thecovariance matrix given in the subsection. In each "NI-type" sub-subsection there is a flag, the LB
flag. The numerical value of LB indicates whether the components are "relative" or "absolute," thekinds of correlations as a function of energy represented by the components in the sub-subsection,and the structure of the sub-subsection.
The following quantity is defined:
LB

Flag whose numerical value determines the meanings of the numbers givenin the arrays {Ek, Fk}{El, Fl}.

a. Flag LB=0-4
The following additional quantities are defined:
NP
NT
LT

{Ek,Fk}{El,Fl}

Total number of pairs of numbers in the arrays {Ek, Fk}{El,Fl}.
Total number of numbers in the LIST record. NT=2*NP
Number of pairs of numbers in the second array, {El,Fl}.LT=0,
when the table contains is a single array {Ek,Fk}. LT≠0,
when the table contains two arrays; the first array, {Ek,Fk}, has (NP-LT) pairsof numbers in it.
two arrays of pairs of numbers; each array is referred to as an "E table," so the"Ek table" and the "El table" are defined.
In each E table the first member of a pair is an energy, En; the second memberof the pair, Fn, is a number associated with the energy interval between the two
entries En and En+1

For a values of the LB flag from 0 through 4, "NI-type" sub-subsections have the following
structure:[MAT,33,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, LT, LB, NT, NP/ {Ek, Fk}{El, Fl}] LISTThe En table, and the El table, when present, must cover the complete energy range of the File 3
for the same (MAT,MT). The first energy entry in an E table must therefore be 10-5 eV, or thereaction threshold, and the last one 20×106 eV unless a large upper-energy limit has been defined.
Some of the Fk's, or Fl's, may be zero, and the last value of F in an E table must be zero.

33.8

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

We now define the meaning of the F values entered in the E tables for different values of LB.
[Note that the units of F vary]. Let Xi refer to the cross section in (MAT,3,MT) at energy Ei and Yj
refer to the cross section in (MAT1,3,MT1) at energy Ej. The contribution of the sub-subsection to
the covariance matrix COV(Xi,Yj), having the units of "barns squared," is defined as follows for thedifferent values of LB:
LB=0 Absolute components correlated only within each Ek interval

Cov ( X i , Yi ) = ∑ Pji;;kk Fxy ;kk

LB=1 Fractional components correlated only within each Ek interval
Cov ( X i , Yi ) = ∑ Pji;;kk Fxy ;k X iY jk

LB=2 Fractional components correlated over all Ek intervals
Cov ( X i , Yi ) = ∑ Pji;;kk Fxy ;k Fxy ;k ′ X iY j
k ,k ′

LB=3 Fractional components correlated over Ek and El intervals
Cov ( X i , Yi ) = ∑ Pji;;lk Fx ;k Fy ;l X iY j
k ,l

LB=4 Fractional components correlated over all El intervals within each Ek interval
Cov ( X i , Yi ) = ∑ Pji;;kk,,ll′ Fk Fxy ,l Fxy ,l ′ X iY j
k ,l ,l ′For LB=0, 1 and 2 we have LT=0, i.e., only one Ek table. For LB=3 and LB=4 we have LT≠0,i.e., two E tables, the Ek and the El tables.
The dimensionless operators P in the above definitions are defined in terms of the operator S as
follows:i;k,l,...
Pj;m,n,...
≡ Sik Sil ... Sjm Sjn ... ,where

Sik ≡ 1, when Ek ≤ Ei ≤ Ek+1 and
Sik ≡ 0, when the energy Ei is outside the range of Ek to Ek+1 of an Ek table.

b.) Flag LB=5. It is often possible during the evaluation process to generate the relative covariancematrix of some cross sections averaged over some energy intervals. Such relative covariancematrices may be suitable for use in File 33. Although the use of LB=3 sub-subsections allows therepresentation of such matrices one row (or one column) at a time, this method of representation isvery inefficient. One sub-subsection must be used for each row (or column) and the same energy
mesh is repeated in the Ek table (or El table) of every sub-subsection. Often, in addition, such
relative covariance matrices are symmetric about their diagonal and there is no way to avoid
repeating almost half of the entries with LB=3 sub-subsections. In order to allow such relative
covariance matrices to be entered into the files efficiently, LB=5 sub-subsections may be used. The
following definition applies for LB=5 sub-subsections:

Cov ( X i , Yi ) = ∑ Pji;;kk Fxy ;k ,k X iY j
k ,kApril 2001

33.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

A single list of energies {Ek} is required to specify the energy intervals labeled by the indices k
and k′. The numbers Fxy;k,k represent fractional components correlated over the energy intervals withlower edges Ek and Ek′.
Since there is no need for Ek tables with pairs of numbers (Ek,Fk) like those found in
sub-subsections with LB<5, a new structure is required for LB=5 sub-subsections.
The following quantities are defined:
NT
NE
LS

Total number of entries in the two arrays {Ek} and {Fk,k′}.
Number of entries in the array {Ek} defining (NE-1) energy intervals.
Flag indicating whether the Fk,k′, matrix is symmetric or not.

The structure of an LB=5 sub-subsection is:[MAT,33,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, LS, LB=5, NT, NE/ {Ek}{Fk,k′}] LIST.

LS=0 Asymmetric matrix
The matrix elements Fk,k′, are ordered by rows in the array {Fk,k′}:{Fk,k′} ≡ F1,1 , F1,2 , ..., F1,NE-1 ; F2,1 , ..., F2,NE-1 ; FNE-1,1 , ..., FNE-1,NE-1
There are (NE-1)2 numbers in the array {Fk,k′} andNT = NE + (NE-1)2 = NE(NE-1) + 1
LS=1 Symmetric matrix
The matrix elements Fk,k′ are ordered by rows starting from the diagonal term in the array {Fk,k′}:{Fk,k′} ≡ F1,1, F1,2, ..., F1,NE-1; F2,2, ..., F2,NE-1; FNE-1,NE-1
There are [NE*(NE-1)]/2 numbers in the array {Fk,k′} andNT = NE + [NE (NE-1)]/2 = [NE (NE+1)]/2
c.) Flag LB=6. A covariance matrix interrelating the cross sections for two different reaction types
or materials generally has different energy grids for its rows and columns. The LB=6 format
described below allows efficient representation of a rectangular (not square) matrix in one LIST
record with no repetition of energy grids.
The following definition applies for LB=6 sub-subsections:

Cov ( X i , Yi ) = ∑ Pji;;lk Fxy ;k ,l X iY j
k ,l

where

Xi as before refers to the cross sections at Ei in (MAT,3,MT) and
Yj refers to the cross section at Ej in (MAT1,MF1,MT1,[LFS1]).

The dimensionless operator P is as defined for other LB's. A single "stacked" list of energies{Ekl} is required to specify the energy intervals with lower boundaries labeled by the indices k and l.
That is, a single array contains the energies for the rows (Ek) and then the columns (El) of the matrix
with the energies corresponding to the rows given first: (ER1, ER2, ..., ERNER, EC1, EC2, ..., ECNEC).
The numbers Fxy;k,l represent fractional components correlated over the energy intervals with lower
boundaries Ek and El.

33.10

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The following quantities are defined:
NT
NER
NEC

Total number of entries in the two arrays {Ekl}{Fk,l}. See below.
Number of energies corresponding to the rows of the matrix and defining(NER-1) energy intervals.
Number of energies corresponding to the columns of the matrix and defining(NEC-1) energy intervals. NEC may be inferred from NT and NER.

The structure of an LB=6 sub-subsection is:(LB=6)[MAT,33,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, 0, LB, NT, NER/ {Ekl}{Fk,l}] LIST

The matrix elements Fk,l are ordered by rows in the array {Fk,l}:{Fk,l} = F1,1, F1,2, ..., F1,NEC-1; F2,1, ..., F2,NEC-1; ...; FNER-1,1, FNER-1,2, ..., FNER-1,NER-1
There are (NER-1)(NEC-1) numbers in the array {Fk,l}. Therefore, the total number of entries inthe two arrays {Ekl} and {Fk,l} is:
NT = NER + NEC + (NER-1)(NEC-1) = 1 + NER*NEC.
d.) Flag LB=8, Short Range Variance Representation. A short range self-scaling variancecomponent should be specified in each File 33 subsection of the type (MAT,MT; 0,MT) by use of an
LB=8 sub-subsection, unless the cross section is known to be free from unresolved underlying
structure. [See section 33.3.3.].
The following quantities are defined:
NP
NT{Ek,Fk}Total number of pairs of numbers in the arrays {Ek, Fk}{El,Fl}.
Total number of numbers in the LIST record. NT=2*NP
Array of pairs of numbers; the first member of a pair is an energy, En; thesecond member of the pair, Fn, is a number associated with the energy interval
between the two entries En and En+1.

The format of an LB=8 sub-section is (just as for LB=0):[MAT,33,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, LT, LB, NT, NP/ {Ek,Fk}] LIST

(LT=0,LB=8)

Only one Ek table is required. The Fk values for LB=8 have the dimension of squared crosssections. The magnitude of the resulting variance component for a processed average cross section
depends strongly on the size of the energy group as well as on the values of F in the sub-subsection.
For the simplest case of a multigroup covariance matrix processed on the energy grid of thissub-subsection with a constant weighting function, the variance elements VARkk for the LB=8
component are just Fk and the off diagonal elements are zero.
In general, each Fk characterizes an uncorrelated contribution to the absolute variance of theindicated cross section averaged over any energy interval (sub-group) ∆Ej that includes a portion of
the energy interval ∆Ek. The variance contribution VARjj from an LB=8 sub-subsection to theprocessed group variance for the energy group (Ej,Ej+1) is inversely proportional to its width ∆Ejwhen (Ej,Ej+1) lies within (Ek,Ek+1) and is obtained from the relation
VARjj = Fk ∆Ek/∆Ej , where Ek ≤ Ej ≤ Ej+1 ≤ Ek+1

April 2001

33.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Note that the VARjj are variances in average cross sections. This rule suffices for arbitrary groupboundaries if subgroup boundaries are chosen to include all the Ek. No contributions to off-diagonal
multigroup covariance matrix elements are generated by LB=8 sub-subsections.
33.2.3. Lumped Reaction Covariances
A lumped reaction is an evaluator-defined "redundant" cross section, defined in File 33 for the
purpose of specifying the uncertainty in the sum of a set of cross sections, such as those for a set ofneighboring discrete inelastic levels. The uncertainty in a lumped-reaction cross section, as well as
its correlations with other reactions, are given in the usual way using the formats described above.
On the other hand, the uncertainties and correlations of the individual parts
or components of a lumped reaction are not given.
The File-33 section for one component of a lumped reaction consists of a single HEAD recordthat contains, in the second integer field, the section number MTL of the lumped reaction to which
the component contributes. (See definition of the HEAD record at the beginning of this Section.)[MAT, 33, MT/ ZA,

AWR,

0,

MTL,

0,

NL] HEAD(NL=0)The value of MTL must lie in the range 851-870, which has been reserved specifically forcovariance data for lumped reactions. These MT-numbers may not be used in File 3, 4 or 5, so the
net cross section and net scattering matrix for a lumped reaction must be constructed at theprocessing stage by summing over the reaction components.
A list of the components of a given lumped reaction is given only indirectly, namely, on theabove-mentioned HEAD records. These special HEAD records, with MTL≠0 and NL=0, form akind of index that can be scanned easily by the processing program in order to control the summing
operation.
Except for the need to sum the cross-section components during uncertainty processing, lumped
reactions are "normal" reactions, in that all covariance formats can be used to describe theiruncertainties in MF=33, MT=MTL. For example, one expects in general that the covariances of a
lumped reaction with other reactions, including other lumped reactions, will be given by theevaluator. Also, a lumped reaction may be represented, using an "NC-type" sub-section with
LTY=0, as being "derived" from other reactions, including other lumped reactions. However, since
uncertainties are not provided for the separate component reactions, a lumped reaction may not be
represented as being "derived" from its components.
33.3. Procedures
Although it is not necessary to have a section in File 33 for every section in File 3, the mostimportant values of MT for the applications to which the evaluation was intended should have asection in File 33.
33.3.1. Ordering of Sections, Subsections and Sub-subsectionsa.) Sections. The sections in File 33 are ordered by increasing value of MT.
b.) Subsections. Within a section, (MAT,33,MT), the subsections are ordered in a rigid manner.
A subsection of File 33 is uniquely identified by the set of numbers:(MAT,MT;MAT1,MF1,MT1,[LFS1]); the first pair of numbers indicated the section and the second
set of numbers appears in the appropriate fields, XMF1, XLFS1, MAT1 and MT1, of the CONT
record which begins every subsection. [When MT≠10, XLFS1=0.0.]

33.12

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

1. The subsections within a section are ordered by increasing values of MAT1. In order to have thecovariance matrices of the cross sections for which MAT1=MAT appear first in a section the value
MAT1=0 shall be used to mean MAT1=MAT in the CONT record which begins the subsection.
2. When there are several subsections with the same value of MAT1 in a section, these subsections
shall be ordered by increasing values of XMF1. When MF1=MF-30, the XMF1 field shall beentered as blank or zero. Therefore, within a given section and for a given MAT1, the subsectionsfor MF1=MF-30 will always appear before those for other MF1 values.
3. When there are several subsections with the same value of MAT1 and MF1 in a section, these
subsections shall be ordered by increasing values of MT1 given in CONT record which begins thesubsections.
4. When MAT1=0, when according to procedure 33.3.1-b-2 means that MAT1=MAT, and
XMF1=0.0 meaning MF1=MF-30, only subsections for which MT1>MT shall be given.
5. When there are several subsections with the same values of MAT1, MF1=10, and MT1 in asection, these subsections shall be ordered by increasing values of LFS1.
c.) Sub-subsections. When both "NC-type" and "NI-type" sub-subsections are present in a
subsection, the format requires that the "NC-type" sub-subsections be given first.
1. "NC-type" sub-sections. Several "NC-type" sub-subsections may be given in a subsection.
When more than one is given, these must be ordered according to the value of the energy range
lower endpoint E1 given in the LIST record. We note that by definition, if several LTY=0"NC-type" sub-subsections are given in a subsection, the energy ranges E1 to E2 of the thesedifferent sub-subsections cannot overlap with each other or with any LTY=1 sub-subsection.
However, in ENDF-6 formats it is permitted to have overlapping (E1,E2) ranges for LTY≥1,
provided that the sum of the WEI values in one subsection is no greater than unity at any energy.
The value of the LTY flag of "NC-type" sub-subsections does not affect the ordering of the
sub-subsections within a subsection.
2. "NI-type" sub-subsections. There is no special ordering requirement of "NI-type"sub-subsections within a subsection. However, it often happens that the full energy range of the file
is covered by different sub-subsections, the F-values being set to zero in the E-tables outside thedifferent ranges. The readability of the files is enhanced if these different sub-subsections aregrouped together by the energy range effectively covered in the sub-subsections.
33.3.2. CompletenessAs previously stated, there is presently no minimum requirement on the number of sections andsubsections in File 33. Lack of a File 33 for a reaction does not imply zero uncertainty. However,the presence of some subsections in a File 33, as well as the presence of some sub-subsections in a
subsection, implies the presence of other subsections either in the same File 33 or the File 33 (or 31
or 40) of another material. In what follows we shall identify the File 33 subsections by their value ofthe sextet:[MAT,MT; MAT1,MF1,MT1,(LFS1)]

April 2001

33.13

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Proceduresa.) Subsections for which MAT1=0. By subsections for which MAT1=0, we mean the subsectionsof the class (MAT,MT; 0,MF1,MT1,[LFS1]), which according to procedure 33.3.1-b-1 implies that
MAT1=MAT.
1. If there is a File 33 subsection (MAT,MT; 0,MF1,MT1,[LFS1] with MT1≠MT, there must bewithin the same material the two subsections: (MAT,MT; 0,3,MT,0) in File 33 and (MAT,MT1;
0,MF1,MT1,[LMF1]) in file MF1+30. Note that the converse is not necessarily true since the twocross sections (MAT,3,MT) and (MAT,MF1,MT1,[LMF1]) may have zero covariances between
them, which are not required to be explicitly stated in the files. (However, see the discussion inparagraph 33.3.2.b below concerning the desirability of explicitly representing some zerocovariances.) This procedure and procedure 33.3.1-b-4 guarantee that every section of File 33,(MAT,33,MT), starts with the subsection (MAT,MT; 0,3,MT,0).
2. In a subsection (MAT,MT; 0,3,MT,0), if there is an "NC-type" sub-subsection with LTY=0, it
contains a list of MTI given in the "NC-type" sub-subsection.
3. "NC-type" sub-subsections with LTY=0 must be given only in subsections of the type
(MAT,MT; 0,3,MT,0), i.e. with MT1=MT. "NC-type" sub-subsections with LTY=0, for derived
redundant cross sections, imply many covariance matrices of the "derived" cross sections and of the"evaluated" cross sections. It is a task of the processing code to generate these covariance matrices
from the information given in the File 33.
4. In a subsection (MAT,MT; 0,3,MT,0) if there is an "NC-type" sub-subsection with LTY=1, thissub-subsection contains values of (MATS,MFS,MTS,[LFSS]). In the same File 33, there must be a
sub-subsection (MAT,MT; MATS,MFS,MTS,[LFSS]). There must be another material MATS witha File (MFS+30) containing the subsection (MATS, MTS,[LFSS]; 0,MFS,MTS,[LFSS]). Note that
according to procedure 33.3.3.a, given below, MATS must be different from MAT in an "NC-type"sub-subsection with LTY=1.
5. In a subsection (MAT,MT; 0,3,MT,0), if there is an "NC-type" sub-subsection with LTY=1
which covers the energy range E1 to E2, in the same subsection there must be at least one "NI-type"subsections represent the relative covariance matrix of the evaluated ratio measurements. In theenergy range where WEI is the relative weight given to the evaluated ratio to the indicated standard
cross section, the processing code takes into account the value of WEI when it applies the standards
covariances. The evaluator is responsible for multiplying the covariances of the evaluated ratios by
WEI2 before entry into the NI-type sub-subsections. Note that, where the weight is not unity in agiven energy region, the NI-type sub-subsections that represent the covariance data for the ratios are
mixed together without identification in File 33.
b.) Subsections for MAT1=0. If there is a File 33 subsection (MAT,MT; MAT1,MF1,MT1,[LFS1])
with MAT1≠0, similar to procedure 33.3.2-a-1, there must also be a subsection (MAT,MT;
0,3,MT,0) in the same File 33. There must also be two sub-subsections, (MAT1,MT1,[LFS1];
0,MF1,MT1,[LFS1]) and (MAT1,MT1,[LFS1]; MAT,3,MT,0) in the File (MF1+30) for material
MAT1.

33.14

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

33.3.3. Other Proceduresa.) "NC-type" sub-subsections with LTY=1 shall only be used with MATS=MAT. The use of
LTY=1 sub-subsections is reserved for covariance matrix components arising out of ratio
measurements of cross sections of different nuclides, i.e., different values of MAT.
b.) If a single "NC-type" sub-subsection with LTY=0 is used in a subsection and there are no"NI-type" sub-subsections, the value of E1 must be 10-5 eV, or the reaction threshold, and the valueof E2 must be the highest energy for which the corresponding cross section is given, at least 2×107
eV.
c.) As a consequence of the definition of "NC-type" sub-subsections with LTY=0, if there are any"NI-type" sub-subsections in the same subsection, the F-values in their E-tables must be zero within
the range E1 to E2 of these "NC-type" LTY=0 sub-subsections.
d.) "NI-type" sub-subsections with LB=0 shall in general be avoided and forbidden in the case ofcross sections relative to which ratio measurements have been evaluated. [Therefore, theacknowledged "standard cross sections" shall not have LB=0, "NI-type" sub-subsections.] The useof LB=0 "NI-type" sub-subsections should be reserved for the description of covariance matrices ofcross sections which fluctuate rapidly and for which details of the uncertainties in the deep valleys"of the cross sections are important.
e.) The formats of File 33 allow for the possibility of great details to be entered in the files if
needed. The number of "NI-type" sub-subsections and the number of energy entries in their Ek andEl tables will be a function of the details of the covariance matrices available and the need torepresent them in such detail. However, good judgement should be used to minimize as much as
possible the number of different entries in the Ek and El tables. An important quantity to note is theunion of all of the E values of the Ek and El tables of a File 33. A reasonable upper limit of the orderof a few hundred different E values for the union of all energy entries in all of the Ek and El tables ina File 33 should be considered.
Note that the evaluator's covariance values will be most readily recognized in a processed
multigroup covariance matrix when the energies in the Ek and El tables can be chosen from the set ofstandard multigroup energy boundaries. If in the File 33 the uncertainties in a cross section are
represented using LB=0 or 1 in regions of width ∆Ei, and if the file is processed to give a multigroupcovariance library with group width in that energy region ∆Ea such that ∆Ei > ∆Ea, the correlation
patterns in ENDF-6 are defined so that the processed group uncertainties are lowest and theintergroup correlations greatest when an energy group of the processed covariance matrix is evenly
split by a covariance file E value. This behavior has alarmed some users. However, because of thecorrelation pattern set up, no big anomalies arise in the uncertainty projected for an integral quantitythat is sensitive to a broad spectrum of incident particle energies. The magnitude of the effect can be
reduced by using narrower intervals in LB=0, 1 files, or more favorably by using overlapping files
with staggered energy edges.
f.) The ground rules above (see 33.2, under LT=1 sub-subsections) state that if cross sections are
obtained by evaluating ratio measurements to a "standard cross section," the latter cross section
should be "evaluated" in the sense that there are no NC-type sub-subsections with LTY=0 or 1
describing the covariance data for that cross section. This leads to procedural requirements.

April 2001

33.15

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

1. Evaluators of established standard cross sections should endeavor to avoid the use of any LTY=0or LTY=1 sub-subsections. If the physics of an evaluation problem should require that this rulebe broken, the CSEWG should be informed and the text documentation should call attention to
the situation.
2. If an evaluated cross section is best obtained as the ratio to a cross section in another material
that is not an established standard, than an evaluator needs to contact the evaluator of thatmaterial to be reassured that NC-type sub-subsections will not appear in the files for thereference cross section for the energy region of concern.
Such communication is required in any case to encourage the evaluation of the covariance data forthat reference cross section, without use of LB=0 sub-subsections, and to assure that the required
LTY=3 sub-subsection will be entered. To aid the review process, a written form of thiscommunication should be sent to the CSEWG.
g.) The ENDF-6 formats allow the evaluator to recognize the partial dependence of a cross section
on a standard cross section. This means that it is possible to recognize in the covariance files anevaluation that utilizes some absolute data as well as ratio data to one or more standard crosssections. Use of this capability is expected to be necessary to properly represent some covarianceinformation. Since processing complexity is thereby induced, evaluators are urged to use thiscapability with caution, and in no case to represent the dependence of a cross section in a given
energy region on ratio measurements to more than two standard cross sections.
h.) The discussion of the covariance terms that arise from evaluated cross section ratio
measurements was based entirely on so-called absolute ratio measurements. Evaluators should notethat various types of cross section "shape" measurements induce additional covariance terms that canbe derived for specific situations. Within ENDF-6 formats the evaluator must include them in
NI-type sub-subsections in the covariance files of the derived cross section.
i.) When cross section A is correlated to B, and cross section C is also correlated to B even though
A is uncorrelated to C, evaluators should include the file segments that express this zero correlation
to signify to reviewers and users that an unusual case is recognized. This is the exception to thegeneral rule that zero covariances need not be openly expressed in the covariance files.
j.) The lumping of reactions for uncertainty purposes will be useful mainly in connection withdiscrete-level inelastic scattering cross sections. However, other reactions, such as (n,n′p), (n,n′),and (n,n′ continuum), may also be treated in this way.
k.) In order not to lose useful uncertainty information, reactions lumped together should have
similar characteristics. Ordinarily, the level energies of discrete inelastic levels lumped together
should not span a range greater than 30-40%, and the angular distributions should be similar.
l.) The components of a lumped reaction need not have adjacent MT-numbers.
m.) Lumped-reaction MT-numbers must be assigned sequentially, beginning at 851. The sequence isdetermined by ordering the lumped reactions according to the lowest MT-number included among
their respective components. Thus, the first value of MTL encountered on any component-reaction
HEAD record will be 851. The next new value of MTL encountered will be 852, and so on.

33.16

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Proceduresn.) Lumped reactions with only a single component are permitted. This is recommended practicewhen, for example, an important discrete inelastic level is treated individually, while all of its
neighbors are lumped. Covariances for both the individual level and the nearby lumped levels canthen be placed together in sections 851-870.
o.) An LB=8 sub-subsection should be included in each (MAT, MT; 0, MT) subsection unless the
cross section is known to be free from unresolved underlying structure4. The Doppler effect inreactor applications smooths cross sections on an energy scale too narrow to be of concern for LB=8
covariance evaluation. This sub-subsection must cover the entire energy range of the section(threshold to at least 20 MeV). Use of zero values for Fk in any part of this energy range should be
avoided because such usage could induce the problem of nonphysical full correlation between
neighboring fine-group cross sections, the problem that the LB=8 format was designed to solve. The
LB=8 format may not be used for cross-reaction covariances.
Note that the law for processing LB=8 sub-subsections directly references the variance of an
average cross section rather than the variance of a pointwise cross section. If a fine-grid covariancematrix is developed and then collapsed to the evaluator's Ek grid with constant weighting, theresulting variance components are just the Fk. (A complete multigroup covariance matrix cannot ingeneral be correctly "reprocessed" to a finer energy mesh; one must process the ENDF/B-VI
covariance files).
The values of Fk may be chosen by the evaluator to account for statistical fluctuations in
fine-group average cross sections that are induced by the width and spacing distributions of theunderlying resonances. Values may also be chosen to represent the uncertainty inherent inestimating the average cross sections for small energy intervals where little or no experimental data
exist and smoothness is not certain.
The LB=8 sub-subsections help prevent mathematical difficulties when covariance matrices are
generated on an energy grid finer than that used by the evaluator, but Fk values must be chosencarefully to avoid accidental significant dilution of the evaluated covariance patterns represented in
the other Sub-sections. If no physical basis is apparent for choosing the Fk values, they may be
given values about 1% as large on the evaluator's grid as the combined variance from the othersub-subsections. Such values would be small enough not to degrade the remainder of the covarianceevaluation and large enough to assure that the multigroup covariance matrix will be positive definite
for any energy grid if the matrix on the evaluator's energy grid is positive definite.
Since LB=8 specifies absolute covariances, it should not be employed near reaction thresholds.
In particular, for threshold reactions having an effective threshold above 0.1 MeV, LB=8 should not
be employed for incident energies less than 1 MeV above the effective threshold.

4

For example, if covariance data for neutron scattering from hydrogen were to be represented in File 33, one would
expect no component that could be properly represented by an LB=8 sub-section. Covariance data in such cases may
best be represented in File 30.

April 2001

33.17

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

33.4. Examples
We illustrate here the use of File 33 by means of two concrete examples.
a. Use of LTY=1 and LTY=2 "NC-type" subsections
Let us consider the hypothetical evaluation of 239Pu, MAT=1264. Assume that the decision ismade that in File 33 only the fission cross sections and the capture cross sections shall havecovariances represented. The following methods were used in performing the hypotheticalevaluation:

1. Fission cross sections, MT=18
Let Xi stand for the fission cross section of 239Pu at the energy Ei.
a. From 10-5 eV to an energy ES, Xi was evaluated in terms of "direct" or "absolute"measurements, Ai. By this we mean that in this energy range, Xi and its uncertainties are
independent of any other cross sections. In this energy range Xi ≡ Ai.
b. From ES to 20 MeV, Xi was evaluated by means of ratio measurements to Yi , the fission
cross section of 235U, to which we assign the MAT number 1261. In this energy range Xi =RiYi, where Ri is the evaluated ratio at energy Ei.
2. Capture cross sections, MT=102
Let Zi stand for the capture cross section of 239Pu at the energy Ei. In this evaluation, Zi was
obtained by the evaluation of ai, the ratio of capture to fission cross sections, over the complete
range of the file. Therefore we have Zi = aiXi.
In this evaluation then, only 3 quantities were evaluated: Ai from 10-5 eV to ES, Ri from Es to 20
MeV, and ai from 10-5 eV to 20 MeV. The evaluation of these quantities resulted in the evaluationof three covariance matrices: COV(Ai,Aj), COV(Ri,Rj) and COV(ai,aj). Let us now assume that inaddition it has been determined that these three different quantities are uncorrelated, i.e., covariancessuch as COV(Ai,aj) can be neglected.
Let us denote relative covariance matrices such as COV(AiAj)/(AiAj) as <dAi,dAj>, and similarly
for the other quantities.
From 10-5 to ES, since Xi = Ai and Zi = aiXi, we have:<dXi⋅dXj> = <dAi⋅dAj><dXi⋅dZj> = <dAj⋅dAj><dZi⋅dZj> = <dai⋅daj> + <dAi⋅dAj>
From ES to 20 MeV, since Xi = RiYi and Zi = aiXi, we have<dXi⋅dXj> = <dRi⋅dRj> + <dYi⋅dYj><dXi⋅dZj> = <dRi⋅dRj> + <dYi⋅dYj><dXi⋅dYj> = <dYi⋅dYj><dZi⋅dZj> = <dai⋅daj> + <dRi⋅dRj> + <dYi⋅dYj><dZi⋅dYj> = <dYi⋅dYj>
We note that in the above we have expressed all of the covariance matrices of the cross sectionsin terms of the covariance matrices of the evaluated quantities and the covariance matrix of the 235U
fission.

33.18

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

For purposes of illustrating the use of the formats we need not know the details of how thecovariance matrices <dAi⋅dAj>, <dRi⋅dRj> and <dai⋅daj> are represented. They must be represented
by one or more "NI-type" sub-subsections having an Ek table, or could be so represented. For our
purposes, we symbolically represent each one of them in terms of a single "NI-type" sub-subsection
with a single Ek table:<dAj⋅dAj>→ {EkA,FkA}<dRj⋅dRj>→ {ERkR,FRkR}<daj⋅daj> → {EKa,Fka}
Whether one or more "NI-type" sub-subsection is used, each one of the E tables used in the
sub-subsections can be written as:{EkA,FkA} = {1.0E-5, F1A ; ...; EkA, FkA ; ...; ES, 0.0; 2.0E+7, 0.0},{EkR,FkR} = {1.0E-5, 0.0; ES, FkR ; ...; EkR, FkR ;...; 2.0E+7, 0.0},{Eka,Fka} = {1.0E-5, F1a ; Fka ; ...; Eka, Fka ;...; 2.0E+7, 0.0},
the E and F values explicitly shown must have the values indicated above for this example.
In the listing given in Example 33.1 for the File 33 of MAT=1264, corresponding to our
example, we have shown with only one sub-subsection each of the matrices <dAi⋅dAj>, <dRi⋅dRj>
and <dai⋅daj>. ES is taken as 2×105 eV.
Note: In the File 33 of MAT-1261 in the subsections (1261,18; 1264,18) and (1261, 18; 1264,102)
an LTY=3 "NC-type" sub-subsection corresponding to the LTY=2 sub-subsections of Example
33.2 must be inserted.

Example 33.1. File 33 with "NC-type" LTY=1 sub-subsections
9.42390+4 2.36999+2000NL=3126433 18 HEAD
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
MAT1=0T1=18
NC=1
NI=2126433 18 CONT
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
0
LTY=1
0
0126433 18 CONT
2.00000+5 2.00000+7 MATS=1261
MTS=18
NT=6
NE=2126433 18 LIST
0.00000+0 0.00000+0 2.00000+5 1.00000+0 2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433 18 <dYi×dYj>
0.00000+0 0.00000+0 LT=0LB=1
NY=14
NE=7
126433 18 LIST
1.00000-5 0.00000+0 1.00000+0 2.50000-3 3.00000+2 3.60000-3126433 18 <dAi×dAj>
3.00000+4 4.90000-3 1.00000+5 6.40000-3 2.00000+5 0.00000+0126433 18
2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433 18
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
LT=0
LB=1
NT=6
NE=3126433 18 LIST
1.00000-5 0.00000+0 2.00000+5 4.00000-4 2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433 18 <dRi×dRj>(1264,18;0.102)
0.00000+0 0.00000+0 MAT1=1261
MT1=18NC=1
NI=0126433 18 CONT
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
0
LTY=2
0
0126433 18 CONT
2.00000+5 2.00000+7 MATS=1261
MTS=18
NT=6
NE=2126433 18 LIST
0.00000+0 0.00000+0 2.00000+5 1.00000+0 2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433 19 <dYi×dYj>
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000126433 0 SEND

(1264,102;0,102)

April 2001

33.19

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Example 33.2. (continued) File 33 with "NC-type" LTY=1 sub-subsections.
9.42390+4 2.36999+2000NL=2126433102 HEAD
0.00000+0 0.00000+0MAT=0MT1=102
NC=1
NI=2126433 18 CONT
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
0
LTY=1
0
0126433 18 CONT
2.00000+5 2.00000+7 MATS=1261
MTS=18
NT=6
NE=2126433 18 LIST
0.00000+0 0.00000+0 2.00000+5 1.00000+0 2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433 18 <dYi×dYj>
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
LT=0
LB=1
NT=14
NE=7126433 18 LIST
1.00000-5 0.00000+0 1.00000+0 2.50000-3 3.00000+2 3.60000-3126433 18 <dAi×dAj>
3.00000+4 4.90000-3 1.00000+5 6.40000-3 2.00000+5 0.00000+0126433 18
2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433 18
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
LT=0
LB=1
NT=6
NE=3126433 18 LIST
1.00000-5 0.00000+0 2.00000+5 4.00000-4 2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433 18 <dRi×dRj>(1264,18;1261,18)0.00000+0 0.00000+0
MAT1=0
MT1=102
NC=1
NI=3126433102 CONT
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
0
LTY=1
0
0126433102 CONT
2.00000+5 2.00000+7 MATS=1261
MTS=18
NT=6
NE=2126433102 LIST
0.00000+0 0.00000+0 2.00000+5 1.00000+0 2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433102 <dYi×dYj>
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
LT=0
LB=1
NT=14
NE=7126433102 LIST
1.00000-5 0.00000+0 1.00000+0 2.50000-3 3.00000+2 3.60000-3126433102 <dAi×dAj>
3.00000+4 4.90000-3 1.00000+5 6.40000-3 2.00000+5 0.00000+0126433102
2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433102
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
LT=0
LB=1
NT=6
NE=3126433102 LIST
1.00000-5 0.00000+5 2.00000+5 4.00000-4 2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433102 <dRi×dRj>
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
LS=1
LB=5
NT=21
NE=61254331-2 LIST
1.00000-5 2.53000-2 9.00000-2 2.50000-1 1.00000+0 2.00000+7126433102 <dai×daj>
2.21000-3 4.84000-4 3.62000-4 3.56000-4 0.00000+0 4.84000-4126433102
3.10000-4 3.04000-4 0.00000+0 6.25000-4 2.30000-4 0.00000+0126433102
2.21000-3 0.00000+0 0.00000+0 0.00000+0 0.00000+0 0.00000+0126433102(1264,102;1261,18)0.00000+0 0.00000+0 MAT1=1261
MT1=18NL=1
NI=0126433102 CONT
0.00000+0 0.00000+0
0
LTY=2
0
0126433102 CONT
2.00000+5 2.00000+7 MATS=1261
MTS=18
NT=6
NE=2126433102 LIST
0.00000+0 0.00000+0 2.00000+5 1.00000+0 2.00000+7 0.00000+0126433102 <dYi×dYj>
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000126433 0 SEND

33.20

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

b. Use of LTY=0, "NC-type" sub-subsections
Let us consider a hypothetical evaluation of 12C, MAT=1274. The decision is made that inFile 33 the MT values 1, 2, 4, 102 and 107 shall have covariances represented. We shall use
the notation developed in the previous example. The following method was used in thisevaluation:
1. Total cross sections (MT=1), σiT, were evaluated over the complete energy range, with thecovariance matrix obtained, and:<dσiT⋅dσjT> → {EkT,FkT} ,with {EkT,FkT} = {1.0E-5, F1T ; ...; EkT, FkT ;...; 2.0E+7, 0.0},
2. Elastic cross sections (MT=2), σiE, were "derived" up to 8.5 MeV from the "evaluated:cross sections:
σiE = σiT - σiI - σiC - σiα .
Above 8.5 MeV the elastic cross sections were evaluated and:<dσiE⋅dσjE> → {EkE,FkE} ,with {EkE,FkE} = {1.0E-5, 0.0; 8.5E+6, FkE ; ...; EkE, FkE ;...; 2.0E+7, 0.0}.
3. Inelastic cross sections (MT=4), σiI, were evaluated from threshold, 4.8 MeV, to 8.5 MeV
and:<dσii⋅dσjI> → {EkI,FkI} ,with {EkI,FkI} = {1.0E-5, 0.0; 4.8E+6, FkI ; ...; EkI, FkI ;...; 8.5E+6, 0.0; 2.0E+7, 0.0},
Above 8.5 MeV the inelastic cross sections were "derived: and:σiI = σiT - σiE - σiC - σiα .
4. Capture cross sections (MT=102), σiC, were evaluated over the complete energy range and:<dσiC⋅dσjC> → {EkC,FkC} ,with {EkC,FkC} = {1.0E-5, F1C ; ...; EkC, FkC ;...; 2.0E+7, 0.0},
5. The (n,α) cross sections (MT=107), σiα, were evaluated from threshold, 6.18 MeV to 20 MeV
and:<dσiα⋅dσjα> → {Ekα,Fkα} ,with {Ekα,Fkα} = {1.0E-5, 0.0; 6.18E+6, Fkα ; ...; Ekα, Fkα ;...; 2.0E+7, 0.0},
In the listing given in Example 33.2 for File 33 of MAT=1274, corresponding to our example,
we have shown only one "NI-type" sub-subsection for each evaluated covariance matrix. Again it isassumed that there are no correlations among the directly evaluated quantities.
The above example has great similarity to the way the evaluation of 12C was made, the majordifference being that instead of MT=4 being evaluated, the evaluation was made for MT=51 and
MT=91. Since it will illustrate some of the procedures of File 33, let us now consider adding to theabove File 33 for MAT=1274 the covariance matrices for MT=51 and MT=91.
a. MT=51
The inelastic scattering to the first excited state, σ151, up to 8.5 MeV is identical to σiI. Therefore,
we may consider up to 8.5 MeV that σi51 is a "derived" cross section with: σi51 = σ1I. This ispermissible because MT=4 has only "NI-type" sub-subsection in this energy range.

April 2001

33.21

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

From 8.5 MeV to 20 MeV, MT=51 was evaluated and:<dσi51⋅dσj51> → {Ek51,Fk51} ,with {Ek51,Fk51} = {1.0E-5, 0.0; 8.5E+6, Fk51 ; ...; Ek51, Fk51 ;...; 2.0E+7, 0.0},
b. MT=91
From 8.5 to 20 MeV, the continuum inelastic, σ191, was "derived" as: σi91 = σiI - σi51. However,
we cannot use this relationship for purposes of File 33 because in this energy range σiI is indicated in
the file as being already "derived."
Therefore, for purposes of File 33, we must write: σi91 = σiT - σiE - σi51 - σiC - σiα ,which now only refers to cross sections having exclusively "NI-type" sub-subsections. Therefore,
we may now add the sections to the File 33, MAT=1274, shown in Example 33.3, to have a more
complete File 33.

33.22

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Example 33.2. File 33 with "NC-type" LTY=0 sub-subsection.

(1274.1;0.1)
6.01200+3 1.18969+10001112733
0.00000+0 0.00000+00101112733
0.00000+0 0.00000+00163112733
1.00000-5 5.00000-5 2.00000+6 2.50000-5 2.00000+7 0.00000+0112733
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000112733

1 HEAD
1 CONT
1 LIST
1
0 SEND(1274,2;0,2)
6.01200+3 1.18969+10001112733
0.00000+0 0.00000+00211112733
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000112733
1.00000-5 8.50000+60084112733
1.00000+0 1.00000+0 1.00000+0 4.00000+0-1.00000+0 1.02000+2112733-1.00000+0 1.07000+01127330.00000+0 0.00000+00184112733
1.00000-5 0.00000-0 8.50000+6 8.00000-6 1.50000+6 2.50000-5112733
2.00000+7 0.00000+01127330.00000+0 0.00000+00000112733

2 HEAD
2 CONT
2 CONT
2 LIST
2
2
2 LIST
2
2
0 SEND(1274,4;0,4)
6.01200+3 1.18970+10001112733
0.00000+0 0.00000+00411112733
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000112733
LIST
1.00000+0 1.00000+0-1.00000+0 2.00000+0-1.00000+0 1.02000+2112733-1.00000+0 1.07000+2
1127330.00000+0 0.00000+001841127334.80000+6 1.00000-3 6.00000+6 1.00000-4 8.50000+6 0.00000-0112733
8.50000+6 2.00000+70084112733
2.00000+7 0.00000+01127330.00000+0 0.00000+00000112733

4 HEAD
4 CONT
4 CONT
4
4
4 LIST
4
4
4
0 SEND(1274,102;0,102)
6.01200+3 1.18969+10001112733102 HEAD
0.00000+0 0.00000+0010201112733102 CONT
0.00000+0 0.00000+00163112733102 LIST
1.00000-5 3.60000-3 1.00000+3 4.00000-2 2.00000+7 0.00000+0112733102
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000112733 0 SEND

(1274,107;0,107)
6.01200+3 1.18969+10001112733107 HEAD
0.00000+0 0.00000+0010701112733107 CONT
0.00000+0 0.00000+00084112733107 LIST
6.18000+6 1.00000-5 6.32000+6 1.00000-4 7.36000+6 2.00000-4112733107
2.00000+7 0.00000+0112733107
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000112733 0 SEND

April 2001

33.23

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Example 33.3. Additional sections of File 33 which could be added to File 33 given in Example 33.3

(1274,51;0.51)
6.01200+3 1.18969+10001127433 51 HEAD
0.00000+0 0.00000+0051
11127433 51 CONT
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000127433 51 CONT
1.00000-5 8.50000+60021127433 51 LIST
1.00000+0 4.00000+0127433 51
0.00000+0 0.00000+00163127433 51 LIST
1.00000-5 0.00000+0 8.50000+6 2.50000-3 2.00000+7 0.00000+0127433 51
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000127433 0 SEND

(1274,91;0,91)
6.01200+3 1.18969+10001127433 91 HEAD
0.00000+0 0.00000+0091
10127433 91 CONT
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000127433 51 CONT
8.50000+6 2.00000+700105127433 51 LIST
1.00000+0 1.00000+0-1.00000+0 2.00000+0-1.00000+0 5.10000+1127433 51-1.00000+0 1.02000+2-1.00000+0 1.07000+2
127433 51
0.00000+0 0.00000+00000127433 0 SEND

33.24

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

34. FILE 34. COVARIANCES FOR ANGULAR DISTRIBUTIONS OF SECONDARYPARTICLES
34.1. Introduction
File 34 contains covariances for angular distributions of secondary particles. It is assumed that
uncertainties will not be required on all quantities in File 4.
A central question is whether quantities in File 3 may have important correlations with those inFile 4, or whether one need be concerned only with correlations of angular distribution parameters as
a function of incident energy. It is judged that covariances between the magnitude and shape arelikely to be important only when theory plays a strong role in an evaluation. When such covariances
occur, the idea, developed below, is that one expresses covariances with the a0 Legendre coefficientseven though a0 ≡ 1 in the ENDF system.
Because of the simplicity of representing the covariances of Legendre coefficients rather thannormalized probability components, only the former is considered here even for cases where File 4
has tabulated p(µ).
In ENDF-6 formats there is no provision for covariance components linking the angular
distribution parameters for different materials, though a MAT1(=0) field is provided.
34.2. Formats
The general structure of File 34 follows the normal pattern, with sections for increasing MT
values. The LTT flag definition is modified from its meaning for File 4.
The following quantities are defined:
ZA,AWR
LTT

NMT1

Standard material charge and mass parameters
Flag to specify the representation used, and it may have the following values inFile 34.
LTT=1, the data are given as Legendre coefficient covariances as a function ofincident energy, starting with a1 or higher order coefficients.
LTT=3, the data are given as Legendre coefficients covariances as a function ofincident energy, starting with a0. (This information is redundant in the formats,as specified below, but is considered desirable as an alarm flag.)
LTT=3 if either L or L1=0 anywhere in the Section.
Number of subsections present in File 34 for various MT1≥MT.

A section of File 34 for a given MT has the form:[MAT,34,MT/ ZA, AWR, LVT, LTT, 0, NMT1] HEAD
<subsection for MT1 = MT>--------------------------------------------------------<NMT1th subsection for largest MT1>
[MAT,34,0/ 0.0, 0.0,0,0, 0,0] SEND(LVT=0)Each subsection begins with a control record that identifies the related MT1 and indicates how
many Legendre coefficients are covered for the angular distributions for reaction types MT(NL) andMT1(NL), MT1≥MT.

April 2001

34.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The following quantities are defined:
MT1

NL

NL1
L
L1
NI
LS
LB
NT

{Data}"Other" reaction type; this subsection contains data for the covariances
COV[aL(E1),aL1(E2)] between Legendre coefficients for two reaction types atincident energies E1 and E2 for various L and L1.
Number of Legendre coefficients for which covariance data are given for thereaction MT. (This value must be the same for each subsection.)(The first coefficient is a0 if LTT=3, a1≥1 if LTT=1).
Number of Legendre coefficients for which covariance data are given forreaction MT1.
Index of the Legendre coefficient for reaction MT for this sub-subsection. Notethat sub-subsections need not be given for all values of L and L1.
Index of the Legendre coefficient for reaction MT1 for this sub-subsection.
Number of LIST records contained in this sub-subsection.
Flag, recognized when LB=5, to indicate whether the matrix is symmetric(1=yes, 0=no).
Flag to indicate the covariance pattern as a function of incident energy. LB
values 0,1,2,5 & 6 are allowed, and are defined as for File 33 in Section 33.2.
Total number of item ,For LB=0,1,2, NT=2*NE;
for LB=5, NT is dependent on LS as given in Section 33.2;
for LB=6, NT=1+NER*NEC.s in the LIST.
For LB=5, sequence {Ek} {Fk,k};for LB=6, sequence {Ek} {Fk,l} (as in File 33).

A subsection has the following form:[MAT,34,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, MAT1, MT1,
NL,
NL1] CONT(MAT1=0)L11,
0,NI1] CONT 1[MAT,34,MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
L 1,
[MAT,34,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, LS1,
LB1,
NT1,
NE1/ {Data1}] LIST------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT,34,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, LSNI1, LBSNI1, NTSNI1, NENI1/{DataNI1}] LIST------------------------------------------------------------------0, NINSS ] CONT
[MAT,34,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, LNSS, L1NSS,
LB1,
NT1,
NE1/ {Data1} LIST
[MAT,34,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, LS1,------------------------------------------------------------------[MAT,34,MT/ 0.0, 0.0, LSNINSS, LBNINSS, NTNINSS, NENINSS/ {DATANINSS}] LIST

1

In this first sub-section, L and L1 are the smallest values present of NL and NL1.

34.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The number of sub-subsections NSS for a given MT1 is NL*NL1, and they are ordered as (L,L1)= (1,1),(1,2),...,(NL,NL1). (Not all L-values need be included). When MT1=MT, redundancy is
avoided by giving each sub-subsection only once, when L1≥L. In this case NSS=NL*(NL+1)/2.
34.3. Procedures
It is strongly recommended that the maximum order of the Legendre expansion for uncertainty
representation be minimized.
If there are important cases (e.g., n-p scattering) where the shape of the angular distribution iscorrelated with the magnitude of the scattering cross section, the convention is that the covariancesamong scattering (integrated) cross sections must be in File 33 and must not be repeated, so all
sub-subsections in File 34 with L=L1=0 would contain null covariance components. This procedure
would maintain the convention that covariance components are summed from various portions of the
ENDF/B file corresponding to a particular material. (The information contained in File 34 for L or
L1 nonzero is the motivation for the present procedure). Note that, in the case of correlation
between shape and magnitude of a scattering cross section, it is possible for an absorption crosssection MT-value to show up in File 34 (with L=0 only).

April 2001

34.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

34.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

35. FILE 35. COVARIANCES FOR ENERGY DISTRIBUTIONS OF SECONDARYPARTICLES
35.1. Introduction
File 35 contains covariance matrices for the energy distribution of secondary neutrons given in
File 5. The data in File 5 are given in the Laboratory system, and are expressed as normalized
probability distributions.
Since there is usually very fragmentary information with which to construct the data given in
File 5, the uncertainties in the secondary distributions are highly correlated as a function of incident
neutron energy. It is therefore proposed that only a few (at most 4 or 5) covariance matrices be usedin each MT value in file 35 to cover the complete incident energy range. Each covariance matrix
applies to the complete secondary energy distributions for the broad incident energy range specified,regardless of how these secondary energy distributions are specified, or broken down into various
components, in File 5. In this first attempt at dealing with covariance matrices of secondary energy
distributions, no covariances between the different incident energy ranges will be allowed. Also, nocovariances linking different materials or reaction types are allowed. Furthermore, no covarianceswith information in other files, for instance File 3 and v_(E) in File 1 are allowed in File 35.
35.2. Formats
Each subsection covers a covariance matrix for an incident neutron energy range, and thecomplete incident energy range is covered by the NK subsections.
A new type of LB subsection is defined (LB=7), since in File 35 it is natural to specify thecovariance matrices as absolute covariances rather than relative covariances. The LB=7 subsection
is similar to an LB=5 subsection, but with entries that are absolute rather than relative.
The following quantities are defined:
NK
E1
E2

LS=1
LB=7
NT
NE
{E′k}

{Fk,k′}

April 2001

Number of subsections
Lowest incident neutron energy to which the covariance matrix in the subsection
applies.
Highest incident neutron energy to which the covariance matrix in thesubsection applies. The value of E2 in a subsection becomes the value of E1 in
the next subsection.
Flag indicating that the covariance data matrix Fk,k′, is symmetric.
Flag indicating that the elements of the covariance matrix Fk,k′ are absolute.
Total number of entries in the list. NT=[NE*(NE+1)]/2.
Number of entries in the array {E′k}Array containing outgoing neutron energies, and defining NE-1 energy intervals
for outgoing neutrons. The value of E′1 in the array must be the lowest outgoingneutron energy possible at E1; E′NE in the array must be the highest outgoingneutron energy possible at E2 and represented in File 5.
covariance matrix. The Fk,k′'s are ordered by rows, starting from the diagonal
term{Fk,k′} ≡ F1,1, F1,2; F2,2, F2,3, ..., ...; FNE–1,NE–1 .

35.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The structure of a section of File 35 is as follows:[MAT,35,MT/

ZA, AWR,

0,

0,

NK,

0] HEAD0,0] SEND<subsection for k=1>
<subsection for k=NK>[MAT,35, 0/ 0.0, 0.0,

0,0,

The structure of a subsection is:[MAT,35,MT/

E1,

E2, LS, LB, NT, NE/{E′k},{Fk,k′}] LIST

(LS=1,LB=7)

In terms of the dimensionless operators defined in Section 33.2, the covariance between two
points on the unity-normalized probability distribution is:()

Cov p ( E → Ei′) , p ( E → E ′j ) = ∑ Pji,,kk′ Fk ,k ′where

k ,k ′

E1 ≤ E ≤ E2, and the P values are defined so that only the term in the sum forE′k ≤ E′I ≤ E′k+1 and E′k ≤ E′I ≤ E′K′+1 is non-zero.

35.3. Procedures
Because probability distributions must remain normalized to unity, covariance matrices in File
35 must satisfy a constraint in addition to being symmetric. This constraint is that the sums of theelements in any row of the matrix, therefore also of any column, must be zero. Therefore, if one
were to divide the outgoing energy of a distribution into n energy ranges, it would only be necessary
to give the covariance matrix of the probabilities in n-1 energy ranges. The remainder of the fullcovariance matrix could be obtained from the above constraint.
There is a procedural objection to the above suggestion. It is that, for the covariance file, if noinformation is provided in the file, this does not imply anything as far as the uncertainties in the data
are concerned. Therefore, it is necessary to provide redundant information in File 35 for eachcovariance matrix of a secondary energy distribution and to require that each covariance matrix inFile 35 meets the above constraint. The sum of each row or column should be <10-5 on theevaluator's energy grid. [Note that this condition must also be met with processed data on the user's
energy grid].
If Fk,k′ are the covariance elements defined above for the normalized spectral yields Yk on theevaluator's grid {E′k}, but the above constraint has not been applied, corrected values F̂k,k′ may beobtained from the following relation.
F k ,k ′ = Fk ,k ′ − Sk Yk′ − Sk′ Yk + Yk Yk′ ∑ S j
j

where

Sk = ∑ Fi ,ki

The secondary energy distribution uncertainty analysis using the "hot-cold" technique of Gerstl,
et al., (see References) can be based on spectral uncertainty data stored in this form. In this case thecovariance matrix is a 2×2 matrix for each incident energy range.

35.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

REFERENCES
1. S. A. W. Gerstl, "Uncertainty Analyses for Secondary Energy Distributions", A Review of the
Theory and Application of Sensitivity and Uncertainty Analysis: Proceedings of a
Seminar-Workshop, August 22-24, 1978, C. R. Weisbin, et al., Eds, Radiation Shielding
Information Center report, Oak Ridge National Laboratory ORNL/RSIC-42 (1978) p. 219.
2. S. A. W. Gerstl, R. J. LaBauve, and P. G. Young, A Comprehensive Neutron Cross-Section andSecondary Energy Distribution Uncertainty Analysis for a Fusion Reactor, Los Alamos
Scientific Laboratory report LA-8333-MS (1980).

April 2001

35.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

35.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

40. FILE 40. COVARIANCES FOR PRODUCTION OF RADIOACTIVE NUCLEI
40.1. General Description
File 40 contains the covariances of neutron activation cross-section information appearing in File
10. This file is based on File 33, which should be consulted for further information, and on File 10.
40.2. Formats
The following quantities are defined:
ZA,AWR
LIS
NS
QM
QI
LFS
NL

Standard material charge and mass parameters.
Level number of the target.
Number of subsections; one for each LFS.
Mass-difference Q-value based on the ground state of the residual nucleus
Reaction Q-value (eV). (See Chapter 10.)
Level number of the nuclide (ZAP) produced in the neutron reaction oftype MT.
Number of subsections.

SectionFile 40 is divided into sections identified by the value of MT. Each section of File 40 starts witha HEAD record, ends with a SEND record, and has the following structure:[MAT,40, MT/ ZA, AWR, LIS,
<NS subsections, one for each LFS>
[MAT,40, MT/ 0.0, 0.0,
0,0, NS,

0] HEAD0,0] SEND

0,

Subsection
Each subsection has the following structure:[MAT,40, MT/

QM,

QI,

0, LFS,

0, NL] CONT

<sub-subsection for L=1>---------------------------------------------------<sub-subsection for L=NL>
Sub-subsections
Each sub-subsection is used to describe a single covariance matrix, the covariance matrix of theenergy-dependent cross section given in section (MAT, 10, MT) with given final state (LFS) and theenergy-dependent cross sections given in section (MAT1,MF1,MT1) (and for a given final state(LFS1), if MF1=10). The values of MAT1, MF1, MT1, and LSF1 are given in the CONT recordthat begins every sub-subsection.
Each sub-subsection may contain several sub-sub-subsections. Each sub-sub-subsection
describes an independent contribution to the covariance matrix given in the sub-subsection. The
total covariance matrix in the sub-subsection is made up of the sum of the contributions of theindividual sub-sub-subsections.

April 2001

40.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The following additional quantities are defined:
XMF1
XLFS1
MAT1
MT1
NC
NI

Floating point form of MF1 (the file number for the 2nd cross section to which
the covariance data relates).
Floating point form of LFS1 (the index of the final state for the 2nd crosssection to which the covariance data relates).
MAT for the 2nd cross section to which the covariance data relates.
MT for the 2nd cross section to which the covariance data relates.
Number of "NC-type" subsections which follow the CONT record.
Number of "NI-type" subsections which follow the "NC-type" subsections.

The structure of a sub-subsection describing the covariance matrix of the cross sections given in(MAT, 10, MT) LFS and (MAT1,MF1, MT1) LFS1 is:[MAT,40,MT/ XMF1, XLFS1, MAT1, MT1, NC, NI] CONT

<sub-sub-subsection for nc = 1>-------------------------------------------------------------<sub-sub-subsection for nc = NC><sub-sub-subsection for ni = 1>-------------------------------------------------------------<sub-sub-subsection for ni = NI>
The formats of the sub-sub-subsection for File 40 are exactly the same as the formats for the
sub-subsections for File 33.
40.3. Procedures
The procedures for File 40 are the same as for File 33 except that File 40 has one more level ofindexing corresponding to the LFS and LFS1 flags and as noted below.
40.3.1. Ordering of Sections, Subsections, Sub-subsections, and Sub-sub-subsections
a. Sections: The sections in File 40 are ordered by increasing value of MT.
b. Subsections: Within a section, (MAT,40,MT), the subsections are ordered by increasing value of
LFS.
c. Sub-subsections: A sub-subsection of File 40 is uniquely identified by the set of numbers(MAT,MT,LFS; MAT1,MT1,MF1,LFS1); the first two numbers indicate the section, the third
indicates the subsection, while the last four indicate the sub-subsection.
1. The sub-subsections within a subsection are ordered by increasing value of MAT1. The value of
MAT1=0 shall be used to mean MAT1=MAT.
2. When there are several sub-subsections with the same value of MAT1 in a subsection, thesesub-subsections shall be ordered by increasing values of XMF1. When MF1=MF, the XMF1
field shall be entered as blank or zero. Therefore, within a given subsection, the sub-subsectionsfor MF1=MF will always appear before those for other MF1 values.

40.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

3. When there are several sub-subsections with the same value of MAT1 and MF1 in a subsection,these sub-subsections shall be ordered by increasing values of MT1. If MAT1=MAT and
MF1=MF, then only those sub-subsections for MT≥MT shall be given.
4. When there are several sub-subsections with the same value of (MAT1,MT1,MF1) in a
subsection, these sub-subsections shall be ordered by increasing values of LFS1. If
MAT1=MAT, MF1=MF, and MT1=MT, then only those sub-subsections for LFS1≥LFS shall begiven. (LFS1=0 implies the ground state of the product and does not imply LFS1=LFS).
40.3.2. Completeness
There are no minimum requirements on the number of sections, subsections, and sub-subsectionsin File 40. However, the presence of certain data blocks in File 40 implies the presence of others,
either in File 33 or 40 of a referenced material. In what follows, we shall identify the
sub-subsections of File 40 by(MAT, MT, LFS; MAT1, MT1, MF1, LFS1).
The presence of this data block with MAT1≠MAT or MF1≠10 implies the presence of appropriate
data in:a. (MAT, MT, LFS; MAT, MT, MF=10, LFS), in File 40 of MAT;
b. (MAT1, MT1, LFS1; MAT1, MT1, MF1, LFS1), in File (MF1+30) of MAT1;c. (MAT1, MT1, LFS1; MAT, MT, MF=10, LFS), also in File (MF1+30) of MAT1.

April 2001

40.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

40.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

APPENDIX A
Glossary
Terms are given in alphabetical order with numbers preceding letters, lower-case preceding uppercase letters, and Greek Letters following.

April 2001

A.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

A.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
a
al
Ak,l
Al
An
ABN
AC
AC1, AC2, AC3,
AC4, BC1, BC2
AF1, AF2, AF3,
AF4, BF1, BF2
AG
AJ
AL
ALAB
ALRE1…ALRE4
AMUF
AMUG
AMUN
AMUX
AP
APL
APSX
AS
AT1, AT2, AT3,
AT4, BT1, BT2
AUTH
AVGG
AWD
AWI
AWP

April 2001

Definition
Parameter used in the Watt spectrum.
lth Legendre coefficient.
Probability of emission of a γ ray of energy Eγ=εk-εl as a resultof the residual nucleus having a transition from the kth to the lthlevel.
Legendre coefficients (LANG=0) or µ,pi pairs for tabulated
angular distribution (LANG>0).
Mass of the nth type atom; Ao is mass of the principal scattering
atom in molecule.
Abundance (weight fraction) of an isotope in this material.
Channel radius
Background constants for the Adler-Adler radiative capture
cross section.
Background constants for the Adler-Adler fission cross section.

Chapter
5
4,6,14
11

Reduced-width amplitude.
Floating-point value of compound nucleus spin, J (resonancespin).
Floating point value of the angular momentum, l.
Mnemonic of laboratory originating evaluation.
Exit-l-value for reaction.
Number of degrees of freedom used in fission-width
distribution.
Number of degrees of freedom used in radiation-width
distribution.
Number of degrees of freedom used in neutron-width
distribution.
Number of degrees of freedom used in competitive-width
distribution.
Scattering radius.
l-dependent scattering radius.
Total mass in neutron units of the n particles being treated by
LAW=6.
Floating point value of channel-spin s.
Background constants for the Adler-Adler total cross section.

22,32Author of evaluation.
Statistical R-matrix parameter.
Atomic mass (not a ratio) of the daughter nucleus.
Projectile mass in neutron units.
Product mass in neutron units.

6
7
2,32
2
2
2

2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2,32
2
6
2
2
1
2
2
1
6

A.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
AWR
AWRI
AWRIC
AWT
AZD
AZP
b
bi(E,E')
Bi(N)
BC
BR
Cn
Cn(Ei)
CI

CONT
CT
D
DDATE
DE2
DECr*
DEFr*
DETr*
DF2
DG2
DGDF
DJ2
DJDF
DJDF
DJDG
DJDN
DN2
DNDF
DNDG
DWCr*
DWFr*
DWTr*
DYC
*

Definition
Ratio of mass of atom (or molecule) to that of the neutron.
Ratio of mass of particular isotope to that of the neutron.
Mass-ratio for charged-particle exit channel (see page D.40).
Nuclear mass (not a ratio) of outgoing particle.
Atomic number of daughter nucleus.
Atomic number of outgoing particle.
Parameter used in Watt spectrum.
Representation of angular part of fi(µ,E,E').
List of constants.
Boundary-condition parameter.
Branching ratio for production of a particular nuclide and level.
Coefficients of a polynomial; NC coefficients are given.
Array of yield data for the ith energy point; contains 4
parameters per fission product.
Channel index.
Coefficient of the cross section for a reaction contributing to
the value of a "derived" cross section (usually ±1.0).
Smallest possible ENDF record, a "control" record.
Chain indicator.
Mean level spacing for a particular J-state.
Original distribution date of the evaluation.
Variance of the resonance energy ER.
Resonance energy for the radiative capture cross section.
Resonance energy for the fission cross section.
Adler-Adler resonance energy for the total cross section.
Variance of GF.
Variance of GG.
Covariance of GG and GF.
Variance of AJ.
Covariance of AJ and GF.
Covariance of AJ and GF.
Covariance of AJ and GG.
Covariance of AJ an GN.
Variance of GN.
Covariance of GN and GF.
Covariance of GN and GG.
Value of Γ/2, (ν), used for the radiative capture cross section.
Value of Γ/2, (ν), used for the fission cross section.
Value of Γ/2, (ν), used for the total cross section.
1-σ uncertainty in cumulative fission-product yield.

Chapter
all
2,32
2
2
2
2
5
6
7,12
2
8
1
8
2
31,33
all
8
2,32
1
32
2
2
2
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
2
2
2
8

The subscript r denotes the rth resonance.

A.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
DYI
{Ek}
E
E′
E1,E2
Eavail
Eint
Eth
E"x"
EB
EBAR
EBI
ED
EDATE
EFH
EFL

EFR
EGk
EGD
EGP
EH
EI
EL
ELFS
ELIS
ELN
EMAX
END
ENDATE
ENP
ENU
EPE

ER

April 2001

Definition
1-σ uncertainty in fractional independent fission-product yield.
List of energies for a covariance file energy grid
Energy of the incident neutron (eV).
Secondary neutron energy (eV).
Range of neutron energies.
Available energy.
Interpolation scheme for each energy range (Appendix E).
Threshold energy.
Average decay energy (eV) of "x" radiation for decay heatapplications.
Total energy released by delayed β's.
Statistical R-matrix parameter
Binding energy for subshell (eV)
Logarithmic parameter for a R-matrix element
Date of evaluation.
Constant in energy-department fission spectrum
Constant in energy-department fission spectrum
Fluorescence yield (eV/photo-ionization). Value is zero if not
photoelectric subshell ionization cross section.
Kinetic energy of the fragments.
Photon energy or Binding Energy.
Total energy released by the emission of delayed γ rays.
Total energy released by the emission of "prompt" γ-rays.
Upper limit for a resonance region energy range.
Energy points where the weighting of the standard cross isgiven.
Lower limit for a resonance region energy range.
Excitation energy of the reaction product.
Excitation energy of the target nucleus.
Number of electrons in subshell when neutral.
Upper limit of energy range for evaluation
Kinetic energy of the delayed fission neutrons.
End-point energy of the particle or quantum emitted.
Master file entry date (yyyymmdd).
Kinetic energy of the "prompt" fission neutrons.
Energy carried away by neutrinos.
Sub-shell binding energy (equal to photoelectric edge energy)
in eV. The value is zero if MT≠534-599.
Total energy release due to fission minus neutrino energy.
Resonance energy (in the laboratory system).

Chapter
8
32-40
all
5,6,7
31,33
5
all
3
8
1
2
28
2
1
5
5
23
1,5
12,13,14
1
1
2,32
31,33
2,32
8
1
28
1
1
8
1
1
1
23

1
2,32

A.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
ERAV
ESi
ESk
ES(N)
ET
ET(E)
ETR
EU
fi(µ,E,E′)
fk(E → E′)
F(q;Z)
Fx,k,k′(LB)
FC
FD
FPS
FTR
g(Eγ ← E)
gj(Eγ ← E)
GE
GF
GFA
GFB
GG
GICr
GIFr
GITr
GN
GN0
GPj,i ≡ Gpi
GRCr
GRE1…GRE4
GRFr

A.6

Definition
Energy (eV) of radiation produced.
Average decay energy of radiation produced.
Energy of the ith level.
Energy of the level from which the photon originates.
Energy of Nth point used to tabulate energy-dependent widths.
Total energy release due to fission.
Energy transfer during electro-atomic excitation orbremsstrahlung
Energy of transition (eV)
Logarithmic parameter for a R-matrix element
Normalized product energy-angle distribution
kth partial energy distribution; definition depends on LF value.
Form factor for coherent photon scattering.
Covariance components correlated over the energy intervalwith lower edges Ek and Ek′ (exact definition depends on LB
value.
Continuum spectrum normalization factor.
Discrete spectrum normalization factor.
Floating-point value of state designator for a fission productnuclide.
Fractional probability for transition.
Particular class of the functions gj(Eγ ← E) tabulated in File15; in units eV-1.
jth normalized partial distribution; in units eV-1.
Eliminated width.
Fission width Γf evaluated at resonance energy ER.
Average fission width - may be energy dependent.
First partial fission width
Second partial fission width
Radiation width Γγ evaluated at resonance energy ER.
Average radiation width - energy dependent if LRU=2.
Asymmetrical capture parameter.
Asymmetrical fission parameter.
Related to the asymmetrical total cross section parameter.
Neutron width Γn evaluated at resonance energy ER.
Average reduced neutron width; energy dependent.
Conditional probability of photon emission in a directtransition from level j to level i, i < j.
Symmetrical capture parameter.
Partial widths.
Symmetrical fission parameter.

Chapter
8
8
1212,13,14
2
1
26
28
2
6
5
27
31-40

8
8
8
28
15
15
2
2,32
2
2
3
2,32
2
2
2
2
2,32
2
12
2
2
2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
GRTr
GT
GX
H(q;Z)
H(N)
HEAD
HL
HSUB
I
Ii
IDP
INT

INT(m)IPS
IPS(e)
IR0(e)
IRP
ISG
ISH
k
L
LA
LAD
LANG
LASYM
LAT
LAW
LB
LBK
LCOMP
LCON

April 2001

Definition
Related to symmetrical total cross section parameter.
Resonance total width Γ evaluated ate resonance energy ER.
Competitive width Γx evaluated at resonance energy ER, or,average competitive reaction width.
Form factor or incoherent scattering function; either F(q;Z) or
S(q;Z), respectively.
Array containing text information that describes evaluated data
set.
First record in a section
Half life of the reaction product.
Library identifier (eye-readable)
Normalizing denominator (see 5.3).
Interpolation scheme (see Appendix E) to be used between theEi-1 and Ei energy points.
Resonance parameter identification number.
Statistical parameter for R-matrix element (LRU=1, LRF=5),or, interpolation scheme used for interpolating between crosssections obtained from average resonance parameters(LRU=2).
Interpolation scheme identification number used in mth range.
Imaginary part of a non-hard-sphere phase shift.
Real part of PS(E).
Imaginary part of R0(E).
Imaginary part of background-R-matrix element.
Spin group index.
Shift function flag.
Boltzmann's constant.
Value of the l state (neutron angular momentum).
Value of l (for the lth coefficient).
Angular distribution flag
Angular distribution indicator
Flag indicating whether asymmetric S(α,β) is given.
Flag indicating which temperature has been used to compute α
and β.
Distinguishes between different representations of fi, thenormalized product energy-single distribution
Flag which determines meanings of the F-numbers in thearrays {Ek,Fk}{El,Fl} .
Background R-matrix parameter (LRU=1, LRF=5), or,background-R-function flag (LRU=1, LRF=6).
Indicates ENDF-5 compatible format.
Continuum spectrum flag.

Chapter
2
2,32
2
27
1
all
8
1
5
8
2,32
2

0
2
2
2
2
2
2
7

7
6
8,31,33,
34,40
2
32
8

A.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
LCOV
LCT
LDRV
LE
LEP
LF
LFI
LFS
LFW
LG
LI

LIBF
LIDP
LIP
LIS
LISO
LIST
LLN
LMF
LNU
LO
LP
LPS
LR
LREL
LRF

A.8

Definition
Chapter
Indicates whether covariance data are given.
8
Indicates which reference frame is used for both secondary
4,6
angles and energies.
Distinguishes between different evaluations with the same1
material keys
Indicates whether energy-dependent fission-product yields are
8
given.
Selects interpolation scheme for secondary energy.
6Specifies the energy distribution law that is used for a
5,6,12,13,
particular subsection (partial energy distribution).
15
Indicates whether this material is fissionable.
1
Indicator that specifies the final excited state of the residual
3,8,9,10,40
nucleus produced by a particular reaction.
Indicates whether average fission widths are given in the
2,32unresolved resonance region for this isotope.
Transition probability array flag for distinguishing between
12
doublet and triplet arrays in File 12.
Indicates kind of Adler-Adler parameters given.
2
Isotropy flag.
4,14
Temperature interpolation flag.
7
Sub-library where some data are sensitive to the same model
30
parameters as data in present sub-library/material.
Identifies identical particles for LAW=5.
6
Product modifier flag.
8
State number of the target nucleus (for materials that represent 1,3,8,9,10,
nuclides).
40
Isomeric state number of the target nucleus.
1,8
Record used to list a series of numbers.
allIndicates form for storing S(α,β).
7File number for this MT containing multiplicity or cross8
section.
1
Indicates representation of ν (E) used.
Indicates whether multiplicities or transition probability arrays
12
given.
Indicates whether particular photon is a primary.
12,13
Optical model phase shift flag
2
3
Defines x in (n,n'x); used in the reactions MT=51, 52, 53,…,
90, and 91. (See Section 3.4.4.)
Release number
1
Indicates which resonance parameter representation used for
2,32
energy range; definition depends on value of LRU for range.

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
LRP
LRU
LRX
LS
LSSF
LT

LTHR
LTP
LTT

LTY
LVT
L1
L2
Mn
MAT
MAT1
MATF
MATP
MATS
MF
MFn
MFSEN,MTSEN
MODn
MP
MPAR
MPF
MT
MTn
MT1
MTL

April 2001

Definition
Indicates whether resolved and/or unresolved resonanceparameters given in File 2.
Indicates whether energy range contains data for resolved orunresolved resonance parameters.
Indicates whether a competitive width is given.
Indicates whether Fk,k, matrix is asymmetric or symmetric(LB=5 or 7).
Indicates how File 2 and File 3 are to be combined.
Temperature dependence (see Appendix F).
Specifies whether temperature-dependent data are given.
Number of pairs of numbers in the array {El,Fl}.
Thermal data flag.
Specifies representation used for LAW=5.
Specifies whether Legendre or probability representation used.
Specifies whether Legendre coefficient covariance data startwith a0 coefficient.
In "NC-type" sub-subsections, indicates the procedure used toobtain the covariance matrix.
Specifies whether a transformation matrix given for elastic
scattering.
Integer to be used as a flag or a test.
Number of Legendre coefficients.
Integer to be used as a flag or a test.
Number of atoms of the nth type in the molecule.
Material number.
Referenced material for covariance data.
MAT in which some data are sensitive to the same parameter.
Material number for the reaction product.
MAT in which a pertinent standard cross section (MTS) exists.
File number.
MF of the nth section.
MF,MT of a section in which data are sensitive to the indicatedparameter (MP).
Modification indicator for section MFn and MTn.
Model parameter index.
Number of parameters for which covariance data is given.
Model parameter index given the same parameter (MP) in
another sublibrary/material
Reaction type number, or, covariance file section identifier.
MT of the nth section.
Referenced reaction type for covariance data.
Indicates MT that is a component of the lumped reaction.

Chapter
12,32
2
31,33,35
2,32
0
3,4,5,6,7
31,33
7
6
4,6,14
34
31,33
4
1
34
1
7
0
33
30
8
31,33
0
1
30
1
30
32
30
all
1
33
33

A.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
Definition
MTS
Reaction type number for relevant standard cross section.
MUF
Number of degrees of freedom for fission widths.
MTRE1…MTRE4 MT values for inelastic or charged particle reactions
N0
Identifies reaction product that has radioactive ground state.
N1
Number of items in a list to follow (except for MT 451).
N2
Number of items in a second list to follow.
NA
Number of angles (cosines) at which secondary distributions
given.
NAC
Number of channel radii
NAPS
Controls use of channel radius a and scattering radius AP.
NB
Total number of β value given.
NBC
Number of boundary-condition parameters.
NBK
Background-R-matrix parameter.
NBT(n)
Value of N separating the mth and (m+1)th interpolation
rangers.
NC
Number of terms used in the polynomial expansion.
Total number of decay energies (eV) given (NC = 3 or 17).
Number of partial distributions used to represent f(Eγ ← E).
Number of "NC-type" sub-subsections.
NCn
Number of physical records in the nth section.
NCH
Number of channels using particular background R-matrix
element, phase shift, penetrability, channel radius, or boundary
condition (LRU=1, LRF=5).
NCI
Number of reactions summed to obtain the reaction of interest.
For a "derived" cross section, number of reaction types forwhich cross sections are combined in the derivation.
NCP
Number of channels.
NCRE
Number of charged-particle reactions.
NCS
Number of channels in a particular spin group.
NCT
Total number of channels.
NCTAB
Number of CONT records in the corresponding table.
ND
Number of discrete energies (File 6);
Number of branches into which nuclide ZAP decays.
NDIR
Number of CONT records in the MF=30 directory.
NDK
Total number of decay modes given.
NE
Number of incident-energy points at which widths given.
Number of points at which tabulated distributions given.
Number of points at which θ(E) (file 5) given.
Number of energy points given in a TAB2 record.
NEI
Number of energy points in {EI,WEI} list.
NEP
Number of secondary energy points.

Chapter
31,33
2
2
8
1
1
6

A.10

April 2001

2
2,32
7
2
2
0
1
8
15
31,33
1
2
1
31,33
2
2
2
2
30
6
8
30
8
2
4
5
14,15
33
6

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
NER

NF
NFOR
NFP
NFRE
NGRE
NHS
NI

NIRE
NIS
NJS
NK

NL
NLG
NL1
NLIB
NLJ
NLRS
NLS
NLSC

April 2001

Definition
Number of energy ranges given for this isotope.
Total number of discrete energies for given spectra type
(STYP).
Number of energies corresponding to the rows of LB=6
covariance matrix.
Number of channels not requiring a phase shift.
Number of secondary energy points in tabulation.
Library format.
Number of fission-product nuclide states to be specified at each
incident-energy point.
Number of fission reactions.
Number of capture reactions.
Number of channels that require hard-sphere phase shifts.
Total number of items in the B(N) list; NL=6* (NS + 1).
Number of isotropic angular distributions given in section(MT) for which LI=0, i.e., with at least one anisotropic
distribution).
Number of "NI-type" sub-subsections.
Number of inelastic reactions.
Number of isotopes in this material.
Number of sets of resonance parameters (each having the same
J state) for a specified l-state.
Number of elements in transformation matrix; NK=(NM+1)2.
Number of partial energy distributions (one subsection for eachpartial distribution).
Number of partial energy distributions (LCON=5).
Number of discrete photons plus the photon continuum.
Number of subsections in this section (MT).
Number of incident-neutron energy ranges for covariance
representation, each with a subsection.
Highest order Legendre polynomial given at each energy.
Number of subsections within a section.
Number of logarithmically parameterized elements.
Number of Legendre coefficients.
Library identifier.
Count of the number of levels for which parameters will begiven.
Number of subsections containing data on long-range
resonance parameter covariance.
Number of l-values considered; a set of resonance parameters
is given for each l-value.
Number of l-value for convergence.

Chapter
2,32
8
33
2
5
1
8
2
2
2
7
14
31,33
2
2,32
2,32
4
5,6
8
12,13,14
26
35
4,6,14
33
2
34
1
2
32
2,32
2

A.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
NLSJ
NM
NML
NMOD
NMT1
NMU
NN
NNF
NO
NP

NPE
NPP
NPS
NPSX
NR
NRB
NRM
NRO
NRP
NRS
NRT
NS

NSG
NSP
NSRS
NSS
NST
NSUB
A.12

Definition
Number of resonances specified by l, s, and J.
Maximum order Legendre polynomial required to describe theangular distributions.
Number of entries in MT list.
Modification number.
Number of subsections, for MT1 ≥ MT.
Number of emission cosine values for LAW=7.
Number of elements in the LIST record
Number of precursor families considered.
Decay information flag.
Number of points in a tabulation of y(x) that are contained on
the same record.
Number of Bragg edges.
Total number of distinct model parameters.
Total number of pairs of numbers in the arrays {Ek,Fk}{El,Fl}.
Number of charged-particle penentrabilities.
Number of pairs of numbers in the {Ek,Fk} array.
Number of non-hard-sphere phase shifts.
Number of particles distributed by LAW=6.
Number of different interpolation intervals in a tabulation ofy(x) that are contained in the same record.
Number of resonances in block.
Number of interpolation intervals for emission cosine for
LAW=7.
Energy dependence of the scattering radius.
Number of interpolation intervals for emission energy(LAW=7).
Number of resolved resonances for a given l-state.
Total number of resonances.
Number of non-principle scattering atom types.
Number of states of the radioactive reaction product.
Number of levels below the present one, including groundstate.
Number of spin groups.
Total number of spectra radiation types (STYP) given.
Number of subsections for covariances among parameters ofspecific resonances.
Number of different s-values.
Number of subshells.
Number of statistically parameterized background R-matrix
elements.
Sub-library number.

Chapter
2
4
2
1
34
6
8
1
8
all but
Ð
7
30
31,33
2
8
2
6
all
32
6
2,32
6
2,32
2
7
8,9,10
12
2
8
32
2
28
2
1
April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
NT

NTP
NTR
NVER
NVS
NW
NWD
NX
NXC
Pj(E)
Pk(EN)

Definition
Number of transitions for which data given.
Number of entries for each discrete energy ER.
Total number of items in LIST.
Control flag for background-R-matrix or penetrability list.
Number of transitions.
Library version number.
Number of covariance elements for a block of resonances.
Number of words in LIST record.
Number of elements in the text section.
Number of sets of background constants to be given.
Number of the sections to be found in the dictionary
Probability or weight given to jth partial distribution, gj(Eγ←E).
Fractional part of cross section that can be described by the kth
partial distribution of the nth incident-energy point.

p(µ,E)

2π dσ( Ω , E)σ s (E) dΩPAR
PCP(E)PMT
PS(E)Q

Parity π of target nuclide.
Charged-particle penetrability.
Floating point value for PMT.
Complex phase shift.
Reaction Q-value (eV); Q=(rest mass of initial state - rest massof final state).
Total decay energy (eV) available in corresponding decay
process, not necessarily the same as maximum energy ofemitted radiation).
Reaction Q-value.
Mass-difference Q-value.
Q-values.
Effective Q-value for the competitive width.
Probability of de-excitation.
Logarithmic parameters for a R-matrix element.
Complex background R-function.
Relative covariance of model parameters.
Date and number of last revision.
Reference to evaluation.
Isomeric state flag for daughter nuclide.
Resonance index.
Intensity of radiation produced (relative units).
Total internal conversion coefficient.
K-shell internal conversion coefficient.
L-shell internal conversion coefficient.

QI
QM
QRE1…QRE4
QX
Rmjα
R0,R1,R2
R0(E)
RCOV
RDATE
REF
RFS
RI
RICC
RICK
RICL
April 2001

Chapter2
833,34,35
2
28
1
32
6
1
2
1
15
5
4
8
2
2
2
3,9,108
3,9,10
3,9,10
2
2,32
11
2
2
30
1
1
8
2
8
8
8
8
A.13

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
RIN
RIS
RNPM
RNSM
RP
RPB
RPS
RPS(E)
RR0(E)RTYP
RVij
S(α,β,T)S0, S1
SF
SMT
SPD
SPI
SPP
STA
STYP
SUBI
SUBJ
SUBK
T
T1/2
TAB1
TAB2
TEMP
TM
TPi
TYPE
U
Vk

A.14

Definition
Statistical R-matrix parameters.
Internal pair formation coefficient (STYP=0.0); positron
intensity (STYP=2.0).
Number of particular sections (MT's).
Number of summed sections (MT's).
Spectrum of the continuum component of the radiation∫ RP(E)dE=1.
Real part of background R-matrix element.
Real part of a non-hard-sphere phase shift.
Real part of PS(E).
Real part of R0(E).
Mode of decay of the nuclide in its LISO state.
Relative covariance quantities among average unresolved
parameters.
Defined (for a moderating molecule) by the relation.
NS
2MσE ′ β /2
dσ E
′
E
,
µ
,T
=
→
(
) ∑ n bne Sn (α , β ,T )d ΩdE ′
E
n=0 4π kT
Logarithmic parameters for an R-matrix element.
Statistical R-matrix parameter.
Floating-point value for MT.
Spin and parity for the daughter nucleus.
Nuclear spin of the target nucleus, I (positive number).
Spin and parity.
Target stability flag.
Decay radiation type (defined in 8.3).
Subshell designator.
Secondary subshell designator
Tertiary subshell designator.
Temperature (K) at which temperature dependent data given.
Half-life of the original nuclide (seconds).
Control record for one-dimensional tabulated functions.
Control record for two-dimensional tabulated functions.
Target temperature.
Maximum temperature parameters.
Probability of a direct transition from level NS to level I, I = 0,
1, 2, …(NS-1).
Indicates the type of transition for beta and electron capture.
Defines the upper energy limit for the secondary neutron, sothat 0 ≤E′≤E-U (given in the Lab system).
Matrix elements of the transformation matrices.

Chapter
2
8
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
8
32
7

2
2
2
2
2,8,32
2
1
8
28
28
28
4,5,6,7
8
all
all
1
5
12
8
5
4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter
Vmn
WEI
x
x(n)
XLFS1
XLFSS
XMF1
XMFS
XMTI
y(E)
y(n)
yi(E)
Y(E)

YC
YI
ZA
ZAI
ZAFP
ZAN
ZAP
ZSYMA
ZSYMAMαβδ(Eγ - εj + εi)
∆
λi
θ

**

Definition
Variance-covariance matrix element among resonanceparameters.
Weight of the standard cross section at a given EI relative tothe next given energy.
E′/θ(E).
nth value of x.
Floating-point form of final excited state number references forcovariance data.
Floating-point form of LFSS, final excited state number of areaction with a standard cross section
Floating-point form of file number reference for covariance
data.
Floating-point form of MFS, file number in which pertinent
standard cross section (MTS) may be found.
Floating-point equivalent of MT number of the reaction forwhich the cross section contributes to a "derived" cross section.
Yield for particle described.
nth value of y.
Product yield or multiplicity.
Total multiplicity at energy E(eV); given as energy-multiplicity
pairs.
Partial multiplicity at energy E(eV).
Cumulative yield for a particular fission product.
Fractional independent yield for a particular fission product.
Designation of the original nuclide.**(Z,A) designation for an isotope.**(Z,A) identifier for a particular fission product.**(Z,A) designation of the next nuclide in the chain.**(Z,A) designation of the product nuclide.**Test representation of material: Z-chemical symbol-A
Text representation of material Z-chemical symbol-A-state.

(

Momentum transfer, α = E ′ + E − 2 µ E E ′) A kT .
0

Energy transfer, β = (E′ - E)/kT.
Delta function, with εj, εi being energy levels of the residual
nucleus.
Uncertainty in quantity.
Decay constant (sec-1) for the ith precursor.
Parameter describing secondary energy distribution; definitionof θ depends on the energy distribution law (LF).

Chapter
32
31,33
5
0
33,40
31,33
33,40
31,33
31,33
26
0
6
9,12
12
8
8
all
2,32
8
8
8
8
1
7
7
11
1,8
1
5

(ZA=(1000.0*Z) + A).

April 2001

A.15

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Parameter

ν (E)
σ(E)
σbn

Definition
Total average number of neutrons formed per fission event.

Chapter
1

Cross section (barns) for a particular reaction type at incident
energy point, E, in (eV).
Bound atom scattering cross section of nth type atom,

3,10,237

2⎛ An + 1 ⎞⎟⎝ An ⎠
Free atom scattering cross section of nth type atom.
Photon production cross section for a discrete photon or photon
continuum specified by k.
Neutron cross section for exciting moth level with neutronenergy E.
Scattering cross sections, e.g., elastic scattering at energy E asgiven in File 3 for the particular reaction type (MT).
C( AT 1 + AT 2 /E + A3 / E 2 + AT 4 / E 3 + BT 1 * E + BT 2 * E 2 )E
Wick's limit cross section in units of barns/steradian.
Differential scattering cross section in units of barns/steradian.

σ bn = σ fn ⎜σfnσkγ(E)
σm0(E)σs(E)σT (background)σWdσ ( Ω , E )
dΩ
γ
dσk
dΩ
µ

A.16

7
13
11
4
2
4
4

Differential photon production cross section in barns/steradian.

14

Cosine of scattered angle in either laboratory or center-of-masssystem.

4,6,14

April 2001

ENDF-102 Formats and Procedures

APPENDIX B
Definition of Reaction Types

Reaction types (MT) are identified by an integer number from 1 through 999. Version 6 of the
ENDF format supports incident charged particles and photons in a manner consistent with thedefinitions of MT's used in previous versions of the ENDF format to the extent possible. Users
should beware of the few differences. In the following table, those MT numbers restricted toneutrons incident are labeled (n,xxx); those that are limited to incident charged particles andphotons are labeled (y,xxx) and those that allow all particles in the entrance channel are labeled(z,xxx), where x can represent any exit particle. See Section 0.0 for complete descriptions of MT
numbers. Refer to Sections 3.4 (incident neutrons) and 3.5 (incident charged particles and photons)
for the list of MT numbers that should be included in each evaluation.
For the ENDF-6 format, all particles in the exit channel are named (within the parenthesis)
except for the residual. The identity of this residual can be specified explicitly in File 6 ordetermined implicitly from the MT number. In cases where more than one MT might describe areaction, the choice of MT number is then determined by the residual which is the heaviest of theparticles (AZ,A) in the exit channel. For example, 6Li(n,t)α is represented by MT=700, rather thanmy MT=800; and MT=32 represents the 6Li(n,nd)α reaction rather than MT=22. Sequential reaction
mechanism descriptions can be used, where necessary, for reactions such as X(n,np)Y. These aredescribed in Sections 0.5.3 and 0.5.4.

April 2001

B.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

B.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

MT
1
2
3
4

5

6-9
10
11
12-15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

1

2

Description(n,total)
Neutron total cross sections. Sum of
MT=2, 4, 5, 11, 16-18, 22-26, 28-37,
41-42, , 44-45, 102-117.
(z,z0)
Elastic scattering cross section forincident particles.
(z,nonelastic) Nonelastic neutron cross section.
Sum of MT=4, 5, 11, 16-18, 22-26,
28-37, 41-42, , 44-45, 102-117.
(z,n)
Production of one neutron in the exit
channel. Sum of the MT=50-91.

Comments
Redundant. Undefined forincident charged particles.

Redundant. For photon
production only.

Redundant. For incident
neutrons, this is inelastic
scattering (MT=50 isundefined).
Each particle can be(z,anything) Sum of all reactions not given
identified and its multiplicity
explicitly in another MT number.
This is a partial reaction to be added given in File 6. Not allowed
in Files 4, 5.
to obtain MT=1.
9
Not allowed in version 6.
Be(n,2n) in version 5.
Redundant; to be used for(z,continuum) Total continuum reaction; includes
all continuum reactions and excludes derived files only.
all discrete reactions.
(z,2nd)Production of two neutrons and a
deuteron, plus a residual.
Unassigned.
(z,2n)
Production of two neutrons and aresidual1. Sum of MT=875-891, if
they are present.
(z,3n)(z,fission)(n,f)(n,nf)
Second-chance fission2.
(n,2nf)Third-chance fission2.
(z,nα)
Production of a neutron and an alphaparticle, plus a residual.
(n,n3α)Production of a neutron and threealpha particles, plus a residual.
(z,2nα)Production of two neutrons and analpha particle, plus a residual.

The "residual" is the remainder after the reaction specified by MT has taken place (for example, A-1
after an n,2n reaction on target A). This "residual" may break up further if LR>0.
Note that the partial fission cross section are not defined for incident charged particles.

April 2001

B.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresMT25(z,3nα)2627(n,abs)28(z,np)

29(z,n2α)30(z,2n2α)31
32(z,nd)

33(z,nt)

34(z,n3He)

35(z,nd2α)36(z,nt2α)37(z,4n)

38
39
40
41

(n,3nf)(z,2np)42(z,3np)4344(z,n2p)45(z,npα)

46-49
50

B.4

(y,n0)

Description
Production of three neutrons and analpha particle, plus a residual.
Not allowed in version 6.

Comments

Version 5: (n,2n) isomericstate; used in file 8 and 6, 9,
or 10.
Rarely used.

Absorption; sum of MT=18 and
MT=102 through MT=117
Production of a neutron and a proton,
plus a residual.
Production of a neutron and twoalpha particles, plus a residual.
Production of two neutrons and twoalpha particles, plus a residual.
Not allowed for version 6.
Used only as an LR flag.
Production of a neutron and a
deuteron, plus a residual.
Production of a neutron and a triton,plus a residual.
Production of a neutron and a 3Heparticle, plus a residual.
Production of a neutron, a deuteron,and 2 alpha particles, plus a residual.
Production of a neutron, a triton, and2 alpha particles, plus a residual.
Production of 4 neutrons, plus a
residual.
Fourth-chance fission cross section2.
Not allowed for version 6.
Used only as an LR flag.
Not allowed for version 6.
Used only as an LR flag.
Production of 2 neutrons and a
proton, plus a residual.
Production of 3 neutrons and a
proton, plus a residual.
(Unassigned)
Production of a neutron and 2
protons, plus a residual.
Production of a neutron, a proton,
and an alpha particle, plus a residual.
Not allowed in Version 6.
Version 5: description of 2nd
neutron from 9Be(n,2n)reactions to excited states.
Production of a neutron, leaving the Not allowed for incident
residual nucleus in the ground state. neutrons; use MT=2.

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresMT51(z,n1)

52(z,n2)

90…
…
(z,n40)91(z,nc)

92-100101(n,disap)

102
103

(z,γ)
(z,p)

104

(z,d)

105

(z,t)

106

(z,3He)

107

(z,α)

108

(z,2α)

109(z,3α)

110
111(z,2p)

112(z,pα)

113(z,t2α)114(z,d2α)April 2001

Description
Production of a neutron, withresidual in the 1st excited state.
Production of a neutron, withresidual in the 2nd excited state.

Production of a neutron, withresidual in the 40th excited state.
Production of a neutron in thecontinuum not included in the above
discrete representation.
(Unassigned)
Neutron disappearance; equal to sum
of MT=102-117.
Radiative capture.
Production of a proton, plus a
residual. Sum of MT=600-649, if
they are present.
Production of a deuteron, plus a
residual. Sum of MT=650-699, if
they are present.
Production of a triton, plus a
residual. Sum of MT=700-749, if
they are present.
Production of a 3He particle plus a
residual. Sum of MT=750-799, if
they are present.
Production of an alpha particle, plus
a residual. Sum of MT=800-849, if
they are present.
Production of 2 alpha particles, plus
a residual.
Production of 3 alpha particles, plus
a residual.
(Unassigned)
Production of 2 protons, plus a
residual.
Production a proton and an alphaparticle, plus a residual.
Production of a triton and 2 alphaparticles, plus a residual.
Production of a deuteron and 2 alphaparticles, plus a residual.

Comments

Rarely used.
For incident protons, this isinelastic scattering (MT=600
is undefined).
For incident deuterons, this isinelastic scattering (MT=650
is undefined).
For incident tritons, this isinelastic scattering (MT=700
is undefined).
For incident 3He particles,
this is inelastic scattering(MT=750 is undefined).
For incident alpha particles,
this is inelastic scattering(MT=800 is undefined).

B.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresMT
115(z,pd)

116(z,pt)

117(z,dα)

118-119120
121-150
151(n,RES)

152-200
201(z,Xn)

202(z,Xγ)

203(z,Xp)

204(z,Xd)

205(z,Xt)

206(z,X3He)

207(z,Xα)

208(z,Xπ+)

209(z,Xπ0)210(z,Xπ-)

211(z,Xµ+)

212(z,Xµ-)

213(z,Xκ+)

214(z,Xκ0(long)

B.6

Description
Comments
Production of proton and a deuteron,plus a residual.
Production of proton and a triton,plus a residual.
Production of deuteron and an alphaparticle, plus a residual.
(Unassigned)
Not allowed for version 6.
Version 5: target destruction nonelastic minus total (n,n′γ)(Unassigned)
Incident neutrons only.
Resonance parameters that can beused to calculate cross sections at
different temperatures in the resolved
and unresolved energy regions.
(Unassigned)
Total neutron production.
Redundant; use in derived
files only.
Total gamma production.
Redundant; use in derived
files only.
Total proton production.
Redundant; use in derived
files only.
Total deuteron production.
Redundant; use in derived
files only.
Total triton production.
Redundant; use in derived
files only.
Total 3He production.
Redundant; use in derived
files only.
Total alpha particle production.
Redundant; use in derived
files only.
Total π+ production.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.
0
Total π production.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.
Total π- production.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.
Total µ+ production.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.
Total µ- production.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.
Total κ+ production.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.
Total κ0(long) production.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresMT
0

Description
Total κ (short) production.
0215(z,Xκ (short))

216(z,Xκ-)

Total κ- production.

217(z,Xp)

Total anti-proton production.

218(z,Xn)

Total anti-neutron production.

219-250251(n,...)

252(n,...)

253(n,...)

254-300
301-450(z,...)

451(z,...)

452(z,...)

453
454(z,...)

455(z,...)

456(z,...)

457
458(z,...)(n,...)

April 2001

Comments
For use in high-energy
evaluations.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.
For use in high-energy
evaluations.

(Unassigned)µ L , average cosine of the scattering Derived files only.
angle (laboratory system) for elastic
scattering of neutrons.
Derived files only.
ξ, average logarithmic energy
decrement for elastic scattering of
neutrons.
Derived files only.
γ, average of the square of thelogarithmic energy decrement
divided by twice the averagelogarithmic energy decrement, forelastic scattering of neutrons.
(Unassigned)
Energy release parameters, E , σ , for Derived files only.
total and partial cross sections; MT=
300 plus the reaction MT number,e.g., MT=302 is the elastic scattering
kerma.
Heading or title information; given in
File 1 only.
ν T , average total (prompt plus
delayed) number of neutrons released
per fission event.
(Unassigned)
Independent fission product yielddata.
ν d , average number of delayed
neutrons released per fission event.
ν p , average number of prompt
neutrons released per fission event.
Radioactive decay data.
Energy release in fission for incident
neutrons.

B.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

MT

459

(z,...)

460-464465-466
467-499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507-514
515
516
517
518
519-521522
523
524-525526
527
528
529-531
532
533
534

K

535

L1

536

L2

537

L3

538

M1

B.8

Description
Cumulative fission product yielddata.
(Unassigned)
Not allowed in version 6.

(Unassigned)
Total charged-particle stopping
power.
Total photon interaction.
Photon coherent scattering.
(Unassigned)
Photon incoherent scattering.
Imaginary scattering factor.
Real scattering factor.
(Unassigned)
Pair production, electron field.
Pair production; sum of MT=515,
517.
Pair production, nuclear field.
Not allowed in version 6.
(Unassigned)
Photoelectric absorption.
Photo-excitation cross section.
(Unassigned)
Electro-atomic scattering.
Electro-atomic bremsstrahlung.
Electro-atomic excitation crosssection.
(Unassigned)
Not allowed in version 6.
Atomic relaxation data.
(1s1/2) subshell photoelectric orelectro-atomic cross section.
(2s1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(2p1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(2p3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(3s1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.

Comments

Version 5: delayed andprompt neutrons fromspontaneous fission.

Redundant.

Version 5: MT=602.

Version 5: (γ,n).
Version 5: total photonuclear

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

MT

539

M2

540

M3

541

M4

542

M5

543

N1

544

N2

545

N3

546

N4

547

N5

548

N6

549

N7

550

O1

551

O2

552

O3

553

O4

554

O5

555

O6

556

O7

557

O8

558

O9

April 2001

Description(3p1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(3p3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(3d3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(3d5/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(4s1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(4p1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(4p3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(4dp3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(4d5/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(4f5/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(4f7/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(5s1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(5p1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(5p3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(5d3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(5d5/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(5f5/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(5f7/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(5g7/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(5g9/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.

Comments

B.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

MT

559

P1

560

P2

561

P3

562

P4

563

P5

564

P6

565

P7

566

P8

567

P9

568

P10

569

P11

570

Q1

571

Q2

572

Q3

573-599600(z,p0)

601(z,p1)

602(z,p2)

603(z,p3)

604(z,p4)

Description(6s1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6p1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6p3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6d3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6d5/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6f5/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6f7/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6g7/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6g9/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6h9/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(6h11/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(7s1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(7p1/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(7p3/2) subshell photoelectric or
elctro-atomic cross section.
(Unassigned)
Production of a proton leaving theresidual nucleus in the ground state.
Production of a proton, with residualin the 1st excited state.
Production of a proton, with residualin the 2nd excited state.
Production of a proton, with residualin the 3rd excited state.
Production of a proton, with residualin the 4th excited state.

Comments

Not allowed for incident
protons; use MT=2.
Version 5: photoelectric
absorption; see MT=522.

…
…

B.10

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

MT

649

(z,pc)

650(z,d0)

651(z,d1)

652(z,d2)

699…
…
(z,dc)

700(z,t0)

701(z,t1)

702(z,t2)

749…
…
(z,tc)

750(n,3He0)751(n,3He1)

799

…
…
3
(n, Hec)

800(z,α0)

801(z,α1)

Description
Production of a proton in thecontinuum not included in the above
discrete representation.
Production of a deuteron leaving theresidual nucleus in the ground state.
Production of a deuteron, with theresidual in the 1st excited state.
Production of a deuteron, with theresidual in the 2nd excited state.

Comments

Production of a deuteron in thecontinuum not included in the above
discrete representation.
Production of a triton leaving theresidual nucleus in the ground state.
Production of a triton, with residualin the 1st excited state.
Production of a triton, with residualin the 2nd excited state.

Production of a triton in thecontinuum not included in the above
discrete representation.
Production of a 3He particle leaving
the residual nucleus in the groundstate.
Production of a 3He, with residual in
the 1st excited state.
Production of a 3He in the continuum
not included in the above discrete
representation.
Production of an alpha particle
leaving the residual nucleus in the
ground state.
Production of an alpha particle, withresidual in the 1st excited state.

…
…

April 2001

B.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

MT

849

(z,αc)

850
851-870871-874875(z,2n0)876(z,2n1891…
(z,2nc)892-999

B.12

Description
Production of an alpha particle in thecontinuum not included in the above
discrete representation.
(Unassigned)
Lumped reaction covariances.
(Unassigned)
Production of 2 neutrons withresidual in the ground state.
Production of 2 neutrons withresidual in the 1st excited state.

Comments

Production of 2 neutrons in thecontinuum not included in the above
discrete representation.
(Unassigned)

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

LR Flags

Many reactions are sequential in nature. That is, a particle or gamma ray may be emitted
first, then the residual nucleus decays by one or more paths. Most often, the first stage of thereaction proceeds through a well-defined discrete state of the residual nucleus and the angulardependence of the first emitted particle must be uniquely described. A simple, two-body reaction is
one in which the incident particle is inelastically scattered from the target nucleus leaving the target
in an excited state, which immediately decays by gamma emission. Other excited states of the sametarget may, however, decay by particle emission, electron-positron pair formation, or internalconversion. It is often necessary to completely specify the reaction mechanism, in particular for
isotopic depletion and/or build-up calculations.
The following numbers can be used as flags to indicate the mode of decay of the residual
nucleus.
LR

0 or blank
1
22
23
24
25
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
39
40

Description

Simple reaction. Identity of product is implicit in MT. Only gamma rays may beemitted additionally.
Complex or breakup reaction. The identity and multiplicity of all products are given
explicitly in File 6.
α emitted (plus residual, if any).
3α emitted (plus residual, if any).
nα emitted (plus residual, if any).
2nα emitted (plus residual, if any).
p emitted (plus residual, if any).
2α emitted (plus residual, if any).
n2α emitted (plus residual, if any).
Residual nucleus decays only by gamma emission.
d emitted (plus residual, if any).
t emitted (plus residual, if any).
3
He emitted (plus residual, if any).
d2α emitted (plus residual, if any).
t2α emitted (plus residual, if any).
Internal conversion.
Electron-positron pair formation.

Examples1. T(d,γ)5He*(16.39) MeV)
2. 7Li(n,n')7Li* (0.48 MeV)
3. 7Li(n,n')7Li* (4.63 MeV)

April 2001

MT=102 LR=24 (5He decays via n+α)MT=51 LR=31 (Residual decays by γ emission)
MT=52 LR=33 (7Li* decays via t+α)

B.13

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

SUMMARY
Version 6 formats and procedures are recommended for all new evaluations. Version 6 format
is the only format allowed for incident charged particles. It must be taken into account, however,that many version 5 materials for incident neutrons will be carried over without technical changes tothe data.
A few files and several MT numbers are defined for the first time for version 6. A few MT
numbers allowed for 5 have now been removed and must be replaced. Other MT numbers areallowed only in version 5 and these are not defined here--the reader is referred to the version 5
manual. Many MT numbers above the 600 series are redefined for 6 and all version 5 materials
must be changed accordingly prior to reissue.
A few of the MT numbers are not defined for certain particles incident: for example, MT=1 is
not defined for incident charged particles: MT=50 is not defined for incident neutrons: MT=600 is
not defined for incident protons; etc. These exceptions are labeled but should be obvious if one
follows the explicit definitions closely.
Several MT numbers cannot be used with File 4 or 5; other MT numbers must have a File 6(File 4 and 5 are not allowed). The changes between previous format manuals are significant,therefore, much effort has been expended to explicitly define the MT numbers for version 6 and,hopefully to associate them with the proper files. For explicit information on usage, see Sections
0.0, 3.4, and 3.5.

B.14

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

APPENDIX CZA Designations of Materials and MAT Numbers

A floating-point number, ZA, is used to identify materials. If Z is the charge number and A themass number then ZA is computed from
ZA = (1000.0*Z) + A
For example, ZA for 238U is 92238.0, and ZA for beryllium is 4009.0. For materials other thanisotopes, the following rules apply. The MAT number is 100*Z+I where I is unique for the isotope
and its isomer state.
1.) If the material is an element that has more than one naturally occurring isotope, then A is set to0.0. For example, ZA for the element tungsten is 74000.0. The MAT number is 100*Z.
2.) For compounds, the ZA is arbitrary and is calculated from ZA=MAT+100. The MAT number
assignments for compounds have the following structure.
Hydrogen (except organics)
Deuterium
Lithium
Beryllium
Carbon (including organics)
OxygenMetals
Fuels

April 2001

1-10
11-20
21-25
26-30
31-44
45-50
51-70
71-99

C.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The presently recognized assignments are
Compound
Water
Para Hydrogen
Ortho Hydrogen
H in ZrH
Heavy Water
Para Deuterium
Ortho Deuterium
Be
BeO
Be2C
Be in BeO
Graphitel-Methanes-methane
Polyethylene
BenzeneO in BeO
Zr in ZrH
UO2
UC

C.2

MAT Number
1
2
3
7
11
12
13
26
27
28
29
31
33
34
37
40
46
58
75
76

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

APPENDIX D
Resonance Region Formulae
D.1. The resolved resonance region
The following resonance formalisms are given for a particular isotope in the laboratory system,without Doppler broadening.
D.1.1. Single-Level Breit-Wigner (SLBW): LRU=1, LRF=1
D.1.1.1. Elastic Scattering Cross Sections1
NSL −1σ n ,n ( E ) = ∑ σ nl ,n ( E ) ,
l =0

where

σ ln,n ( E ) = ( 2l + 1)

4πksin φ l22

Γ 2nr − 2Γ nr Γ sin 2φ l + 2 ( E − E ′r ) Γ nr sin 2φ l
1
2
k J
r=1
( E − E ′r ) + Γ2r
4
The hard-sphere phase shifts φl, the wave number k, the primed resonance energy E´r, the neutron
width Γnr, and through it the total width Γr, are all functions of energy, φl(E), k(E), E′r(E), Γnr(E), andΓr(E), but this dependence is not shown explicitly. Also, each resonance parameter carries theimplicit quantum numbers l and J, determined by the appropriate entries in the ENDF/B file. In casea given pair (l,J) is compatible with two different values of the channel spin, s, the width is a sum
over the two partial channel spin widths. This allows one to omit an explicit sum over channel spinwhen defining the cross sections.
+

π

NR J

g
2 ∑ J ∑

D.1.1.2. Radiative Capture Cross Section
NLS −1σ n ,γ ( E ) = ∑ σ nl ,γ ( E )
l=0

where

σ ln,γ ( E ) =

π
k

NR J

Γ nr Γγ r

r=1( E − Er′ ) +g
2 ∑ J ∑
Jand Γγr, the radiative capture width, is constant in energy

1

1 2
Γr
4

Processing codes should sum the cross section, as shown, from l=0 to l=NLS-1, including any "empty" or "nonresonant" channels, in order to get the potential-scattering contribution. If higher l-values contribute to the scatteringin the resonance region, it is the responsibility of the evaluator to provide a suitable File 3 contribution. (See Sections
2.4.23 and 2.4.24.)

April 2001

D.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.1.1.3. Fission Cross Section
NLS −1l
σ n, f ( E ) = ∑ σ n , f ( E )

,

l=0

where

σ ln, f ( E ) =

π

NR J

Γ nr Γ fr

r=1( E − E ′r ) +

∑g ∑
k
2

J

J

2

1 2
Γr
4

and Γfr, the fission width, is constant in energy.
D.1.1.4. The Competitive Reaction Cross Section.
The competitive reaction cross section, σn,x(E), is given in terms of analogous formulas involving
Γxr, the competitive width. By convention, the cross section for the competitive reaction is given
entirely in File 3, and is not to be computed from the resonance parameters. The reason for this isthat the latter calculation can be done correctly only for a single competitive channel, since the file
can define only one competitive width.
The statistical factor gJ = (2J+1)/2(2I+1) is obtained from the target spin I and the resonance spin
J given in File 2 as SPI and AJ, respectively.
The sum on l extends over all l-values for which resonance parameters are supplied. There will
be NLS terms in the sum. NLS is given in File 2 for each isotope. In general, ENDF/B resonancefiles are limited to l=0, 1, and 2, so that the potential-scattering contribution will be represented byhard-sphere scattering up to the energy where f-wave (l=3) potential scattering starts. At that point,
the evaluator may have to supply File 3 scattering to simulate the higher l-values. He may also
require a File 3 contribution at lower energies to represent any differences between hard-spherescattering and experiment.
The sum on J extends over all possible J-values for a particular l-value. NRJ is the number ofresonances for a given pair of l and J values and may be zero. NRS is the total number of resonances
for a given l-value and is given in File 2 for each l-value.
J=JMAXNRS =∑ NR ,J

J =JMIN

where

JMAX = l + I +

1
2

and
JMIN = l − I −1
2

if l ≥ I= I −l −1
2

if I ≥ l= I −l −D.2

12

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Γnr(|Er|) ≡ GNr is the neutron width, for the rth resonance for a particular value of l and J,
evaluated at the resonance energy Er. For bound levels, the absolute value |Er| is used.
P l (E) Γ nr ( E r )Γ nr =Pl ( E r )Γr = Γnr(E)+Γγr+Γfr+Γxr is the total width, a function of energy through Γnr and Γxr, since Γγr andΓfr are constant with respect to energy. The "competitive" width, Γxr is not entered explicitly in File
2. It is calculated from the equation:
Γ xr = Γ r − Γnr − Γγ r − Γ fr at E = Er
The following quantities are given in File 2 for each resonance:Er= ER, the resonance energyJ= AJ, the angular momentum ("spin") of the resonance stateI= SPI, the angular momentum ("spin") of the target nucleus
gJ= statistical factor (2J+1)/2(2I+1)
Γnr(|Er|) = GN, the neutron widthΓγr= GG, the radiation widthΓfr= GF, the fission width andΓr(|Er|)= GT, the total width evaluated at the resonance energy.
Since the competitive width Γxr, is not given, Γr should be obtained from File 2 directly, and notby summing partial widths.
For p-, d- and higher l-values, the primed resonance energy E´r is energy-dependent:

E r′ = E r +Sl ( E r ) − Sl ( E )2 Pl ( E r )Γ nr ( E r ) .

The fact that the shift is zero at each Er is an artifact of the SLBW formalism, and implies a different
R-matrix boundary condition for each resonance.
The neutron wave number in the center-of-mass system is given as:
k=

2m n
AWRI
|E|,
h AWRI +1.0

where
AWRI = ratio of the mass of a particular isotope to that of the neutron.
E= laboratory energy in eV.
The energy is written with absolute value signs so that the same formula can be used for positive
incident neutron energies and for negative (bound state) resonance energies. (When inelastic
scattering can occur, resonances below the level threshold are at "negative energy" in the inelastic
channel.)Sl is the shift factor,
S0 = 0 ,S1 = −

1,
1+ ρ 218 + 3ρ 2
S2 = −,
9 + 3ρ 2 + ρ 4
S3 = −

675 + 90 ρ 2 + 6 ρ 4.
225 + 45ρ 2 + 6 ρ 4 + ρ 6(the quantity ρ is defined below).
April 2001

D.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

For higher l-values, Sl is defined by Equation (2.9) in Reference 1. In conventional R-matrix
theory, the shift factors are defined differently for negative energies (Reference 1, Equations
2.11a-c). In ENDF, the positive-energy formulas are used, but the absolute value of E is used in
SLBW and MLBW. For the R-Matrix Limited format, Section D.1.7, a flag indicates whether shifts
are to be calculated or assumed to be zero for each particle-pair.
Pl is the penetration factor,
P0 = ρ ,P1 =ρ3,1+ ρ 2ρ5,P2 =9 + 3ρ 2 + ρ 4
P3 =

ρ7
.
225 + 45 ρ 2 + 6 ρ 4 + ρ 6

For higher l-values, the Pl are defined by Equation (2.9) in Reference 1. In conventional Rmatrix theory, the penetrabilities are zero for negative energies. The theory uses the "theoretical"
definition of a reduced width, Γ(E)=2Pl(E)γ2, where E is a channel energy (center-of-mass), and it
suffices to say that Pl(E) = 0 if E < 0.
In ENDF, the "experimental" definition is used, Γ(E)= Γ(|Er|)Pl(E)/Pl(|Er|), and it is necessary to
make the convention that a penetrability for a negative resonance energy is evaluated at its absolutevalue. A negative kinetic energy can occur in an exit channel if the reaction is exothermic, and in
this case Pl(E < 0) is zero.
φl is the (negative of a) hard-sphere phase shift,
φ0 = ρ ,φ = ρ − tan −1 ρ ,
1

 ⎫⎪
⎧⎪ 3ρ
,
2 ⎬

⎩⎪ 3 − ρ ⎭⎪φ2 = ρ − tan −1 ⎨

(

)

2
⎧ρ
 15 − ρ ⎫⎪⎪φ 3 = ρ − tan ⎨
.
2 ⎬
 ⎪
⎪ 15 − 6 ρ⎩⎭
For higher l-values, the φl are defined by Equation 2.12 in Reference 1. It is not necessary toevaluate a phase shift at negative energies.
ρ and ρ̂ are defined as k × RADIUS, where RADIUS is defined as follows:
−1

Let

2

= channel radius in units of 10-12 cm= 0.123 AWRI1/3 + 0.08 2(D.0)
AP= energy-independent scattering radius, which determines the low-energy
scattering cross section. It is given in File 2 following SPI.
AP(E) = energy-dependent scattering radius, given as a TAB1 card preceding the "SPI
AP.... NLS..." card.

a

The channel radius, strictly speaking, involves A1/3 (the target mass in amu), and not (AWRI)1/3, but as long as themass of the incident particle is approximately unity, as it is for neutrons, the difference is not important. AWRI =A/mn, where mn is the neutron mass (see Appendix H).

D.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

If

NRO = 0 (AP energy-independent)
NAPS = 0 ρ = ka; ρ̂ = k AP
NAPS = 1 ρ = ρ̂ = k AP

If

NRO = 1 (AP energy-dependent)
NAPS = 0 ρ = ka; ρ̂ = k AP(E)
NAPS = 1 ρ = ρ̂ = k AP(E)NAPS= 2 ρ = k AP; ρ̂ = k AP(E)

D.1.2. Multilevel Breit-Wigner (MLBW): LRU=1, LRF=2
The equations are the same as SLBW,3 except that a resonance-resonance interference term islincluded in the equation for elastic scattering of l-wave neutrons, σn,n
(E):
1
⎛
⎞
2Γ nr Γ ns ⎜ ( E − Er′ )( E − Es′ ) + Γ r Γ s ⎟NR j r −1
.
π
4
⎝
⎠
.
(D.1)
g
2
2
2
2
2 Σ J ∑ ∑k J′
r = 2 s =1 ( E − E r′ ) + ( Γ r / 2 )
E
E
+
/
2
−
Γ
(
( s )
s)

)(

(

)

This form, which has  NRJ2 energy-dependent terms and can involve a great deal of computer time,
may be written in the following form with only NRJ terms: (See Section 2.4.14)
π . NR J Gr Γ r + 2 H r ( E − Er′ )
(D.2)
g
2
2
2Σ JΣ
k J
r=1 ( E − E r′ ) + ( Γ r / 2 )whereΓ nr Γ ns ( Γ r + Γ s )1 NR J(D.3),
Σ
2 s=1 E ′ − E ′ 2 + 1 Γ + Γ 2( r s)( r s)(s ≠ r)
4
NR J
Γ nr Γ ns ( Er′ − Es′ )(D.4)
Hr = Σ
1
2
2
s=1
′
′
−
Γ
Γ
E
E
+
+
(
)
(
)
r
s
r
s
(s ≠ r)4
For the user who does not require ψ- and χ-broadening, the following equations, which aremathematically identical to the MLBW equations, require less computing time: (See Section 2.4.19)
Gr =

NLS −1σ n ,n ( E ) = ∑ σ nl ,n ( E )

(D.5)

l =0

σ nl ,n ( E ) =

π
k

2

I+

1
2

l+s

∑ ∑ g 1 − U (E)
J

lsJ
nn

2

NR sJ
⎞
i Γ lsJ
lsJ−2 i φ l ⎛
nr
U nn
E
=
1
+
( ) e ⎜ Σ⎟
r=1 E r′ − E − i Γ r / 2 ⎠
⎝

3

(D.6)

1 J = l −ss= I −
2(D.7)

Including footnote on page D.1.

April 2001

D.5

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.1.3 Reich-Moore (R-M): LRU = 1, LRF = 3
This description of the ENDF Reich-Moore formalism differs from previous versions by using
notation in closer agreement with References 1 and 5. The dependence of all quantities on channel
spin has been made explicit, to support a format extension which permits specifying the individual
channel-spin components of the neutron width.
Partial cross sections may be obtained from a collision matrix U a b , which connects entrance
channels a with exit channels b. In ENDF, the formalism is applied to neutron reactions, a = n:σ nb =πg n δ nb − U nb

2

(D.8)
k
These partial cross sections are not observable, but must be summed over the appropriate
entrance and exit channels to yield observable cross sections. The statistical factor gn is a result ofprior averaging over channels with different magnetic sub-states, since the ENDF formulae apply tounpolarized particles.
In the Reich-Moore formalism, the only reactions requiring explicit channel definitions areelastic scattering and fission; capture is obtained by subtraction (although it is possible to obtain it
directly from the collision matrix elements). Neutron channels are labeled by three quantum
numbers, l, s, and J. In the ENDF format, l runs from zero to NLS-1, the highest l-value that
contributes to the cross section in the energy range of interest. The channel spin s is the vector sumof the target spin I and the neutron spin i (1/2 ), and takes on the range of values | I - 1/2| to I + 1/2.
The total angular momentum J is the vector sum of l and s, and runs from | l - s | to l + s. The fission
channels do not correspond to individual two-body fission product breakup, but to Bohr-channels in
deformation space, which is why two are adequate for describing many neutron-induced fission
cross sections. It is not necessary to specify the quantum numbers associated with the two “ENDFallowed” fission channels, and they can simply be labeled f1 and f2.
If one sums over all incident channels n and exit channels b, and invokes unitarity, the resulting
total cross section can be expressed in terms of the diagonal matrix elements as
2π NLSσ T (E) = 2 ∑k l =0

2

I+

1
2

l+s

∑ ∑ g Re (1 − UJlsJ lsJ

1 J = l −ss= I −
2)(D.9)

The elastic cross section is obtained by summing the incident neutron channels over all possiblelsJ values and the exit neutron channels over those quantities l′s′J′ that have the same ranges as lsJ.
Conservation of total angular momentum requires that J′ = J; the ENDF format imposes additional“conservation rules” l′ = l and s′ = s which are actually just simplifying assumptions, with somebasis in theory and experiment. The six-fold summation then reduces to the familiar form
I+1

2
2π NLSσ nn ( E ) = 2 ∑ ∑k l =0 s = I − 1

l+s∑ g 1−U2

J = l −sJ2
lsJ lsJ.

The absorption (non-elastic) cross section is obtained by subtraction:
σ abs ( E ) = σ T ( E ) - σ n n ( E ) .

D.6(D.10)(D.11)

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Fission is obtained from the collision matrix by summing Eq. (D.8) over all incident lsJ values
and over the two exit fission channels, b = f1 and b = f2,
I+12
2
2π NLS 2 l + s
σ f ( E ) = 2 ∑ ∑ ∑ g J ⎡⎢ U nflsJ1 + U nflsJ2 ⎤⎥ .
⎦k l =0 s = I − 12 J = l − s ⎣(D.12)The Reich-Moore formalism is described in Reference 2. Here we repeat the level-matrix formof the collision matrix as given in the earlier versions of this manual:−1− i φ +φ− δ nb ⎥ ,U nbJ = e ( n b ) ⎢ 2 ( I − K )(D.13)
nb
⎣⎢
⎦⎥
where
1/ 2
1/ 2
i
Γ n r Γb r.
(D.14)( I - K )n b = δ n b ∑2 r E r - E - i Γγ r / 2
Here φ b is zero for fission, φ n = φ l (defined previously), and the summation is over thoseresonances r which have partial widths in both of the channels n and b; Er is the resonance energy;
Γγr is the “eliminated” radiation width; Γnr and Γbr are the partial widths for the rth resonance inchannels n and b.
If we define a matrix ρ by the equation
ρ nb = δ nb − ( (1 − K ) −1 )(D.15))(

nb

then the various cross sections take the following forms:
Total:σ T (E) =Elastic:

σ nn =

2π

g ⎡⎣(1 - cos 2φ ) + 2Re( ρ e φ ) ⎤⎦ .
∑
k
2

-2i

J

nn

l

(D.16)llsJ

πg ⎡⎣ 2 − 2 cos 2φ + 4Re( ρ e φ ) − 4Re( ρ ) + 4 | ρ | ⎤⎦ .
∑
k
2

-2i

J

l

nn

2

l

nn

nn

(D.17)

lsJ

Absorption (fission plus capture):

σ n ,abs ( E ) =4π

Fission:∑ g ⎡⎣ Re( ρ ) − ρ
k

nn

4π

2

J

2

nn

2

lsJ

(D.18)+ ρn f 2 ⎤(D.19)⎥⎦lsJ
The phase shifts and penetrabilities are evaluated in terms of a and AP as described earlier. The
shift factor has been set equal to zero in the above equations (Er′→Er); hence they are strictly correct
only for s-wave resonances. Originally, the ENDF Reich-Moore format was used for low-energy
resonances in fissile materials, which are s-waves. However, it is believed that the “no-shift”
formulae can be safely applied to higher l-values also, since the difference in shape between a shifted
resonance and one that is not shifted at the same energy has no practical significance.

σ nf ( E ) =April 2001

g ⎡ρ
∑
⎢⎣
k

⎤
⎦

2

J

nf1

D.7

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Footnote 1 applies to the Reich-Moore formalism also. Until this revision, the format did not
permit the specification of channel spin; therefore, if an evaluation includes l > 0 resonances for I >0 nucleus, it was necessary for the processing codes to include the potential-scattering contributions
from the “missing” channels. (It is adequate to arbitrarily assume that the supplied values are for thes = I −1/2 channels, and to use the same potential-scattering radius in the missing I +1/2 channels.
See Sections 2.4.23 and 2.4.24.) Having the ability to specify which channel spin is intended does
not solve this problem, unless the evaluator actually supplies resonances for both channels. In cases
where the data can be fit with all the resonances in the same s-channel, the “other one” will still beabsent from the ENDF file, since the format stipulates nothing about avoiding missing channels.
This is why it is reasonable for the processing codes to run over the triple lsJ loop, inserting potential
scattering in every channel, and resonances whenever they are supplied.
Note: When both positive and negative AJ values are given in the file, negative AJ implies s = I1/2 and positive AJ implies s = I +1/2. When AJ = 0, one and only one of I−1/2 or I +1/2 is possible,
so the possible ambiguity of ±0 does not arise. In this case s = l, parity conservation prevents theoccurrence, for a given J, of two s-values differing by one unit.
D.1.4. Adler-Adler (AA): LRU=1, LRF=4
The formulae, taken from References 3 and 4, are given for the total, radiative capture, andfission cross sections. They have been slightly re-cast to make them conform to the definitions usedearlier in this Appendix. Furthermore, only the l=0 terms are given, consistent with current usage ofthis formalism. Procedures are discussed in Section 2.4.15. Since only s-waves are considered,higher l-wave contributions to the potential scattering must be put into File 3 by the evaluator.

1. Total Cross Section:
4π
σ T ( E ) = 2 sin 2φ 0
k
T
T
T
T
π E ⎡ NRS ν r ( G r cos 2φ 0 + H r sin 2φ 0 ) + ( µ r − E ) ( H r cos 2φ 0 − Gr sin 2φ 0 )+ 2 ⎢Σ
(D.20)
2k ⎢⎣ r=1( µ r − E ) +ν 2r+ AT1 + AT2 E + AT3 E 2 + AT4 E 3 + BT1E + BT2 E 2 ⎤⎦ .

2. Radiative Capture Cross Section:γγ
π E ⎡ NRS ν rGr + ( µ r − E ) H r
σ n ,γ ( E ) = 2 ⎢ ∑2k ⎢⎣ r=1 ( µ r − E ) +ν r2+ AC1 + AC 2/E + AC 3/ E 2 + AC 4/ E 3 + BC1E + BC 2 E 2 ⎤⎦(D.21)

3. Fission Cross Section:

σ n , f (E) =π E ⎡ NRS ν rGrf +( µ r − E)H rf⎢∑
2
22
k ⎣ r=1 ( µ r − E ) +ν r

(D.22)+ AF 1 + AF 2/E + AF 3/ E + AF 4/ E + BF1E + BF 2 E ⎤⎦2

32

Although the format uses different names for µ and v for each reaction, they are equal:
DETr = DEFr = DECr = µr
DWTr = DWFr = DWGr = νr

D.8

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.1.5. General R-Matrix (GRM): LRU = 1, LRF = 5

no longer available

D.1.6 Hybrid R-function (HRF): LRU = 1, LRF = 6

no longer available

D.1.7 R-Matrix Limited Format (LRF) : LRU =1, LRF = 7

In R-Matrix theory, a channel may be defined by c = (α, l, s, J), where•

α represents the two particles making up channel; α includes mass (ma and mb with subscript a
indicating the incident particle for an entrance channel), charge (Za and Zb), spin (ia and ib) andparity (πa and πb) and all other quantum numbers for each of the two particles, plus the Q-value.

•

l is the orbital angular momentum; the associated parity is (-1)l.

•s represents the channel spin (including the associated parity); that is, s is the vector sum of thespins of the two particles of the pair.

•

J is the total angular momentum (and associated parity); J is the vector sum of l and s.

Only J and its associated parity are conserved for any given interaction. The other quantum numbers
may differ from channel to channel, so long as the sum rules for spin and parity are obeyed.
In the Reich-Moore approximation to R-matrix theory, the radiation width is treatedseparately and differently from widths for other channels (which are hereafter referred to as “particle
channels”). In this LRF=7 format, there is assumed to be an “eliminated channel” which, for thestrict interpretation of the Reich-Moore approximation, contains all the radiation width; in thisformat, it is possible for some portion of the radiation width to be treated in the same fashion as theparticle widths. In the equations below, the eliminated width appears only in the denominator of theR-matrix.
In all formulae given below, spin quantum numbers (e.g., J ) are implicitly assumed toinclude the associated parity. Vector sum rules are implicitly assumed to be obeyed; readers
unfamiliar with these sum rules are referred to Sect. D.1.7.6 for details.
Let the angle-integrated cross sections from entrance channel c to exit channel c' with total
angular momentum J be represented by σcc'. This cross section is given in terms of the scatteringmatrix U cc' as

σ cc ' =

π

k

2
a

g Jα eiwc δ cc ' − U cc ' 2 δ JJ ' ,(1)where (l) kα is the center-of mass momentum associated with incident particle-pair α, (2) is gJα is thespin statistical factor, and (3) wc is zero for non-Coulomb channels. (Details for the charged-particle
case are presented later.) The spin statistical factor is given by

April 2001

D.9

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

g Jα =

2J + 1,( 2ia + 1)( 2ib + 1)

(2)

2ma mb2E .
(ma + mb )2(3)

and center-of mass momentum kα by

kα2 =The scattering matrix U can be written in terms of the matrix W as

U cc ' = Ω cWcc ' Ω c ' ,(4)i ( wc −φc )(5)where Ω is given byΩc = eHere again, wc is zero for non-Coulomb channels, and the potential scattering phase shifts for nonCoulomb interactions φc are defined in many references (e.g., Ref. 1). The matrix W in Eq. (4) isrelated to the R-matrix (in matrix notation with indices suppressed) via

W = P 1 / 2 ( I − RL) −1 ( I − RL* ) P −1 / 2(6)

The quantity I in this equation represents the identity matrix. The quantity L in Eq. (6) is given by
L = ( S − B ) + iP ,(7)with P the penetration factor, S the shift factor, and B the arbitrary boundary constant at the channel
radius ac. Formulae for P and S are likewise found in many references (see, e.g., Eq. (2.9) in Ref. 1);
for non-Coulomb interactions see Table D.1.7.1 for the appropriate formulae. For fission, thepenetrability is unity. For non-eliminated capture channels, the penetrability is unity. For two
charged particles, formulae for the penetrabilities are given in Sect. D.1.7.4.
In the eliminated-channel approximation, the R-matrix of Eq. (6) [for the spin group defined bytotal spin J and implicit parity π] has the form⎡⎤γ λc γ λc 'Rcc ' = ⎢∑+ Rcbkgδ cc ' ⎥ δ JJ ' ,⎢⎣ λ Eλ − E − iΓλγ / 2⎥⎦(8)where all levels (resonances) of that spin group are included in the sum. Subscripts λ designate theparticular level; subscripts c and c' designate channels (including particle-pairs and all the relevant
quantum numbers). Again, the width Γλγ occurring in the denominator corresponds to the“eliminated” non-interfering capture channels of the Reich-Moore approximation.
The “background R-matrix” Rcbkg of Eq. (8) will be discussed in Sect. D.1.7.7.
The channel width Γλc is given in terms of the reduced width amplitude γλc by
D.10

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresΓλc = 2 γ λ2c Pc (E ) ,(9)where Pc is the penetrability, whose value is a function of the type of particles in the channel, of theorbital angulat momentum l, and of the energy E. Note that the reduced width amplitude γλc isalways independent of energy, but the width Γλc may depend on energy via the penetration factor.
Cross sections may be calculated by using the above expressions for R and L to calculate W, andfrom there calculating U and, ultimately, σ. However, while Eq. (6) for W is correct, an equivalent
form which is computationally more stable is
W = I + 2i X

,

(

) RP

(10)

where X is given in matrix notation by
X = P1/ 2 L−1 L−1 − R

−1

1/ 2

(11)

When the suppressed indices and implied summations are inserted, the expression of X becomes[]

X cc ' = Pc1/ 2 L−c1 ∑ ( L−1 − R) −1 cc" Rc"c ' Pc1'/ 2δ JJ ' .

(12)

c"

The various cross sections are then written in terms of X.

April 2001

D.11

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Table D.1.7.1. Hard sphere penetrability (penetration factor) P, level shift factor S, andpotential scattering phase shift φ for orbital angular momentum l, center of mass momentum
k, and channel radius ac, with ρ = kac.

φl

l
0

Pl
ρ

Sl
0

ρ

1

ρ3/(1 + ρ2)-1 / (1 + ρ2)

ρ-tan-1 ρ

2

ρ5 / (9 + 3 ρ2 + ρ4)-(18 + 3 ρ2) / (9 + 3 ρ2 + ρ4)

ρ-tan-1[3ρ / (3 - ρ2)]3

ρ7 / (225 + 45 ρ2) +6ρ4 + ρ6)-(675 + 90 ρ2 + 6 ρ4) /(225 + 45 ρ2 + 6 ρ4 + ρ6)

ρ-tan-1[ρ(15-ρ2) / (15-6 ρ2)]4

ρ9 / (11025 + 1575 ρ2 +
135ρ4 + 10ρ6 + ρ8-(44100 + 4725 ρ2 + 270 ρ4 + 10 ρ6) /(11025 + 1575 ρ2 + 135 ρ4 + 10 ρ6 + ρ8)

ρ-tan-1[ρ(105 - 10 ρ2) /(105 – 45 ρ2 + ρ4)]l

ρ 2 Pl −1(l − Sl −1 )2 + Pl 2−1

ρ 2 (l − Sl −1 )(l − Sl −1 ) 2 + Pl −21−lφl −1 − tan −1 (( Pl −1 /(l − S l −1 ) )or

Bl = ( Bl −1 + X l )/(1 − Bl −1 X l )with

Bl = tan( ρ − φl )andX l = ( Pl −1 ) /(l − S l −1 )D.12

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.1.7.1 Energy-Differential (Angle-Integrated) Cross Sections (Non-Coulomb Channels)

The observable cross sections are found in terms of X by first substituting Eq. (4, 5, and 10)
into Eq. (1), summing over spin groups (i.e., over Jπ), and then summing over all channels
corresponding to those particle pairs and spin groups. If Xr represents the real part and Xi theimaginary part of X, then the angle-integrated (but energy-differential) cross section for theinteraction which leads from particle-pair α to particle-pair α′ has the form

σα,α' (E) =

2
2 ⎤
⎡ 2
4π
g
sin ϕc (1− 2Xcci ) − Xcci sin( 2ϕc ) δα,α' + ∑{Xcci ' + Xccr ' } ⎥ .
2 ∑ Jα ∑ ⎢
kα J
c ⎣
c'
⎦

(

)

(13)

[This formula is accurate only for cases in which one of particles in α is a neutron; however, bothparticles in α′ may be charged.]
In Eq. (13) the summations are over those channels c and c′ {of the spin group defined by Jπ}
for which the particle-pairs are respectively α and α′. More than one “incident channel” c = (α, l, s, J
) can contribute to this cross section, e.g., when both l = 0 and l = 2 are possible, or when, in the caseof incident neutrons and non-zero spin target nuclei, both channel spins are allowed. Similarly, there
may be several “exit channels” c′ = (α′, l ′, s′, J ′ ), depending on the particular reaction being
calculated (elastic, inelastic, fission, etc.).
The total cross section (for non-Coulomb initial states) is the sum of Eq. (13) over all
possible final-state particle-pairs α′, assuming the scattering matrix is unitary (that is, assuming thatthe sum over c′ of |Ucc′|2 = 1). Written in terms of the X matrix, the total cross section has the form
4π⎤
⎡1σα, total (E) = 2 ∑ gJα ∑ ⎢ sin2 ϕc + Xcci cos(2ϕc ) − Xccr sin(2ϕc )⎥ ,
(14)
kα J
⎦
c ⎣2
where again the sum over c includes only those channels of the Jπ spin group for which the particlepair is α.
The angle integrated elastic cross section is given by

σα , α (E) =4πkα2∑ g α ∑ ⎢⎣sin ϕ (1 − 2 X ) − X sin ( 2ϕ ) + ∑ {X + X }⎥⎦ . (15)
⎡

J

J

2

c

i
cc

r
cc

i
cc '

c

c

r2
cc '

⎤

c'

In this case, both c and c′ are limited to those channels of the Jπ spin group for which the particlepair is α; again, there may be more than one such channel for a given spin group.
Similarly, the reaction cross section from particle-pair α to particle-pair α′ (where α′ is not equalto α) is224π
σ α , α ( E ) = 2 ∑ g Jα ∑ ∑ X cci ' + X ccr ' .
(16)
kα J
c
c'

[

]

Here c is restricted to those channels of the Jπ spin group from which the particle-pair is α, and c′ toApril 2001

D.13

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

those channels for which the particle-pair is α′.
The absorption cross section has the form

σ α absorption ( E ) =

4π
kα2

⎡

∑ g α ∑ ⎢⎣ X − ∑ { X
i
cc

J

J

c

i 2
cc '

c'

2 ⎤
+ X ccr ' }⎥
⎦

.

(17)

Here both the sum over c and the sum over c′ include all incident particle channels (i.e., particle-pair
α only) for the Jπ spin group.
The capture cross section for the eliminated radiation channels can be calculated directly as

σα γ ( E ) =

4π
kα2

⎡

∑ g α ∑ ⎢ X − ∑{ X
J

J

inc c

⎣

i
cc

i 2
cc '

all c '

2 ⎤+ X ccr ' }⎥
⎦

,

(18)

or may be found by subtracting the sum of all reaction cross sections from the absorption crosssection. In Eq. (18), the sum over c includes all incident particle channels for the Jπ spin group, andthe sum over c′ includes all particle channels, both incident and exit, for that spin group.
D.1.7.2 Angular Distributions

Angular distributions (elastic, inelastic, or other reaction) cross sections for incident neutrons
can be calculated from Reich-Moore resonance parameters. Following Blatt and Biedenharn [Ref. 7]
with some notational changes, the angular distribution cross section in the center-of-mass system
may be writtend σ ss '= ∑ CLαα ' ( E ) PL ( cos β ) ,
d ΩCM
L

(19)

in which the subscript αα′ indicates which type of cross section is being considered PL is the
Legendre polynomial of degree L, and β is the angle of the outgoing neutron (or other particle)
relative to the incoming neutron in the center-of-mass system. The coefficients CLαα′ (E) are givenby1
C Lα α ' ( E ) =
∑ ∑ ∑
∑
∑
∑
4kα2 J 1 J 2 c1 = (α l1 s1 J 1 ) c1 ' = (α ' l1 ' s1 ' J 1 ) c 2 = (α l 2 s 2 J 2 ) c 2 ' = (α ' l 2 ' s 2 ' J 2 )(20)
× B{l1 s1 l1 ' s1 ' J 1 } {l 2 s 2 l 2 ' s 2 ' J 2 } L[]

1Re ( δ c1c1 ' − U c 2 c 2 ' ) ( δ c1c1 ' − U c*2 c 2 ' ) ,(2ia + 1) (2ib + 1)

where the various summations are to be interpreted as follows:(1) sum over all spin groups defined by spin J1 and the implicit associated parity.

D.14

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures(2) sum over all spin groups defined by spin J2 and implicit associated parity.
(3) sum over all those channels c1 belonging to the J1 spin group and having particle-pair α[c1 = (α, l1, s1, J1)].
(4) sum over those channels c1′ J1 spin group with particle-pair α′ [c1′ = (α′, l′1, s′1, J1)].
(5) sum over those channels c2 J2 spin group with particle-pair α [c2 = (α, l2, s2, J2)].
(6) sum over those channels c2′ J2 spin group with particle-pair α′ [c2′ = (α′, l′2, s′2, J2)].
Also note that ia and ib are spins of the two particles in particle-pair α.
The geometric factor B can be exactly evaluated as a product of terms
B{l s l ' s ' J } {l s l ' s ' J } L = Al s l ' s ' ; J Al s l ' s ' ; J Dl s l ' s ' l s l ' s ' ; L J J
1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 22

1 1 1 11

2 2 2 22

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

1

2

,

(21)

where the factor Al1 s1 l1 's1 '; J1 is of the form
Al s l ' s ' ; J =1 1 1 1( 2 l1 + 1 ) ( 2 l1' + 1 ) ( 2 J1 + 1 ) ∆ ( l1 J1 s1 ) ∆ ( l1' J1 s1' ) .

1

(22)

The expression for D is
Dl s l ' s ' l s l ' s ' ; L J J = (2 L + 1) ∆2 ( J1 J 2 L ) ∆2 (l1 l2 L ) ∆2 (l 1' l '2 L)
1 1 1 1 2

2 2

2

1

2

'

× w ( l1 J1 l2 J 2 , s1 L ) w( l 1' J1 l '2 J 2 , s 1' L ) δ s1 s 2 δ s ' s ' (−1) s1 − s1
1

×

2

(23)

n ! ( −1 ) nn' ! (−1) n ',(n − 11 )! (n − l2 )! (n − L )! (n'−l1' )! (n ' − l2' )! (n ' − L )!

in which n is defined by
2 n = l1 + l2 + L ;(24)

D is zero if l1+l2+L is an odd number. A similar expression defines n′. The ∆2 term is given by∆2 (abc) =(a + b − c)! (a + b + c)! (a + b + c)!
,(a + b + c + 1)!

(25)

for which the arguments a, b, and c are to be replaced by the appropriate values given in Eqs. (22)and (23). The expression for ∆2 (a b c) implicitly includes a selection rule for the arguments; that is,the vector sum must hold:r v r
a +b =c .

April 2001

(26)

D.15

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The quantity w in Eq. (23) is defined asw (l1 J1 l2 J 2 , s L ) =××(−1) k + l1 + J 1 + l 2 + J 2 (k + 1)!
k = k min (k − ( l + J + s ) )! (k − ( l + J + s ) )!
1
1
2
2
k max

Σ

1

(27)

(k − (l1 + l2 + L) )! (k − ( J1 + J 2 + L) )!
1( l1 + J1 + l2 + J 2 − k )! ( l1 + J 2 + s + L − k )! ( l2 + J1 + s + L − k )!

(and similarly for the primed expression), where kmin and kmax are chosen such that none of thearguments of the factorials are negative. That is,
kmin = max { ( l1 + J1 + s ), ( l2 + J 2 + s ), ( l1 + l2 + L ), ( J1 + J 2 + L ) }kmax = min { ( l1 + J1 + l2 + J 2 ), ( l1 + J 2 + s + L ), ( l2 + J1 + s + L ) }

.

(28)

.

(29)

Single-channel case
For the single-channel case, the coefficients CLαα’ (E) reduce to

C Lα α ( E ) =

1
4 kα2

∑ ∑
J1

J2

∑

c1 = (α l1 s1 J1 )∑c 2 = (α l 2 s 2 J 2 )B{ l1 s1 l1 s1 J1 } { l2 s2 l2 s2 J 2 } L[

1×Re (1 − U c1 c1 ) (1 − U c*2 c2 )( 2 ia + 1) ( 2 ib + 1)]

where the existence of only one channel requires that the primed quantities of Eq. (25) be equal tothe unprimed (e.g., α = α’). The geometric factor B becomesB{ l1 s1 l1 s1 J1 } { l2 s2 l2 s2 J 2 } L = A l1 s1 l1 s1 ; J1 A l2 s2 l2 s2 ; J 2 D l1 s1 l1 s1 l2 s2 l2 s2 ; L J1 J 2

,

(30)

where the factor A reduces to the simple form
Al1 s1 l1 s1 ; J 1 = ( 2 l1 + 1) ( 2 J1 + 1) ∆2 ( l1 J1 s1 )

,

(31)

and the expression for D reduces to

D l1 s1 l1 s1 l 2 s 2 l 2 s 2 ; L J 1 J 2 = ( 2 L + 1) ∆2 ( J1 J 2 L ) ∆4 ( l1 l2 L ) w2 ( l1 J1 l2 J 2 , s1 L ) δ s1 s 2
⎡
⎤
n!
× ⎢
⎥
⎣ (n − l1 )! (n − l2 )! (n − L )! ⎦2

. (32)

in which n is again defined as in Eq. (24).
D.16

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.1.7.3 Kinematics for angular distributions of elastic scattering

If E represents the laboratory kinetic energy of the incident neutron, E′ the lab kinetic energy ofthe outgoing particle, θ the laboratory angle of the outgoing neutron, and Q the Q-value for thereaction, the E′ may be expressed in terms of E, θ, and Q as⎡macosθ +
E' = E ⎢⎢ ma + mb⎣

2⎛ ma ⎞⎛ mb ⎞⎟⎟⎜⎜⎟⎟ − sin 2 θ ⎜⎜⎝ ma + mb ⎠⎝ ma + mb ⎠

2

⎤
⎥
⎥
⎦

2

.

(33)

where ma represents the mass of the incident particle (neutron) and mb, the mass of the sample(target) nucleus. Similarly, the center-of-mass angle β between outgoing and incoming neutron isfound fromcos β = ±ma ⎧⎪⎨ cosθ
mb ⎪⎩

⎫⎪
mb2
− sin 2 θ − sin 2 θ ⎬ ,
2
ma
⎪⎭

(34)

and the Jacobian of transformation from center-of-mass to laboratory system isd (cos β )ma
1 + ( 2 cos 2 θ − 1) ma2 / mb2= 2 cosθ+d (cosθ )mb
1 − sin 2 θ ma2 / mb2

.

(35)

The elastic angular distribution cross section in the laboratory system is then found by combining
Eq. (15 or 29) with (35), using the relationship in Eq. (34), to givedσd σ d (cos β )(θ ) =d Ωlabd ΩCM d (cosθ )

.

(36)

Note that the lowest energy into which a neutron may scatter (i.e., the energy of a neutron after
180-degree scattering) is⎡ m − ma ⎤E ' (cos θ = −1) = E ⎢ b⎥⎣ mb + ma ⎦

2

,

(37)

and the energy of 90-degree scattering is⎡ m − ma ⎤E ' (cos θ = 0) = E ⎢ b⎥ .
⎣ mb + ma ⎦April 2001

(38)

D.17

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.1.7.6 Spin and Angular Momentum Conventions

The spin and angular momentum conventions used in the Classic Reich-Moore Format aredescribed in Table D.1.7.6. Note that the word “channel” refers to the physical configuration as wellas to the quantum numbers given here. For example, for an incident neutron (intrinsic spin i = ½)
v rr
impinging on a target (sample) whose spin is I, the channel spin is s, where s = i + I . The relative
orbital angular momentum of this channel (neutron + target) is l, and total spin is J, whererr r
J = s + l . The exit channel might be the same as the entrance channel, or it might include, forexample, two particles whose individual spins are i′ and I′ and whose channel spin is s′, wherer rrs ' = i ' + I ' . The relative angular momentum of the two particles is l′, and the total J must satisfyrr r
J = s' + l '.
For readers unfamiliar with vector summation, the rules are as follows: All quantum numbers
are either integer (0, 1, 2, …) or half-integer (1/2, 3/2, 5/2, …). If vectors of magnitude a and b are
to be added, then the sum c has magnitude in the range | a-b | ≤ c ≤ a + b; c takes on only integer
values if a + b is integer, and half-integer values if a + b is half-integer. The parity associated with cis the product of the parities associated with a and b. Note also that parity associated with orbital
angular momentum l is rarely expressed explicitly, as it is always (-1)1.
Table D.1.7.6 Spin and angular momentum conventions
SymbolMeaningi or i′Intrinsic spin of incident neutron or outgoing particle½ for incident neutron

I or I ′Spin of target or residual nuclei

integer or half-integerl or l′Orbital angular momentum of incident or outgoing non-negative integer
particler r
r r
Incident or outgoing channel spin, equal to target spin sr = I + i or sr ' = I ' + i 'plus incident particle spin
r r
r r
r
(1) Spin of resonanceJ = l + s = l ' + s'(2) Spin of excited level in the compound nucleus(3) Total angular momentum quantum numbers or s′J

D.18

Value or range of values

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.1.7.7 Extensions to R-matrix theory

As stated in Eq. (6), the R-matrix has the form⎡⎤γ λ c γ λc '+ R cbkg δ cc ' ⎥ δ J J ' .
R c c' = ⎢ ∑⎣⎢ λ Eλ − E − i Γλγ / 2
⎦⎥

(39)

The external or background R-matrix Rcbkg can be written in many different ways; four options areavailable in the RML format:
Option 0.

Rcbkg = 0 (in which case the background is described by “dummy” resonances whoseenergies lie outside the range of validity of this parameterization).

Option 1.

Rcbkg is a tabulated complex function of the energy.

Option 2.

Rcbkg is a real statistical parameterization of the form available in SAMMY [ref.11],⎡ E up − E ⎤Rcext ( E ) = R con , c + R lin , c E + R q , c E 2 − slin , c ( Ecup − Ecdown ) − ( scon, c + slin , c E ) ln ⎢ c down ⎥ .
⎣ E − Ec ⎦Option 3.

(40)

Rcbkg is a complex statistical parameterization of the forms described by Fröhner [ref. 6& 10],
⎡
⎤
⎢
⎥
⎢
⎥
⎞
⎛
Q
Γ
/
γ
ext
-1 E − E ⎟.
(41)i
R c ( E ) = R c + 2sc ⎢ tanh ⎜⎜+⎟2⎥⎝ Q/2 ⎠⎢⎛ (E − E) ⎞ ⎥⎟⎟ ⎥1 − ⎜⎜⎢⎢⎣⎝ Q / 2 ⎠ ⎥⎦with
Q = Ecup − Ecdown

and

(

)

E = Ecup + Ecdown / 2 .

(42)

D.2. THE UNRESOLVED RESONANCE REGION: LRU=2, LRF=1 or 2
Average resonance parameters are provided in File 2 for the unresolved region. Parameters are
given for possible l- and J-values (up to d-wave, l = 2) and the following parameters may be energy0dependent: Dl , J , Γ nlJ , Γγ lJ , Γ flJ , and Γ xlJ . The parameters are for the single-level Breit-Wigner
formalism. Each width is distributed according to a chi-squared distribution with a designatednumber of degrees of freedom. The number of degrees of freedom may be different for neutron andfission widths and for different (l,J) values. These formulae do not consider Doppler broadening.
April 2001

D.19

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.2.1. Cross Sections in the Unresolved Region
Definitions and amplifying comments on the following are given in Section D.2.2.

a. Elastic Scattering Cross Section
NLS −1

σ n,n ( E ) = ∑ σ ln,n ( E ) ,l=0

σ ln,n ( E ) =

4π
k

2

( 2l + 1) sin 2φ l⎤
2π 2 NJS ⎡ g J Γ n Γ n22−Γnl , J sin φl ⎥⎢∑2
Γ l ,Jk J ⎣ D l,J⎦
The asymmetric term in E−E´r is assumed to average to zero under the energy-averaging denoted by< >.
+b. Radiative Capture Cross Section
NLS −1σ n,γ ( E ) = ∑ σ ln,γ ( E ) ,l=0

σ ln,γ ( E ) =Γ n Γγ2π 2 NJS g J
k

2

∑
J

Γ

D l, Jl,Jc. Fission Cross Section
NLS −1σ n, f ( E ) = ∑ σ ln, f ( E ) ,
l=0

σ

D.20

l
n, f

(E) =

2π 2 NJS g J

∑
k
2

J

D l,J

ΓnΓ f
Γ

.
l ,J

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The sum over l in the above equations extends up to l = 2 or NLS-1 (the highest l-value forwhich data are given). For each value of l, the sum over J has NJS terms. The number of J-states fora particular l-state will depend on the value of l. NLS and NJS are given in File 2.
The averages are re-written as
⎛
⎞
Γn Γn
= ⎜ Γnl,J Γnl,J ⎟ R n,l,J
Γ l,J ⎝ Γl,J ⎠Γn ΓγΓ⎛Γ Γ ⎞= ⎜ nl,J γ l,J ⎟ Rγ l,J , andl,J⎝ Γl,J ⎠⎛Γ Γ ⎞= ⎜ nl,J fl,J ⎟ R fl,J
Γ l,J ⎝ Γl,J ⎠where Rγl,J, Rfl,J and Rnl,J are width-fluctuation factors for capture, fission, and elastic scattering,
respectively. Associated with each factor is the number of degrees of freedom for each of theaverage widths, and the integrals are to be evaluated using the MC2-II method.
Γn Γ f

Data given in File 2 for each (l,J) stateµnl,J= AMUN, the number of degrees of freedom for neutron widthsµfl,J= AMUF, the number of degrees of freedom for fission widthsµxl,J= AMUX, the number of degrees of freedom for competitive widthsµγl,J= AMUG, the number of degrees of freedom for radiation widths
Γ x ,l ,J = GX, the average competitive reaction width0Γ n ,l , J= GN0, the average reduced neutron widthΓγ ,l , J

= GG, the average radiation widthΓ f ,l , J= GF, the average fission width

D l ,J= D, the average level spacing

The average neutron widths are defined in Section D.2.2.2, Equation (31c), where
Γ nlJ = Γ n (l , J ) . Degrees of freedom are discussed in Section 2.4.20.
The average total width, at energy E, isΓl , J = Γ nl , J + Γγ l , J + Γ fl , J + Γ xl , J ,and all widths are evaluated at energy E. J=AJ, I=SPI, and l=L are given in File 2. The penetration
factors and phase shifts are functions of a or AP, as describe earlier.
D.2.2. Definitions for the Unresolved Resonance Region
Editions of ENDF-102 prior to ENDF/B-V have had some errors in the "Definitions" section ofAppendix D (previously Section D.2.1). To clarify the points and facilitate parallel reading with
Gyulassy and Perkins, Reference 8, their parenthesized indices will be used. Section D.2.3 contains
a table of equivalences to the notation used in D.2.1 and Section D.2.4 compares the present
discussion with those previously given.

April 2001

D.21

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.2.2.1. Sums and Averages
In an energy interval ∆ε, let the resonances be identified by a subscript λ = 1, 2, … which goesover all the resonances. The present discussion is concerned with the combinatorial aspects of level
sequences, hence λ enumerates all the resonances, whether their widths are observably large or not.
One purpose of this section is to permit estimation of missed resonances by comparing observed
level densities or strength functions with the theoretically-expected relations. The latter areconcerned with the set of all resonances, and not just those that are observable in a particularexperiment.
Let x denote a set of quantum numbers that label a subset of resonances in the interval. If there
are N(x) such resonances, their level density isρ (x) = N(x)/ ∆ε ,(D.1)
and their level spacing is(D.2)
D(x) = 1/ ρ (x) .
If yλ is some quantity associated with each resonance, λ, the sum of the y-values over thesubset x isx(D.3)
∑ λ yλ .

In this section, the summation index λ is written as a subscript, and the range of the summation isindicated by the superscript x. Equation (D.25) says "sum the quantity y over every resonance in theinterval ∆ε which has the quantum numbers x." Usually, these resonances will possess otherquantum numbers too, but it is the set x which determines whether they are included or not.
An average of the quantity y over the set x isxxy = [1 N ( x ) ] ∑ λ yλ(D.4)
D.2.2.2. Reduced Widths
In this section, reduced widths follow the experimental definition rather than the theoreticalusage Γ = 2Pγ2. A partial width for the decay of a resonance into a particular channel carries many
quantum numbers, but we need only three, the total and orbital angular momenta J and l, and thechannel spin s. The reduced neutron width, Γlnλ(J,s), is defined by:l(D.5)
Γ nλ (l,J,s ) = Γ nλ ( J,s ) E ν l ( E )wherevl = Pl/ρv0 = 1,v1 = ρ2/(1+ρ2)
v2 = ρ4/(9+3ρ2+ρ4)
andρ =ka, a being the channel radius.
Assuming additivity of partial widths,
l
l
(D.6)
Γ nλ ( J ) = Σ s Γ nλ ( J,s )where Σs is a summation over the 1 or 2 possible channel-spin values.
If we average over resonances, and assume that the average partial width is independent of channel
spin,4Γln ( J ) = ∑ s Γln ( J , s ) = µl ,J Γln ( J , s )
(D.7)

4

This is not true for the individual resonances

D.22

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Equation (D.29) introduces the multiplicity µl,J, which for neutrons can have the value 1 or 2,
depending on whether the channel spin has one or two values. For l=0, or I=0, or J=0, µl,J = 1. Inother cases, s can take on the values I ±1/2 subject to the additional vector sum
r r ur
s=l+J
(D.8)
5
which may again restrict µl,J to the value one.
The other new notation is the line through the quantum number s, meaning that the quantitylΓ n ( j , s does not depend on the value of s. This is not the same as omitting s from theparentheses, since that defines the left-hand side quantity. This is the primary source of confusion inprevious discussions. Since vl only depends on l,Γ n (l , J ) = Γ ln ( J ) Eν lwhere the bar overa.)

= µl ,J Γln ( J , s ) Eν lb.)

= µl ,J Γln ( J , s )

c.)

Eν l

(D.9)

Eν l denotes some average value appropriate to the interval.

D.2.2.3. Strength Function
The pole-strength function was originally introduced as an average over the R-matrix reduced
widths for a given channel, γc2. Using the experimental convention.
S(l,J,s) = Γ ln ( J , s )l,J,sD (l , J , s ) .

(D.10)

Since the channel spin values are uniquely determined by J and l, together with the target spin I
which is common to all the resonances, s is superfluous in defining the subset over which theaverage is taken, andS(l,J,s) = Γ ln ( J , s )l,JD (l , J ) .

(D.11)

If the parity π were used as an explicit quantum number, l could be dropped,
S(l,J,s) = Γ ln ( J , s )J ,πD( J , π ) ,(D.12)

because l and π are equivalent for labeling resonances. That is, every resonance with a given J and π
will have channels labeled by the same set of l-values, whether their partial widths are observably
large or not. Some authors go one step further and drop π, so that J means J,π, but that is aninvitation to confusion.
Expressing S(l,J,s) as a sum over reduced widths gives
l ,J
S l,J, s = ∑ λ Γ lnλ ( J , s ) ∆ε
(D.13)()

where we use the assumed independence ofΓ ln ( J , s )on s to get the same result on theleft-hand-side.

5

For example, if I = 1/2, µ1,2 = 1.

April 2001

D.23

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The strength function S(l,J) is defined as
S ( l,J ) = ∑ s S ( l,J,s )(a)= µ l,J S ( l,J,s )(b)(D.14)

The corresponding sum and average forms are
S (l,J ) = ∑ λ Γlnλ ( J ) ∆εl ,J= Γln ( J )

l,J

(a)

D (l , J )(b)(D.15)The next "natural" summation would be to collect the different l-contributions to the total width,
to form S(J), but this is not what is observable. Instead one defines S(l) as a weighted sum of theS(l,J,s):∑ gS(l,J,s)(D.16)S (l ) = Js
∑ Js gThis equation occurs in Lynn, Reference 1, as 6.126, with a confusing typographical error,
namely the index s is missing from S(l,J,s).
Actually, the strength function was introduced first in the "s-wave" form
l =0
S (0 ) = ∑ λ ( g Γ0n )λ D (l = 0)
(D.17)and later generalized by Saplakoglu et al. Reference 9, to the p-wave form
l =1
S (1) = (1/ ∆ε )(2l + 1) −1∑ λ ( g Γ1n ) λ .

(D.18)For expository purposes, it is clearer to start from (31). The sum on J and s is for fixed l:
I + 12≡ ∑∑s = I − 12

Js

l +s

∑ .

(D.19)

J = l −s

It is important to note that the outer sum on channel spin is correct as written. It goes over the values
I±½ if I≥½ , and over the single value ½, if I=0. It is not further constrained by Equation (D.30)
because now it is the "independent variable." The inner sum on J enumerates some J-values once,and some twice, the latter occurring when both s-values can produce that J-value. The number oftimes J occurs is the same µl,J that appeared previously.
If we are summing a quantity that is independent of s, then (D.41) can be rewritten:
 l ,J µ y ( s )Σ Js y ( s ) = Σ(D.20)lJ
The multiplicity µl,J takes care of the sum on s, and the tilde over the sum on J, as emphasized by
Gyulassy and Perkins, Reference 8, reminds us that J goes over its full range, "once-only":6~

l+I+ 1J

1
J= l − I −
2

∑=

∑

l+I+ 1=∑

2

2

if l ≥ I(a)(D.21)

if I ≥ l(b)

1
J= I −l −27Reference 8 has this written incorrectly.

D.24

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The denominator in Equation (D.38) can be shown to beΣ Js g = 2l + 1 ,or, since g is independent of s, J µ g = 2l + 1 .
Σl ,J(D.22)(D.23)

G-P assume, and later approximately justify by comparison to experiment, that S(l,J,s/) is also
independent of J. With this, Equation (D.38) becomes
S (l ) = (2l + 1) −1 ∑ Js gS (l , J , s ) = S (l , J , s ) (a)(D.24)= S ( l , J ) µl , J ,(b)using Equation (D.36.b).
Note the peculiar fact that S(l) and S(l,J,s) are independent of J, but S(l,J) is not. This is aconsequence of the fact that more than one channel spin value can contribute to S(l,J), inducing a"J-dependence" in the form of a possible factor of two.
As a sum over resonances,
S (l ) = (2l + 1) -1 Σ Js gS (l, J , s )(a)(D.25)= (2l + 1) -1 ∑ Js ∑λ g Γlnλ ( J,s ) / ∆ε(b)
 J Σl , J g l ( J ) / ∆ε ,= (2l + 1) −1 Σ
(c)
Γ nλ
λ
l
The right hand side of Equation (D.47c) says to sum Γ nλ(J) over all possible values of J, which iswhat is meant by Equations (D.39) and (D.40). We can suppress the explicit J's and write, as inEquation (D.40),
S (l ) = (1 ∆ε ) (2l + 1) −1 Σlλ ( g Γ lnλ ) λ(D.26)
ll
but we have to remember that Γn is still Γn(J), and not a new quantity.
As an average, using the same convention,l ,JS (l ) = (2l + 1) −1 g ΓlnlD(l ) .

(D.27)

Otherwise, all the notation is correct: D(l) is the spacing of l-wave resonances without regard totheir J-values, and the average < >l goes over all resonances possessing the quantum number l, again
without regard for their J-values. It is worth noting explicitly that although S(l,J) is "almost"independent of J, this is not true of Γ ln ( J ) . As Equation (37b) shows, its J-dependence is canceledby the J-dependence of D(l,J), up to the factor µl,J. This property is what makes strength functions
useful.
D.2.2.4. Level Spacings
G-P emphasize that
 J ρ (l , J )ρ (l ) = Σ(D.28)

ρ (l , J ) = K (l )(2 J + 1) ,(D.29)(2l + 1)
ω I,l ,
g

(D.30)

which, together with the assumption
leads toρ (l ) = ρ (l,J )April 2001

D.25

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

whereω I,l = (l + 1) / (2l + 1)

for l ≤ I

= ( I + 1) / (2 I + 1)

for l ≥ I

(D.31)and is unity if l=0 or I=0.
The reader is referred to Reference 8 for a fuller discussion but here we can point out that, for agiven parity, ρ(l,J) is independent of l, by definition. As noted, every resonance with a given J and π
has the same set of associated l-channels, whether it has an observable width or not. Henceρ (0, J ) = ρ (2, j ) = ρ (4, j ) = K , and(D.32)
ρ (1, J ) = ρ (3, j ) = ρ (5, j ) = K
The further assumption of parity-independence makes ρ(l,J) totally independent of l. As a result,
G-P's K(l) from Equation (D.51) is independent of l, andρ (l ) = C (2l + 1) ω I ,l ,(D.33)
where C depends on the nuclear species by not on any quantum numbers.
D.2.2.5. Gamma Widths
In the limited energy range of a few keV usually covered by the unresolved resonance region, thegamma width may be assumed to be constant and equal to that obtained from an analysis of theresolved resonances. If, however, the energy range is rather wide, an energy dependence as given bysome of the well-known theoretical models, Reference 1, may be built in. Since the observed
gamma width is the sum of a large number of primary gamma transitions, each assumed to have achi-squared distribution of µ=1, the sum is found to have a µ≥20. In effect this implies that the
gamma width is a constant, since a chi-squared distribution with a large number of degrees of
freedom approximates a δ-function.
D.2.2.6. Degrees of Freedom
For the reasons enumerated in Chapter 2, Section 2.4.20, the following values should be used:
1. Neutron width, 1. ≤ AMUN ≤ 2., and specifically, AMUN= µl,J .

2. Radiation width, AMUG=0.
3. Fission width, 1. ≤ AMUF ≤ 4., to be determined by comparison with experiment. Only integral
values are permitted, although non-integers occur in some analyses.
4. Competitive width, 1. ≤ AMUX ≤ 2., because only a single inelastic level excitation is permitted
as a competitive reaction. Specifically, AMUX= µl′,J, where J is the spin of the resonance, and l′is the orbital angular momentum of the inelastically scattered neutron. Since the daughter
nucleus may have a spin %I different from the target spin, I, l′ may be different from l and thenumber of channel spin values µl′,J may be different from µl,J.

D.26

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.2.3. Equivalent Quantities in Sections D.1 and D.2

in D.1r
Γnr
Γγr,Γfr,...
Pl

Symbolin D.2.1
in D.2.2λDl,JΓnλ(l,J)
ρvl
D(l,J)

Γ nl , J0Γ ln ( J )Γ nl , JΓ n (l , J )

l ,J

l ,J

Definition

This is a non-equivalence. λ enumerates all resonances. r
enumerates those within a subset and hence implies a setof quantum numbers.
The neutron width, summed over channel spin.
Not used in D.2.2, but the same implication of l, J holds.
Penetration factor.
Average level spacing for a subset of resonances withgiven l and J.
The l-wave reduced width, averaged over all resonanceswith given l and J.
The average neutron width. In practice, the energydependence of this quantity is not averaged, but extracted
before averaging.

D.2.4. Comparison with previous editions of ENDF-102
D.2.4.1. ENDF-102, October 1970 edition
1. Equation (1). Dobserved is D(l).

2. Line 9. l is not the angular momentum of "the incident neutron." The incident neutrons carry all
angular momenta. l is the orbital angular momentum of the resonance, or more precisely, of thechannel or channels which are involved. The resonant lth phase shift will interfere with the
non-resonant ones in angular distributions, but not in angle-integrated cross sections.
3. Equation (2)ρJ is ρ(l,J); ρobs is ρ(l); Σ is Σ̃J.
4. Equation (3). DJ is D(l,J) and the right-hand-side should have a factor ωI,l.
5. Page D-11, line 1. "Level-spacing" means D(l,J). Line 8. The statement "If we assume thes-wave strength function is independent of J..."presumably means assuming S(0,J) is independent ofJ, since the s-wave strength function itself, S(0), is a sum over J-states and is therefore "independent"
of J by definition.
Equation 4 means
S(0) = S(0,J⁄,s⁄) = S(0,J)/µ0,J
which because µ0,J= 1 implies
S(0) = S(0,J) = 〈Γ0n(J)〉 0,J/D(0,J) .
Equation 5 is trickier because µl,J is not identically equal to 1, and the discussion appears to givethe user the option of getting D(l,J) from Equation (3) and "the corresponding reduced neutron
width" from Equation (5), or of using the ENDF/B convention, Equation (6).

April 2001

D.27

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

The problem lies in the failure to distinguish Γln(J) from Γln(J,s). Equation (6) states the"ENDF/B convention":
ΓlnJ = Γ0nJ E vl µlJ .
(Here and in the following, E and vl are average values appropriate to the energy interval.)
We know that the correct relationship isΓ n (l , J ) = Γ ln ( J , s ) E ν l µlJ= Γln ( J )E νl

If we assume that Γ lnJ in Equation (6) is to agree with experiment, Γ 0lnJ then must be
Γln ( J , s ) = Γ ln ( J ) µ I , J .
If we use a subscript E to denote an ENDF-convention quantity,lΓ 0nJl → Γ 0nJE
= Γ 0nJl actual µ I , J
and now0Γ nJlin (5) means

D l,J

D l,J

which is correct. Thus an ENDF reduced width

l

0

0l

Γ nJE

=

Γ n actual J
D l,J µ l,JΓ 0lnJE

will sometimes be half what anexperimentalist would measure.
In the notation of D.2.2., Equation (24) isΓ n (l , J )l ,J= Γ ln ( J , s )l ,JE ν l µl , Jand Γln(J) is the reduced width determined by experiment.
For p-waves,

S (1) = S (1,J ) / µ 1,J = Γ1n ( J )1,J/D( 1,J ) µ 1,J ,and Equation (5) would read:S1 =

Γ1n ( J 1 )1, J1

D (1, J 1 ) µ1, J1=

Γ1n ( J 2 )1, J 2

D (1, J 2 ) µ1, J 2=K

6. The October 1970 edition uses three different symbols for the reduced width. In a unified
notation:
page D-90

Γ nl , J = Γ ln ( J )page D-11

Γ

0 l =1n J

page D-12

Γ

0l
nJ

D.28

l ,J

= Γln ( J )= Γ (J , s
l
n

l ,J

l ,J

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.2.4.2. Comments on ENDF-102, October 1975 edition, Section D.2.1

1. Equation (1). Dl,observed is D(l).
2. Same as comment 2 on the 1970 edition; above.
3. Equation (2). Dobs is D(l); ρl,obs is ρ(l); ΣJ is Σ̃J.
4. "All allowed l-values label the same set of resonances" means ρ(l,J) does not depend on l (forgiven parity).
5. Equation (3). (2J + 1)-1 is missing from the right hand side.
6. Page D-12, second equation:l

The quantity 〈gΓln〉 is g Γ ln ( J ) . The bracket 〈〉l means summed over all J-values. The othertwo brackets are for particular J-values, i.e.,g Γ ln = g Γ ln ( J )=g Γ ln ( J )

l
l ,J

=

ω I,l µ l,Jg Γ ln ( J, s )ω I,l7. "The strength functions for a given l-value but different J-values" means S(l,J). These are not all
equal--it is the ratio S(l,J)µl,J which is independent of J.
8. Equation (D.6) should read:lΓ n (l,J ) = Γ n ( J, s )E v l µ l,J= ⎡⎣ Γ ln ( J ) ⎤⎦ E ν lwhere Γln(J) is the reduced width determined by experiment. That is, the relation involving µl,J isonly valid for an average width, and hence E ν l must also be some appropriate average value. The
quantum number s should be exhibited when µ is used.
D.3 The Competitive Width
D.3.1 Penetrability Factor for the Competitive Width in the Resolved Resonance Region

A. SLBW and MLBWFor these formalisms, the only physical situation which can be handled without approximation isthat in which a single inelastic competitive process is possible, because the formalism presently
permits the definition of only one additional quantity. The most common case will occur wheninelastic scattering to the first excited state of the target nucleus is energetically possible. Ignoring,as in the case of elastic scattering, the possibility that the partial widths depend on channel spin, thepenetrability is identical to that for elastic scattering, but the energy is reduced by the excitationenergy of the first excited state, corrected for recoil, so thatΓ xr ( E ) = Γ n ′ r ( E ) =April 2001

Pl ( E − E1* ) Γ xr ( E r )Pl( E −E )r*1, if E ≥ E1*

D.29

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresandΓ xr = 0 if E < E1*
where E*1 is (AWRI+1)/AWRI times the excitation energy of the first excited state,
E1ex ( E1ex = −QX in File 2).
This definition involves two conventions, both taken over from the elastic case. One is the way
in which an "experimental" reduced width Γln′ is defined in terms of the theoretical reduced width γ2,
and the other is the way in which negative energy levels are treated. Neither of these problems arisesin the theory, where Γ=2Pγ2 and all quantities are defined in terms of the channel energy. Note thatthe l-value to be used in the penetrability is not that of the incident neutron, but of the "exit"
inelastically scattered neutron.
It is conceivable that an (n,α) or (n,p) reaction to the ground state of the daughter nucleus could
be open, without inelastic competition, in which case the formula for Γxr would be the same, but the
Pl would be a Coulomb penetrability, and the excitation energy El* would be replaced by theapproximate Q-value and reduced mass. The R-Matrix Limited format allows for this possibility(see Section D.1.7).
If more than one competitive process is energetically possible, then the SLBW and MLBW
formats are inadequate to give the correct energy dependence of the competitive width, since they
supply only one number, and a partial width is required for each process. E.g., when two inelastic
levels can be reached,Γ xr ( E ) =Pl1 ( E − E1* ) Γ n1′r ( E r )(Pl1 E r − E1*)+

Pl2 ( E − E2* ) Γ n2′ r ( E r )(Pl2 E r − E 2*),with appropriate modification below each threshold. Note that the exit l-values are independent of
the incident-neutron l-value.
For codes that presently approximate Γ as a constant in the denominator, a possible procedure isto substitute a step function
Γ xr ( E ) = 0= Γ xr ( Er )if E < E1*
if E ≥ E1*

and then make some provision to handle the resultant discontinuity in the cross section.
Users who are unable to handle this degree of complexity, and would like to use GTR from File
2 as the total width without regard for whether the competitive process is energetically possible ornot should at least be aware of the problem.
B. When the Adler-Adler and Reich-Moore formalisms are used for low-energy fissile materials, norecommendation concerning the treatment of Γxr need be given, and users can presume that it is zero.
When Reich-Moore is used above the thermal region, the same comments apply as for the
SLBW/MLBW formalism.
C. General R-matrix and Hybrid R-function (deleted)

D.30

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

D.3.2. Penetrability Factor for the Competitive Width in the Unresolved Resonance Region
Since many codes treat the average total width in the denominator of expressions like <ΓnΓγ/Γ>as an energy-independent constant, the penetrability factor of the competitive width needs to behandled by specifying energy-dependent unresolved resonance parameters.
The formalism, which is a simple average over SBLW line shapes, takes account of the energydependence of the neutron widths in the numerator, by extracting their penetrability factors before
the averaging is done. These then contribute to the energy-dependence of the average cross section.
The energy-dependence of the neutron width in the denominator, i.e., in Γ , is neglected. No such
fix is readily available for the energy-dependence of the competitive width, whose penetrability
factor will involve the threshold dependence of an inelastic cross section. The evaluator cancircumvent this difficulty by specifying energy-dependent parameters and setting <Γx>=0 below its
threshold; then allowing it to build up according to the formulas given in Section D.3
The degrees of freedom, AMUX, should be 1.0 or 2.0. (See Section 2.4.20.)
D.3.3. Calculation of the Total Cross Section when a Competitive Reaction is Specified
When a competitive reaction is specified for SBLW or MLBW and Γ exceeds Γn + Γγ + Γf, the
ENDF convention is that the scattering, capture, and fission cross sections will be calculated fromthe sum of File 2 and File 3 contributions, but the competitive reaction will be contained entirely inFile 3, and no File 2 contribution should be added to it. The reason for this is that users can avoid
problems in coding up resonant competitive widths. In the File 2 calculations, the correct total widthΓ must be used in order to get the correct line shape.

April 2001

D.31

ENDF-102 Data Formats and ProceduresThis puts the total cross section in a special category. If it is calculated as the sum of σn, σγ, σf,σx, then the above prescription works satisfactorily. However, if it is calculated from the SLBW
formula,πΓ nr Γ r,
σ n,t ( E ) = 2 ∑ g J
1
2
2
k J
2
−
+
Γ
E
E
(
( r )
r′ )
4
as it is in some applications, then it will include the competitive reaction, and the user should not add
the File 3 contribution to it. The ENDF convention presumes that σn,t will be calculated by summing
the partial reactions.
The R-matrix Limited format does not have this problem. The "competitive" reactions aretreated normally, and File 2 and File 3 are added together for all reactions. That is because the total
width is always the sum of the explicitly given partial widths. If a File 3 contribution were specified
for the total cross section, then it would be added to the {1-ReU} calculation, but not to the sum-ofparts calculation, as the latter would already include the File 3 contribution for each partial reaction.
This assumes that the File 3 total is the sum of the File 3 partials.
REFERENCES

1. J.E. Lynn, The Theory of Neutron Resonance Reactions, Clarendon Press, Oxford (1958)
2. C.W. Reich and M.S. Moore, Phys. Rev. 111, 929 (1958)
3. F.T. Adler and D.B. Adler, Interpretations of Neutron Cross Sections of the Fissionable
Materials for the Resolved Resonance Region, U.S. Atomic Energy Commission Report CONF660303, Conf. on Neutron Cross Section Technology (1966), Book 2, p. 873
4. D.B. Adler and F.T. Adler, Argonne National Laboratory report ANL-6792, 695 (1963)
5. A.M. Lane and R.G. Thomas, Rev. Mod. Phys. 30, 257 (1958)
6. F.H. Fröhner, Applied Neutron Resonance Theory, Kernforschungszentrum, Karlsruhe report
KFK 2669 (1978)
7. J.M. Blatt and L.C. Biedenharn, Rev. Mod. Phys. 24, 258 (1952)
8. M. Gyulassy and S.T. Perkins, Nucl. Sci. Eng. 53, 482 (1974)
9. A. Saplakoglu, L. M. Bollinger, and R. E. Coté, Phys. Rev. 109, 1258 (1958)
10. F.H. Fröhner, New Techniques for Multi-Level Cross Section Calculation and Fitting,
Brookhaven National Laboratory report BNL-NCS-51363, Proceedings of the Conference on
Nuclear Data Evaluation, Methods and Procedures (1981), Vol. I, P. 375

D.32

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

APPENDIX E
Kinematic Formulas

The notation used to describe two-body kinematics is shown in Fig. E-1. The scattering
treatment used for neutrons can be generalized to two-particle reactions by allowing the emitted
particle mass to be different from the incident particle mass (i.e., m3 ≠ m1). Applying conservationof mass, energy, and momentum gives the following non-relativistic kinematic equations:

A=

m2
,
m1

(E.1)

A′ =

m3
,
m1

(E.2)
1

⎛ A ( A+ 1 − A′) ⎡ 1+ A Q ⎤ ⎞ 2
β =⎜⎢1 + A E ⎥ ⎟
′
A
1 ⎦⎠
⎣
⎝

γ=

A′
β,
A+ 1 − A′

(E.3)

(E.4)

ε 3 A′ 2
=
β ,
ε1 A2

(E.5)

2

⎛ A ⎞
ε1 = ⎜⎟ E1 ,⎝ A+ 1 ⎠(E.6)µ3= µ ,

(E.7)

ε4
A′
ε3
=
,
ε1 A+1 − A′ ε1(E.8)µ 4 = −µ ,

(E.9)

E3
A′
2
=
+ 1 + 2 βµ ,2 βE1 ( 1 + A )

(

ω3 =

April 2001

1+ βµβ + 1 + 2 βµ2),(E.10)(E.11)E.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

E4 A+1 − A′ 2=
γ + 1 − 2γµ ,E1(1+ A )2(ω4 =1 − γµγ 2 + 1 − 2γµ)(E.12)(E.13).

If the incident and scattered particles are the same, A′=1, and these formulas reduce to thefamiliar set used for neutron scattering. The elastic reaction corresponds to A′=1 and Q=O.
According to these formulas, the secondary energy distribution of the emitted particle and thecomplete energy-angle distribution of the recoil nucleus are completely determined by A, A′, Q, andthe angular distribution for the emitted particle.

m3

ε3

θ
m1

m2

ε1

ε2

µ = cosθm4

ε4Figure E.1
Kinematics Variables for Two-Particle Reactions
Center-of-Mass System

E.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

m3
E3

φ3
m1

ω = cosφ

E1

φ4
m4
E4

Figure E.2
Kinematics Variables for Two-Particle Reactions
Laboratory System

April 2001

E.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

E.4

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

APPENDIX F
Summary of Important ENDF Rules

General
1. Cross sections for all significant reactions should be included.
2. The data in ENDF are specified over the entire energy range 10-5 eV to 20 MeV. It should bepossible to determine values between tabulated points with use of the interpolation schemes
provided.
3. All cross sections are in barns, all energies in eV, all temperatures in degrees Kelvin, and alltimes in seconds.
4. Summary documentation and unusual features of the evaluation should appear in the File 1
comments.
5. Threshold energies and Q-values must be consistent for all data presented in different files for aparticular reaction.
File 2 - Resonance Parameters
1. Only one energy region containing resolved resonance parameters can be used, if needed.
2. The cross section from resonance parameters is calculated only within the energy range EL to
EH, although some of the resonance parameters may lie outside the range.
3. Every ENDF Material has a File 2 even if no resonance parameters are given in order to specify
the effective scattering radius.
4. In the unresolved resonance region interpolation should be done in cross section space and not inunresolved resonance parameter space. Any INT is allowed.
5. The Breit-Wigner single-level or multilevel formalisms should be used in the resolved resonanceregion unless experimental data prove that use of the other allowed formalisms is significantly
better.

August 2004

F.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

File 3 - Tabulated Cross Sections
1.

All File 3 data are given in the laboratory system.

2.

The total cross section MT=1 is the sum of all partial cross sections and has an energy mesh that
includes all energy meshes for partial cross sections.

(Exceptions MT=26, 46-49, 719, 739, 759, 779, and 799 are not included in the MT=1.)
3.

The following relationships among MT numbers are expected to be satisfied if data arepresented:
1= 2+33 (or 1 - 2)
4=
18 =
101 =
103 =
104 =
105 =
106 =
107 =

4.

= 4 (or 51→91) + (6→9+16) + 17 + 18
(or 19→21+38) + (22→25) + (28→37)+ (102→114)
sum (51→91)
sum (19→21) + 38
sum (102→114)
sum (700→718)
sum (720→738)
sum (740→758)
sum (760→778)
sum (780→798)

Threshold reactions begin at zero cross sections at the threshold energy.

Files 2 and 3
1. If there are resonance parameters in File 2, there are contributions to the total (MT=1) andscattering (MT=2) cross sections and to the fission (MT=18) and capture (MT=102) crosssections if fission and capture widths are also given. These must be added to the File 3 Sections
MT=1, 2, 18, and 102 over the resonance region in order to obtain summation values for thesecross sections.
2. The cross sections in File 3 for MT=1, 2, 18, and 102 in the resonance region are used to modify
the cross section calculated from the resonance formalisms, if necessary. The File 3"background" may be positive or negative or even zero if no modifications are required. The
summation cross section (File 2 + File 3) should be everywhere positive.
3.

Double-value points (discontinuities) are allowed anywhere but are required at resonance region
boundaries. A typical situation for MT=1, 2, 18, and 102 in File 3 is a tabulated cross section
from 10-5 to 1 eV, tabulated "background" to the cross sections calculated in the resolved
resonance region between EL1 and EH1, tabulated "background" to the cross sections calculated
in the unresolved region between EL2=EH1 and EH2, and tabulated cross sections from EH2 to
20 MeV. Double-value points occur at EL1, EL2, and EH2.

F.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

4.

the tabulated "background" used in File 3 to modify the cross sections calculated from File 2
should not be highly structured or represent a large fraction of the cross sections calculated from
File 2. It is assumed that the "background" cross section is assumed to be at 0 Kelvin. (The"background" cross section is usually obtained from room temperature comparisons, but thisshould be unimportant if the "background" cross section is either small or slowly varying).

5.

The generalized procedure for Doppler-broadening cross sections from File 2 + 3 is to generatea pointwise cross section from the resolved resonance region on an appropriate energy mesh at
0K and add it to File 3. This summation cross section can be kernel-broadened to a higher
temperature.

File 4 - Angular Distributions
1. Only relative angular distributions, normalized to an integrated probability of unity, are given in
File 4. The differential scattering cross section in barns per steradian is determined bymultiplying File 4 values by the File 2 + File 3 summation scattering cross section σs divided by
2π.
2. Discrete channel angular distributions (e.g., MT=2,51-90,701...) should be given as Legendre
coefficients in the center-of-mass system, with a maximum of 64 higher order terms, the last
being even, in the expansion. If the angular distribution is highly structured and cannot be
represented by a Legendre expansion, a tabular angular distribution in the CM system must be
given.
3. When the elastic scattering is represented by Legendre coefficients, an energy-independenttransformation matrix must be given to perform a CM to laboratory conversion.
4. Angular distributions for continuum and other reactions must be given as tabulated distributionsin the Lab system.
5. The angular distribution, whether specified as a Legendre expansion or a tabulated distribution,must be everywhere positive.
6. Angular distribution data should be given at the minimum number of incident energy points thatwill accurately describe the energy variation of the distributions.
File 5 - Secondary Energy Distribution
1. Only relative energy spectra, normalized to an integrated probability of unity, are given in File 5.
All spectra must be zero at the end points. The differential cross section in barns per eV isobtained by multiplying the File 5 values by the File 2 + File 3 cross section times its
multiplicity (2 for the (n,2n) reaction).
2. While distribution laws 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 10 are allowed, distribution laws 3 and 5 arediscouraged but can be used if others do not apply.
3. The sum of all probabilities for all laws used for a particular reaction must be unity at each
incident energy.
4. The constant U must be specified, where applicable, to limit the energy range of emitted spectra
to physical limits.

August 2004

F.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

F.4

April 2001

ENDF-6 Data Formats and Procedures

APPENDIX G
Maximum Dimensions of ENDF ParametersFile
1

Section
451
452
455
456

Variable
NXC
NC
NCD
NCP

Max
350
4
4
4

All
2

All
151

3
4

All≠4
All

5

All

6

All

7
9,10

All
1
≠1
All
All

NR
NE
NER
NFRE
NGRE
NIRE
NCRE
NIS
NRS
NLS
NLCS
NP
NE
NL
NM
NP
NE
NF
NK
NE
NL
NS
NP

20
250
12
1
1
4
4
10
5,000
4
20
50,000
2,000
64
64
201
200
1,000
2,000
2,000
64
3
50,0005,000
64 Highest order Legendre polynomial
10,000 Mesh size

14
All
other

August 2004

NL
NP

Definition of Number
Card images in directory
Polynomial terms in expansion of ν
Polynomial terms in expansion of ν dPolynomial terms in expansion of ν p
Interpolation ranges
Energy mesh in unresolved region
Energy ranges
Fission reactions
Radiative capture reactions
Inelastic scattering reactions
Charged-particle reactions
Isotopes
Resonances for a given l-value
l-values
l-values which must be given to converge reaction
Incident energy points
Incident energy points
Highest order Legendre polynomial
Maximum order Legendre polynomials required
Angular points
Incident energy points
Secondary energy points
Number of subsections
Incident energy points
Highest order Legendre polynomial
Non-principal scattering atom types
Energy points

G.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

APPENDIX H
Recommended values of Physical Constants
to be Used in ENDF

Sources for Fundamental Constants
The basic source for Fundamental Constants used by CSEWG in evaluating and processing
ENDF data are the values reported in 1998 CODATA internationally recommended values of
the Fundamental Physics Constants (Source 1) as taken from the NIST Reference on
Constants, Units, and Uncertainties Web site1.
These are supplemented by the mathematical constants from MathSoft2 (Source 2).
Atomic masses not given in the CODATA recommended values should be taken from theAtomic Mass Tables of G. Audi and A. Wapstra3 (Source 3).

1

The information was prepared by P. J. Mohr and B. N. Taylor, “The 1998 CODATA Recommended Values of theFundamental Physics Constants,” Version 3.1, National Institue of Standards and Technology (December 1999).
The Web site is located at http://physics.nist.gov/cuu/Constants/.
2
The information was prepared by Steven Finch of MathSoft, Inc., for their Web site which is located at
http://www.mathsoft.com/asolve/constant/constant.html.
3
G. Audi and A. H. Wapstra, Nucl. Phys. A. 595, 409 (1995). The Web site, maintained by the Atomic Mass Data
Center, is located at http://csnwww.in2p3.fr/groupes/massatom/masseval.html.
April 2001

H.1

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

H.2

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Fundamental Constants and derived data
Values of the Fundamental Physics Constants, as approved by CSEWG, are given in thisAppendix. These values should be used until updates are approved by CSEWG.
Values for quantities which are derived from these fundamental constants, and which werepreviously given in the body of this manual, are also presented in this section with theexpressions by which they have been replaced in the body of this Manual. These values may notappear in subsequent revisions of this Appendix.

Use of fundamental constants by code developers
Code developers are encouraged to locate any values for fundamental physics constants that
may be currently buried deep within their codes, and to replace these values by the expressions
given here; the values would then be specified in only one location in the code. This ensuresinternal consistency, and expedites any necessary updates.
Code developers should double-check that numerical constants (e.g., π or e) are represented
to a degree of accuracy consistent with the precision of the computers on which the codes are to
be run.
In subsequent revisions of this manual, values for derived quantities may not be given.
Instead, code developers should calculate those quantities by directly evaluating the expressions.
This will ensure that values are as precise as the computer permits.

Use of fundamental constants by evaluators
Evaluators should use the fundamental constants, mass numbers, Q-values, etc., as specified
in this section, for evaluations submitted for acceptance by ENDF.
Evaluators are encouraged to specify values for “hidden” physical constants within the File 1
comments of the ENDF file in order to prevent future confusion in the event of changes in theaccepted values.

April 2001

H.3

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Table 1: Fundamental Constants
Expression

Definition

Numeric value

Sourceenatural logarithmic base

2.718 281 828 522πArchimedes' constant

3.141 592 653 59

2eelementary charge

1.602 176 462 × 10-19 C

1

α-1 = h c / e 2

inverse fine-structure constant

137.035 999 76

1
6u

atomic mass constant (amu)931.494 013 × 10 eV

1hPlank's constant

4.135 667 27 × 10-15 eV s

1hPlanck's constant/2π

6.582 118 89 × 10-16 eV s

1kBoltzmann's constant

8.617 342 × 10-5 eV K-1

1cspeed of light (in vacuum)

299 792 458 m s-1

NA

Avogadro's number

1
23

6.022 141 99 × 10 mol-1

1

Table 2. Masses
Expression

Definition

Numeric value

Sourcemn

neutron mass

1.008 664 915 78 amu

1meelectron mass

5.485 799 110 × 10-4 amu

1

mp

proton mass

1.007 276 466 88 amu

1md

deuteron mass

2.013 553 212 71 amu

1mt

triton mass

3.016 049 268 amu

3

m3He

3

He mass (hellion)

3.014 932 234 69 amu

1mα

α mass4.001 506 1747 amu

1

Table 3. Energies needed to break particles into their constituent nucleons.

3

H.4

d

deuteron

2.22 MeVttriton8.48 MeV

He

3

He

7.72 MeVαalpha28.3 MeV

April 2001

ENDF-102 Data Formats and Procedures

Table 4.
Conversion Factors
Convertamu → eV

Conversion Factor
9.314 940 13 × 108

Source1

The following table gives values which were previously given in the body of this Manual, alongwith the expressions which should be used in the future for these values. These expressions havebeen substituted for the values at the appropriate places in the Manual. These values should not
be used in any future applications; instead, please use the values for the Fundamental
Constants as specified in this Appendix. (For example for mp/mn, do not use 0.99862; use thevalue derived from the values for mp and mn).

Table 5.
Derived quantities whose values were formerly given in the body of the Manual
Location
page 0.18

Value previously given in
ManualUnits for value

0.998 62mp/mn

1.996 26

md/mn

2.989 60

mt/mn

2.989 03

m3He/mn

3.967 13ma/mn

Page 4.7

3.0560 × 10-8

Eq. (6.9)

4.784 53 × 10-6 (10Eq. (6.10)

2.480 58 × 104 eV / amu

page D.3

2.196 771 × 10-3 10

April 2001

Expression

1 / ( eV barn steradian )
-12

-12

cm) 2 eV / amu

cm (eV) –1/2

2 mn / ( ħ2 (4π)2 )2 / ħ2e4 / 2ħ2 = 1 / (2 α2 )2mn hH.5